Type = 0 iDate=0/7/52 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  A STEP BY STEP BREAKDOWN OF 88    A STEP BY STEP BREAKDOWN OF 88 L. Ron Hubbard SUGGESTED ROUTINE: Symbological Processing on current life until pc is well in present time. Return pc to incidents where the thetan can be located as outside and in good control of the body and run such incidents to orient pc. In absence of an outside thetan, audit pc through failures to control self. Use an E-Meter to locate youngest entity (newest bank in the body) and audit its effort to control body. Then audit any transfer you can find. Then audit blanketings until pc finds thetan is without a body. Where thetan is outside, where he belongs, audit pc in current life through any and all DEDs and DEDEXs and degrades. Audit all present life transfers of the thetan, all switch and control transfers that can be found. Run off all incidents in present life where thetan and body create boil- off. (Don't be surprised at thetan visios. You're auditing theta not MEST perception.) Inscan and outscan thetan through present life. This makes MEST Clear. With E-Meter locate first implant about having facsimiles in thetan. Audit it. Locate first borrowings. Audit them. Locate first blanketings. Audit them. Locate DEDs and DEDEXs of thetan and audit them. Locate each and every transfer on track. Audit them. The thetan concentrates on the body. He is usually about arm's length from the body, concentrating on the body. When he is not concentrating on the body there is a disturbance in the area and the thetan is being distracted to another body or object. These distractions are important to audit. Don't ask your pc to get any other visio on the scene than the visio of the body the thetan is manipulating. This is the usual thetan position and only interest. Don't be dissuaded that the pc is not the thetan. That he thinks he is not is the aberration. The most fixative emotions are resentment, antagonism and anger. These tend to fix the thetan on the body. They confirm a transfer as permanent. The thetan's aberration toward the body is to want things to seem real to the thetan ;a the body. Actually the thetan should feel at least a little remote and detached as though he weren't quite present. This detachment will increase as auditing continues to the great benefit of the intelligence and ability. The pc gets better the better the thetan gets and that's all the better the pc can get. [The above text is taken from What to Audit. See previous page.] 267  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 101 iDate=0/8/52 Volnum=0 Issue=1 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  What is Scientology?    THE JOURNAL OF SCIENTOLOGY Issue 1-G [1952, ca. mid-August] published by The Hubbard Association of Scientologists, Inc. Phoenix, Arizona What is Scientology? L. Ron Hubbard "Scientology" is a new word which names a new science. It is formed from the Latin word scio, which means know, or distinguish, being related to the word scindo, which means cleave. (Thus, the idea of differentiation is strongly implied.) It is formed from the Greek word logos, which means the word, or outward form by which the inward thought is expressed and made known; also, the inward thought or reason itself. Thus, Scientology means knowing about knowing, or science of knowledge. A science is not merely a collection of facts, neatly arranged. An essential of a science is that observations give rise to theories which, in turn, predict new observations. When the new observations are made, they, in turn, give rise to better theories, which predict further observations. A science grows. Its most important growth is not in numbers of facts but in the clarity and prediction-value of its theories. Many fields which call themselves sciences substitute fact-collecting for theorizing, others substitute theorizing for observation. Without both, there is no science. The "exact" sciences contradict each other daily. This is not because their observations are wrong, but because they cling to old theories that conflict instead of finding the newer, simpler theories. Scientology has introduced new simplicities of theory into the field of human thought and has brought the study of human thought up to a level at which it begins to embrace all thought and all life, not only of man, but of all organisms. Scientology is not a therapy for the sick, although from Scientology such a therapy may be derived. Thought is the subject matter of Scientology. It is considered as a kind of "energy"-which is NOT PART of the physical universe. It controls energy, but it has no wavelength. It uses matter, but it has no mass. It is found in space, but it has no position. It records time, but it is not subject to time. The Greek word (and letter [theta]) Theta is used as a symbol for thought as an "energy." -- Reprinted from the Introductory Lecture to the Professional Course. Copyright $c 1952 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved. 268  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 101 iDate=0/8/52 Volnum=0 Issue=1 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Electronics Gives Life to Freud's Theory ASSOCIATIVE PROCESS QUICKLY BREAKS CASE WITH USE OF E-METER    THE JOURNAL OF SCIENTOLOGY Issue 1-G [1952, ca. mid-August] Published by The Hubbard Association of Scientologists, Inc. Phoenix, Arizona Electronics Gives Life to Freud's Theory ASSOCIATIVE PROCESS QUICKLY BREAKS CASE WITH USE OF E-METER L. Ron Hubbard Years after free association as developed by Sigmund Freud had been abandoned as a therapy, the development in electronics has revised, at least in part, the techniques of the Viennese master. In the days when none could expect a great deal from psychotherapy, Sigmund Freud introduced the advance of free association. In this technique, the patient was permitted to discourse freely and wanderingly until the doctor could gain a clue as to the source of his trouble. The doctor sought to obtain his data by evolving, from the clues given, that in which the patient was seeking to escape, or what he was repressing. This was the famous system of mental catharsis as developed by Freud and Breuer in the years prior to 1894. There were many difficulties with the technique of free association but the main one was the lack of positive evidence for the doctor on what the patient was avoiding, or repressing. Years later, the technique is made workable for the first time by the development of an electronic instrument, the electropsychometer. While this instrument was developed primarily for the needs of Scientology, its inventor has furthered its use by developing, as well, what he calls "Technique 100," or "Associative Processing." The technique is so called since it imposes and even guarantees absolute honesty on the part of the patient and provides the doctor with adequate and useful clues. It is said by those who have employed this process that they cannot see how analysis could possibly be conducted without the use of the electropsychometer. Now that associative processing has been developed, its importance in the field of psychotherapy cannot be slighted or even overestimated. For the auditor or doctor who has minimum time to spend with his preclear, or patient, an E-Meter and a knowledge of Technique 100 can bring about an amazing shortening of the number of hours of processing necessary. With the aid of an E-Meter and the technique of associative processing, it has been estimated that the usual two-year psychoanalysis probably could be cut to three or four months. In the field of Scientology, it is said that an hour of associative processing is worth more than fifteen or twenty hours of straight memory questioning. With reference to psychosis, or severe neurosis, the technique can be considered to be, and is considered to be, indispensable for both the auditor and the psychoanalyst. In this state it is especially difficult to pick from the babblings of a patient the clue for the material which, if brought to light, may relieve his stress. Despite its importance, associative processing requires very little technical background or information. It can be utilized by one who has had no more than the most elementary instruction on a psychometer -- such as how it is turned on, how the electrodes are connected, and how to keep the needle balanced in the middle of the meter. 269 The patient is given the electrodes to hold. If he is particularly disturbed, they are strapped to his hands with adhesive tape, and a mitten is placed over one of the hands holding the electrodes so that banging Them together will not disturb the needle reading. The patient is permitted to talk freely, discussing anything he cares to discuss. The practitioner simply watches The needle on the E-Meter. The discussion of the patient will shortly cause him to approach the subject which must be relieved. As he begins to approach his clue, the needle of the E-Meter will take a sudden and sharp drop. Before permitting the patient to discourse, the practitioner makes a pact with him, if possible, that at any time the practitioner says "Now!" the patient immediately will tell him what he was thinking about at the moment the word "now" was uttered. The pact includes, if possible, an agreement with the patient that one hundred percent honesty would be employed -- thus Mathison's use of Technique 100, by which he meant one hundred percent honesty. The moment the needle drops, the practitioner says "Now." The patient then tells him what he was thinking about while he was speaking. It generally will be something connected with his speech, and therefore is easy to detect if he is not telling the truth. Further, if he is not telling the truth, the needle will dive again, under the stress of the patient's repressing the information should the practitioner ask him, "Are you telling me the truth?" and the patient tells him "Yes." Otherwise the needle will drop in response to the charge of the data upon which the patient has touched. The practitioner then requires the patient to give him a fuller amplification of the data which caused the needle to drop. The practitioner, still watching the needle, observes that on much of this data the needle does not react, but when it again drops suddenly, the practitioner repeats the word "Now," and once more the patient tells him of what he was thinking, below the strata of his speech. By this route, considerable depth can be plumbed. The patient will unburden rapidly much of his repressed hatreds and conflicts. The patient is made all the more ready to do so by the fact he knows the practitioner is watching the needle. This causes the patient to speak with much greater honesty than he otherwise would observe, for he conceives his mind to be "read" by the practitioner. A practitioner should know the following manifestations: (1) A sharp drop of the needle for emphasis to the right as you face the dial denotes the existence of a heavily stressed subject. It detects, for the practitioner, the existence and whereabouts of an emotional strain, which, if talked about, may release. (2) A steadily rising needle, which is one that keeps drifting to the left as you face the dial, denotes an avoidance of a subject which, if probed, will bring about the reaction of fear. This shows, in most instances, an effort on the part of the patient to escape. The rise may be continuous and carry on for some time. The rise is halted by asking the patient what he would like to get away from, and why; whom he would like to get away from; what situation he finds unbearable in the past. When this is touched upon by the patient, the needle will stop rising and give a short sharp drop. (3) An idle needle, one which is drifting slightly to the right and slightly to the left very easily and gently, denotes a comfortable status of mind on the part of the patient, and tells the practitioner that he is nowhere near any subject that distresses him, or, if it follows an emotional outburst, tells him that the outburst itself is spent, and that the subject now can be abandoned for the moment. (4) A sticky, or rigid needle is one which does not change, but if it does, changes very slightly and with a jerk. This sticky needle can be interreted, for the purposes of associative processing, as an effort on the part of the patient to hold back information, or even use physical effort to suppress information. The practitioner should ask the patient if he is attempting to keep the machine from reading (which the patient cannot) or if he is actively and consciously repressing some information. If this fails to resolve the "sticky" needle, simply ask the patient to get a whole concept of waiting 270 for somebody, or somebody waiting for him, or ask him to get a concept of somebody standing still, or the patient holding somebody still, and the needle may free. The patient should be reminded occasionally of the compact with the practitioner as to the 100 percent honesty, as most patients have many things which they are determined, very knowingly, to suppress and not bring to light. With this technique of associative processing, the hidden data which the practitioner, if he is to advance the case, must bring to the surface can be detected and released. No other effective method of doing this is known at this time. 271  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 101 iDate=0/8/52 Volnum=0 Issue=1 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  The Handling of Arthritis    THE JOURNAL OF SCIENTOLOGY Issue 1-G [1952, ca. mid- August] Published by The Hubbard Association of Scientologists, Inc. Phoenix, Arizona The Handling of Arthritis L. Ron Hubbard The disability commonly called arthritis is actually a chronic somatic of the depository type. Calcium or other minerals become deposited in the joint structures or on the bones of the body, and there, impeding circulation and often causing swelling, occasion considerable pain. Joint limitation of motion is often marked, and quite commonly progresses to a point where the individual must use crutches or a wheel chair. The arthritic may have any joint or area of his bone structure so impeded that the ailment may be manifested by claw hands, or hunched back, or stiffened knees. Characteristic of the disability is a certain immobility of the body and muscles. This stillness is strongly contrasted to the spastic's twitching motions. The sufferer from arthritis generaly is subject to endocrine failure. The thyroid is deteriorated, the estrogen or androgen glands are relatively inactive. The glands which monitor the calcium in the body and its solution in the bloodstream are evidently particularly inactive. Calcium in solution in the blood becomes deposited in areas having restricted, or sluggish, flow. In Scientology, it can be demonstrated that a restriction of circulation is present in those areas which have suffered previous injury. The injury, although perhaps forgotten, or suppressed, nevertheless can become active, thus placing a mental block over the area to become affected and inhibiting normal mental communication and physical functioning with and in that area. The damage to joints in any arthritic can be demonstrated easily by testing the individual on an E-Meter where it will be discovered that the area affected indeed has been injured. Arthritis, then, is structurally a deposit of calcium, or other mineral, in an area which has been restricted by an old injury. The injury is held in suspension and in place in the area by restimulation of the environment which contains some of the factors present when that area was injured. It is a condition of such an injury, in order to be in suspension sufficiently to cause arthritis, that the sufferer himself must have administered a like injury to another person. The processing of the chronic arthritic may be pleasant or difficult. This depends upon where the individual may be found on the tone scale. Arthritis occurs at three places on the tone scale. The first is .375, an area of extreme apathy where motionlessness in general makes it easy for deposits to occur. The second is its harmonic, .75, the area of grief, where the suppression of losses of allies or possessions causes a rigidity, a belated effort to hold that which already has departed. The third is the next harmonic, 1.5. This is the band of anger. The .375 often is easy to process, but the apathetic state of the individual occasionally denies the auditor cooperation, even though it appears to be present. The .75 is best relieved by a discharge of grief, where this can be obtained; but grief in a chronic .75 is quite often occluded. The processing of the 1.5 is best effected by 272 running anger, both the anger of others toward the preclear and the preclear's anger toward others. All three levels of arthritis can be affected interestingly by running sympathy for persons who are in a motionless position, such as the ill, and by running sympathy of others for the preclear when he has lain in a motionless position, as in illness. The next most important thing to run is waiting, or enduring, both on the part of the preclear, or others, and when they have waited, or endured for him, or on his account. These incidents by themselves have commonly produced an alleviation of arthritis. The complete and entire reduction of arthritis, so as to inhibit its return at any time in the future, depends on the running of electronic incidents by Technique 80, in particular its famous black and white process. There are many things which can be done for the arthritic, many processes which can be used. It is impossible in this short space to give one of the many case histories of arthritis, under process, or to give all the techniques, or complications of cases concerning it. Of all the ills of man which can be successfully processed by Scientology, arthritis ranks near the top. In skilled hands, this ailment, though misunderstood and dreaded in the past, already has begun to become history. Twenty-five hours of Scientology by an auditor who fairly understands how to process arthritis can be said to produce an invariable alleviation of the condition. Some cases, even severe ones, have responded in as little as two hours of processing, according to reports from auditors in the field. 273  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 101 iDate=0/9/52 Volnum=0 Issue=2 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  The Running of Concepts    THE JOURNAL OF SCIENTOLOGY Issue 2-G [1952, ca. early September] Published by The Hubbard Association of Scientologists. Inc. Phoenix, Arizona The Running of Concepts L. Ron Hubbard The running of concepts is a new development in processing which replaces, to a large degree except in psychotic cases, what formerly was called Straight Wire. Individuals commonly are able to obtain a concept much more easily than they can obtain a specific memory. Furthermore, when they run a concept, it is run out of an incident in which they are fixed, rather than out of the locks, where it does little good. Concept Running is the term given to this portion of Technique 80, and Concept Running alone is used for the light process running of Technique 80. The dictionary definition of concept is "an abstract general notion or conception." One has the concept, for instance, that another is tired, or that people are bored, or that he himself feels sorry for himself. Thought and emotion both are embraced in concepts. Concepts are run on any and all dynamics. Motivators, overt acts, DEDs, and DEDEXes (see What to Audit) all are run lightly on the conceptual level. Heavy processing of effort and attention units is done as before with effort, counter-effort, attention units, and counter units. The Hubbard Chart of Attitudes is one of the swiftest methods of Concept Running. Across the top of this chart we have concepts of a more or less ideal nature, such as I KNOW, I AM, CAUSE, CHANGE, WIN, etc. At the bottom end of the scale on this chart we have the reverse of these concepts, such as I KNOW NOT, I AM NOT, EFFECT, NO CHANGE, LOSE, etc. (The complete chart may be found in The handbook for Preclears.) In the first, the auditor merely requires the preclear to "get the concept of not being." In the running of changing concepts, the auditor requires the preclear to get first the concept "I know not," and then "scan" this up to the concept "I know." In other words, in the process known as changing concepts, one runs bottom scale up to top scale concepts. This can produce some very fast rises in tone and can take an individual out of incidents in which he is fixed. Additional Concept Running is done on the emotional scale of the Chart of Attitudes, which goes from apathy, cowardice and fear, up to exhilaration. One can run these as single concepts, which is to say, one emotion, or as a changing concept, from a base emotion to a higher emotion. In the latter case, one actually is running a reverse emotional curve. Concept Running also includes specific thoughts. It does not include phrases and the auditor must be careful not to let the preclear repeat phrases, since these will repeat him into unconscious periods of engrams. Let the preclear simply get the concept contained in a phrase, and feel this concept rather than express it. One also can combine a thought concept with an emotional concept. He can ask a preclear to get a concept of not liking dogs and, as he gets the concept, to actually feel 275 that he dislikes dogs. Quite commonly the incident occasioning this dislike will come into view. In the running of concepts, it must not be omitted that a preclear is quite often too low on the tone scale to remember things that are absolutely real to him, times when he was in good communication, etc. Further, the running of concepts actually can blunt his reality if he is permitted to go into incidents which are too heavy with these concepts, a thing an auditor finds difficult to prevent and about which he should not particularly worry beyond this remedy: After every period of Concept Running, the auditor should cause the preclear to remember specific incidents on the time track which seem absolutely real to him, and in which he was in good communication, where he felt affinity, or affinity was felt for him, or good communication was being given to him, and where he was able to give reality to someone. Conditions and positions and states also may be run as concepts: the condition of being poor, of being happy, the position of something being near, far, high, or low -- either socially, professionally, or actually -- and the state of something being still, somebody standing, somebody lying down, something being in fast motion. The concepts in these cases can be combined with the concept of the desire to stop somebody from moving, or to start somebody who is not moving into motion. The key concepts on any case are those to be found on the Chart of Attitudes. One can amplify this chart by putting the words "Try to" or "Trying to" in front of these conditions. Such as, the concept of trying to know, the concept of trying to get somebody else to know, the concept of trying to be, the concept of trying not to be, the concept of trying to get somebody else to be cause, etc. All Concept Running is productive of considerable result, but, as in any type of processing, it must be remembered the preclear can get only a limited number of concepts as overt acts before he has to get concepts as motivators. He has to get a number of concepts as motivators before he can get them as overt acts. Thus, be sure to run Concept Running along all of the dynamics. For example, here is a routine that can be followed: 1. Get the preclear to get concepts about himself. 2. Get him to get concepts about other persons. Get him to get concepts of trying to do something, or to be something about himself, trying to do or be something with or about others. 3. Concepts of others feeling emotion toward him. 4. Concepts of himself feeling emotion toward others. 5. Concepts of a state of beingness, such as tiredness on the part of others, as in making somebody feel tired, or in tiredness on the part of self. A chart of all possible aberrations would demonstrate that concepts can be fitted into an inner play of dynamics, so that the first dynamic feeling tiredness then could be rotated into the remaining dynamics feeling tiredness. Or one could take a group feeling tiredness on the part of individuals. There is a validation type of Concept Running whereby one merely runs happy or corroborative states and data, top tone scale material. This can be run quite successfully, and often results in keying out low-level engrams. In running attention units and counter units, one quite occasionally finds it advisable to ask the preclear to get a concept. The preclear is never asked to get a phrase. Because of newer and more efficacious techniques, phrases have not been run for almost a year. Concept Running will be found quite as effective as Straight Wire, which it replaces. 276  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 0 iDate=0/9/52 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  An Auditing Formula To Make A Theta Clear    An Auditing Formula To Make A Theta Clear 1. Read questions to PC from Handbook for Preclears until auditor has confidence. 2. Run Beauty - Ugly current life until all occlusions gone. 3. Run by Black and White any electronic incident which shows up while doing (2). Alternate such incidents with current life until current life clears. 4. Run all blanketings. 5. Run most distant body preclear can contact. Run out. 6. Run closer and closer bodies until preclear is clear.  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 101 iDate=0/0/0 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Issues 3-G, 4-G & 5-G [1952, ca. late Sept., early Oct. & late Oct.] Published by The Hubbard Association of Scientologists, Inc. Phoenix, Arizona Danger: Black Dianetics!    THE JOURNAL OF SCIENTOLOGY Issues 3-G, 4-G & 5-G [1952, ca. late Sept., early Oct. & late Oct.] Published by The Hubbard Association of Scientologists, Inc. Phoenix, Arizona Danger: Black Dianetics! L. Ron Hubbard DOES COURT PROTECT MAN BRANDED INSANE? Unscrupulous groups and individuals have practicing a form of Black Dianetics on their fellow men for centuries. They may not have called it that, but the results have been and are the same. Their easiest victims are the unsuspecting. No one can slip up behind you if you know they're there. The prowler has no potency in an alertly guarded home. The subject of Black Dianetics long has been hinted at, abut this is the first time it has been released to the general public. Its release is dictated by the belief people must know what threatens them so they can be better prepared. Those who use it already know; those who do not use it should be protected. In this, the first of three articles, read how little protection Man has should the wheels of legal procedure be turned against him. -- J of S Editor. Death, insanity, aberration, or merely a slavish obedience can be efficiently effected by the use of Black Dianetics. Further, adequate laws do not exist at this time to bar the use of these techniques. The law provides that only the individual so wronged can make complaint or swear out a warrant for offend using these techniques. A person on whom Black Dianetics has been employed seldom retains the sanity or will to make a complaint, or does not know he has been victimized. In addition, persons claiming such offenses against their persons are commonly catalogued by doctors as suffering from delusion. Thus the employer of Black Dianetics can escape unpunished under existing legal procedures. One invites, by the release of such powerful and insidious methods, the censure of those who seek to hold society together. But a little thought will tell one that these techniques are better released and known to many than hidden and known to but a few. A shabby, inefficient, and fifth-rate shadow of these techniques has been employed by Russia and other governments. The cases of Mindzenty, Vogeler, and Oatis reflect a faint forerunner of such methods. Even the United States government, honorable above most governments, has sought better ways to "influence" human beings. Hypnotism is a rather old and untrustworthy method of influencing or enslaving others. However, hypnotism is very unreliable even when it can be effected upon an individual. The mechanisms of hypnotism, quite incidentally and of no great importance, are circumscribed in Black Dianetics. One could not release this furiously violent poison unless one first had the antidote. Processing, even that contained in Self Analysis, can undo Black Dianetics unless, of course, the victim has been driven into suicide or past the point of no return -- a feat which is not difficult, but a condition which is not desirable where the operator seeks real advantage. Several people are dead because of Black Dianetics. Hundreds of thousands are dead because of the atom bomb. Thousands may die because of Black Dianetics. 280 Millions may die because of nuclear physics. But also because of nuclear physics man may reach the stars. And because of Scientology we may some day win a world without insanity, without criminals, and without war. Efforts to influence and prevail over the minds of individuals, groups, and nations have been exerted since the dawn of time. These efforts have utilized every known means of psychic and physical phenomena. One of the earlier broad efforts consisted in the field of astronomy where, in Chaldea, Babylon, and other early civilizations, priests procured power by predicting solar and stellar activity such as eclipses and comets. By first stating the phenomena would occur, the priests would be held to be in league with the gods by a populace which beheld the spectacular occurrences. The courses of men and nations could thus be swayed by a body of men with recourse to phenomena known to them and yet unknown to the vulgar. Another effort of swaying minds occurred in Persia and Syria between the 11th and 13th centuries A.D. A sect known as the Assassins utilized the popular belief in Mohammedan Paradise to rule, viciously and powerfully, a large segment of the known world. This sect enforced its will upon the rulers and influential men of its time by assassination, and, indeed, that is the derivation of that word. The leaders of this sect would ply religious young men with hashish and then transport them to a marvelous garden which contained all the sensual delights recounted in the Koran, even to the forty black-eyed houris. The young men, believing themselves in Paradise itself, would be told that they could not remain there unless they obeyed the slightest wish of the sect and that they could not return unless they were actually dead. The young men, so bedazzled, were then returned to the "world of the living" and were used to slay important persons, for what mattered it that the assassin was killed, since he would, at worst, return to "Paradise." Thus any ruler or influential man in the world, once threatened by this sect, would obey its mandates as to tribute or the passing of new laws. In India, down through the millenia, various methods of influencing human thought have been practiced with greater or lesser success. One of these wandered into The western world and became known as "hypnotism." The variability of its success was such and the extravagant and unfounded claims made for it were so out of the ordinary that even today there are many people who do not believe it exists. The basic technique of hypnotism consists of one individual, the hypnotist, relaxing or coaxing into quiescence another individual called the "subject." The operator then makes certain suggestions to the subject and the subject may, during the session or after it is dictated, obey. Hypnotic subjects are in the minority and skilled hypnotists are few and so this method of influencing minds has had limited scope. Further, the hypnotist claims curative powers in hypnotism and a careful examination of the field demonstrates that hypnotism is far more harmful to a mind than beneficial. Thus hypnotism, a curious phenomena, is not greatly employed. But it has, nevertheless, been employed to the harm of individuals and the "betterment" of operators. It is claimed by hypnotism's zealots -- and it has them in plenty -- that a hypnotized subject will not perform immoral or dangerous acts. Experiment demonstrates a limited truth in this but it also demonstrates that a hypnotic subject can be influenced against his best interests. The charlatanism in this field is very great. Other methods of influencing and swaying minds are all about us. They range from the cold brutality of threatened death to the extensive practice of advertising. Each depends upon some natural phenomenon or phenomena, whether known or unknown. [The continuation of the above article, which is on the following page, appeared in Journal of Scientology 4-G.] 281 PART II The Loophole in Guarded Rights WHAT IF THE "EXPERTS" SAID YOU WERE INSANE? Failure to delineate sanity has left a wide loophole in our civil and criminal laws. An insane man has no rights, and his degree of mental efficiency can be determined by men who, themselves, are borderline psychotics. What can Man do about it? What would YOU do if rumors were circulated that you were mentally ill; that some of your idiosyncrasies imperiled the safety and health of your neighbors and associates? What recourse would you have if you were examined by a board of "experts" and declared mentally unfit to handle your own affairs? There are those who, to control, resort to narcotics, suggestion, gossip slander -- the thousands of overt and covert ways that can be classified as Black Dianetics. There is only one defense. In this, the second of three articles, Mr. Hubbard tells you the vital role White Dianetics can play in the peace and security of you and the world. -- J of S Editor. Whenever phenomena become known to a small number of unscrupulous men, these by secrecy, can employ it to the enslavement of many. This, in a thimble, is the history of the race. It was inevitable that once natural law concerning thought became known, it would be utilized by individuals to enslave, reduce, or even to murder others. Invalidation of Dianetics is now, fortunately, rendered impossible by the vigorous program of proof and testing to which it has been subjected. However, an invalidation of Dianetics as a process by which aberration can be relieved, works in the direction of permitting Black Dianetics to be employed without censure upon luckless human beings who may not even know that it has been so employed. The processes of Black Dianetics can be remedied by what might be called White Dianetics, in most cases. If any group desired to use the phenomena discovered in Dianetics to enslave an individual, a group, or a nation, its first step would be to place White Dianetics out of bounds, to illegalize its practice, and to condemn the tenets contained in it. To debar the general public practice of White Dianetics is to make possible a general unpublic practice of Black Dianetics. At the present writing, there is one certain method of disenfranchising a human being. In 1215 A.D. by the Magna Carta and in 1791 by the Bill of Rights in America, certain liberties of person and property were delineated and given to certain nations. In the absence of any known natural law relating to sanity beyond the legal definition that it is the "ability to tell right from wrong" without saying what right and wrong are, clauses relating to sanity were, perforce, omitted from such documents. Thus a wide loophole was left in civil and criminal structure. For whatever a sane man's rights may be said to be, it is only necessary to declare him insane and his rights vanish. He has no right to property. He has no right to trial. He has no right to be confronted by his accusers. All processes of law are suspended the moment an individual is declared to be insane. Indeed, on this whisper, even his friends may desert him. He must have an appointed guardian for all his affairs to whom he cannot object. He can be spirited away into a public jail without other than a complaint that he is not sane. There he is examined by men whose pretense it was to be able to distinguish sanity from insanity and who, themselves, are suspect of being insane in most part. An individual so accused can be incarcerated without any other legal process and can be given "treatments" which will leave him a hopeless imbecile for the remainder of his life. Or he may simply be killed by attendants. Electric shock, "psychosurgery," other types of shock "treatment" are at this writing accepted treatment of the "insane." Adequate documents exist to demonstrate that these "treatments" never cure anything, that they often break a man's spine or leave him even unable to control simple body functions. All this waits for the individual the moment he is pronounced "insane." He is disenfranchised, his property is forfeited, he passes into hands which have the power of life and death over him. 282 Thus we see that even the Magna Carta and the Bill of Rights are worthless in the hands and under the manipulation of the unscrupulous. In order to have a true bill of rights a citizen would have to be given rights to his sanity and to his life. These are two rights which cannot now be guaranteed. Until they are guaranteed, the Constitution, to many, is a mockery. In one insane asylum, at the behest of a government, a man that government considers dangerous is held as "insane,, After Pearl Harbor in 1941 any naval captain who dared cry "Treason!" when he saw how high administrative orders brought about a debacle was shipped, quicky and without any recourse to friends or courts, to insane asylums. Thus it is possible, even now, in this "enlightened age" for a group of men to function much as did the assassins, even without Black Dianetics. By using the public fear of the insane, a fear born from the unknowns of insanity, anyone can be discredited and imprisoned. By using Black Dianetics, insanity itself can be brought about with considerable ease. In these turbulent times, with an A-bomb hanging over every city, civil law is more and more withdrawn from the citizen, censorship is more and more strict. Disaster breeds secret control and enslavement. In event of a national disaster such as that envisioned in an atomic war, it is not necessarily true that civilization may be destroyed, regardless of what the president says, but it is true that disaster may assume a magnitude sufficient for any small group to seize control of the remaining populace, a control very close to complete slavery. In order to resolve insanity, it was necessary to release the natural laws discovered in Dianetics. When they were released it became possible to create insanity at will. And even more insidiously, complete control of a human being can be effected without insanity being demonstrated by him. The release of these laws and the whole of Black Dianetics is necessary if a long range program of prevention is to be effected. So long as Black Dianetics remains the property of the very few, a very great many more will suffer eventually than those few who will die because of the publication of this material. Thus, the first basic principle of Black Dianetics: So long as a natural phenomenon remains the knowledge of a few and is denied to the many it can be utilized to control the many. The first law of Dianetics which you should know is as follows: The human organism receives and records all perceptions while under duress and in a reduced state of consciousness. Should you wish to know complete derivations of this law and its proofs, you are invited to study the science itself. Here is contained only sufficient material to delineate Black Dianetics in full. [The conclusion of the above article, which is on the following page, appeared in Journal of Scientology 5-G.] 283 PART III Records of Mind Are Permanent MEANS TO RESCUE MAN ALSO CAN CONTROL HIM In this, the last of three articles on Black Dianetics, Mr. Hubbard tells how the very processes of the mind are used for man's control, when utilized by persons seeking power. By knowing how the mind works, and adapting this knowledge to his needs, man at the same time can free himself of his operations, his psychosomatic illnesses -- even ascend to the stars. -- J of S Editor. Man, for all his years took the observation for the fact that when a human being was no longer able to control its own operations and functions and so long as it, again in control, could not recall what had occurred, that the material was not recorded. This was wholly unwarranted as an assumption Let us examine, first, pain. Pain, technically, is caused by an effort counter to the effort of the individual as a whole. The individual is a colonial aggregation of cells. Each cell is seeking to live. Each cell and the whole organism is basically motivated by a desire to survive. The entire physical structure is composed of atoms and molecules, organic and inorganic. While the individual is alive and conscious, these atoms and molecules are in a state of optimum or near-optimum tension and alignment. On the receipt of a counter-effort such as that of a blow or, internally, as in the case of drugs, shock or bacteria, the optimum or near-optimum tension and alignment of these atoms and molecules, as contained in the nerves, muscles, bones, and tissues of the body, are disarranged. The result is a slackening or speeding of the motions of the physical body in such a way as to cause misalignment and maltension of the atoms and molecules. This is pain. Counter-efforts to survival cause this effect to take place. The technical name of this effect is randomity. The directions of motion of the various portions of the body are disarranged into random vectors or patterns. Pain results in loss, invariably, the loss of cells or the loss of general alignment. When pain departs, it is still on record. The record of that pain can be called again into existence. If you wish to make a very simple test, simply go back to the last time you hurt yourself. Get as full perceptions as you can of the object which hurt you and the surrounding environment. Seek to contact the painful object again. Unless you are badly occluded, you should be able to feel that pain once more. If you yourself cannot make this test because you are occluded, ask your friends to try it. Sooner or later you will find someone who can recall pain. Another test: Pinch yourself and then go back to the moment you did it and feel the pinch again. Even if you are occluded you should be able to do this. In short, pain is stored on record. But that is not all that is stored. The whole area of any randomity is stored in full. The atoms and molecules rearrange themselves, when pain is recontacted, into the pattern they had when that pain was received. Hence the pain can come back. But also the effort and all of its perceptions can come back when either the pain or the general randomity come back. The misalignment caused by a blow, shock, drugs, or bacteria causes an inability of the control center of the mind to function. Thus, the control center of the mind can go unconscious, can be overwhelmed by this misalignment. After consciousness is regained, whenever the control center of the mind tries to recall what happened, it can recall only the randomity. It is trying to recall a time when it could not recall and thus draws a blank. Man thought that if he could not recall a thing, then it didn't record. This is like the little child who hides his eyes and then thinks you can't see him just because he can't see you. With every area of randomity thus created by injury or illness or shock or drugs, there is stored as well the counter-effort to the body. The effort impinged upon the 284 body by the blow or the other misaligning factor also was stored. This is physical force. When it comes back upon the body, it comes back as physical force. It can distort features or the body by being in constant "restimulation." Restimulation is occasioned by some part of the early recording being approximated in the environment in the present. This calls up the old area of randomity. The body, confused, registers the old counter-effort. Nearly everyone has these counter-efforts of the past being, some of them, exerted against him in the present. His sub-level awareness is tied up in resisting old counter-efforts -- blows, sicknesses, drugs -- which once affected him and drove him into unconsciousness. The moment an individual wholly concentrates his attention elsewhere these old areas may exert their force again. Feel the aliveness or full sense of being of each one of the following. Feel wholly alive only in the member of your body named: 1. The right foot. 2. The left foot. 3. The right cheek. 4. The left cheek. 5. The toes. 6. The back of the head. 7. The back of the neck. 8. The nose. 9. The right hand. 10. The tongue. 11. The left hand. 12. The stomach. If you have gone over these members, investing carefully, aliveness only in each, you probably will have received various aches and pains in areas where your concentration was not fixed or at least experienced grogginess. Try it several times. Processing cleans up these old areas with resultant rise in health and sanity. Black Dianetics uses this mechanism to implant new compulsion. 285  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 101 iDate=0/11/52 Volnum=0 Issue=6 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Procedures for Theta Clearing    THE JOURNAL OF SCIENTOLOGY Issue 6-G [1952, ca. early November] Published by The Hubbard Association of Scientologists, Inc. Phoenix, Arizona Procedures for Theta Clearing L. Ron Hubbard (J of S EDITOR'S NOTE: The material in this article parallels the book and Increase of Life Energy, recently published by the HAS. Further and necessary data for a complete use of this article is contained in Scientology: 8-80. Use of this material by itself without knowledge of 8-80 may not produce the desired results. The auditor should equip himself with complete knowledge of the subject. The origination and formulation of Standard Operating Procedure for Theta Clearing was done by L. Ron Hubbard during his stay in England. SOP marks a new high in Scientology and is the technique which sums all Dr. Hubbard's work for the last year. The importance of SOP to mankind will become apparent to the auditor on his first tests of the method. To accomplish a "clean use" of SOP, one should know Dianetics and Scientology thoroughly in all their phases for he will have, from case to case, use of all his repertoire.) This is Standard Operating Procedure for Theta Clearing. This IS THE ROAD. It applies to all cases of whatever kind. It does not change or vary from case to case. This process is done in steps. The auditor with EVERY preclear makes no other judgment than to begin with Step I and, failing to accomplish that immediately, to go to Step II; if he fails to accomplish this immediately he goes to Step III and so on. When he is able to accomplish a step he labels the case as that step number, i.e., a III. He then begins working with that step. After a few hours of work he again starts at the top with the pc with Step I and progresses on through. Eventually the pc becomes a Step I. Step I: POSITIVE EXTERIORIZING. Ask the preclear to step a foot back of his head. If he does, make him go back further, then up, then down, practicing placement in space and time. Then one asks him to see if there are any items in the body he would like to repair and proceeds to let pc repair them according to pc's own ideas as to how he should do it. Then educate the pc by making him create and destroy his own illusions into finally getting a certainty of illusion and from this a certainty of perceiving the real universe with all perceptions. (Note: The most real universe is, of course, one's own illusory universe and should be completely rehabilitated before one attempts to perceive or handle or worry about the MEST universe. Rehabilitated, sonic, visio, etc., of the MEST universe are clear and very certain. Clear perception in early stages is not a test of being outside. The only test is whether the pc KNOWS he is outside.) Failing the first line of this step, go to Step II. Step II: NEGATIVE EXTERIORIZING. Ask the preclear NOT to be a foot back of his head. (See sub-zero tone scale where all commands reverse.) Give him commands in the negative which will be obeyed in the positive sense. Then orient him in space and time (the thetan can be out of time badly) and thereafter treat him as a Step I case. Failing this step, go to Step III. 289 Step III: BY ORIENTATION. Ask the preclear, still inside, to locate the inside of his forehead. Ask him to put a pressor beam against it and push himself out the back of his head. Supplement this by asking him to reach out through the back of his head and grab the wall with a pulling beam and pull himself out. Ask him to steady himself outside and then, by means of beams, to raise and lower himself while outside and to move to various parts of the room while still outside. By orientation as a thetan, placing himself as a thetan in time and race, he becomes sure of his whereabouts. Have him find and cast off old lines which have their terminals fixed to radiators and water taps so the energy will drain out of him. The III ordinarily has enough lines to cause him to snap back in the head when he releases beams. Failing this go to Step IV. Step IV: RIDGE RUNNING. Ask the preclear to give himself a command to walk. Let him locate the white flow line which results inside his head. When this line goes dark, have him locate the tiny inside skull ridge that stopped it. Have him run the flow from this barrier (these barriers are tiny ridges, each having a thought with it such as "Can't walk" or "Too bored to walk") back toward the spot where he told himself to walk. It will run white for a moment, then go black. Have him give himself the command to walk again and "watch" this flow line. It may run through two or three tiny barriers and then stop. Again have him run the "objection" to walking. Have him watch this "objection" flow until it goes black. Then have him give himself the command to walk again and so on and so on. He will wind up at some outside point. Now have him give himself the command "Listen" and have him run this and its back flows on "black and white" until he is exterior on the subject of listen. Then use the command "Talk" similarly. Then the command "Nod," then the command "Move." Give "Look last for it may "blind" his perception of black and white. He may each time get out to a distance in another quarter. If he can do all this start with Step I again. Failing this step, failing to "see" black and white energy manifestations, go to Step V. (See What to Audit.) Step V: DED-DEDEX RUNNING. Audit the preclear on DEDs and DEDEXes with particular attention to blanketings. Audit him also very heavily on "Creative Processing" (Self Analysis, British Edition). Then go through steps again. If pc is immediately perceived to have little or no reality on ANY incident, go to Step VI. Step VI: ARC STRAIGHT WIRE. Drill, by direct questioning, on locks until pc can remember something really "real" to him, something which he "really loved," something with which he was in communication. Then drill him on creating illusions until he is certain he has created one which really isn't real, which he is certain HE put the emotion and perceptions into. (See Self-Analysis, British Edition, with attention to "End of Session Processing.") Then go through steps again. Failing Step VI after a quick test, go to Step VII. Step VII: PRESENT TIME BODY ORIENTATION. Have preclear locate a part of his body and recognize it as such. Have him locate furniture, fixtures, auditor in room. Have him locate the town and country he is in. Get him to find something in present time which is really real to him, with which he can communicate. Work on this until he can do this. Then go to Step VI. Then go to Step I. The Bibliography for SOP Theta Clearing is as follows: Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health, Science of Survival, Self Analysis (British Edition as revised Fall, 1952), What to Audit, Professional Course Books, Scientology: 8-80. [Also in this issue of the Journal was a list of terms and definitions used extensively in the theta clearing techniques. This same collection of terms, with some revisions and modifications, can be found as the Glossary of Scientology 8-8008.] 290  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 101 iDate=0/11/52 Volnum=0 Issue=7 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Sanity Needs Creation-Destruction Balance SPACE, TIME AND ENERGY HAVE THEIR PARALLELS IN START, STOP AND CHANGE    THE JOURNAL OF SCIENTOLOGY Issue 7-G [1952, ca. late November] Published by The Hubbard Association of Scientologists, Inc. Phoenix, Arizona Sanity Needs Creation-Destruction Balance SPACE, TIME AND ENERGY HAVE THEIR PARALLELS IN START, STOP AND CHANGE L. Ron Hubbard Self-determinism seeks as its goal the attainment of the goal of theta itself. Theta has the capability of locating matter and energy in time and space, and of creating time and space. Any action requires space and time, for space and time are necessary to motion. Motion can be defined as change of location in space, and any change of location requires time. Thus we have an interacting trianglee, one corner of which could be labelled space, another corner time, and the third energy. Matter is not included in the trianglee because matter is apparently cohesion and adhesion of energy. The cycle of a universe could be said to be the cycle of creation, growth, conservation, decay, and destruction. This is the cycle of an entire universe or any part of that universe; it is also the cycle of life forms. This would compare to the three actions of energy, which are Start, Change and Stop. Where creation is Start, growth is enforced Change, conservation and decay are inhibited Change, and destruction is Stop. The two extremes of the cycle -- creation and destruction or, in the terms of motion, Start and Stop -- are interdependent and are consecutive. There could be no creation without destruction; as one must eradicate the tenement before building the apartment house, so, in the material universe, must destruction and creation be intermingled. A good action could be said to be one which accomplished the maximal construction with minimal destruction; a bad action could be said to be one which accomplished minimal construction with maximal destruction. That which is started and cannot be stopped and that which is stopped without being permitted to run a course are alike actions bordering upon the psychotic. Unreasonableness itself is defined by persistence in one or the other of these courses of starting something which cannot be stopped (as in the case of an A-bomb) or of stopping something before it has reached a beneficial stage. Unlimited creation without any destruction would be insane; unlimited destruction without any creation would be similarly insane. In actuality, insanity can be grouped and classified, detected and remedied by a study of creation and destruction. If one discovers in an individual where he will not use force, or cannot tolerate force, he will find where that individual will also refuse to be responsible. The definition of responsibility is entirely within this boundary. An assessment of a case can be done by use of the accompanying graph. We see here creation with a line pointing straight downward and find there the word insane; 293 CREATION DESTRUCTION ____________________ ____________________ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | Insane Sane Insane D 1 D 1 D 1 y 2 y 2 y 2 n 3 n 3 n 3 a 4 a 4 a 4 m 5 m 5 m 5 i 6 i 6 i 6 c 7 c 7 c 7 s 8 s 8 s 8 under this, we list the dynamics. Wherever along any of these dynamics the individual cannot conceive himself to be able to create, on that level he will be found aberrated to the degree that he does not believe himself able to create. This might be thought to introduce an imponderable but such is not the case, for the individual is most aberrated on the first dynamic and, rightly or wrongly, conceives that he could not create himself. This goes to the extent, in homo sapiens, of believing that one cannot create a body and, rightly or wrongly, one is then most aberrated on the subject of his body. Potentially, because of the character of theta itself, an individual in an absolute and possibly unattainable state, should be able to create a universe. Certainly it is true that every man is his own universe and possesses within himself all the capabilities of a universe. To the extreme right of the graph, we have the word destruction and a line pointing downwards toward insane, and beneath this, the list of the dynamics. That individual who can only destroy along any of these dynamics and cannot or will not create could be said to be aberrated on that dynamic. He is aberrated to the degree that he would destroy that dynamic. Looking again at the column of creation, one finds the individual aberrated anywhere along the dynamics in that column where the individual will only create and will not destroy. In the destruction column, one finds the individual aberrated on any dynamic in that column where he will not destroy. Use of this graph and these principles enables the auditor to assess hitherto hidden compulsions and obsessions on the part of the preclear. This is an auditing graph. If one looks at it in another way than auditing, he finds laid out what has been occasionally posed as a philosophy of existence. Friedrich Nietzsche, in his book Thus Spake Zarathustra, presents as a desirable code of conduct unlimited willingness to destroy. In order to survive in any universe, conduct must be regulated by a sense of ethics. Ethics are possible on a reasonable level only when the individual is high on the tone scale. In the absence of such height, ethics are supplanted by morals which can be defined as an arbitrary code of conduct not necessarily related to reason. Should one attempt to regulate his conduct on the basis of unlimited creation or destruction, he would find it necessary to act without judgment to put his philosophy into effect. It is noteworthy that the late Nazi regime can serve as a clinical test of the workability of a scheme of things wherein unlimited creation and destruction are held as an ideal. 294  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 101 iDate=0/11/52 Volnum=0 Issue=7 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  The Components of Experience    THE JOURNAL OF SCIENTOLOGY Issue 7-G [1952, ca. late November] Published by The Hubbard Association of Scientologists, Inc. Phoenix, Arizona The Components of Experience L. Ron Hubbard The physicist long has been on a carousel with regard to the component parts of the material universe. He has had to define time in terms of space and energy, space in terms of time and energy, and energy in terms of time and space, and matter as a combination of all three. When three factors exist at such an altitude in a science, there can be no further clarification unless the material can be related to experience of an equal magnitude. The current definition in Scientology has this liability: if self- determination is the location of matter and energy in time and space, and the creation, change and destruction of time and space, then there is no comparable data by which to evaluate this level. The physicist has found the interrelationship of time, space and energy to be invaluable and has, indeed, produced a civilization from this interrelationship just as, with our definition of self-determinism, it is possible to deaberrate an individual and increase his potentialities in a way never before suspected possible, and with a speed which exceeds all past estimates, even in the science of Scientology. Because we are now working from a higher understanding than time, space and energy, it is possible to compare these to experience in such a way as to broaden their use and modify their force or increase it. Control of time, space and energy now comes well within our capabilities. Space, time and energy in experience become Be, Have and Do, the component parts of experience itself. Space could be said to be BE. One can be in space without change and without time; one can also be, without action. The essence of time is apparently possession. When possession ceases, the record of time ceases. Without possession, change cannot be observed; in the presence of possession change can be observed. Thus it is deduced that time and possession are interdependent. The past could be subdivided into Had, Should Have Had, Didn't Have, and Got, Should Have Gotten, Didn't Get, and Gave, Should Have Given, Didn't Give. The present could be subdivided into Have, Should Have, Does Not Have, and Giving, Should Be Giving, Not Giving, and Receiving, Should Be Receiving, Not Receiving. The future is subdivisible into Will Have, Should Have, Will Not Have, and Getting, Will Be Getting, Will Not Be Getting, and Will Receive, Will Not Receive. In each of the above -- past, present and future-the word would apply for any individual or any part of the dynamics to all the other dynamics. The way one knows there was a past is by knowing the conditions of the past. The most revelatory of these is the facsimile which was taken in the past. However without any possession in the present stemming forward from the past, the past becomes unimportant; or, because possession ceased, the past is obliterated. The single matter of the body of a past life not being in the present life invalidates the existence 295 of the past life to the individual who then does not -- or does not care to -- remember it. Yet the facsimile can be, nevertheless, effective upon him. Energy, whether in the field of thought, emotion, or effort, can be summed into DO. It requires beingness and havingness in order to achieve doingness. Here we have the static of space acting against the kinetic of possession to produce action in the field of thought, emotion, or effort, the various categories of doingness. Should one care to test this as a process on a preclear, he will find that the missing portions of the preclear's past have to do with loss of something. Loss itself is the single aberrative factor in living. It long has been known in this science that the release of a grief charge was an important single improvement in the preclear. Grief is entirely and only concerned with loss or threatened loss. Pain itself can be defined in terms of loss, for pain is the threat which tells one that loss of mobility or a portion of the body or the environment is imminent. Man has pain so thoroughly identified with loss that in some languages the words are synonymous. Loss is always identified with HAVE, for if one doesn't have, one cannot lose. The Hindu sought to depart into his Nirvana by refusing to have anything to do with Having. He sought thus to promote himself into Being. He saw that so long as he retained a grasp on a body in any degree he was Having, and thus was pressed into Being. Having and Being often are identified to the degree that many people attempt exclusively to Be only by Having. The capitalist judges his own beingness solely by the degree of possession, not even vaguely by the degree of action he is able to execute. Possessions absorb and enforce time; only without possessions would one be able to regulate time at will. This is a singular attribute of the cleared theta clear, and to him possession of MEST is extremely unimportant. One can make up for a lack of Having by Doing, and by Doing accomplishes Having and thus regulates time. Having enhances either Being or Doing, as is sometimes severely recognized by one who would like to take a vacation or a trip to foreign lands. Doing ran enhance either Being or Having; a balanced Doing slants in both directions, but if one Does without Having, his Being increases, as is well known by anyone who insists on doing favors without recompense and without gain. There is an optimum speed of Doing. If one travels less than that speed, he has little Being and Having; if one travels greater than that speed, he has to abandon both Being and Having. This is applicable especially to the MEST universe. The case of a race driver is in point. He must assume a contempt for Being and Having in order to achieve the speeds he does. When change is too rapid both Beingness and Havingness suffer. When change is too slow both Beingness and Havingness suffer. For Change is essentially the redirection of energy. In the assessment of a preclear, one can easily trace, by use of the trianglee, Be, Have and Do; and by placing this over a second trianglee with space at the point of Be, time at the point of Have, and energy at the point of Do, find where the preclear is overbalanced and why the preclear cannot handle time or why he is trying to occupy too much space without being able to fill it, or why his life is complicated with too much havingness and has reduced his beingness to naught. In the MEST universe as well as in a constructed universe, these three factors should be balanced for orderly progress. 296  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 101 iDate=0/12/52 Volnum=0 Issue=8 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  New Data Doesn't Invalidate Early, Proven Techniques    THE JOURNAL OF SCIENTOLOGY Issues 8-G - 12-G [1952, ca. early December - 15 March 1953] Published by The Hubbard Association of Scientologists, Inc. Phoenix, Arizona New Data Doesn't Invalidate Early, Proven Techniques L. Ron Hubbard J of S EDITOR'S NOTE -- Auditors and preclears too often complain that Scientology is invalidating itself; that today's techniques are making those of yesterday obsolete. L. Ron Hubbard, in a recent lecture, said definitely that you audit the preclear, not the technique; that the first book still will do exactly what it said it would do, and new developments have only one purpose: to give auditors newer and better tools with which to work. Because we feel that this lecture is of extreme importance, it has been edited somewhat, and is being reprinted serially in Scientology. This is the first chapter. In the opinion of many people, this science changes -- rapidly, radically, sporadically and unpredictably. When someone tells you this, you know he does not know his Scientology. In DIANETICS: The Modern Science of Mental Health, in a chapter called "The Cell and the Organism," there is a statement (though not in these words) that the structure of the human body is a series of efforts and counter- efforts. In the chapter on emotion, there is a discussion on unburdening the misemotion by which the body is controlled. There is a statement that emotion is a theta thing, which we can use though we do not fully understand it. This consistency of theory from the time of the first book to now is easily observed. There is one major error along the line, of which I know: the theory of valence. One glaring error out of all the hundreds of theoretical building blocks of this science is not a bad record. Valence, as we used it, was wrong. We do not want anyone getting into valence. We want him to get out of valence. Why? Because if he is thoroughly inside his body, the thetan has almost ceased to exist, and the Genetic Entity is in control of the organism to a large degree. Nowadays we are using Technique 80. That was not in the first book. But does Technique 80 invalidate what was in the book? No! In the first book we got around what we now do in Technique 80 by finding the basic on the chain. You can bypass the whole of Technique 80 if you can find the basic on the chain. But that is a long and tiresome search, and now Technique 80 makes it unnecessary. Instead of running down chains of this and chains of that, looking for the first counter-effort on the line Technique 80 just picks up any effort and counter-effort anywhere on the line and takes it from there. Still, finding the basic on the chain was a workable technique, though it required much greater art and many more hours than Technique 80. Technique 80 says that we can use any effort or counter-effort anywhere we find it and unravel the track from that point. What has the preclear done with this counter-effort, and what has this counter-effort done to him? 300 The motivator and the overt, the DED and the DEDEX: that is Technique 80. This is considerably easier than looking through all tangle and confusion of incidents for the basic on the chain, but that does not mean that the auditor should never have heard of basic-basic. Because one fine day he may find a preclear who can go back to the first moment of pain or unconsciousness in the life and run it out -- and blow the rest of the track clean. The processing in the first book was designed for the wide-open case. In a tougher case, you had to know how to shoot demon circuits, as they were called. We don't shoot demon circuits much any more, but now and then you may get a preclear who is being told what to do and think by a voice inside his head, and if you know what it is to shoot a demon circuit you can just turn it off at will and go on to the next problem. There was a lot of art involved in processing in those days. Some demons had to be attacked by running imaginary incidents. The more difficult the case, the more art was required. We have been replacing art with technology, until now the case which was a great challenge in 1950 is only the standard routine, but that does not mean that the first-book case no longer exists. There are still cases which have to be processed by 1950 methods before they can be processed by 1952 methods. The first-book case is stuck in a prenatal engram. He is spouting the words of the incident. The auditor ignores concepts, attention units, effort, emotion, thought, and so on. He just gets the preclear to tell him what is happening. The incident runs and reduces. Pretty soon the preclear begins to laugh and line-charges all the way up to present time -- or scans the locks, as we would say it now. A great improvement has been made in the case, because the auditor knew enough to use the appropriate methods -- first-book auditing for a first-book case. Book One addressed the psychotic. But every time we turn around, we find that our sights have gone up. In 1950 we were trying to take a case and process him up to the point where he would no longer rub his mashed potatoes into his hair. Now we are trying to recover the full identity and knowingness of the being and causality of the immortal, imperishable self, forevermore. It is quite a different goal. PART II Thetan, to Be "Sane," Must Learn How He's Been Caring for Body One thing which was not covered by the first book on Dianetics, because we did not know the answer to it, was the difference between the wide-open and the occluded case. We observed a difference which we could not explain. Now we know that the occluded case, instead of becoming wide-open with processing, wakes up as a thetan and begins to run on the whole track, while the wide-open case, before beginning to run on the whole track, shuts down and becomes an occluded thetan. The wide-open case is wide open because it is running not as a thetan but as a Genetic Entity. When you have processed this case for a while, on the genetic line, in prenatals, in late life, in whatever has to be run, then it will stop running as a Genetic Entity and begin running as a thetan. Then, instead of having a MEST body under its own somatic direction, you have a thetan, in terrible condition, with a MEST body inserted into the middle of him. The upgrade is from a quite sane MEST body to a quite insane thetan. But here is the catch: the thetan can handle his own affairs and get along in the world. He is not considered insane by the society -- only by us. He has enough horsepower to override 301 his aberrations -- or to use them to the disadvantage of everyone else. He may be crazy, but he also may conquer the world. Our problem is to unaberrate him so that he can conquer the world with reason instead of with force. One of the things that this thetan has to find out, before he can be sane, is that he has been wasting a lot of his strength in "taking care of" his MEST body. And how has he been "taking care of it"? You may get a pretty big line charge from this thetan when he finally realizes that he has been "helping" his MEST body by crushing it in a vise of energy. The preclear has headaches. Something feels like a tight band around his head. He has been trying to help this MEST body by throwing tractor waves over it, by feeding it engrams to run so that it will be better off, and he has this MEST body as if he had a long wire around it, choking it. He says, "Boy, I'm going to do a wonderful job for this body and get it well!" He chokes it some more. At no moment does he realize that he is out there with all that horsepower and that this MEST body does not have the insulation to stand it. He is feeding in tremendous electrical impulses. He strikes this body with lightning every few hours -- just to keep it in good condition -- and he wonders why he has a blank feeling in his prefrontal lobes. Then, suddenly, in processing, he realizes the horrible truth. He is complaining about this terrible somatic across his eyes and in his jaws, and then he says, " -- Oh, my God! I'm doing it!" He suddenly discovers that he can tighten up or slack off this somatic at will, and he is very embarrassed about the whole thing. "I've been doing it to me!" He has been using this tractor wave for so long that he has forgotten how to control it. Or you will find a thetan who is obsessed by the image of some individual. He just can't get this individual out of his mind. And then he will discover that he has a tractor wave around this individual and is holding this individual in one place and not letting him get away. The facsimile bothers him and the individual obsesses him because of his he individual close to him. He is putting out a tremendous effort to hold on to facsimiles of certain wavelengths, similar to his own, and at the same time he is complaining that he can't get rid of these facsimiles. In the first book we had: What has been done to the preclear? That was pretty low on the Responsibility Scale. Now we have: What has the preclear done to himself? That is much higher on the scale. Unfortunately, if the preclear is pretty low on the scale, he may have to run what was done to him before he can run what he has been doing. In December of 1951, some individuals heard the first half of a lecture which said, "All you have to do is be self-determined!" So they went off to be "self-determined." But they didn't hear the second half of the lecture which said, "But you have to run engrams first." Some of those individuals are now sitting around in apathy, anger, boredom, or hydrophobia, growling, "Well, that's your reality!" They just went up the pole a little ahead of the technique. I have no doubt that there will be a technique for doing this -- possibly next year, possibly tomorrow morning, possibly ten thousand years from now. But right now we have to process preclears at the level where we find them. PART III Preclears Must Be Audited According to Their Condition A preclear must be processed according to the condition he is in. If he is near the top of the Genetic Entity scale -- if he is about as high as he can go as a Genetic Entity, but the thetan is asleep or in terrible condition -- you will be able to 302 process him by the first book. This process will appeal to him. And the funny part of it is that this is the process which will work on him. Your goal is to unsnarl this case and get him up to the point where he can perceive energy manifestations. You are not trying to clean up every engram on the genetic line. You are only trying to get him unburdened enough so that his thetan can take over. Of course, you can use Technique 80 -- but do you have to? Perhaps this case can go back to the first moment of pain or unconsciousness in his life and blow out a whole chain of material in practically no time. He will come up the tone scale. As you bring him up, he will get premonitions of danger. He will sense death in the afternoon. He will want to stop processing. And why? Because the Genetic Entity is about to come under the control of the thetan. The Genetic Entity feels pretty fine, but the thetan is a wreck. Naturally the preclear wants to stay as he is. Now, while this case is running as a Genetic Entity, he will have somatics. You had better process them out. You may find that this person cannot take much more than first-book processing. With it you can make him feel a lot better. This does not mean that you should forget what you have learned since reading the first book -- it means only that you should not forget what you learned when you read the first book. On some cases you can use it: on some cases it is all you can use. For the occluded case you will need another level of processing. Science of Survival and the later 1951 techniques, particularly effort processing, are what he will accept. If you can get him into effort, he will be overjoyed. He will run efforts and counter-efforts with great enthusiasm. But then, using the E-Meter, you will notice that he is showing signs of dropping into whole-track material. You may try to nudge him in that direction. You may say, "It sounds as though you are outside your body, running it from a distance." Oh, no -- he's not going to have anything to do with that. He's right where he wants to be -- stuck in a body. And he'll run efforts and somatics, and sometimes secondaries. If you try to get him out of his body, he will refuse. Then, there is the individual who is always outside his body, watching it, walking around it. In early precessing we tried to get these individuals into their bodies. We told them to get into valence. These preclears got upset about being told to get into their bodies. They didn't like that kind of processing. All this time they have been walking around a body saying, "I wonder why I am tied to this post." All the auditor has to do is say, "Yes, you are tied to this post, but now we are going to get you untied and off of it." That is processing which this individual will gobble up. Black-and-white, ridge running, and the late techniques will be just what this individual wants. The point in all this is: GETTING IN ADVANCE OF THE IMMEDIATE GOAL OF YOUR PRECLEAR SWAMPS HIM. The preclear must be processed at his own level. That is why the auditor must know both the old methods and the new methods. In processing, you should not overlook the things we learned in 1949 and 1950, and you should not overlook the things we will learn in 1953 and 1954. Don't believe that we have to accept just what we have now. Don't believe that "this is it." What we have today is no more IT than the first book was IT. New techniques do not make the old ones unusable. They make them better and more understandable and MORE usable, on the cases for which they are designed. If you know your old materials and your new materials, you are going to solve more cases. You will not take a preclear who is exteriorized and try to sell him on getting into his body. He doesn't want a body. You will not take the Genetic-Entity preclear and try to get him out of his body before he is even a healthy Genetic Entity. What we are doing with the new techniques is not throwing out the old techniques but making them more applicable to precessing. Before Science of Survival, we had very little in the way of a map of human behavior. When we got that map, we found that first-book processing fitted into a certain slot and made sense there. Very little has been added to that chart in Science of Survival, but something has been added to its applicability. The behavior of motion on the tone scale has made that chart more usable. 303 If you know about motion, you can use the chart better. But knowing about motion is not a substitute for knowing the columns of behavior and manifestation. It is a refinement. Scientology is being refined and improved, but it is still Scientology. PART IV Preclears Should Be Processed; Education Isn't Auditor's Task Don't educate your preclear: process him. In the early days, before 1950, I processed many people by what later became Dianetics. Most of the people I processed don't know to this day that they have been processed by Dianetics. If two of my clients had even got together, one of them would have said, "Isn't it wonderful! Zoroastrianism has been known about all these years!" And the other would say, "Where did you hear about that?" "Down at First and Asafetida Streets," (which is where I was practicing). "Oh, really?" the other would say, "Well, I know a fellow down there, too -- it must be a different fellow, though -- he talks about electronics all the time." In other words, a preclear would come in and say, "I hurt," or "I'm unhappy," and I would just use anything on him that worked. Pretty soon he would say, "What is this you are using?" and I would have to tell him something. But what could I tell him? Did you ever go down to the library and pick out a book that had been read by many people? You look through it and you find the lines that are marked. The people who read this book didn't read it to learn a single, cockeyed thing. All they were looking for was something that would agree with them. They would comb through the book, page after page, and finally they would underline "God is good." Do you re-educate people like this? No. The preclear says, "This stuff you are doing is Chinese acupuncture, isn't it?" You say, "Sure, sure. Let's go over that again, now." Another says, "You know, I learned all about this by reading Sneeze's The Breeding of Cats. After I read that, I figured out all these techniques myself." You say, "Well, well! You discovered my source. That's wonderful! Now, how about running that again?" You don't try to educate your preclear. He says, "Well, well. This is related to the work of Gutsbaum, isn't it?" You happen to know that Gutsbaum was a chemist who did some work on dyes and had nothing to do with teaching elephants to speak German -- which is what he is talking about -- but you say, "Sure, that's right. And then what did your mother say?" If you pound him in the head and correct his data, you may send him down the tone scale further in one instant than you could bring him up by 20 hours' processing. Inside of every preclear there is a tiny little spark which says, "I have yet a core, an idea, which is my own. I am neatly gone, wiped out, but I still have this." Perhaps the preclear has the idea that the sun is really the source of all life. As a child he got this idea, and it seemed right to him. So, it's right to him! Don't extinguish this idea in the hope that you will improve something else, because you won't. He says, "I did some studying on the Egyptian Sun God, Ra, in the University." He didn't do any studying in the University. He did it when he was six years old. He says, "I have thought about it quite a bit." Do you look him squarely in the eye and say, "That is old, superstitious malarkey. That is a lot of bunk!"? No, you don't. Who knows? Perhaps this preclear's highest aesthetic concept is the sun. Perhaps his secret joy is the idea that the sun will burn people to a crisp if they stand in it too long. Perhaps he thinks it is God smiting them. Perhaps he merely likes to stand in it 304 himself. You, as the auditor, must not overlook the fact that you are dealing with a human being. To agree with the preclear endlessly, to spend all of your time agreeing with his aberrations, is destructive to him and destructive to you. But you have processes to use on him, and you have to agree with him to the point where you can get the processes to work. When the processes work and his self-determinism increases, he will make up his mind about the Sun God, Ra -- without any mention of the subject from you. You are trying to increase his self-determinism. If, at the beginning, all you can find of his self-determinism is the Sun God, Ra -- then, agree with it. Trying to re-educate a preclear while you process him is no good. He will find out for himself, as he comes up the tone scale. You can give him a new idea now and then, if he wants one. But don't try to change his ideas. They may be all there is left of him. You are working with basic laws, powerful laws. If you have to educate your preclear to make these laws work on him, you haven't got your subject down worth a nickel. PART V Auditor First Should Know Tools Before He Goes in for Artistic The auditor is both a technician and an artist. We still have art in processing, but thank God we don't need as much as we used to. The more and better technique an auditor has at his command, the less he has to be an artist. But some auditors persist in being very "artistic" about some little corner of this science while ignoring the rest. A real artist is not above using his technique. A real artist has many techniques to use. Compare, for example, Rembrandt and the dilettante. The dilettante does not know how to paint, so most of his energy goes into selecting the "right" brush or the "apt" line or the "perfect" pigment. Rembrandt does know how to paint. He picks up the first brush that comes to hand, touches it to the palette and -- wham! A color. Rembrandt can be an artist, because he has a lot of technique with which to be an artist. The dilettante has no technique, and so he only plays the role of the artist. There is a standard way to run an engram. There is a standard way to diagnose a case. There is a standard technique to use for every level of the tone scale. On the wide-open case, you can run Responsibility. Times when he took responsibility. Times when he shifted responsibility to others. On a case in which you cannot find the first engram, you can use Technique 80: motivators, overts, DEDs, DEDEXes. Dianetics, Science of Survival, Self Analysis, Advanced Procedure and Axioms, Handbook for Preclears, Technique 88 -- each is applicable to a case at a certain level. There is not one of them that does not apply somewhere. The wide-open case will need first-book procedure until he gets out of the incident he is stuck in. Then he will need rehabilitation in ARC, agreeing and disagreeing with affinity, reality, and communication flows between him and the environment. The occluded case will need later techniques. These are the tools of the trade. They are graduated against the level of the case. They are just as solid and usable as the tools in a plumber's box. When you start to audit, know these tools. After you know them, you can be as artistic as you want about using them, because then you will have the techniques to be artistic with, and you won't have to use a gallon of art to every eye-dropper of technique. 305  L. RON HUBBARD 305   Type = 101 iDate=0/4/53 Volnum=0 Issue=13 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Marital Scientology    THE JOURNAL OF SCIENTOLOGY Issue 13-G [1953, ca. early April] Published by The Hubbard Association of Scientologists, Inc. Philadelphia, Pennsylvania Marital Scientology L. Ron Hubbard The name of this article could also be "Don't kill your mother-in-law: mock her up!" The severest criticism that could have been leveled at Dianetics was entirely overlooked by the critics. This is not unusual, for a person, to be a critic, must first have assumed that he could not create anything. It required a certain creative ability to understand what went on early in Dianetics, for the marriage and divorce rate was considerably shifted by processing. Fortunately, there were more marriages and more saved marriages than there were divorces, but this did not mean that there weren't divorces. Husbands and wives who had for years been coming to an explosion point, faced with the technique of Book 1, exploded; in many cases, beyond marital repair. Mismated in the first place, grown sour in harness, buckled down by an economic system which could not have been bettered by the Devil himself, it took very little to tip over what would have happened anyway. One of the most serious parts of this was the husband-wife auditing team situation. Husbands and wives tried to audit each other with too high a percentage of failures. To understand what takes place in a marriage it is necessary to understand why a husband-wife auditing team is so often unsuccessful, and will, now and then, blow up a marriage. And the answer to this is also the answer to why marriages blow up. The introduction of the factor of co-auditing team into the marriage is the only catalyst necessary to something which will already give trouble. From now on in these articles, you're going to hear a lot about communication, for the solution of the problems of communication, and the gaining of an understanding of its anatomy have resolved the problem of auditing as well as marriage. Communication, then, is the root of marital success from which a strong union can grow, and non-communication is the rock on which the ship will bash out her keel. In the first place, men and women aren't too careful "on whom they up and marry." In the absence of any basic training about neurosis, psychosis, or how to judge a good cook or a good wage-earner, that tricky, treacherous and not always easy to identify thing called "love" is the sole guiding factor in the selection of mates. It is too much to expect of a society above the level of ants to be entirely practical about an institution as basically impractical as marriage. Thus, it is not amazing that the misselection of partners goes on with such abandon. There are ways, however, not only to select a marriage partner, but also to guarantee the continuation of that marriage; and these ways are simple: they depend uniformly upon communication. There should be some parity of intellect and sanity between a husband and wife for them to have a successful marriage. In Western culture, it is expected that the women shall have some command of the humanities and sciences. It is easy to establish 309 the educational background of a potential marriage partner; it is not so easy to gauge their capability on the second dynamic or their sanity. In the past efforts were made to establish sanity with inkblots, square blocks and tests with marbles to find out if anybody had lost any. The resulting figures had to be personally interpreted with a crystal ball and then re-interpreted for application. In Scientology there is a test for sanity and comparative sanity which is so simple that anyone can apply it. What is the communication lag of the individual? When asked a question, how long does it take him to answer? When a remark is addressed to him, how long does it take for him to register and return? The fast answer tells of the fast mind and the sane mind, providing the answer is a sequitur; the slow answer tells of down-scale. Marital partners which have the same communication lag will get along; where one partner is fast and one is Sow, the situation will become unbearable to the fast partner and miserable to the slow one. Further, Scientology when applied will be more swiftly active in the case of the fast partner and so the imparity under processing will grow beyond either's ability to cope with the matter. How to audit a marriage and keep it a marriage is a problem a large number of auditors would like to have answered. It is not too difficult a problem. One simply takes the slow communication lag member of the team and processes that one first, for this will be the harder, longer case. By speeding up the slow one, parity is neared with the fast communication lag partner, and no objection will be offered. If the fast one is chosen for processing, or if both of them enter processing at the same time, the ratio will not be neared but widened and a marital breach will ensue. The repair of a marriage which is going on the rocks does not always require the auditing of the marriage partners. It may be that another family factor is in the scene. This may be in the person of a relative such as the mother-in-law. How does one solve this factor without using a shotgun? This, again, is simple. The mother-in-law, if there is trouble in the family, is responsible for cutting communication lines or diverting communication. One or the other of the partners, then, is cut off the communication channel on which he belongs. He senses this and objects strenuously to it. Under processing particular attention should be given to rehabilitating his sense of being on communication lines. Jealousy is the largest factor in breaking up marriages. Jealousy comes about because of the insecurity of the jealous person and the jealousy may or may not have foundation. This person is afraid of hidden communication lines and will do anything to try to uncover them. This acts upon the other partner to make him feel that his communication lines are being cut, for he thinks himself entitled to have open communication lines, whereas his marital partner insists that he shut many of them. The resultant rows are violent as represented by the fact that where jealousy exists in a profession such as acting, insurance companies will not issue policies -- the suicide rate is too high. A person who is jealous has something wrong on the subject of communications and, in selecting the partner to be processed first, the auditor should select the jealous person. Rapidity of communication is aberrated in some types of psychosis, but here it is also non sequitur and is rapidly and hysterically told about the cat. This is very easy to notice: even psychiatrists can tell it. The subject of Marital Scientology could not be covered in many chapters, but here are given the basic clues to a successful marriage -- Communicate! 310  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 0 iDate=15/4/53 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  ADMIRATION PROCESSING    ADMIRATION PROCESSING 15 April 1953 1. Convince any step 5 case that he can mock up or create a particle or flow to be known as ADMIRATION. (The step 5 case is anyone capable of using energy flows.) The particle or flow of ADMIRATION should be slightly of the frequencies of WONDERMENT and ACCLAIM. 2. Processing can be done in three ways. Select the one the pc can do best. The three ways are: ENERGY FLOWS, CONCEPTS, MOCK-UPS. 3. ADMIRATION PROCESSING is based on the following demonstrable theories: a. Those things which are not admired, persist. b. Undesirable conditions persist until ADMIRED. c. The SERVICE FACSIMILE is simply a persistence of non-admired things; which resolve when ADMIRED. 4. It is not necessary to FEEL the ADMIRATION. Just know that it is in the mock-up. An enormous number of particles or flows were tested to isolate ADMIRATION as the most effective frequency or wavelength of thought. An enormous number of things to admire were investigated and only the following have been found to produce marked effects (favorable and speedy) on the pc to date. 1. A mock-up will alter when its imperfections are ADMIRED. Imperfections of the pc, mocked up in front of him, will alter and succumb to ADMIRATION. Imperfections in others will do the same. 2. The running of ADMIRATION on FAST and SLOW COMMUNICATION lines is intensely workable. 3. RUN ADMIRATION OF -- ADMIRE -- NOT ADMIRE: 1. FAST -- SLOW COMMUNICATION 2. HOLDING -- BREAKING COMMUNICATION 3. AGREE -- DISAGREE 4. PAY -- NO PAY 5. GIVE PAY -- TAKE PAY 6. IDEAS 7. BEINGNESS 8. DOINGNESS 9. HAVINGNESS 10. WANTINGNESS 11. GETTING INTO TROUBLE 12. BEING IN JAIL: Produces marked effects in that the THETAN is in jail in the body. STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE (SOP 5): AMENDED STEP 1: same; but add, improving perception by ADMIRING the imperfection of each perceptic. STEP 4: same; but add, ADMIRATION of imperfections of childhood home MU. STEP 5: same; but add, ADMIRATION PROCESSING. L. RON HUBBARD 311  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 81 iDate=23/4/53 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0     From: L. RON HUBBARD Through: The Office of L. Ron Hubbard London 30 Marlborough Place London N.W.8, England ASSOCIATE NEWSLETTER 23 April 1953 Several items of interest to associates are submitted herewith. The first is The Factors, which announces the gaining of the highest echelon planned at this time in Scientology. This will be printed in the next issue of The Journal of Scientology. The entire issue is devoted to its expansion and explanation. By it results are being achieved which embrace all levels of case and with it we can guarantee auditing with no vaguest qualms. The current lecture series is designed for the training of HCAs. It contains The Factors and SOP 8. It is 20 hours in length, is quite basic. It is best given in extension of the first 12 lectures of the Summary Course and the six hours of the Group Auditor's Course. An HCA course then consists of these items, a total of 38 hours of lecture on tape. It is being given in 30 days in Phoenix and Philadelphia and London. Phoenix and Philadelphia are charging $250 for it. In the doctorate schools an additional month is given for an additional $250. These schools credit associate training. Thus a graduate of an associate school, an HCA, can procure his higher rating, H.G.A. and his B.Scn., with an additional month's training in Philadelphia or Phoenix. These schools, however, reserve the right to make an HCA review material. The degree of Doctor of Scientology is given after the B.Scn. has completed a series of cases and has completed a paper demonstrating his application of Scientology to one particular illness and proving Scientology as efficacious on that illness: the illness selected must be passed upon by my office to guarantee wide coverage of Man's ills. It takes at least a year to get a D.Scn. after graduation. The course would probably be an HCA at an associate or doctorate school, a B.Scn. at a doctorate school, a D.Scn. through a doctorate school. D.Scn.'s will probably be scarce for a long time to come. Only five have been issued to date. THE GROUP AUDITOR'S COURSE of 6 hours fits people to apply Self Analysis to adults and children. It is being given away, run every Saturday afternoon complete, by the HAS London. Teachers and others regularly attend it. New faces continually show up (about eight or ten new ones every Saturday). Many of the new ones enroll for the day or night courses. The people attending it are getting wonderful results in schools and elsewhere. It has just been taken into a training school of the Royal Navy. Those who attend three Saturdays get a small certificate as a Group Auditor for which they are not charged. That is, they hear these tapes three times. The Group Auditor's Course is being sold from here for $28.50. It is air- freighted at a cost of $8.25. This is a total of $36.75. It is less than cost. The 20-hour HCA course is slightly more expensive due to our difficulties in getting tapes copied. There has been a tape strike and tapes are at a premium here. We have managed to reduce this price to $8.75 per reel. Air freight makes this $10.00 per reel. The set, then, is $200.00 with air freight included. Both these courses are being mailed daily. If you have an order here it is being filled or is already in the mail. Because of customs red tape in America there are about ten days involved en route. 312 I have not heard from some associates regarding HCA certification price and conditions. Because we do not want a large flood of HCAs and you may want to train some without certification and because the HCA gets as well a year's professional membership in the HAS, the price is $55.00. A notarized statement signed by the associate as to the student's skill and attesting that he has heard and passed an examination upon the tapes submitted and has done the required work must accompany the request for his certification. This request and the statement and the full name and home address of the student and a membership application in the HAS must be sent to me personally at 30 Marlborough Place, London, N.W.8, with check, cash or money order (international) for $55.00. The certificate is airmailed directly to the student unless the associate indicates otherwise. Airmail these requests, for airmail takes three days, regular mail 17 days. It costs 20 cents to airmail a half ounce to here. Any funds due and owing to the HAS by reason of past training or books should be sent here. The HAS accounts will be credited in Philadelphia. The Philadelphia office of the HAS is at 237 N. 16th Street, Philadelphia 2. The HUBBARD FOUNDATION has again raised the standard in New Jersey, at Trenton. A new clinic is being established in the same building as the HAS. The state of Scientology is so good that it ran out of quarters. It is occupying about 30 rooms in the Philly area now (Trenton is just across the river). The move from Phoenix was too bluntly accepted by the field. We moved the publications office only because we couldn't get the facilities in Phoenix. The HAS main office and legal office is STILL IN PHOENIX. The doctorate school is STILL IN PHOENIX. However, address HAS mail to Philly or to me, preferably Philly. HUBBARD PROFESSIONAL SCHOOL mail and HAS mail for Phoenix should go to 4248 N. 32nd St., Phoenix, Arizona. The doctorate school is operating now at this Phoenix address under the direction of R. Ross Lamoreaux. The following are the associate addresses: D. O. McElvain, Hubbard Associates of Puget Sound, Inc., 311 West McGraw Street, Seattle 99, Washington; Doris Colbury Graffam, 1904 Sul Ross, Houston 6, Texas; Hardin Walsh, Scientology Council, 7070 Hollywood Blvd., Hollywood 28, Calif.; George Seidler, Institute of Self Knowledge, 859 Balra Drive, El Celrito 8, Calif. (San Francisco); Earl Cunard and Refa Postel, Detroit Dianetic Center, 8901 Dailey Court, Detroit 4, Michigan; Adele and Roman Mazurek, Chicago Dianetic Institute, 855 N. Dearborn St., Chicago 10, Illinois. The doctorate schools are: The Hubbard Foundation, 122 N. Mole St., Philadelphia, Pa.; Hubbard Professional School (or Phoenix Scientology Institute), 4248 N. 32nd St., Phoenix; The HAS, 163 Holland Park Avenue, London, N.W.8. Clinics are assumed to exist at each associate address. A central clinic is located at 237 N. 16th St., Philadelphia -- the Hubbard Consulting Center. On the subject of rumors, America sure likes to close terminals with a lot of chatter. In three years, I have never heard a true story in circulation about anyone. What a wild record! Recently so many reports reached me in various ways about Walsh in LA that I wrote some real mean letters in that direction. Further data revealed that not one of these reports I had received was true. How do you break up an organization? You just tell one section of it how bad another section is until it falls apart. Simple? How do you kill Scientology or Dianetics? Why, just convince everyone that "while the work is all right, Hubbard is... well...." How do you lose business? They tell your potential students and preclears that "while the subject may have merit, the people who run that associate school...." Just like many a preclear starts trouble amongst auditors. Auditor A helps him but he tells Auditor B that Auditor A is a dog. Auditor B gets self- righteous and tackles Auditor A. They discover that this pc gave a wrong-end- up account of the whole thing. Should you believe a psychotic 1.1 pc? Or does he cause more trouble if you listen? Should you believe the Great American Grapevine? Believe the Martians have 313 landed, believe that the sun has just exploded, believe that water runs uphill, but believe John Public's favorite comm line? Never! Here is some fact for a change. The Detroit squabble is tough on the guys there and it got plenty of headlines BUT the fight is about RUNNING A SCHOOL WITHOUT A LICENSE, not about Dianetics or Scientology, no matter what the papers are printing. The police there will make none of it stick. If they do, God help Detroit. But the point is that Detroit did not inquire about licenses in the right quarter and didn't play it vault safe; the first foundation in New Jersey, which had a schnook for an attorney, missed the same boat, got in the same trouble. Dianetics and Scientology are not and will not be under responsible attack from any quarter that can matter. Bills against it have now been defeated in EIGHTEEN STATE LEGISLATURES in three years. Most of them never got out of committee. The only thing that can hold us back is the shadow that we might have opposition. When one discovers after three years that opposition doesn't exist, he ought to and crowd on the steam. So stand steady under rumor fire and know there is not and never will be serious competition or opposition except in our own-minds. Stay true to our goals and to truth and we will attain these goals. I think they are worth attaining. L. Ron Hubbard 314  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 81 iDate=28/4/53 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0     From: L. RON HUBBARD Through: The Office of L. Ron Hubbard London 30 Marlborough Place London N.W.8, England ASSOCIATE NEWSLETTER 28 April 1953 It probably has not occurred to the field at large what I am trying to do in relationship to theta clearing and aberration. Theta clearing, even to auditors who have taken the course, continues to be something very special, perhaps allied with religion, perhaps a mystic practice, and possibly just another form of Christian Science or plain Hubbardian nonsense. In order to understand what has taken place in theta clearing, an auditor would have to have fairly good command of Book I. Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health, published about May 9th, 1950, described the state of affairs wherein the analytical mind was perfectly sane but, because it was in proximity to the reactive mind, could not behave uniformly or predictably and could not reach optimum solutions because of the stimulus- response mechanisms of the reactive mind which were built in during moments of pain and unconsciousness. Therapies were designed and set forth in that book to reduce the effectiveness of the reactive mind and to free the analytical mind in such a way as to permit it to compute more reliably and actively and to permit Man to reach something like his possible potential as a man. Science of Survival, following that, still addressed the problem of the reduction of the reactive mind. The first editions of Self Analysis, The Handbook for Preclears and Advanced Procedure and Axioms all have the same goal: the reduction of the reactive mind. It was realized that the self- determinism of the individual could only be trusted at such times as it was not being influenced by unconscious and hidden influences which would cause it to act in an aberrated fashion. Early in 1952 -- January 1st, to be exact -- I was already well launched on another idea: Instead of attempting the resolution of this problem in terms of the reduction of the reactive mind, would it not be possible to put the analytical mind in such a state of alertness as fo make it capable of handling and nullifying the reactive mind? There ensued a considerable investigation of the reactive mind to find out what had to be handled. Overt acts and motivators, DEDs and DEDEXes, and the bewildering confusion of the whole-track aspect and borrowed facsimiles brought into view the fact that the reactive mind was not something that was going to be handled very easily. Several key engrams were picked out which, when reduced, made a remarkable change in the behavior and attitudes of an individual. Fac One was one of these; others on the genetic entity line were found and stressed. And then it was discovered that there were two reactive minds. One reactive mind was that which belonged to the genetic entity, the other reactive mind was that which the thetan himself, the preclear himself, took along with him on the whole track. These two reactive minds, combining in influence, posed a problem which could not be easily handled in terms of engrams and demonstrated adequately why homo sapiens could never get above 4.0, the goal of Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health. The goal of that first book was realized -- it was realized over and over on many people; but others found fault with the results and there were some cases which could not be solved by routine auditing and which required very expert skill indeed. As always, as in any wildcat therapy which enters in from unreliable quarters, what we called the wide-open case was easily resolved. The wide-open case continues to be easily resolved, but below this level, in terms of recall, the problem is quite difficult. The training and experience an auditor requires to achieve results on the more difficult cases was 315 beyond the scope of the Foundations to provide. I myself, no matter what results I could get with cases, could not be expected to audit two billion human beings, and it was obviously necessary that if we were going to have a sane world, we would have to audit two billion human beings. What, then, was the answer to this conundrum? The formulations of Scientology are based on no other concepts or precepts than those of Dianetics, except that those of Dianetics are addressed to the treatment of man as an individual by a new form of psychotherapy in the attainment of a goal of a better man. These are not the goals of Scientology. Scientology attempts to achieve the highest level of knowingness and beingness possible, whether the person remains a man or becomes something else. Scientology is a popularized word which means exactly the same thing as epistemology -- which word, I think you will agree, is not acceptable to the general public. What does Scientology do? It handles the problem of the reactive mind by subtracting the analytical mind from the proximity to the reactive mind or minds, puts the analytical mind into the kind of thinkingness and beingness it should attain and then permits it again to associate with the reactive minds. We have turned the problem exactly around and answered it exactly on a 180 Deg vector. Instead of treating the reactive mind, I have found it possible to separate the analytical mind -- which we call the thetan -- from the body and, while it is separated, treat it until it is capable of handling with great ease any quantity of aberration in the reactive mind. This is the process on which we are working. Would you please tell me how this process differs actually from the goals we first embraced? It differs only in trying to attain a higher level of beingness than was ever envisioned in Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health, and it differs in bringing the analytical mind up to the point of handling the reactive mind instead of reducing the reactive mind until it can be handled by the existing analytical mind. We have something now which well exceeds the definitions and activities of psychotherapies, for we are dealing solidly in the field of knowledge. It is now our purpose to put minds into a condition whereby they can know, all by themselves and without further coaching. A preclear who has been brought up to a high condition of operating thetan knows that he knows. Our process, then, is not to teach people to know; our process is to put people into a condition wherein they can know. We do not purvey data and knowledge; we purvey a process which brings people up to a level where they themselves can accumulate all the data and knowledge which they desire. Scientology is the science of knowing how to know. It is almost incidental that it incorporates in its structure ways and means of achieving the goals of Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health and exceeding those goals. But why the formulation of Scientology should in any way separate the loyalties or confuse those who were first interested in Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health is quite beyond me. As in all fields of research and activity, the inventor is imitated by those who desire to make money from his inventions. It is an old experience in a capitalistic society that the capitalist will seek to take from the inventor his invention and then, holding that invention at a certain level of saleability, purvey it. A discouragement of continued research, wherever I met it, caused me to abandon that terminal of discouragement. This naturally fed to a certain amount of enturbulence, but it also led to an all-out endeavor to attain the goals which we have now attained. Aside from telling you in a way which you can probably understand better than before what we are trying to do with Scientology, this newsletter also tells you that we have attained a process of knowing how to know, represented by a paper called The Factors and by Standard Procedure 8, which is not likely to change for a long time to come, for it rapidly produces the results which we desire. I am not, and will never pretend to be, a philosopher. The task of a philosopher is to go off and philosophize. Philosophers normally philosophize all the years of their lives, and in the books of philosophers all the absurdities and wisdoms of men can be found. My entrance into this field of better minds was a forced one: I had a feeling 316 that man ought to progress. It was with astonishment that I discovered that man, for all his prate of science, psychotherapy, all his yap of mysticism and philosophy in general, did not even vaguely know how to improve himself. Those systems of improvement which were in existence were actually control operations and were harmful to the individuals who practiced them. I was an expert in hypnotism and mysticism, mostly for my own amusement and not as any preconceived plan. To these things I combined a knowledge of the material universe found in nuclear physics to bring man up to a level where he could operate as a culture instead of the pigpen type of civilization in which he laughingly believes himself to be progressing. This was done mostly by an observation of man himself in the environment rather than observation of books man has written about man. This search for the tool which could improve men's minds so that man could improve has been and always will be a bypass, a detour, in my life. If it is called achievement, then I care nothing for it. The true achievement is in its application and its use as a tool by which the culture of man can be improved from the mere barbarism which he now enjoys where he can be lifted from a level of war and famine and pestilence, of crooked courts, of predatory governments, sanctimonious religions and raw barbarianism under a hundred thousand guises. Here on earth there is an opportunity to construct a civilization such as earth has not before enjoyed. A tool has been provided by which this can be done. The application of this tool, not its invention, is the goal. That the forging of the tool has come to a successful conclusion does not mean that the job is concluded. It is not our purpose to be selective, competitive, credit-happy and generally foolish about organizations and personal activities in the achievement of this goal. This tool must be employed to make each and every one of us above such things. It is up to us now to do a job which man has never before been able to do. We can process with Standard Operating Procedure 8 not only individuals but groups from five to five thousand -- five million if we had the speaker systems. There is no lack of personnel to process. Man at large, however, does not know that he has a reactive mind. It is not up to us to convince him he is crazy so that we can make him sane. It is up to us to employ such salesmanship as we can to make the able far more able. We will succeed in direct ratio to the number of people we make more able. At this writing, our organization is in a rough but workable form. We have associates spotted out here and there across the world. At these Centers people can be trained and from these Centers the impetus can go out to stimulate man into conceiving a better beingness. I do not believe personally that a perfect organization can be brought into being, because we must perforce include in our ranks people whose motives we will not know until it is too late. Instead of trying to be selective, our Centers should put out such pressure for forward progress that these unhappy persons and connections are simply swallowed up in the general good. Even now there is competition amongst the associates, competition exists in Philadelphia; there is much snarling and snapping going on in our own ranks. I cannot guarantee you that everything is going to be perfect; all I can ask you to do is to see that the individuals most closely connected with this operation are the best-processed individuals we have. There is no excuse now not to be clear. A good thorough- going operating thetan should not take more than fifty hours of auditing. Certainly we can afford this as individuals. I have set an example in this, and am in a better state of mind and action today than I have been in any of the years in my life. You may see me recruiting from strange sources to get a show on the road in the societies of man. You must expect in an advance to find yourself allied to auxiliary troops with whom you might not ordinarily care to associate. This does not mean that our goals are less; it means that our goals are greater than partisanship. We are not disagreeing with man and we are not trying to fight man into shape. He will not fight into shape. We want to agree with man and get man to agree with us until he is in shape. Tapes and materials are going out from here and from Philadelphia as fast as they can be mailed. Sometimes they are scarce and a little time has to go by before they can 317 be manufactured, but every possible pressure to get the show up to speed is being applied. I ask you for your loyalty and cooperation and I ask you, as well, for your occasional tolerance and patience. I am honest and I am sincere. I need your help, you need my help, but most of all man needs our help, for we are today the only team even vaguely in shape on the face of Earth capable of pulling him out of the mud and setting man on a road toward destiny. L. Ron Hubbard 318  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 101 iDate=0/4/53 Volnum=0 Issue=14 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Child Scientology    THE JOURNAL OF SCIENTOLOGY Issue 14-G [1953, ca. late April] Published by The Hubbard Association of Scientologists, Inc. Philadelphia, Pennsylvania Child Scientology L. Ron Hubbard Save the child and you save the nation. If, in the course of the next fifteen years, Scientologists were to specialize in the group processing of children, it might well follow that all of the goals of Scientology would thereby be realized. Thus, by processing children between the ages of six and ten, we would achieve in fifteen years a sanity and alertness never before obtained in that portion of the populace between the ages of 21 and 26, the age bracket which contains the energy and influence most strikingly felt by a civilization. Child Scientology could very well be, in terms of practice, the most important single field of endeavor in the science. So used, without other addresses or assistances, Scientology might well bring about the condition of world peace -- even if only by eradicating, through the restoration of sanity, the enthusiasm of youth for the sham glory of war. Therefore, we address here a subject which is broader than "what will I do to cure Johnnie's sneezes." Whether or not we are interested in those sneezes, whether or not we have tolerance or intolerance for children, whether or not we care to give time to the problems of child adjustment and sanity, each of us who has a vested interest in the continuation of Earth and of Man should be willing to invest some of his industry in the investigation and application of the group processing of children. Hence, this article is written, not to those who are interested in children, not to those who have family problems, not even to those whose duty it is to instruct children, but to anyone interested in the goals of Scientology. In order to utilize Scientology in the attainment of the goal of a sane stratum of the populace, do you need special training? No, not beyond the contents of this article and a knowledge of the book Self Analysis in Scientology, a simple text. What passport do you need to help children? None. What recommendations, papers, figures, historical documents, statistics, and other buffoonery do you need to assist children? None. Is there any lack of groups of children? No. Where are groups of children to be found? In schools, in hospitals, in orphan asylums, in children's societies, in boy and girl organizations such as the Boy Scouts, in the YMCA's, in Sunday Schools, and anywhere that interested people forward the battle to prepare the child of today to become the sane adult of tomorrow. Theirs has been a gallant struggle in the face of almost insuperable odds. It is time these people had some help. Historically, child therapy has been as difficult as it is now simple. Let us be very blunt -- we are not interested in the problems of the child's mind. In Scientology, we are no longer concerned with the inopportune and conceited short 319 circuit between epistemology and the human brain which has resulted in the "science" of psychotherapy. The Scientologist practicing with groups of children should disabuse anyone in authority of any lingering thought that the Scientologist might be using psychotherapy. The concern of psychotherapy is with the thinking processes of the human brain. The concern of the Scientologist is purely with the beingness of the child, which is to say his spirit, his potentialities, and his happiness. A Scientologist working with children, who permits himself to be led into arguments concerning psychotherapy is permitting to exist and be part of the argument the erroneous concept that gains in learning and behavior are attainable through a rearrangement, by direct address, of the physical habits or fears of the child. It is possible to reform a child's attitude toward existence by working with his mind. The best results in the field of psychotherapy were obtained by Dianetics, but even prior to Dianetics, many child psychotherapists had obtained considerably improved attitudes and behavior on the part of children by directly addressing the individual child and forming with the child a personal friendship which opened the child's interest sufficiently to permit an awareness of the existing conditions of present time. This was possible because the child's awareness of present time could be suppressed by incidents which, having force and stress contained in them, sought to represent in themselves that they were present time. But this does not say that the optimum results are obtainable by this process of addressing the past in order to heal the present. Psychotherapy could be said to be a series of processes by which the past is addressed to remedy the present or by which physical matter, such as the human brain, is rearranged (as in a prefrontal lobotomy) in order to inhibit odious conduct in present time. The 500 or 600 percent gains obtainable by the application of Child Scientology to groups of children are not obtainable by addressing the past to remedy the present. Scientology increases the beingness and potentialities of beingness of the child in present time in order to secure the capabilities of the child in the future. It does this by exercising the capabilities of beingness of the child, and is about as closely related to psychotherapy as penmanship might be, or, for that matter, any other subject in the school curriculum. Thus, no one can reasonably object, on the grounds that psychotherapy is being practiced, to the education of the child in present time so as to fit him for his future. It will be very difficult for the Scientologist to keep himself from being led into this snare, because tests in child psychology on those in his group will indicate that their reading ages leap under this process, that children who have never been able to master even rudimentary subjects begin to learn, and that behavior which, in the past, has been highly lacking in good order and discipline turns markedly for the better. These and many other advantages to be gained in the application of Child Scientology to groups of children cannot be classified as psychotherapy simply because they attain the goals of psychotherapy. Because a thing obtains the goals another thing hoped to obtain, is no reason to assume that the two are identical. This obtaining of goals was never accomplished in terms of groups by psychotherapy, and, indeed, psychotherapy never attained these goals -- even on individual children. But that person who immediately proclaims that we now have child psychotherapy simply because we have Child Scientology is making an extremely bad error in thinking and in semantics. Significantly, camping out, hiking, hobbies, and excellent and personable group leaders have obtained results similar to these, down through the ages. But one does not classify these as psychotherapy. What we have done in Scientology is render available to those in authority over groups of children the means of procuring results of magnitude in the absence of highly personable instructors, camping out, hobbies, individual attention to the child, perfect home life, and other intensely desirable but very scarce commodities. Any expert in the field of child study can inform you that it is possible to take any child and, by giving him enough time, improve him. Parents can tell you this. Anyone, in short, could have gotten results from a child by sufficiently devoting himself to the child's interests. When one realizes that this might consume dozens or thousands of hours per child, one sees immediately that without the fundamentals of Scientology the mass resolution of the problems of children is impossible. The question 320 has been "How do we do it without devoting this special time to each and every child, since it is not possible to devote that time?" The answer, of course, lies in the fact that a group of 30 or 500 children simultaneously can be given Child Scientology by one untrained person, and that these children will accrue the various gains to be realized in the past only by individual address and interest. What is the process given to groups of children? Taking a copy of Self Analysis in Scientology, the instructor, the Scientologist, the scout leader, or other person, delivers to the assembled group imaginary scenes to envision. The children envision these scenes, one after another. The imaginary scenes are taken from the lists found in Self Analysis in Scientology. They are selected and re-formed from these lists in accordance with the ability of the children to understand them. This process is continued for about 20 minutes per day. It may be continued for as short a time as three weeks for any group of children with excellent results, but, more optimumly, may be incorporated permanently into their routine activities. The Scientologist will discover in his first session that the children in the group divide roughly into three classes: (1) those who cannot get any mock- ups at all, (2) those who get them too fast or too slow, and (3) those who get them well. He divides his group into three sections. He gives processing -- as described above -- to each of the sections, processing those who cannot get mock- ups the most, and processing those who are too fast or too slow slightly more than the third group, which is given the continued routine processing. Ordinarily, it will be found that the three groups will assume a parity in a short time, and so can be continued as one group. The person delivering the lists must know that he should not give special attention to individuals in the group simply because these individuals are having trouble, for this would mean to each child in the group that he or she would have to have trouble so as to get individual attention. The instructor must also know that the children often become quite active, dramatic, and emotional when they do this process, for they find it a great deal of sport, and, in the case of a school, he should be prepared to have complaints from adjoining rooms, should he be so unwise as not to arrange for a suitable period of the day for processing. The instructor or Scientologist should know that a child will occasionally "boil off." This, as a manifestation of unconsciousness, is very mild, and simply means that some period of the child's life wherein he was unconscious has been slightly restimulated. He should know that all he has to do to arouse the child from this state is to have him remember something that is real to him, a time when he was in good communication with somebody, and a time when he felt that somebody loved The person applying the lists should also know that he should not rebuke, criticize, evaluate, or tease the children because of their mock-ups or their troubles with them. He should also know that he must not evaluate these mock- ups or try to interpret them as dreams, since whatever relationship they may have to dreams and regardless of how fascinating they may be, their interpretation will reduce the effectiveness and ability of the child. In fact, their evaluation for the child is actually destructive to his pride and beingness, and such interpretation not only has no part in his processing but is expressly forbidden as being intensely harmful. What else can be expected immediately? A small percentage of the children will not respond at all. A small percentage will become worried because of the activities and noise of the other children. A small percentage will be unchanged, though responsive. The remaining 75 or 85 percent will 321 advance variously in their intelligence quotients, their behaviors, and their personal abilities (in particular, their ability to learn). By experience, no disabilities will occur because of this process, excepting those which are occasioned by sudden upsets in home life or by reason of teasing or evaluation on the part of an applicator. By all standard tests of learning ability, reading skill, differentiation, and so forth, it will be discovered that the group, as a group, has progressed very far beyond what anyone has ever had the right to expect from the application of any form of child improvement. This should not be labelled a wild claim; it is rather a sober fact which is based upon very wide, careful testing and observation under many differing conditions, under many types of instructors, and under many groups of children. Quite incidentally, and certainly of no great interest except that it makes good telling, psychosomatic difficulties, perception inhibitions (such as stuttering), and various other disabilities, the correction of which is classed entirely in the field of psychotherapy, have a tendency to de- intensify or disappear in the child who is part of a group undergoing this processing. Such improvements -- no matter how dramatic they may be -- are not the reason why this processing is given to the group, but instead are simply an added bonus, and entirely a by-product. Indeed, it is a rather grim joke that Scientology so employed and without direction toward the release of such ills, does rather routinely what medicine has been unable to do. It is of no great concern to the Scientologist that this happens. Certainly, he does not want to prevent it from happening, but he must not lose sight of the fact that he is not processing a group to make it happen. He will be given his greatest thanks as a result of such cases and his benefits will be measured by them, but this should not turn his head from the main goal of the process, which is to make a group of able children far more able. Parents, for instance, who have spent thousands of dollars on little Johnny's asthma, discover one day, after he has been part of such a group for some time, that he is no longer troubled with asthma. Further, it is doubtful if he will ever be troubled with asthma again. Parents presented with such evidence have a tendency either to become angry or to be grateful, depending upon their level of sanity. The group auditor is not there to cure, heal, repair, patch up, treat, advise, counsel, or otherwise to mend children. By definition, the group auditor is one who works to create a new state of beingness in a group of people by the administration of lists prepared by the H.A.S. or himself. It should be clearly understood that we are attempting something which has never happened before. We are achieving a state in people which has not previously existed. We are taking another step forward with Man. We are not trying to bring children back to normal, nor are we trying to remedy existing conditions. We are factually striking out to attain a level of culture and civilization higher than those attained before, in which we include any period of any nation anywhere. The group auditor has about as much relationship to psychotherapy as a stone-mason at work on a new city has to the proprietor of a junkyard. The group auditor is not working to return children to normal. They have never been other than they are and, in the absence of what we know now, never could have been what we hope them to be. People who try to classify the group auditor as one who is making children normal by treating them are actually insulting the group auditor. In the absence of Scientology, or whatever it would have been called had it been discovered in the past or future, such repair work was the best that could be done. The attainment of gains by the eradication of something differs considerably from the attainment of gains by the creation of something. All processing in Scientology today is positive-gain processing and is, in fact, creative; the work of the auditor is creative whether he is working on an individual or a group. The special problems of individual children which confront the group auditor should be referred by him to a professional auditor, or handled by himself as a professional auditor providing he is trained in that capacity. Therefore, parents or interested persons desiring special consideration for individual problems should be directed elsewhere by the group auditor. The group auditor's interest is in terms of mass production. He is creating with his work a new state of beingness, a new type of childhood. 322 This is a state that is desirable not simply because it contrasts with former states, but desirable because it means a better civilization or perhaps one might say, a civilization. What theory underlies this? The group auditor needs no more theory than that contained in this article and in Self Analysis in Scientology to succeed in his work. Indeed, he need not even have a solid grip on that much theory for the process to work for him. However, in the absence of background data, many things may strike him as strange or unexplained, and, lacking the data, he may believe himself to be dealing with an imprecise thing and so wander off course. Thus, the best group auditor would be the one who is best founded in theory and who is a professional auditor as well. The next-best group auditor would be one who has studied this article and Self Analysis in Scientology and who has attended the tape- recorded lecture course consisting of six hours of lectures on this subject, which is available at the H.A.S., at associate offices, or as reels from the Publications Section of the H.A.S. Although this is apparently very simple -- that we just get a child to imagine something and the child is then better -- and although people will occasionally try to tell the group auditor that it has been long known that creative imagination plays a considerable role in the life of the child, yet mock-up processing from prepared lists is based upon fundamental precisions which are quite invariable. With much too much simplicity, it can be stated that here the imagination is being utilized in such a way as to bring it under the control, direction, and self-discipline of the child. The knowledge that we are not actually dealing with imagination as it has been classified in the past, and that in reality we are dealing with quite another function -- namely, clarification of the role of imagination -- at least makes one feel himself conversant with what is happening. In mathematics, even in that pallid thing called arithmetic, it is necessary to observe and realize the existence of a problem and the factors of the problem, and to combine these to predict an answer. In the entire field of life, it is imagination which delivers answers. If one cannot imagine he cannot predict. The factors of life are more complex than the factors of arithmetic, but they do not differ so far as mental functioning is concerned. There are simply many more of them. One can teach a child by rote that two plus two equals four, but many an instructor and many a parent with the fondest hopes for the future of a child have, after the child's education was complete, discovered that the child either cannot or will not utilize the data to resolve problems in his own existence. In such a child, the ability to imagine the answer by recombining existing factors has not been developed or disciplined. Many an engineering school has been embarrassed by turning forth honor graduates who yet failed dismally in the reduction of rudimentary practical problems to workable solutions. Even a thing as apparently precise as mathematics yet requires, in the good mathematician, an enormous amount of imagination. In general, symbols and figures, statistics and data, serve only to assist the functioning of the mind in a solution of problems. These are at best crutches to be utilized by an active intelligence. The mind is always the servo-mechanism of mathematics, a thing which even the better mathematicians are apt to overlook. Thus, when we are trying to teach a child, whether to be proficient in geometry or in handling his body, we must teach him as well to predict a future state of beingness; if he cannot predict a future state of beingness, he cannot resolve problems. As a statement, the phrase "prediction of a future state of beingness" almost encompasses the function of the human mind. Prediction of beingness is somewhat different from simple prediction. It is not necessary to have pictures to tell one what is going to happen, but it is necessary to have the potentiality of imagining what is going to happen to accurately assess a situation. Thus, it may be seen that the inhibition of the imagination of a child directly results in the inhibition of the child's ability to resolve problems relating to his own environment and his own life. This nullification of imagination should not exist; 323 however, the individual should be able to utilize this imagination, and the imagination should be under the discipline of the individual. A good instructor realizes that it is the discipline of the student's mind by the student himself which accrues to the student the benefits of education. The discipline of the imagination is essential in any learning process. The infant and the child are peculiarly prone to utilize their imaginations in such a way as to make their imaginations utilize them. Their imaginations are not wild; they are simply not founded upon fact and are not correlated with the existing state of affairs. At night, the child is hounded by nightmares and delusions; by day his imagination conjures up for him images based upon factual and unimportant data of his environment which frighten and inhibit him. He is given to believe, then, that there is some hidden thing in his vicinity which is inhibitive to his further survival. Delusion is imagination out of control. The control and discipline of imagination and its employment for the artistic and practical gains of the individual would be the highest goal of a training process. There have been -great instructors in the past, great teachers who could lead their students forward by their own personal magnetism. Their effort was centered upon giving the student into his own hands, and this was accomplished by causing the student to desire to discipline his own beingness. However, the discipline of beingness is not necessarily the limitation of beingness. It is better to be able to decide and control a few things to be, than to be under the whip of an imagination which drives one to be a great many things, none of which are under one's control. These processes, then, aim directly towards disciplining the imagination and bringing it under the control of the individual child. Throughout the day, and every day of his life, the child is told that things do not belong to him. If he is given a pair of shoes, he is informed that they are not his shoes by the first command from the parent that he polish them. In the case of nearly all children, even though they seem to have possessions, they themselves do not believe themselves to own anything. Their bodies, their minds, their toys, their clothes, their habits, their mannerisms, and their likes and dislikes, are all under the continuous impact of the MEST universe and other intelligences. There is something, however, which a child can own -- an image which he creates himself. In fact, he will only attain to those images which he does create for himself, because, in his opinion, any attempt to reach images created for him by others (particularly by duress) is antipathetic to his survival. At every hand he is driven from possession and driven from beingness, for the child can possess only those things which he feels free to be. The creation and control of mental images performs another function in that it utilizes and disciplines energy. In creating mental images which he then controls, the child discovers first that he can own something, next that he can control something, next that here is something he is free to be, and next that he has control over mental functions. Dignity and purpose are native to the child; badness and uncontrol are not. Thus, by envisioning images the child comes into possession of his own beingness and is convinced that he is free to be something. The change which comes with this realization is not an ultimate or absolute thing, for there is a gradient scale of beingness and there are always new heights above any last plateau reached. This is a gradual and continuous process, this creation of beingnesses (or, symbologically, mock- ups), and the process continues in any phase of life so long as the person has life in him. The direct attack on this problem by the use of mock-up processing results as one would expect; it brings the child under his own discipline and makes him capable of being what he wants to be, not what he is forced to be. At the same time, it renders him less reactive toward disciplinary actions undertaken for his own good and toward educational measures which are provided for his future security. Acceptance will be found to replace resentment of education. The goal of an instructor is to instruct. There is an old story about the Rough Riders, a regiment in the Spanish-American War. Their most famous exploit was the taking of San Juan Hill, yet there is an incident in this which is worthy of our notice. The orders of the day were posted and stated explicitly that they were to "jump off" from El Caney at five o'clock the following morning and were to take San Juan Hill. 324 The Rough Riders awoke at 4:30 a.m. to discover that one small thing had been omitted from their plans: they had, as yet, to take El Caney. Thus, before they could execute their orders they had to assault and take another objective, which they did take with severe losses, and from which they finally carried out the main assault, many hours overdue, again with enormous casualties. Thus it is that a military organization can suffer frightfully from trying to fight one battle when another has to be fought first. The instructor is supposed to educate children, the camp leader is supposed to entertain them, and the hospital nurse is supposed to make them well. Yet, standing as an obstacle before each one of these and any other individuals attempting to handle children, is, in actuality, the lack of a child. Bluntly, the child is not there. He is sitting in the classroom but his mind is elsewhere. He is in the hospital as a body, but is maundering about the scene of the accident which sent him there. He is supposed to be having a good time in camp, yet he is actually at home playing with his dog. Any attempt to work with a child is an attempt to contact and get into communication with the child. Unless one can get into communication with the child he cannot perform his duties as pertain to that child. The task of communicating with a child does not begin with talking to the child. It begins with finding a child to talk to. There are many tricks which lead a child's interest sufficiently into present time to allow one to communicate with him. Anyone dealing with children knows that this is the primary problem in that task. But it is a very terrible strain trying to maintain the child's attention in present time while one communicates with the child. If one had a process which made it possible for the child to be in present time and to get him there easily, that process would, of course, be very welcome to the child. The group processing of children, or the use of the same process on an individual child, is a workable answer to this problem. There is no reason to go back into the past after the child (as in psychotherapy) if one has a modus operandi to bring the child into the present. You certainly would not actively go after things which easily came to you. Application of these lists in this fashion to groups of children brings them into present time, and thus to their instructor or leader. Consequently, once he has used it, an instructor finds this processing as necessary a part of classroom activity as ringing the school bell. It is one thing to get the body into class; it is another thing to get the mind into class. The instructor is being paid to instruct, but before he can instruct there must be somebody there to be instructed. This is terribly elementary, but it is a problem which has been overlooked, and it is a problem which, in many cases, has made education an arduous process. Children in present time are very easy to look after, very easy to instruct, and very easy to live with. Children out of present time, bent on revenge, and fresh from a quarrelsome breakfast table in an antipathetic home, form a noisy and rebellious group. The behavior of a child out of present time is not easily predicted, and this unpredictability is a considerable strain to the child's leader. A child out of present time walks off the curb into heavy traffic, falls down fire escapes, gets hit with gymnasium equipment, hurts himself in games, and causes those multitudes of upsets which make the life of a child shepherd an onerous one, at times. The problem of the parent in the home is no different from the problems of the instructor. The continual nag-nag-nag necessary with children is occasioned solely by two things: one is that the child has no real understanding of his role (for it has never been explained to him) and so has no beingness in the house as part of the family, part of an economic unit, or part of a work team; and the other is that the child is not there. The more one corrects and punishes the child, the less the child is there, since, in essence, correction is "go back into the past and pick up punishment data to remind you that the future is going to be unpleasant." The process of mocking up is peculiarly suited to children, for in the main they possess brilliant ability. An adult preclear is filled with envy at the ability of a child to obtain mock-ups and control them. The time to salvage a human being and get him out of the past into the present time is when that human being is a child, for he thus benefits most from hs environment and all his education within it. Out of present time, the data and experience are going nobody knows where. 325 All the theory one needs to know in order to apply Child Scientology to groups is contained here. There is a great deal to know in addition to this (although almost all of it is as simple) and it should all be known before much individual work is done on a particular child. This, however, will suffice for groups. What is a mock-up? A mock-up is not a mental image but an additional beingness. One is afraid and troubled by those things which he cannot be but must fight. One's effort is mainly expended in fighting shadows in the belief that these shadows are things which one must not be or cannot be. The limitation, rather than the increase, of beingness is the common course of existence. One finds out "by experience" (most of it incorrect) that he cannot be a great many things. His ability to be is also his ability to communicate, for the things which he is are those things which demark the amount of space he can occupy. A mock-up, then, is more than a mental picture; it is a self-created object which exists as itself or symbolizes some object in the MEST universe. It is a thing which one can be. One can be it because one can see it. Those things which one cannot see, he cannot see because he cannot. be them. In terms of human experience, beingness is space. Space is a viewpoint of dimension. The points which mark an area of space are called anchor points, and these, with the viewpoint, alone are responsible for space. The creation of anchor points, then, is the creation of space, which is, in itself, the creation of beingness. The essential in any object is the space which it occupies. Thus, the ability to be an object first depends upon the ability to be the space which it occupies. When one puts out pictures which he himself creates, he at once demarks space and occupies, with his own creation, an area of space. Thus, he knows it is safe to occupy this space. Thus, he knows that he can be that space. Thus, he can be that object. It does not follow that he is that object simply because he creates that object, but he has assumed by its creation that there is a new thing which he can be and a new space which he can occupy. A mock-up, then, is a picture, preferably in full color, with three dimensions and in motion. There is, however, an astonishing variety of disabilities connected with mock-ups. The mock-ups of one individual are flat, those of another have no color, and yet another gets them only on the far side of a black curtain. Some mock-ups have no motion in them, and some have too much. The term "mock-up" embraces all these conditions. "Mock-up" is derived from the World War II phrase which indicated a symbolized weapon or area of attack. Here, it means, in essence, "something which a person makes up himself." The mock-up actually contains energy and mass. It occupies space. It should be under the control of the individual. A mock-up differs from a delusion in that in order for a thing to be a mock-up, it must answer three conditions: (1) it must be created by an individual, (2) he must know that it is his, and (3) he must get it under control so that it does not do things unless he commands it. A mock-up can be of anything, and it can be located in any direction or at any distance from the individual creating it. The ability of an individual to get a mock-up is an index of the individual's distance from present time. That person who gets very clear, brilliant mock-ups which are definitely under his control and which do not perform erratically without his consent, is in present time. This graduates on down to an inability to get mock-ups of any kind, which means one is very far from present time. One can generally establish the quality and character of a person's mock- ups, and, consequently, the distance of that person from present time. How will other factors in the child's environment affect this process? The child who is a member of a group can be expected to have many factors in his environment which are antipathetic to his best survival. Such things as quarrelsome 326 homes, lack of parents, and physical disability, all occasion problems for the group member which are beyond the scope of the applicator of these processes. Children who have special problems need special processing. This does not mean, however, that these special problems would not be alleviated in greater or lesser degree by the child's being a member of a group which is being given Scientology. Many remarkable gradual or sudden recoveries from disabilities, as well as adjustments to antipathetic surroundings, have been noted and logged when these techniques were in their experimental stages, but such recoveries or adjustments should not be expected of the process. A child who receives Scientology as part of the group can be expected to cope better with those problems which are assailing him than he could in the absence of Scientology; just as a child who is poorly fed at home can be expected to do better if he receives a hot meal in the middle of the day at school. Invalidation of the benefit he might get from group processing might be given the child by a neurotic parent. One case has been noted where the child returned to the group after a short absence and was unable to get any mock-ups of any kind whatsoever. It was discovered, however, that as the work progressed without any further special attention than noting the child was suffering from a sudden disability, the ability returned. The parental admonition, in other words, had no lasting effect upon the child. It might be a matter for caution on the part of the applicator not to discuss the process with the parents, although this would be rather an extreme measure, taken to prevent such invalidations and resultant temporary inabilities, in a small number of cases. One applicator who consistently did not give end-of-session processing after having given ten minutes of mock-ups to his group, found that one child was badly out of present time as a result of the process. The error in this case was the omission of end-of-session processing, as contained in the back of Self Analysis in Scientology; the total damage involved was the momentary inability of the child to demonstrate an arithmetic problem. The child was only a little way out of present time. He had become so entranced with his mock-up that he was still with it. Children occasionally experience sharp pains while doing mock-ups, and in such instances, they're letting go of old incidents and punishments. The end- of-session lists take care of any such occurrence. It is noteworthy that a group undergoing this processing during an epidemic of measles had a lower loss-of-attendance rate than the other classes in the same school which were not undergoing processing. Here's how it is done. The applicator opens his copy of Self Analysis in Scientology, goes to the beginning of the list, looks for a mock-up (the first one in that list that he can use for delivery to children), and says, "All right. Now let's see if we can get a picture of you enjoying something." He pauses, and as soon as it is apparent to him that the majority of the class have such a picture, he gives the next application. After a short period of this, he asks for a show of hands to find out how many have been getting mock-ups easily. He then selects this group out of the group, and then asks for a show of hands as to how many got no mock-ups at all and selects this group out. He then has three groups. He can, himself, render processing to each of these groups separately; or he can delegate the processing of the no mock-up group to a student of that group, and the processing of the too-slow group to another student, retaining for himself the easy group. It is desirable that he retain the processing of the easy group for himself, because this group will be the largest group and out of it will come the very best results. He should always remember that he is trying to make the able more able, and he should repress in himself any instinctive closure with the most nearly disabled. The two groups which are not as able as the easy group are processed exactly as the main group is processed; the reason for their separation is that the less able hold back the able, and the ability of the able rouses the envy of those who are poor at the game and tends to press them into apathy about it. 327 The applicator gives approximately 15 minutes of Scientology out of the lists to his group, and then gives the group the end-of-session list which is Exercise 14 of the book Self Analysis in Scientology. This consists of: (1) rapidly sketching over the session, (2) sketching over what has been going on again, with particular attention to how each member has been sitting, (3) going over the session again with regard only to present-time surroundings, (4) fixing each individual's attention upon a pleasant object near to him now. This is repeated until the group is refreshed, and requires only five or ten minutes. The total period of application of the entire process is about 20 minutes, and should be done at least once a day for a period of three weeks to get a very marked change in a group. When achieved, however, such a change is then noted to be considerable. Children who have never been able to study before, or who have been very poor at their lessons will be found to be interested in and good at them. There's a special case of the child whose school work is of a low quality, yet who has a very high I.Q. This child is found to be unable to mock up anything he hasn't actually seen. He would be able to mock up his instructor, and he would be able to mock up a glass of soda water, but he would not be able to mock up his instructor drinking a glass of soda water since he has not actually seen this. This child should be watched for; it will be discovered that the mock-ups he gets are not really his. This is remedied by simply changing them until he knows they are his. He is actually a no-mock- up case although he can get pictures; a picture is not a mock-up, a mock-up belongs to the preclear. If a child cannot mock up creatively, his work will bear no relationship to his I.Q. If a child has a high I.Q. but no creative mock-ups, then his work will be poor. This is all the background one needs to apply Scientology to groups of children or groups of adults. Groups of adults are handled in exactly the same way, and they respond as well as, but with not quite the same lucidity as, children. On this basis, an individual can build with his own experience. Such experience is essential to a deep insight into what is happening, for nothing written here beyond the basic data can supplant the actual experience of taking a group and bearing with it for several weeks and then seeing what has happened to it and in it. This, in itself, is sufficient recompense for the trouble taken. It is expressly recommended that the professional auditor take up the processing of groups of children by going to local schools and institutions and getting the consent of those in charge to conduct this game. He need have no qualms about what might happen, for, as tests have proven, the institution and even the highest authority in relation to that institution will not be anything but pleased with what occurs (unless, of course, some intensely personal factor enters). A professional auditor would do well to acquire the six-hour taped lecture course on group processing which supplements the above data, and give it free-of-charge to school teachers and others in his area. First and foremost, it will accomplish the goals of Scientology, and second, but sometimes important to an auditor, here is opened the most certain source of preclears known, for parents who are aware of the benefits being achieved with the child are prone to see that the child gets even further benefit in the form of professional processing. People, wisely or not, will pay more to have their children well than they will pay to have themselves well. Thus, even in the narrowest economic sense, it is extremely good business for a professional auditor to give great quantities of his time to the processing of groups of children or adults. He can be certain that he will get auditing assignments at least equal to the amount of time invested with such a group. This particular highway of approach to the problems of the world has been found workable. It is extremely easy to introduce these processes into a school and to incline instructors into their use. It is easy to put these processes to work in nursing homes, in veterans' establishments, and in many other places. The amount of help an individual can deliver per capita with these processes easily is greater than with any other single method now in existence, for he is giving men back to themselves, and there is no greater gift at his command. 328  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 0 iDate=1/5/53 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  SCIENTOLOGY 8-8008 UNLIMITED TECHNIQUES    SCIENTOLOGY 8-8008 UNLIMITED TECHNIQUES As of May 1, 1953, we have several techniques which are susceptible of being audited without time limit. These we call Unlimited Techniques. They are Positive Gain Processes. Engram running, Expanded Gita and all negative gain processes can be audited with benefit only a short time. Double Terminal is an excellent assist -- it cannot be audited more than a few hours before the case must be patched up with an unlimited. HOLDING MEST POINTS: The pc is requested to shut his eyes and to locate and then "feel" the upper two corners of the room and sit there without thinking, just keeping contact, being interested in the two upper corners of the room. Circuits clamor and other interesting things happen. He must not cease from his interest in the two corners. Can be done for thousands of hours, evidently, always with benefit. Gets pc to PT. COMPARISON: Two similar MEST objects are observed in fact (not in memory) by the pc and compared one to the other. Then two new objects or spaces are observed, their difference noted. This is done outside and inside with cars, people, trees, grass blades, anything. Spaces, of course, are different because they have different boundaries. You see what happens: He is matching terminals and then stopping the discharge by seeing differences. This is one of the most valuable techniques we have, simple as it is. Can be done for thousands of hours. Pc uses MEST (body's) eyes. DUPLICATION: The pc is shown a MEST object, person or space. Then beside it he mocks up a mock-up like it. Then he finds the difference between them. Of course he cannot get mock-ups of any duration or value at first. He simply keeps it up, each time taking a new object, person or space, each time noting the difference. This triggers out the automaticity of making facsimiles. It cuts down the competitive feeling about his own and the MEST universe. Can be audited endlessly, always with benefit. LIST MOCK-UPS: Self Analysis and similar lists. SPACATION: Putting out one, then eight anchor points to make a box in space either in general or around mock-ups or objects. This is the creation of space. UNMOCKING: Practicing seeing through MEST objects or spaces, done by creating new space where they are and in which they do not exist. You see what makes a technique unlimited: It builds up confidence in pc's own universe as in straight LIST MOCK-UPS; or it causes pc to confront the existing state of present time and discover that the MEST universe seldom bites; or it gives the difference between one's own universe and the MEST universe and raises ability to differentiate between them. Unlimited techniques are all differentiative, all deal with present time. L. RON HUBBARD 329  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 81 iDate=0/5/53 Volnum=0 Issue=2 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0     From: L. RON HUBBARD Through: The Office of L. Ron Hubbard London 30 Marlborough Place London N.W.8, England ASSOCIATE NEWSLETTER NO. 2 [1953, ca. early May] Associate, please send me name and address of every HCA you have in your files, including every HDA and B.Scn. I have no roster of auditors and wish to compile a directory of professional auditors. The omission of any name, including your own, may mean its omission in the directory by oversight so please make your list as complete as possible. I am putting all HCAs on a direct mailing basis for my office here in an effort to collect case reports. Volume of releases is the best publicity weapon which we have. If one HCA gets one cure in sinusitis, it makes very little impression, but if 45 HCAs get 45 cures in sinusitis we have cured 45 cases of sinusitis, and I can put it forward as a demonstration of what Scientology is doing. I wish to circulate case report sheets which can be sent to me here and compiled. It is about time that we had a central filing of this now that our processes are at a level where we can assure results. We must continue to work together as a very close team for very many reasons. We must recruit the HAS and swell its membership ranks as high as possible. There are various hinds of members: early issues tell you about them. Membership in the HAS is membership in an organization which is determined to free Man. As of a letter of 29th April, Hardin Walsh has been requested to handle mailing to 70 groups with which he is in contact and to furnish those groups with Group Auditors' Courses. Group Auditors' Courses are therefore available from Philadelphia and from Los Angeles. Any associate can sell Group Auditors' Courses (six hours of tapes) to anyone for any price he cares to charge. Because of the complications of manufacture, it is suggested that people requesting courses be referred to Los Angeles, Philadelphia or London, where the tapes are already being manufactured and shipped daily. The Phoenix office of the HAS has not been closed. The main legal office of the HAS is in Arizona. The HAS can be addressed there c/o R. Ross Lamoreaux, 4248 North 32nd Street, Phoenix, Arizona. R. Ross Lamoreaux is operating the doctorate school in Phoenix. It is running at an advanced level over its former status. It is charging the same price. It is giving the advanced course in one month to those who have recently been certified by associates. Ross credits any associate HCA and reduces his doctorate fee accordingly. Doctorate level schools, then, are located in Phoenix, Philadelphia and London, as before. There is no change in this program, but there has been some change of address. I am specifically looking to any associate for the management of his area, and even greater than his area. Do not worry about overlapping: there is no dearth of public. Don't worry about duplication of function: the idea is to get people trained, to get people processed and to keep this information going out. You have a very stable package of information now. It consists of: Self Analysis in Scientology, in hard cover ordered from the HAS in Philadelphia, $3.00 per volume; the Communications Manual, ordered from Philadelphia, $3.00 per volume; Scientology 8-8008, paper cover, HAS London, $5.00 per volume; the 50 course books, $25.00 per set. The doctorate schools are giving a B.Scn.; associates are giving an HCA. Groups may obtain the first 12 lecture tapes from the HAS in Philadelphia and the Group 330 Auditors' Course of six hours in tapes. These items listed are all staple commodities. Outside of the fact that Scientology 8-8008 is being revised at the moment, I do not expect these publications to change for many years. Added to them is Introduction to Scientology by Richard de Mille, procurable from Los Angeles associates. I do not know what discounts he will care to give. Self Analysis in Scientology and How to Live Though an Executive (the Communications Manual) are suitable for bookstore distribution in your area. Where you give an order to the HAS to be shipped to a bookstore, your discount is 50%; your general discount for books is 40%. Remember to allow for and include postage. You may re-manufacture and distribute at your discretion, providing proper credit is given and no details or data are omitted, SOP-8, its Appendix and The Factors. The HAS will put these out in printed form shortly. Any associate should constitute himself an office of the Hubbard Association of Scientologists as an organization and should take memberships, form chapters and hold chapter meetings and get the HAS into shape as a local organization. If you have not sent money for your tapes to London, please do so, for we are shipping straight out without regard to cash and your order is probably already on its way. There were more tapes and the cost was slightly greater than you were informed in an earlier letter. In case you missed it before, send a notarized statement as to the skill of your HCA applicant signed by the person in charge of the associate office, and a check for $55.00 to me here in London, and a certificate, properly lettered and signed, will be sent immediately to the home address of the applicant or, if the associate elects, to the associate for his remailing. The applicant will also receive his membership card as a professional member in the HAS. The first part of this job has been done, but it is only the first part of this job. It was my task to get workable techniques which could be used on more than one individual and techniques which could produce rapidly a high level of effectiveness in Man. We have those techniques. I do not personally see any reason to go on looking for faster techniques because my experience tells me that they probably do not exist. We are at the roof of this universe. There are hotter techniques, but not for MEST universe. I know three principle data beyond those I have released. It is not likely that I will divulge them, for they are not important so far as the job we have to do is concerned. Thus this stream of communication coming from my office and from me at this time is signalizing a shift of emphasis in operation and finds me no longer buried in investigation and out of communication but devoting my time to the improvement of business and public relations and the improvement of general acceptance of Scientology. It has moved as fast as I have worked on it and I am trying to move it rapidly forward now. Please adjust your own viewpoints and those of the people in your area to realization of this. Please send me the letters you are receiving from people so I can write personal answers to them. I don't care how long it takes the letters to get here. If you are processing any preclear or have processed any preclears, you will find out that a letter from here enquiring after his health and asking for a report will do much to improve his general attitude and alertness, for it is simply a token of somebody else being interested in him. I don't much care whether I have to answer these letters or not, or whether I have them for my own viewpoint, but I wish to be of all possible service to associates; and you will find, I am sure, that this will show up in your accounting books on the blue side of the ledger. 331 If you don't think we are going places, let's look at the developments of just the past few weeks. Aside from the American picture, the HAS in Great Britain has come up to a level of financial stability which assures its continuation. The main problem now is adequate quarters. Here in Great Britain every week several schoolteachers are trained to use Self Analysis in their classes, taking the free Group Auditors' Course at the HAS headquarters. A few weeks ago I addressed the London Head Teachers' Association (D.0.9) and the invitation of that body to address it was probably an effort to expose a "charlatan"; and, although some of the bigwigs of the public school system were present with that definitely in mind, at the end of the talk which merely concerned itself with the education of children and bringing them up to present time and the use of their imagination, there was no dissenting voice. On the contrary, there was considerable compliment, and since that time official ripples are nonexistent. Little by little, then, the public school program of group auditing is moving up into official status and one of these days will be a standard part of the curriculum. That may not happen for some time but it is on the road to happening. All we have to do here is maintain a constancy giving that course every week, making sure people know about it, keeping the books available and simply keeping it rolling. It requires no real effort to keep it rolling, since once it was started, it was bound to continue. In New Zealand, in Auckland, an associate school is going in to serve the down under area. The personnel is on the way there, the tapes have been made and are on the way, and the manager of that school has completed his training with honors here at the HAS. In other words, the South Pacific has an associate. The Middle East now has an associate. Owen Nasr, going back to the Lebanon, is establishing an associate quarter there. The tapes are on their way and he is ready to get going. Strangely enough, that area's educational stratum speaks English, so here is the area of primary knowledge being invaded by Scientology. Most important, probably, is the fourth doctorate school which is going in in Germany. You can imagine the appeal of Scientology to a country which has had all roads blocked and its reality badly smashed. More important than this is the proximity of that doctorate school to the Russian zone. This doctorate school will be conducted in German and will take in all the Teutonic- tongued nations. The various standard texts are at this time undergoing translation into German. Aside from these associates and the new doctorate school, which are, of course, something very special, groups are continuing or starting up in many other nations. The amount of enterprise being demonstrated by auditors in areas where the ploughing must be of the most primitive kind, where no great wealth and no high level educational mean exists, rather puts to shame operations existing in wealthy areas where the population almost averages the first year of high school in education which have difficulty in remaining solvent. Your attention is called to some data concerning what the public wants which does not appear under that heading in the recent material. In SOP-8 on Step IV, Expanded GITA, a workout of wasting and accepting under duress pain demonstrates the sensation hunger which exists in the individual. This technique lays bare for the first time the actual thirst for agony, its receipt and delivery, of homo sapiens. If you have had this run on yourself or if you run it on a case or two, you will be startled to discover an apparent goal and desire on the part of the thetan. Throwing this over into the general public, one finds then that the general public very aberratedly will patronize those places and those techniques which will deliver pain. Those techniques are preferable which deliver pain in good quantity without permanent damage. The protest of the general public against people delivering pain is actually a protest against other people getting pain and the protester receiving no pain. Pain is a precious commodity. If you were to tell people that 332 these techniques were extremely and intensely painful, but that they left no permanent damage, and brought the person up to a level where he could obtain more livingness and beingness than before, you would find an immediate response, according to what I have worked out here in terms of preclears. I have not made this experiment but it seems indicated in the light of what turns up with Expanded GITA on the subject of pain. The psychiatrist will continue to be supported, the surgeon will continue to be supported so long as they can be hired to waste pain at a price. People are trying to waste pain although they really want pain. This is a rather strange outlook. However, it is true that an individual up the scale is cured of this obsession for pain. individuals who appear quite sane to you or me are actually too low on the tone scale to demonstrate this desire for pain. As you bring them up the tone scale they pass through a wide band of desire for pain. When they get up above this, for the first time they begin to appreciate what sanity is. Anything which is scarce becomes valuable. Thus pain, if it becomes very scarce and is prohibited, becomes automatically valuable and is desired. The prohibitions in use against having pain, against touching hot stoves, get an idea into the head of the preclear that pain is valuable, that he can't have it and it is therefore desirable. Institutions such as war, hangings, psychiatry, will continue in any society so long as this desire for pain exists. You might make a test of this by telling people that these techniques were productive of far greater pain and agony than any other technique ever invented but that they leave no permanent damage on the individual. Just make the test and let me know how it comes out. You understand, of course, that above this band and into the realm of sanity this desire for pain does not exist. This is merely a comment on the fact that homo sapiens is actually below the level of sadism and masochism. As an additional comment on techniques you will find SOP-8 resolving a lot of things which we have found it difficult to touch before. It is fantastic that the craving for work disclosed by running Expanded GITA is so strong in the individual. The very lazy person who won't work, won't work simply because work is so scarce that he can't have it. Running Expanded GITA remedies this. It is remarkable to see people going into action after a very few minutes of this process. Those people who complain how hard work is are simply complaining so that other people will be driven off the work they are doing. Those people who complain about how hard work is are actually unproductive because work is already quite scarce to them and although it's lying right in front of them, they know that they don't dare touch it; they want to drive people off from it, but they themselves can't have it. This is remedied very easily. Run wasting work and such people come well up very rapidly. This aspect of work is very pleasant to contemplate, for it means that people processed are going to see immediate reaction and that people who are around those people are going to observe a change in them. There is no change as desirable in the society at large as seeing a lazy man become ambitious. I recommend this process very strongly (Step IV, Expanded GITA) to auditors who can't find preclears. If they will waste preclears for a while and waste working on preclears for a while, they will find themselves capable of procuring far more people to process than they ever have before. An auditor should waste processing. He will find it is so scarce that he himself can't have processing. Then immediately after that he finds that it is so valuable that only he can have processing. Then on the next step up he realizes that it is quite plentiful and so he can give it to people. Wasting anchor points is right up there with the more important things of Expanded GITA. In order to perceive this universe at all, somebody must have had to convince the individual that he had anchor points out there someplace. The thetan has to have anchor points in space which he uses to see anything; if a thetan can't see anything it means that he doesn't think he has any anchor points out there, or, if he has had anchor points, that he has now lost them. Thus rehabilitation of the visio depends upon wasting anchor points for a while: having other people take them away or break them. Naturally, there should be anchor points clear out to the various limits of the MEST universe which one had once -- or thinks one had -- and has now lost. By far 333 the most important single button in this whole line is healthy bodies and sound minds. You will find that preclears will waste these for a long time before they can have anything like a healthy body or a healthy part of the body. You will also find sex playing a remarkably strong role and remaining unsolved until eating is run. Eating is that thing of which sex itself is a symbol. I am totally revising Scientology 8-8008 as the professional course textbook and putting into it SOP-8. The copy for this probably won't be available for another five or six weeks. A surprisingly small amount of change is necessary to bring this book up to date. Nothing is being deleted from this volume. What is getting stressed is communication: it is found that communication is terribly important; communication outranks by far affinity and reality. Processing space, beingness and communication is the road through to fast clearing. Any kind of communication, even painful communication, is more desirable than no communication; just as the thetan would rather be anything than nothing. Speaking of communication, the Journal of Scientology is taking a pretty long while getting settled down as might be expected. The Children's Issue is probably in the mails as this is written. This edition probably more or less makes up for the delay, for it is a twelve-page issue devoted to group processing and children. Immediately following this issue is an issue called "This Is Scientology." Copies of this issue will be available for 50 cents per copy. This is actually a textbook and will be another twelve-page issue. It will contain a simplified rundown of the whole procedure, including The Factors, and is actually a breakdown of The Factors into a book. This is the third Associate Newsletter although you are probably not aware of the fact that a news service has begun here. In fact, I have not been aware of it myself until I realized that with a raised communication level, I had quite a bit of information here which should start going out. Having pretty well completed this job and having techniques which are doing well in auditors' hands, I am giving more attention to getting the information out. I will continue to send you these newsletters, for I think they are a needed communication line. The data contained in them is probably more intimate than would be circulatable to professional auditors and certainly far more intimate than that which could run in the Journal of Scientology. In addition to this newsletter I am contemplating a paper to go out every week to professional auditors. This would be the professional newsletter and would carry case data, case reports and so forth. It is for this professional auditors' communication line that I want the names and addresses of all the HDAs of whom you have any knowledge. I have no list of HDAs and only a limited list of HCAs. I have a small Gestetner mimeographing machine and either myself or the secretary here cuts the stencils and Susie and I then run them on this Gestetner. They are then mailed by my secretary, so you can see that this is a sort of informal communication line. However, data keeps piling up here and organizational matters keep cropping up. You send in letters to me and then I answer them, but the information is of service to other associates and would be useful to professional auditors. This is the beginning of a new cycle. You may or may not realize how thoroughly I meant what I said in the early Fall of 1950 and, indeed, you are probably not aware that I said it at all; but I made a forthright declaration that at that moment I cut loose from any and all managerial organization and activities, for I had discovered that I could not even vaguely continue in a managerial capacity and conduct my researches and write material and give lectures as necessary. I had become aware of the fact, and become convinced of it by September of 1950, that I had evidently done with preclears many odds and ends and extra flourishes which I did not know enough about to communicate to auditors and that the subject was too difficult to teach, and I left organizational activities because, having become aware of this fact, I knew I would have to get up and dust to finish the subject off and bring it to a conclusion so that it was workable in the hands of the many. We didn't want a specialized expert subject. The only excuse I had for putting it out at all 334 was that it was much, much better than anything which had existed prior to it, and the reason I continued to put out the techniques I developed was that they were much better than techniques we had had before. Auditors have a tendency to overlook the fact that each one of these techniques made man the owner of a better psychotherapy. Auditors are not aware of this and don't understand this mostly because they don't understand the general lack of psychotherapy and its absence in man's knowledge prior to 1950. If an auditor knew and had worked in the field of psychoanalysis or psychology prior to 1950, he would know -- oh, so well -- that the techniques of Dianetics put a real weapon in his hands. I have been criticized for being optimistic about each process as it came out. That's very true: I have been, mostly because it was a good process when used properly and partially because I considered that, having fired the first shot, it was up to me to keep people encouraged toward the final goal. Maybe I overdid this; I don't much care whether I did or not: the point is, the decision to leave management alone in September of 1950 was evidently a sound one, for here, in the Spring of 1953, we have a SOP-8, a technique which, while it might not lift the dead out of their graves, yet solves anything we want solved in this universe. Of course, it can be improved, but, my experience here is telling me, not very much. Most of the criticism of my managerment capacity was levelled at me from September onwards of 1950. The criticisms should have been couched, "Ron won't take any part in management," for it was my opinion that it was much sounder, even if things went completely to hell in the Foundations (which they did), to keep on with investigation, knowing that the organizations would eventually be as sound as the subject and no sounder. You will see this work out. A sound, simple, uncontrovertible subject delivers into our hands the best basis I know of for a smooth-running organization. The public coming to us and going away satisfied is all we need; they're not just satisfied here in England, they're hysterical. They come back a couple of days after a session walking two feet off the pavement. This is all we needed and we've got it, so here you find me back in management. Hello! LATE BULLETIN Theoretically, anything an associate wants to know is also desired information by other associates and the doctorate schools. Thus much that is contained in the Associate Newsletter is in response to some inquiry whether or not that is so stated. Thus I may omit a direct answer to your letter and answer your letter instead in this bulletin. The Associate Newsletter has limited circulation. It goes to the doctorate schools, to associates and to centers. It is not intended for HCAs, groups or the general public. However, students may be interested in many of these items. But the student is more properly and directly addressed by the professional auditor's publication. I am at this time putting out news as follows: The Associate Newsletter, The Professional Auditor's Bulletin, The Journal of Scientology and personal correspondence. Additionally, papers such as SOP-8 and The Factors are to be circulated. The news is intimate to the general operation in the order of The Associate Newsletter -- business and promotion; The Professional Auditor's Bulletin -- technical and promotional on a professional auditor and professional student level; The Journal of Scientology -- broadly of interest, general members. The Associate Newsletter will come out fairly often. The Professional Auditor's Bulletin will come out every couple of weeks. The Journal remains on a twice-a-month level. One has to be an associate or a center to get the Newsletter, one has to be a professional auditor or student to get the Bulletin. The Journal is sent to subscribers. PUSH THESE BOOKS: Self Analysis in Scientology, The Communications Manual, full sets of Course Books. You get 40% discount. Push Journal of Scientology subscriptions: you get 40% discount on every one you send in: you collect $3.50; you send in, on your stationery, the subscriber's name and $2.10 cash. Post a notice to this effect. 335 Send all cash for books and subscriptions and tapes you buy (from Philly only) to Philly. Send all certification fees and data and tape cash (for London mfg. only) to me at 30 Marlborough Place, N.W.8 -- London. IF YOU WANT BUSINESS, ONE NIGHT EVERY WEEK GIVE FREE PROCESSING USING SHORT 8A to groups of people in your place. Advertize it in the papers that you are processing groups of professional and working people to make the able more able. SHORT 8 and SHORT 8A (better) will give them, on only two hours a week, miracles. You will get professional processing and students from such a group. Start it and it will grow. This and giving the GROUP AUDITORS' COURSE free will, in a very short time, swamp you with business: Professional auditors will be asked, as well, to start such groups. This is how we can begin to clear Man. We've got the process. LRH 336  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 101 iDate=0/5/53 Volnum=0 Issue=15 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  "The Old Man's Case-Book"    THE JOURNAL OF SCIENTOLOGY Issue 15-G [1953, ca. May] Published by The Hubbard Association of Scientologists, Inc. Philadelphia, Pennsylvania "The Old Man's Case-Book" L. Ron Hubbard (The following material is an extract from the case-books of Dr. Hubbard or advice he has given in letters or personally to auditors concerning the running of cases.) Mr. Brennan, HPA (Gt. Britain), phoned me concerning the treatment of an eighteen-months-old baby expected to live one week according to medical opinion. Medicine as usual had given up the case and the family as well, evidently, as the family doctor had insisted that a consulting Scientologist be brought in. The baby was conscious and fairly alert. Mr. Brennan was informed that this is a very trying type of case and results on it are not within reasonable expectancy. He was informed of procedures as follows: Leukemia is evidently psychosomatic in origin and at least eight cases of leukemia had been treated successfully by Dianetics after medicine had traditionally given up. The source of leukemia has been reported to be an engram containing the phrase "It turns my blood to water." The reduction of an engram in an eighteen-months-old baby by Dianetics is, of course, impossible; therefore keying out procedures or automatic type running or direct communication with the thetan are indicated. The first procedure Mr. Brennan was given was to have the baby get two anchor points in present time. This to be done with tactile and the baby's hands. The theory of this is, of course, that contact with present time is contact with the material universe. By slightly agitating, pleasantly or unpleasantly, the fingers of the baby, thus attracting his attention to his fingers for a period of time -- at least two or more hours -- there is a possibility that the baby could be brought into present time. This, of course, is a key-out of an engram. The second procedure given Mr. Brennan was a somewhat imaginative one based upon the conduct of two mocked up matched terminals. The MEST universe is a two-terminal universe; by having one object of everything there is no discharge of the environment; thus the MEST universe remains constant. By mocking up two terminals facing each other, both the same, a preclear often experiences physical reaction and the charge on that type of terminal can be found to dissipate without the preclear knowing what has happened. This is a limited technique used in assists. In this case it was suggested that two effigies made out of pillows and clothes or two dolls similar to the baby be placed in sight of the baby, facing each other, and that the baby's attention be permitted to rest on these two objects. By doing this, there is a faint chance that the charge on the baby itself might discharge automatically. The third technique consisted of a type of processing used on animals. The basis of this is that man's health is proportional to his belief in his dangerousness to his environment. Animals are processed by building up in them the belief that they are 337 capable of frightening or driving something away. A cat or a dog is taken and gestures are made at its hands. The moment it makes the faintest return gesture in retaliation, the auditor backs up as though frightened. He does this very quietly, for the animal is liable to be frightened itself at this first venture. The animal is led more and more to strike out at the auditor on a gradient scale, until the animal is very cocky and confident about its approach to the auditor. It will be found that neurotic or depressed cats, dogs and mice will alter their social behavior and will become well if this process is followed. This is about all there is to animal therapy. It was suggested that this be tried with the baby by getting the baby to strike back. It was particularly cautioned that the first advance the baby made should be met by the auditor with the very gentlest of withdrawals, for the baby is quite often surprised if an exclamation of fear and a sudden gesture of withdrawal are made. This is the application of gradient scale, getting more and more of something built up. The final method is one which has been reportedly used by several auditors with success. The baby's body, facial expressions and voice are disregarded as communication mediums. The auditor addresses the thetan and continues in confidence that the thetan understands him. The auditor applies Step I and, even though the baby gives no sign of understanding, the auditor goes right on working Step I. He exteriorizes the thetan, orients the thetan in the room by putting the thetan in various places of the room, and then eventually asks the thetan to patch-up whatever is wrong with the body by locating deposits of energy on nerves or in other places in the body, turning them white and discharging them. The auditor continues this process for several sessions, each time going back to the first part of Step I and going through Step I completely; then completing an orientation and asking the thetan to patch up the body. This reportedly works. I have not myself done this to babies. I have been informed that it has worked on babies as young as four months. In working babies I normally use the first three steps given above. 338  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 81 iDate=0/5/53 Volnum=0 Issue=3 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0     From: L. RON HUBBARD Through: The Office of L. Ron Hubbard London 30 Marlborough Place London N.W.8, England ASSOCIATE NEWSLETTER NO. 3 [1953, ca. mid-May] Enclosed herewith, prior to release, is Professional Auditor's Bulletin No. 1, which is sent to you for your information, particularly the last part. We have here a new type addressing machine. It has the faculty of being able to run off reels of gummed labels from its stencils and does so with great speed. This means that as I collect the mailing list, I can repeat and bundle up this mailing list in a gummed roll for your use should you wish to utilize it. If you will send me any current and valid mailing addresses which you have, provided you've collected a sufficient number to warrant the trouble here, I will be happy to send in return this master mailing list. I am sure that pooling our names and addresses should prove profitable and beneficial to all of us. Could anybody tell me what goes on in Seattle? McElvain of the Hubbard Associates of Puget Sound has written me a couple of times and then the line has gone silent. I don't seem to be able to get anything out of them. Maybe somebody amongst you knows more about this organization than I do: if so, shoot the data to me. GROUP PROCESSING PLAN The following arrangements, possibly with some modification, are tentatively being established by a group of consulting Scientologists at 237 North 16th Street, Philadelphia. The plan is not yet in operation but it is based on group processing experience obtained in the professional school in London and in British public schools. The group process which will be used in this instance will be Short Eight. It will be administered, probably, in the auditorium at 237 N. 16th on several nights each week. It will be delivered there for about two hours by a professional auditor between, probably, the hours 7:30 to 9:45, with a fifteen- minute break between the two hours. It may be that a slightly shorter period will be adopted; but, in any case, the processing period will not be under two hours. The difference will come in the number of breaks that are taken. The processing will be regularly scheduled and will continue to be given regardless of audience. By direct mail means, advertisements in suitable publications or papers, it will be announced in a very dignified way that the HAS has embarked upon a program of free processing for the working people and executives of the city with the goal of making the able more able. It will be stated that this is educational and aimed at improving reaction time and intelligence quotient and at rehabilitating the goals and energy of those who work hard to keep the culture running. The actual advertising copy will be adjusted against the response and what is learned from those who attend the sessions. Exactly in keeping with the plan announced in Professional Auditor's Bulletin No. 1 as to the material at hand, it is believed that the processing itself will pay for itself and that it will provide preclears and students for organizations in that area. Although this is subject to modification as to its procurement of persons to take the free processing and in its actual performance, it is offered here as a general outline of what is intended. 339 TAPE SHIPMENTS The doctorate schools at Phoenix and Philadelphia have received all the late 1952/1953 tapes; that is, a set of Philadelphia lectures made there in December, 1952 on Standard Operating Procedure No. 5 (Expanded) and called SOP- 5 (Expanded), the Group Auditor's Course, a set of six hours made for use with Self Analysis in Dianetics (or Self Analysis in Scientology) for group auditors, and the London Spring lectures on latest procedures and theory, 20 hours in all, called the HCA tapes. Those associates who have ordered the HCA course may have as yet received only 18 hours; the other two hours which come at the very end of the series are also being copied and will be sent on very soon. Joanna Walsh's HCA course is being shipped on May 27th. I have no note of the Chicago associate asking for tapes, if Roman and Adele Mazurek want them, will they please write? No order has been received by the London HAS. All tapes ordered with the exception of the last two hours of the HCA course have been shipped. GENERAL News on the general scene looks very good. I am in receipt of floods of letters from auditors congratulating me on these new techniques. On every hand I am hearing of cases busting which have been hanging fire for as long as three years. And, in addition to this, these people are not even in possession of what I said was the final solution; they are in possession of SOP-8. SOP-8 is a gunshot safe technique which can be put in the hands of people who are not particularly well trained. The solution of Case V requires much longer assay and will be the subject of PAB No. 2. You will get airmail copies of PAB No. 2, whereas they will go out regular mail to the list of auditors. This whole thing wound up as simplicity itself. You're going to hear of Scientology as "the science of certainty." Anything we consider certain, which is to say the three universes and the multitude of viewpoints of them and the repair and increase of the awareness of these certainties which is awareness itself since certainty itself is knowledge and certainty alone is awareness, are the meat which we underline as Scientology. Now we take whole-track facsimiles, prenatals, engrams under pain and unconsciousness and anything else there's ever been a question about -- anything on which anybody has any slightest possible maybe -- and we call these things para-Scientology. These are the things one can be or cannot be aware of, but the time to judge whether or not they exist or whether they do exist by the individual is when he has a high enough awareness level to observe. If his awareness level isn't up there, there is no reason why we should try to shove them down his throat. In other words, we're going off on a complete certainty. A case advances as fast as it is certain. SOP-8A, which is not released, does nothing but establish certainties and on a gradient scale brings the person up in terms of certainties, higher and higher and higher until he knows. We take no interest in what he finds out when he knows how to know. We've given him some hints in the past as to what might lie around for him to find out; we're only interested in his becoming certain. With this line of approach I think any and all opposition or questioning we have ever had will simply be wiped out flat. It makes a very simple basic subject which thereafter can become more and more interestingly complicated as one advances into higher levels of certainty. But one never runs for a guess when he can grab a lead-pipe cinch. Right now, we're going to deal with the science as a lead-pipe cinch. This ought to make it a lead-pipe cinch in terms of salesmanship and getting the job done. I was keeping this shot in the locker. It will be pointed up in 16-G. Professional auditors are going to get it and we are ready to hit our stride. I think these techniques all by themselves will override and make silly any opposition we have had. It was my theory originally that this is what would happen and, sure enough, it is happening here. The more simple and the more certain this science gets in England, the better student reaction we are having and the better field reaction. 340 The keynote of processing Case V (as a little advance notice) is "is here" and "isn't here." In other words, the theta-MEST theory, "there is something," "there is nothing." This can be run in terms of brackets, it can be run as matched or double terminals and it can be run on any thought or subject. It is best to be applied for a Case V simply by running these two things. The technique is broadened by "there isn't anything here," "there is something here" in any numb or painful part of the body. You simply run these two things alternately over any place in the body that has no feeling or where it does have feeling, and you get rid of chronic somatics so fast that it's wonderful to behold. This goes additionally into "there isn't anything there," "there is something there." Now you understand that there is a certainty about "there is something here" and there's another certainty on "there is nothing here." These two intermixed become an uncertainty or a maybe. We avoid the maybes. We can even go so far as to run a question occasionally like, "Is there sex?" and then "There is sex" and "There isn't any sex"; but we avoid, to a large extent, the maybe area. You start running maybes and the case goes downscale; you start running certainties and it goes upscale. The most certain certainty there is is that "there is something," "there is nothing." We don't care what the something is and we don't care what is absent to make it nothing. You'll find out that any maybe on any subject will resolve by running brackets on "There is something," "There is nothing." These are certainties. We never deviate from the certainties and we don't give a damn for the computations of the preclear. We don't, in other words, ask him what he thinks. We never care what he thinks and we don't let him think. He'll figure, figure, figure himself to death if we permit it. Now it happens that the most certain certainty is blackness and this is the last certainty. So your V turns the last thing on of which he can be certain, which is blackness. There isn't any lighting shade or shade of lightness which has the same certainty as blackness. Here's a man who has a terrific amount of certainty. It's all black. Now, of course, although he has blackness, he has no pictures, so we can run something like "There are pictures," "There are no pictures." We can even run it as concepts, although this isn't as good as positioning it out from somebody. A variation on this is "It is solid," "It is not solid." One of the high levels of certainty is solidity. A Case V has engrams packed round him so tight that he's practically solid. By matching terminals -- that is to say, getting one person facing another person in terms of mock-ups and having each agree on the certainty that something exists and the certainty that nothing exists, and having these things be somebody else putting them up and the preclear putting them up -- we resolve an awful lot in an awful hurry. A remarkable thing about this technique is that it can be audited very easily. The main danger is that the auditor starts going into a lot of things he shouldn't touch; which is to say, he lets the preclear figure computations, tries to force things on the preclear, tries to get him to run this or that. Now we come to the entities. The entities are important, they have always been important, but I didn't have anything that would gunshot them. This "reach" being the basis of uncertainty and being the basis of insanity (can't reach, can reach, must reach, must be reached, can't be reached) is a basic resolution of a case, but even in brackets, matched terminals and all other things, it becomes very tough auditing. In fact, it is so tough, I wouldn't trust it into the hands of a preclear. You can have some preclear who is apparently being audited only during sessions but, believe me, he goes home and starts auditing. He starts running this "reach" all by himself and he's a gone goose, for it is uncertainty plus, even to the degree of insanity. In fact, you can reproduce the emotion of insanity in any pc merely by having somebody hold something way, way out from him in mock-ups and having him get the feeling that he must reach it. Now on the matter of entities, we find out that the entities themselves are working against the preclear. They are pretending to be there and pretending not to be there and so forth. We simply run these on "There is something here," "There isn't anything here." The entities will put up pictures of all sorts and descriptions to try to distract the attention of the preclear. The pictures are ignored. 341 You will find that in a V one-half of the body is darker than the other half. The dark part of the body is pretending it isn't there. This goes back on down the track to the clam and so forth. Case Levels IV and V on "We are taking care of the reactive mind, we are directly processing the reactive mind." The main trouble with most thetans is "they cannot reach away from MEST." It is very important in this case to give attention, if you were running reaching, to this fact. If they can't reach away from MEST, they can't reach away from circuits, and so they go on figure, figure, figuring. Quite incidentally, they can't get out of their body. A faster way to run this is "There are bodies," "There aren't any bodies"; "There is a future," "There isn't any future"; "I can create something," "I can't create anything." You will find a person has to hold onto things which he no longer believes himself capable of creating. That actually is the gist of the techniques. More of a rundown is given to them. We run certainties, in other words, and we get places with these cases we have never gotten before. PERSONAL NOTE I am going over to France for the summer because I have an enormous amount of material to write and I have to give a lot of heavy concentration to getting us curriculums and texts very precisely lined up and very simply done and so that I can finish up the summary of discoveries and materials in an understandable way. What I am actually doing is making ammunition. Now there happens to be something like a shortage of cash around here and I am asking you to actively remember what I am up to in these coming months. In the first place I have started a heavy communication line flow, timing it to coincide with hot and fast results for auditors plus ways and means for auditors to make money, plus ways and means to get Scientology on the road. It costs me quite a little money to keep this communication line running -- not just these Associate Newsletters: the communication line is much broader than that. The only reason you had a lot of competition around was because there was a scarcity of information, a scarcity of books, a scarcity of cheap material, a scarcity of results. I have set myself to remedy these scarcities. It is my belief that if results start to be obtained in the field, plus the fact that if auditors start to make money by processing groups and by other modus operandi which I have here at hand and will release from time to time, that more and more people will be trained. The more people who are trained, the more this information is let loose into society, whether those people become practicing auditors or not. Therefore we should never go on the basis of refusing training, except, of course, when a case is so psycho that it's impossible to keep an orderly class with such a person in it. I have ways and means of obtaining income, but the best method former enemies of this subject used was the denial of income and funds to me. They did this very grandly and, for lack of funds, I have been unable to function as widely as I could. All kinds of rumors, wild stories which hurt my personal reputation and so forth, could go around simply because of this scarcity of communication. As long as this scarcity of communication existed, then, anybody pushing the ball along in Scientology got hurt whether he realized it or not, for he could be fought by E-therapy and Q-therapy and P-therapy. And these things existed because Dianetics was not producing the results that it ought to produce, mostly because it was too hard to train people into a technique which was easy. Now we have a super-simple technique and if we get heavy on the communication lines -- buying advertisements in national magazines of a very conservative nature and so forth -- we will find ourselves relatively unopposed. I am depending to a large degree upon the Associates to produce sufficient income in this direction to keep up a communication line flowing in that direction. I am assembling master mailing lists and doing other expensive things, and I dare say it will cost me about $2,500 a month to keep the ball rolling and to keep new publications coming up, for I now have the job of standardizing this whole work across the field. This means I have to go through everything, recodify it; that means the books have got to get into print, and that means, too, that we have to publish those books and sell them cheaply. So your role in the commercial side of this is not a light one, and I am depending heavily upon it. 342 Over in France living is not very expensive, and I am not apt to be very bothered in this highly concentrated effort. I would very much like to travel round the U.S. and give talks at various Associate addresses, but I do not believe it would be economical at this time. Let's make sure we have all the powder properly prepared and the ammunition ready to go, have everything sleeked down and nailed down, and then I will give talks anywhere and everywhere. I figure it will take me about a year to get everything written that should be written and everything put together the way it should be put together for rapid teaching and rapid use. So it will be about a year from now that I will be able to come around and say hello. I mention this at this time because I have had several offers from you to give a series of lectures and this will tell you when those offers are being accepted. They are accepted at a slightly extended date. If we work hard, and if everything goes well, we will be talking to thousands where we would only be talking to hundreds now. My own frame of mind these days, if anyone is interested, is incredibly relaxed. I am getting an enormous amount of work done; and yet, at the same time, I am getting in an enormous amount of leisure. I didn't know before that one could work like mad and loaf all the time at the same time: this is a new experience. I write this in the throes of getting visas, shipping papers for my motorbikes and racing car and amidst the mounds of paper which Great Britain and Europe consider absolutely necessary for any move from one room into another. The paper is far more important than the person. It is astonishing that Scientology is doing so well in Great Britain. It is traveling slowly, but with good security as it goes. However, the general public is hardly aware that it exists and I have just made probably the most disastrous lecture in terms of attendance in the city of Birmingham up in the middle of England. There were 100 people present, and every one of them was deeply interested in the subject and well advised about it. They probably constituted all the people in that area who had even heard of it and they were well informed of it, but as far as general public attendance or any curiosity audience is concerned, it didn't exist. In view of the fact that the lecture was given in the Town Hall which seats anything up to 2,500 or 3,000 people, this 100 made about the emptiest looking hall you ever wanted to stare at from a lecture platform. Any talks I've given in Great Britain have found the audience small, well informed in Dianetics and Scientology, very intense and with the typical British slow burn on all jokes told. It's almost as if the Dianetic population of Great Britain was static, yet it increases; but as it increases, it gains entirely conquered territory. One of the most interesting facts in Great Britain is the personal courtesy I am shown and the almost complete lack of enturbulence and wildcat activities. You never saw such a calm vista; it would drive any of you mad because it just doesn't seem to expand. Yet it does expand. Now with the new ideas about groups, however, this expansion should be more rapid. I will soon modify group processing on reports as I get them in, for experience is bound to bring about some changes. The question is simply "How much processing can a person take as a part of a group?" The answer is, evidently, "quite a lot," but I am approaching it cautiously. I want to thank those of you who are writing me quite regularly and point out that there are a couple who don't. I need to know what's happening with you and, to be frank, I need and like the communications. You're going to see a change of curriculum very shortly with some additional material, but this has nothing to do with the tapes you have on hand. It is mainly in the field of what an auditor does to become a Doctor of Scientology. The training in the doctorate level schools is going to be rather different -- not in terms of how it's administered, but in subject matter -- from the HCA schools. It will fall upon the shoulders of the HCA school to teach all there is to know on the subject of Scientology. It will fall upon the shoulders of the doctorate schools to cram into people the additional knowledge and presence to make expert psychotherapists. Thus you can teach in the HCA schools a great many people who will not become auditors even 343 though they are certified. Auditors who have been around for a long time will get a crack at this new material. We are about to do a terrible thing to the general morale of psychotherapists in America. I have just gotten through a complete review of Freudian psychoanalysis, and I find out, Lord knows how he did it, that Sigmund Freud was hitting some very hot buttons. He was not hitting the button and he was not hitting buttons which had any therapy value with any technique he could possibly have invented. I don't know how psychoanalysis has survived as long as it has, but the techniques with which he was fooling around and the computations on which he was working were so wide apart that it is a wonder that he didn't produce complete raving insanity on the part of about 80% of his people. Any and every diagnostic conclusion drawn by Sigmund Freud can be found to have validity and can be processed in the preclear. This is not the fastest way to clear preclears, but it certainly is the fastest way to get into the sordid depths of the reactive mind and stir it around. Running reaching and suppression with all the Freudian diagnostic labels converted into Scientology finds us capable of resolving any problem in psychoanalysis. We can do a two years' psychoanalysis and do it properly and correctly in any small number of hours. Now, if you're very bright, you can figure out from that what we are about to do. This is extra-curricular and in addition, but it certainly does suddenly monopolize psychotherapy. Freud's books certainly are doing well out there on the bookstores. The additional training, aside from a brush-up for the individual in the doctorate school, will include, according to my present plans here, a fast review of Freudian psychoanalysis to the end of obtaining a fast and certain command of diagnosis and definition as outlined by Sigmund Freud. Next a command of philosophy as represented in the books of Will Durant which give a fast and accurate review. Next, a fast glance through of general semantics, although it looks at this time as though I will have to write a short enough book as none of the books now existing are sufficiently comprehensive to be susceptible to easy teaching. Further, we have made certain changes in the subject. Next, a history of psychotherapy. Next, an outline of psychology, experimental psychology and psychiatry as practiced. Next, a short look at a study of giant brains of the electronic type. Naturally a person could not possibly assimilate that in a short time. Therefore what we are going to do is give him once-over-lightly, make sure he's absolutely on the beam with this additional subject matter, give him some extended training in Scientology itself, and then, with his work assigned, direct him after he leaves the doctorate school in a long course of study which may continue at least a year. At the end of that time he must have produced various results, have case histories to submit, have applied Scientology in some specific illness or field, and be able to pass examinations on the subjects I've just listed. In this way, we will get a trained expert in the field of the humanities. And we will, furthermore, be able to point to our doctors as people who, although very intensively trained for a short period, did long and arduous work in the actual field under our supervision. And we'll be able to claim that with their professional formal training and their field work, we are the best trained people in the world on the subject of the humanities. In other words, from the poorest trained, we intend very thoroughly to graduate into the best trained. An HCA, for instance, could undertake a study of the work as outlined after he leaves an associate school, take his doctorate training at any time in the future from then on. It would be necessary for him to go to a doctorate school, but it doesn't matter whether he goes to it in the first part of his year or in the last part. The point is that there is just so much information he will have to soak up, and just so many hours he will have to put in in a classroom. Therefore it is up to the Associate to turn out a good, solid, accurate auditor who, by rote if necessary, can resolve any and all kinds of cases, and who is capable of understanding and applying the goals of Scientology. This is the HCA by definition. Although I hadn't particularly counted upon it, all the above work I have outlined in the doctorate school depends to a large degree upon my burning the midnight oil and boiling it down into acceptable material, so that people can be trained on it. Actually, the amount of actual data involved in the above subject is slight. It is our 344 purpose to teach what data was or is on that subject, not to teach what somebody's concept of that subject was, but to teach what was basically considered to be that subject. No brief, accurate textbook exists on any of those subjects, and this writing is quite in addition to the writing I mentioned earlier, which is getting Scientology straightened around; so you can see I will be quite busy. Turning out a synthesis of a subject when you have Scientology to orient that subject is, however, quite simple; although the experts in those subjects would faint when you said that. You could state Freudian psychoanalysis from beginning to end in 5,000 words. I hope you are aware of the fact that the Axioms as such have not suffered any damage in later work and are as valid today as they were. There are a couple of higher level Axioms and there are more Axioms just ahead of the first Axioms, but these do not sweep aside or knock out any of the later Axioms. Thus, I hope you include training in the Axioms along with your regular curriculum. I have found out that auditors who knew the Axioms did a tremendous job of auditing and auditors who didn't know the Axioms sooner or later wandered off to practicing Indian swamp ritual or some other offbeat practice. You can find data in these Newsletters for working preclears and data to add to your training and perhaps be tipped off way in advance before anything happens, thus bringing you up to a better level of security about what's going on. L. Ron Hubbard 345  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 31 iDate=10/5/53 Volnum=0 Issue=1 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  GENERAL COMMENTS, GROUP PROCESSING and A SUMMARY OF NEW WORK: CERTAINTIES    P.A.B. No. 1 PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN From L. RON HUBBARD Via The Office of L. Ron Hubbard 30 Marlborough Place, London N.W.8 10 May 1953 GENERAL COMMENTS, GROUP PROCESSING and A SUMMARY OF NEW WORK: CERTAINTIES This is the first issue of the Professional Auditor's Bulletin, mailed as of May 10, 1953, from 30 Marlborough Place, London N.W.8. It will be followed from time to time, probably every fortnight, with its successive issues. The bulletin is airmailed where the professional auditor to whom it is going has provided airmail postage, a sum of $10 for one year of 26 issues. It is sent regular mail to all others. Airmail arrives into the United States and other parts of the world in four days. Regular mail arrives in seventeen days. The cost of the bulletin is covered in the professional membership fees of the HAS and although I am putting it out and paying for it, it is to be considered a service of the HAS. The content of this bulletin is technical and promotional. Its intent is to give you and your preclears the best possible processes and processing available at the moment it becomes available. And it intends to assist you in getting preclears. And it intends to arm you with statistics which will make your arguments stick. And it hopes also to help us organize into a team and coordinate our work with the associates and groups. Its outright intent is to make professional auditors as a class wealthy and respected. Why this sudden burst of enthusiasm from Ron after all these years of comparative silence? The answer is SOP 8, SOP 8A, SHORT 8, SHORT 8A. I've up and took "El Caney."* In September of 1950 I found that the science wasn't working too well for many on many cases. I forthrightly and loudly said that I was going to leave business and organization alone and continue with investigation until I had a process that worked fast for everybody on anybody. I said I was going to do that and let organizations go to hell if they did but that the subject would go as fast and far as it worked and that a fast, workable general process was the basic of a sound organization and that I would get that first. I continued to release everything I discovered and did what I could to keep up morale without actually going into organization itself. I didn't care who or what this antagonized or what it did to press or what rumors would start. The only answer to any problem we had was a fast, completely workable process. Parasitic publications, money mad millionaires, crooked, dishonest and incompetent management were not important when stacked up against a workable process for all. If you read the enclosed paper on what I am trying to do you will see that our very first goals, the control of the reactive mind and betterment of the analytical mind, are reached. Instead of reducing the reactive mind until it is tame, we detach the [*El Caney was a strategic village near Santiago, Cuba, which had to be taken by the American Rough Riders during the Spanish-American War before they could attack their intended main objective of the day which was San Juan Hill. See LRH comments in Child Scientology, Journal of Scientology 14G, April 1953, page 324.] 346 Now what will create that abundance? A group process which changes for the better the members of the group so much that they KNOW we have something will bring in members of that group for individual processing to a sufficient extent to keep us in a good state of solvency. We have that process in SHORT 8 or SHORT 8A. It gets around the fact that some people can't get mock-ups. By substituting tactile for sight, it even reaches the blind. How would we put this group processing formula to work? Well, the package is very standardized both as to procurement and delivery. Our slogan is "making the able more able" and our appeal is to people to increase the cultural level and production standards of the country. In a newspaper, a magazine, on the word-of-mouth line, by sending direct mail invitations to lists out of the classified phone directory (such as to all osteopaths or all registered nurses, etc., etc.) we collect, as an HCA, the first group. On a certain night, say Thursdays, of each week, we pack into our own quarters or into a hired room at a hotel, we process this group for two hours using SHORT 8 or RT 8A. We charge them nothing, not for the hall or anything else. We sell them nothing. But we have available certain things. First we have available a little sheet, neat and brief, even part of the first Pro Course Booklet, which says what SCIENTOLOGY is. Then we have, on the back of that sheet, what professional processing is, how much, and the name and address of the auditor of this group. We make clear on this sheet that our purpose in processing people is part of an international effort to make the able more able in order to bring about, in their fields, a bettered society for Man. We don't get glowing or fanatical and we don't condemn the existing society. Next we have available membership forms in the HAS, again making it clear that we don't care if anybody joins or not. The auditor collects, as a membership fee $12 10.0 or $7.50 U.S. and he sends #11.15.0 or, in the U.S., $5.00 to the main office of the HAS along with the form. The HAS makes out the card of membership and returns it to the member and sends as well, for one year, the magazine Scientology, a fact which is made plain on the form available for the group. On hand also is a form which requests special processing. This again has the auditor's name and phone number on it. But it doesn't pressure sell individual processing. Also to hand are various texts on Dianetics or Scientology. The auditor can procure these, in most cases, at a 30% discount from associates or the main HAS office. Revenue from books and memberships should itself pay the auditor well for processing a group, and pay the costs of mailings. But the auditor will have respect and effectiveness and response to the degree that he is casual about selling and to the degree that he stresses this as part of a program to raise the cultural level of Man by putting its leaders into a very high state of effectiveness, and other similar arguments. An auditor can also give the Group Auditor's Course for teachers and others but he will find this a convenience only and should not look to it to produce revenue beyond good public relations unless, of course, he has started out on the line of processing children by interesting teachers in processing children, as groups, with Self Analysis, as discussed in the Journal, Issue 14- G. An auditor can carry forward both programs. An associate, by advertising and direct mail procurement of people to be a member of groups, can turn off such persons to auditor's groups, benefiting only by training. And indeed, with auditors doing the auditing and associates doing training and general advertising and good will, all this not only could work out but is working out in several quarters. 348 Well you've got SOP 8A coming shortly. SOP 8, mild as it looks, tears cases to pieces and assembles new people. SHORT 8A is effective on both groups and individuals and is very easy to audit. You may cling to the idea that the pc has to suffer through engrams even if SOP 8 makes him well. If so, use some yourself. Waste some pain and find out why. And now your own case. A lot of auditors are here to help their own cases. SHORT 8A, if you have the persistence, if used without deviating from it, is a self-processing technique. And it can make you clearer than Book One ever could have made anybody. But nothing beats good auditing from a good auditor so look to you and another pro being a co-audit team. No pro can be audited by some pc he's taught. If he thinks he can, he's fooling himself. Write me. I've got answers here. You need me and I need you. So here, with PAB No. 1, let's get, as a team, a show on the road. L. RON HUBBARD SUMMARY OF NEW WORK -- MAY 8, 1953 CERTAINTY ITSELF IS KNOWLEDGE. A DATUM IS SECONDARY KNOWLEDGE. THE MOST CERTAIN CERTAINTY IS PERCEPTION. THE LEAST CERTAINTY EVALUATION. A triangle of certainties would indicate the following formula of certainties. There are three universe-types, on each one of which one can achieve a certainty. The most important of these types is one's own universe; the second most important is the MEST universe; the third most important is the class known as "others' universes." A certainty on each one of these universes could exist in each of three time categories. The most important of these is the present for each universe; the second most important of these from the standpoint of desirable certainty is the future of each universe; and the third most important of these is the past of each universe. Two conditions of certainty can exist for each class of universe and for each time aspect of universes, and one is a certainty that it exists and the other a certainty that it does not exist. Thus we have eighteen certainties derived from this formula. The rehabilitation, then, of any one of these certainties will find a resurgence in the case; the rehabilitation of all these certainties, if possible, would take one theoretically to the highest possible levels of the tone scale. In addition to these there is the certainty of controlling and a certainty of not controlling. There is also being the effect of these as a certainty and a cause of these as a certainty. As we proceed down from one's own universe, i.e. mock-ups, and a certainty that they are there, are not there, or can be controlled, we are going into important but less desirable certainties. This tells you why Self Analysis mock-up processing present time is such a desirable process. This process has the following advantages: 1. It unfixes the attention or remedies a dispersal of attention by putting one again into control of his attention. 2. It creates new space and, when one banishes the mock-up, it banishes space, which is to say uncreates space. 3. It opens communication, for communication is the interchange between an awareness viewpoint and a dimension point. 4. It creates beingness since beingness is dependent upon space. 5. It creates forms which one can be or destroys forms which one does not want to be in terms of his own universe. 6. It utilizes the control of objects. 349 By taking the catalogue of eighteen certainties and applying these steps or working out these steps in each one of them, one can see that one has an expanding perimeter of certainties. The most desirable certainty, of course, is certainty of one's own universe. From this all other things proceed. But the problem is enterable in any corner of the trianglee and the individual rehabilitates accordingly. Any point of this trianglee of universes or trianglee of certainties, if increased in certainty, will increase the certainty on the other two corners of the trianglee, and any suppression on any corner of the trianglee will suppress the other two corners of the trianglee. The professional auditor in processing this has these processes at hand, then: Differentiation in one universe: one object in the universe differentiated from a similar object in the same universe, and this for each of the universes, and including differentiation between thereness and not- thereness. Differentiation between one universe (which is to say, one corner of the trianglee) and another universe (or another corner of the trianglee) which is to say differentiation between one's own universe and the MEST universe, the MEST universe and another's universe, another's universe and one's own universe. Creation of objects for each universe and the destruction of objects for each universe. The task of the auditor would seem to be indicated under the heading of pulling apart or unconfusing one universe from another universe. For instance, one has no certainty whatever when his own universe is confused in his mind with the MEST universe, or when his own universe is confused in his mind with another's universe. The preclear has been making facsimiles continually of the MEST universe and has used the MEST universe as a pattern of the facsimile pattern of his own universe to such a degree that his own universe appears to be at first glance simply a duplicate of the MEST universe. Taking an object in the MEST universe and then putting a mock-up similar to it beside it and seeing the difference between the two, will resolve eventually not only this confusion but will resolve the automaticity which causes the preclear to continue to make facsimiles of the MEST universe. Of all these awarenesses, awareness of present-time circumstance of any of these universes simply rehabilitated in all forms of communication (by which is meant perception, not talk and ideas) simply continued on and on and on produces all the desirable results and gives a certainty to the future and the past and of the various aspects of these universes. You can see easily now that communication embraces both the creation of space, the beingness and performance of particles, and that greatest certainty exists at the instant of actual observation. Therefore the auditor is most interested in communication when he considers the relative values of communication, affinity and reality. COMMUNICATION What are the values of Affinity, Communication and Reality with relation to each other from the standpoint of behavior or the auditor? Affinity is type of energy and can be produced at will. Reality is agreement; too much agreement under duress brings about the banishment of one's entire consciousness. Communication, however, is far more important than affinity or reality, for it is the operation, the action, by which one experiences emotion and by which one agrees. 350 Communication is not only the modus operandi, it is the heart of life and is by thousands of percent the senior in importance to affinity and reality. And this is easily demonstrated, for only if the auditor concentrates on communication can he resolve problems, predict behavior and alter or control minds. Sharply then, alert to this value of communication and do not go on trying to make a thirst for love, make love all or a hope for agreement the all. The important answer is found always in the modus operandi of communication. Communication is at once the strongest hope for resolving any problem of behavior and the weakest commodity in the case one confronts. Fail to observe the singular magnitude of communication when evaluated against agreement and affinity and fail with cases. It almost does not matter what is communicated if it is communicated. The one test of aberration is communication lag index. How long does it take to get an answer from the preclear? He is as aberrated as he takes time. He has in the degree that he handles particles. The handling of particles, of motion is communication. Reality is the consideration of particles. Affinity is the opinion about particles and sensation. Consideration is not beingness. Opinion is not beingness. Only communication ranks with beingness. The only accurate test of whether or not a case is improved is whether or not there is a communication change. By communication change we also mean perception change. Perception is all. And any form of communication is known alone by perception. A thetan can be what he can see. He can see what he can be. If he can't see it as a thetan (not as MEST eyes) he can't be it. If he can't be it he can't see it. A viewpoint puts out anchor points. It now has space. How does it know it has anchor points out? Because it can see them. How does it know there are anchor points at all? Only because it can see them. Then how does it know it has space? Because it can perceive. How does it perceive? By knowing. By knowing a datum? No, by being certain. Knowingness is being certainness. One is as certain as he can communicate. He can communicate as well as he can be. Further, one is as responsible as one can communicate. One is not responsible for that with which he cannot communicate. One will fight only that with which he cannot communicate. How does one communicate? The method of permissible communication is via MEST. One places his ability into hands, eyes, etc. and by sound waves, light particles and others, communicates. He has "put the blame on MEST." Actually all these particles are his own immediate creations by agreed upon, implicitly believed ritual. His body, even the sun, are there because he co-believes with many other viewpoints that they are there. He mocks up the MEST universe continually as can be tested by comparison of a MEST universe terminal with a mock-up terminal many times, each time noting the difference. The circuit that automatically mocks up MEST comes to view and under control. Get an invalid by whatever means, pleasant or unpleasant, into communication with a withered limb and it will heal. It requires hours, perhaps, of massage (and the massage or sensation must be sufficiently irregular to continue to command his attention) but it will work, not because of faith but because of continuously commanding the invalid to perceive his leg. There are many levels of communication. The best is self-determined communication by postulate containing no effort. But any is better than none. 351 The best communication is by the thetan's own creation, dispatch and return of dimension points. That which he thus perceives is really real to him and he takes full responsibility for it. He puts out golden clouds of "flitter" in order to so perceive. Simply by putting out, by postulate, this flitter the occluded case can, after several times trying, unmask the black facsimile behind which he is hiding. This is direct thetan communication, the best. Beingness, communication, space are, in action, synonyms. The 0.2 case has no space. Get him to communicate, he has space. He may feel his body and facsimiles are rock hard. Get him to communicate, to waste anchor points in Expanded GITA (following) and be things and he becomes less aberrated, less in pain, less solid. If a person cannot communicate, if he has a long communication index lag, he has no great beingness, no space. Spacation (following) solves it, imitating beingness solves it doing routine mock-ups of any kind solves it (for these are anchor points which make space), and any communication betterment process solves it. Even finding present time solves it. Thus, see the role that communication plays in the game called Existence. THE DOUBLE TERMINAL ASSIST The process known as Double Terminaling is an ASSIST. As in the case of admiration processing, the running of double terminals cannot long be continued on a case without the benefit turning into a downgrade. The downgrade in tone, when reached, whether in a few hours or many with the process, indicates that a POSITIVE GAIN PROCESS is now indicated, for the preclear has, in running a negative gain process, come into an uncertainty. The state of uncertainty, whenever noticed or reached in any preclear, is remedied by the prompt use of such things as Self Analysis or certainties in any one of the three universes. One double-terminals as follows: He has the preclear mock up something or someone facing its duplicate, then he gets another such pair beside, in any position, the first pair. It will be noted that the mock-ups discharge one against the other like electrical poles. A double terminal may also consist of an unmatched pair such as a mock-up of a husband facing a wife and, parallel to this, the husband facing the wife again. Or a person facing an inanimate object, then, beside that pair, the same person as another mock-up facing the same object as another mock-up. It will be observed that when TWO pairs are used, there are, even so, only TWO COMMUNICATION LINES. The lines are more important than the terminals; one wants two communication lines, parallel to each other. This, of course, requires four terminals. Injuries, engrams, emotions, existing mental states, postulates, aberrative persons, deformed body members, either side of the body against the other side, anything, in short, that could be run in Dianetics can be double- terminaled. Accidents can be run out with particular ease with it. A Case V can double-terminal emotions or concepts although he cannot see the mock-up. In case the pc becomes ill acutely while double-terminaling, continue the action until the symptoms go away, for they are part of the operation. The pc unable to remain out of his body is a problem in terminals. The body as one terminal, and the pc as a thetan as the other terminal, snap together because the body is too heavily charged. Thus the pc cannot stay or even get outside. Have him mock up own body and create and uncreate space until he can stay out. [Enclosed with this PAB were SOP 8, Short 8 and "The Factors," which are also part of the Journal of Scientology 16-G, page 374.] 352  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 31 iDate=0/5/53 Volnum=0 Issue=2 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  GENERAL COMMENTS, SOP 8 and A SUMMARY OF SOP 8A GENERAL COMMENT    P.A.B. No. 2 PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN From L. RON HUBBARD Via Hubbard Communications Office 4 Marylebone High Street, London W.1 [1953, ca. end May] GENERAL COMMENTS, SOP 8 and A SUMMARY OF SOP 8A GENERAL COMMENT According to the letters I have been receiving SOP 8 fell like a minor bomb in some quarters: and all the letters are reporting the sudden resolution and dissolution of cases which had previously been considered very difficult. Some of the letters reflect the fact that none of the materials of Scientology had been available because the auditor had been out of touch. But the main thing which is being reflected is the sudden understanding of what I've been trying to do in Scientology. It had not occurred to many that the effort to treat the reactive mind was lengthily unnecessary if one could actually separate out the analytical mind and bring it up to a point where it could handle any reactive mind. Where we want the strength in validation is of course in the analytical mind. I went into this pretty thoroughly in Issue 15- G of the Journal of Scientology released a short time ago, and it is wonderful and beautiful to me (1) how auditors everywhere completely missed the point and (2) how I had overlooked telling them what the point was. It is very gratifying in some quarters that this realization alone makes us all friends again. I am also getting some early reports on groups and some suggestions concerning the handling. One of the suggestions is of very great interest. After one has a group formed and is group processing it, it is very well worth his while to take the names and addresses of his group members and make a personal call around on these people, without any formal appointment, and ask them how they're going along and if the group processing did them any good and so forth. This all by itself seems to produce the personal contact necessary with some to ask for private and personal auditing. This is a pretty easy thing to do after all. One simply makes sure that he gets the names and addresses of everyone who comes into the group and then one calls around on them personally after they've been there a time or two and finds out how they're getting along. The same auditor also remarked that most of his preclears came from the vicinity of preclears where his results had been successful, and that he did his best acquisition of preclears by writing to all of his old preclears at regular intervals and asking them how they're getting along. In other words, after he'd processed a preclear, he made a point, about a week later, of writing him a letter asking him how he was getting along. About three weeks after that he wrote him another letter. About a month after that he wrote him another letter. And then he let a period of about three months elapse and wrote him again. This quite often produced an additional intensive run and it certainly produced, in the vicinity of the preclear, new preclears. I have also received the comment that hardly any auditors ever took me at my word when I said that one could simply go out on the street and stop people who had 353 things obviously wrong with them, make an appointment and process the person and get paid for it. Every auditor who has tried this has found that it was a successful method of getting the word around. One simply stopped somebody on the street, inquired after his health, asking him how he got that way. Then he simply tells him he's going to give him some processing. An auditor who has a professional card on him with a definition of Scientology printed on the back of it, can give the person a card, but he should not count on the person to make any advance because that person is out of communication. If a person has anything wrong with him, that person can be reached but that person will not reach. Therefore it's up to the auditor to do the reaching. If he sits and waits for the public to come to him, the public who has anything wrong with it cannot and will not come to him simply because they cannot reach out away from themselves and communicate, but they can be communicated to and can be reached, and are actually quite obedient to anybody who reaches to them. This is such a workable method of getting a practice going that we are considering installing it as a necessary act in professional training. I received a letter not long ago from an auditor who had gone around the manufacturing plants and had pushed his way in to see a big enough name to get action with the proposition that he cut down the loss of work hours of the company by giving emergency treatment to absentees who were just then costing the company money. He also stated that he was able to walk through plants and pick up the names and addresses of people who were absent and then tell the management he was going to send them back to work, which he did. This was intensively productive of interest, and was quite remunerative. Remember and do not forget that in the building of a practice and its continuance, one is dealing only with people who can be reached but who will not reach. These people are dramatizing "must not reach," but only a few of them are dramatizing "must not be reached"; and all of them can be reached but it is up to the auditor to go out and do the reaching. Any occluded case is actually dramatizing to some degree "must not be reached." An auditor who is an occluded case is liable to take himself out of the general swim and wait for the lame, halt and blind to come to him. The lame, halt and blind do not come to him for the simple reason that they are waiting for him to come to them. They do not know he exists. Many of you would consider it brassy in the extreme to go from house to house down one block after another and ask at each door if there were anybody chronically ill in the household; then explain what he was there for and say he was going to straighten them out and make an exact statement that his fee was so-and-so. An auditor who would not do such a thing actually is going to have a poor practice. An auditor who would not do such a thing is suffering from stage fright. Under new techniques which you will know about, this auditor should simply run the concept in brackets: "Audiences exist" "Audiences do not exist", and not fumble about any uncertainties but simply run the positive and negative of the fact that audiences do and do not exist. This stage fright will turn on and off and go away; and after that he can go out and procure preclears. He can run in concepts, mock-ups or in brackets "People exist" "People do not exist" and without touching any in-betweens discover, after he's done quite a bit of this, that he's capable of reaching people. In order to have any kind of a practice it is necessary for the auditor to reach people because the practice which he will build will be built out of people who must not reach. Anybody who has anything wrong with any part of his body simply cannot get into communication with it. This means he cannot reach that part of his body. If a person cannot reach a part of his body how can he reach another person? And how can he reach an auditor? An auditor who waits for people to come and apply to his group for entrance, who waits for preclears to come and knock at the door, is liable to sit there for a very long time. He must practice on quite a few people in any given area before the word starts to get around. All he has to have is a few successful cases and the word will begin to get 354 around and people who can reach will be bringing around people who can't reach. But even so, this is a slow way to go about it. The number of hours of auditing which preclears need is steadily reducing and an auditor could actually start building his practice in terms of very short sessions, seeing a great many people for a very short time rather than seeing one person for a long time. It has been observed that a lot of auditors impede their practice by standing around trying to explain what Scientology or Dianetics is to somebody. A patient doesn't want to know what Dianetics or Scientology is: he wants to get well. The auditor is most successful with new preclears who simply says, "I am a consulting Scientologist; we handle all sorts of human difficulties and malfunctions. Now what's yours?" And sails on from there to get results. By explaining there is something new in the world he is immediately bringing the preclear into the state of uncertainty of "Will it work or won't it work?" Burke Belknap wrote in to say that one of the first things he did with a preclear was to run concepts on the basis of auditors were no good, the thing wouldn't work on him, nothing would ever change. This is very excellent. Under present techniques this could be run in this fashion: "Nothing will ever change" "Everything is going to change." One runs this in concepts, mock-ups, brackets, and runs it until he has a preclear that's going to change. It doesn't take very long to do this. He will immediately discover that the preclear isn't changing because the preclear's afraid that if he starts to change, everything will go into complete confusion. When the preclear discovers it doesn't, he is then willing to change. You could work the most beautiful techniques in the world on a pc who was trying madly to stay stable, and produce nothing if you did not first shake loose the fear of change. You are trying to change this pc's communication lines, therefore it's necessary for you to hit the case on the basis of change. Another thing: you want to make your pc more aware; he will get as well as he becomes aware. If you want anybody to become aware, you have to raise their communication line. If a person is madly holding onto communication shut-offs, how can he become more aware? The test as to whether or not a case is getting well is whether or not that case suffers a communication change. The communication lag index is the most important method of telling whether or not a person is sick or well. A person who answers quickly (and rationally) is in much better condition than a person who answers after a long consideration. A person who's being impartial, conservative, etc., is hung up on a maybe so hard that it would take tugs to get him off. One old-time auditor has written in to tell me that auditing still remains an art and no matter how hard I try to teach it as a rote, it will still be an art. This has some truth in it. Therefore, if an auditor wants a pc to get well, the auditor had better be a shining example of something that is well. This in itself inspires certainty and confidence. More important than this, a person has to have a very high level of communication before he can indulge in art. One is actually to date creating new people rather than repairing old, broken down homo sapiens. Creation is the work of the artist. In order to do very well, run "something can be created" "Nothing can be created" on himself until he recovers all those artistic impulses of his youth. True enough, it will help his auditing. I recently had an interesting example of how case level influences the numerousness of a practice and the number of results which an auditor got. Two auditors were in the same area. One had had a lot of successes and had a good practice; the other had had several failures and had a very poor practice, and was, in fact, thinking of chucking it all when SOP 8 and the Group came out and revived his activities. The second auditor was an occluded case. Now, with these techniques which take apart an occluded case, there isn't any excuse for an auditor to be occluded and be low in tone. By the way a trained Scientologist can to a marked degree audit himself. This isn't 355 possible for somebody who isn't trained in the subject because that somebody runs across all sorts of computations and circuits and starts to figure, figure, figure, and almost drives himself mad because he's into so many maybes. A person can stay in the field of certainty and audit himself. He's got to have enough training and enough sense to stay in the field of certainties and not wander off into uncertainties and speculations. Anybody who starts self-auditing should audit to technique which is laid out in front of him. Anything I am giving you in the way of technique in this bulletin can be done by an individual on himself. However, he should be very careful not to stray off. The technique starts exciting circuits into action and the auditor starts doing figure, figure, figure, which is very far from certainty. In Issue 16-G, which may be a bit delayed, I am laying out this whole subject of Scientology as "science of Certainty." Scientology deals now in nothing but certainties. Those things which are uncertainties, such as metaphysics, spirits, other worlds, space opera, whole track, GE Line, are all being put into the bin called para-Scientology. The auditing we do is directed towards the establishment of certainties, and in itself works only with certainties. Prenatals, engrams and facsimiles -- anything which anybody would consider uncertain does not belong on the main line. What is the level of awareness which we will accept as being a level of awareness? It would be: Can a man stand looking at a tree and know that he is standing there looking at a tree, or if he is blind, can he stand there and feel a tree and know that he is feeling a tree? This man is sufficiently aware to be considered for our purposes fairly sane. Awareness goes from there on up into expanding certainties. How aware is awareness? It is as aware as it is certain. What is knowledge? Knowledge is certainty. Is data knowledge? No, data is not knowledge. A certainty is knowledge. Therefore knowledge depends upon perception. Is certainty an absolute? No, it is relative. What are the two ends of the spectrum of certainties? Here you're looking straight at the theta-MEST theory. There is nothing, there is something. Here you have the nothingness of the static and the somethingness of all motion. Now, what are we considering, then, at the bottom level of all acceptable certainty? It is a certainty when one is standing looking at a tree and one sees a tree; or, if one can't see, having no MEST vision, one can feel a tree: that is certainty. And that is the bottom level of certainty that we're going to accept as a certainty. What's the top level of certainty? Well, we're not interested in the top level of certainty because it goes too high to observe. In the last bulletin I talked about three universes. There are numbers of viewpoints of these universes and one is as certain as he is certain of these three universes. But one can become more certain than that to the degree that he is aware. Communication establishes awareness as a mechanism. The three universes give us something of which to be aware. Therefore, this perception is in itself certainty and this certainty is in itself knowledge and thus we can achieve what we would consider an acceptable certainty. What is an acceptable certainty? It is a certainty that the three universes exist in terms of perceptions: one's own universe, the MEST universe and the other fellow's universe. When we have established these, we will find that an individual can assume viewpoints which are not dependent upon the body and can perceive these universes as an analytical mind directly. We don't ask anybody to be certain of this until it happens. Thus from these three certainties with MEST eyes, we go into these three certainties on a direct level. What we will call a "stability" for want of a better word at this time and to replace the word "clear" about which there is a tremendous amount of confusion, would be one who can, without the assistance of MEST eyes, perceive with complete certainty the three universes from many viewpoints. We reach this state with a person by leading him up the gradient scale of certainties, taking him at the certainty level where we find him, wherever that is -- even if it is psychotic, neurotic or normal level -- and raising him on upscale until he is certain of his own universe, the MEST universe and other people's universes. You have observed the phenomenon of people who were theta exteriors getting back into the body and not being able to get out again. This is because they were 356 actually insufficiently aware and because they ran into this one single aberration: "They must not reach away from MEST." If you think for a moment that it is the purpose of Scientology to produce something intensely spectacular like a ghost that can move cigarette papers or mountains, you have definitely gotten the wrong idea. We are interested in well men, we are interested in people with well bodies who think straight and who co-operate on optimum solutions. We are not making magicians. There are a great many things which a thetan or the analytical mind can do, but all these, until you are certain of them, belong in the field of para-Scientology and are only interesting data. We have no interest in their truth or untruth. If you start filling your pc full of an education about the whole track and electronic incidents and other doubtful things, you are giving him more and more uncertainties and he'll start on down tone scale. By giving him a gradient scale of certainties, you will surely and securely bring him up the line to stability. The actual horrible truth of the matter is that an individual below the level of what we are calling "stability," will continue throughout the remainder of his life going on down tone scale. We can make a 4.0 in Dianetics by very arduously swamping up via negative-gain processing the reactive mind, and he will remain relatively stable and with greater longevity, and is as defined in the first book; but we have not put aside the normal course of ageing in the body nor have we completely proofed this individual against the shocks and upsets of existence which would come from new incidents of pain and unconsciousness. It has been completely overlooked that the first "clear" was a relative thing and definitely not an absolute thing. It was an intensely hard thing to gauge. An auditor had to be a very good expert on the subject to produce anything like a 4.0 because the uncertainty in the auditor himself about what he was doing would introduce uncertainties into the pc and so would impede the processing. I fought this for a couple of years before I got it through my own head that pcs reacted to my certainty, got their recalls back simply because I was certain they would, and were content to drill never beyond their own depth but always in the level of what they could reach when they could reach it. A few auditors achieved this but they were all certain people. Even so we got lots of clears, but the bashfulness of the beast dropped him out of sight, for everybody insisted on making a circus curiosity of him and everybody was so uncertain about his state that they very often took an uncertain clear and turned him into an aberree again. I have had this thing happen to theta clears. Man is not exactly kind to his fellow man. Man is basically good, but, believe me, he has a long way to travel up the tone scale to reach that basic goodness. If you don't believe that Man can be slightly unkind, look what the more aberrated amongst us say about yours truly. Now you have some sort of idea about what I mean by a positive-gain process. A positive-gain process is a positive-gain of certainty; a negative- gain process, although it eradicates engrams and alters the pattern of behavior of the individual, actually makes that individual at times more uncertain than before, for he has been plunged into things he didn't know were there and in fact has been made wrong. If you keep on using negative-gain processes such as erasure, remember to back them up right away with positive- gain processes. Otherwise you've not brought the pc up toward being a "stability." Now in the last bulletin I told you I'd resolved this problem and sent to most of you SOP 8, "The Factors" and Short 8. I sent those along so you could get acquainted with them, not because they contain all the basic information you should have to work them. There is a philosophy and goal behind that modus operandi which must be employed in order to produce the results which are expected. And you don't have the final technique on this, for that requires the essay which follows. There is a whole process which is devoted to and dedicated solely to cases of Step IV and V. This we call SOP 8A. SOP 8 solves these when they are not too bad, but SOP 8A should be immediately employed the moment it is discovered the pc's very uncertain of his own 357 mock-ups or if he is occluded. The IV and V steps work in SOP 8 but there is a much faster way of going about it which blows the occluded case. Within these faster processes and SOP 8A we also resolve at one fell swoop special kinds of trouble; any pc who steps up with a special somatic or a special worry is run on SOP 8A. It then is actually an office technique and in 10 or 15 minutes produces quite marked changes in the individual. I will not say how many hours it takes to resolve a completely occluded case, since some cases are more occluded than others, but it doesn't take very many hours. All this got shockingly simple, and if you don't do it simply, you're simply working yourself unnecessarily, putting the pc through a lot more things than he should go through. In the first place, in the use of SOP 8A, we omit any explanations to the pc. If he happens to know Dianetics or Scientology, that's tough, but it is included in the techniques of SOP 8A. These things can be self-audited, but remember, auditor, that they can only be self-audited by a trained Scientologist. These buttons are hot. It is not even a dramatic statement to say that one had to walk along the edge of hell to find these techniques and that these techniques lie straight through insanity itself. Thus, when one is auditing a pc, he can expect momentarily, even in one he has considered very sane, fantastic reactions. An auditor recently mentioned to me that everyone around a certain area considered anything I had labelled as "unlimited technique" and a "positive- gain technique" as a necessarily faint or weak technique. Just because a thing could be done forever seemed to indicate also that it was weak in its operation. The matter of two anchor points to the back corner of the room and holding them there was considered by the auditors round the area to be a faint technique. Actually that is about the hottest technique you ever threw a pc into. To understand this you will have to understand that "reach" and nothing but "reach" is in itself the basic center of the hurricane called insanity. You have somebody reaching with theta energy to the corners of the room. He is not supposed to reach away from MEST. You could run simply the concept of must not reach away from MEST and produce some very interesting results in an individual. When a person has been told to hold the corners of the room in this fashion as in SOP 8, an auditor should expect repercussions, if not during the session, certainly during the next day or two. The technique has to be done over and over because there is an enormous amount of material which it sets loose. The individual is made thereby to let go both sides of the engram. He is holding the engram in to him and not knowing that he is doing so and he feels the effect of doing so and holds it out from him. You're asking him simply to let go and reach MEST. He's reached MEST, he's not supposed to reach away from it. Certainly all of his old holds on the bank will disappear and the technique is very effective and it can be done for long periods of time. Do not think for a moment it is a faint technique; it definitely isn't. Any of those unlimited techniques are powerful above and beyond running engrams as the Empire State Building is bigger than a doll house. So make up your mind to the fact that you have a handful of dynamite. You have to use it for a little while to discover this and then use it for a little while longer to be certain that, carried through, it brings about the desired result. It is definitely none of my business how you apply these techniques. I am no policeman ready with boards of ethics and court warrants to come down on you with a crash simply because you are "perverting Scientology." If there is any policing done, it is by the techniques themselves, since they have in themselves a discipline brought about by their own power. All I can do is put into your hands a tool for your own use and then help you use it. Now one further comment: There is a further issue of "The Factors" which contains two or three new lines. The basic motivation and the reason behind the decision to be is the desire or curiosity, the enforcement and inhibition of production 358 of effects. Don't mistake it for a moment and think this is not the center button. It is the reason behind beingness: the production of effects, the enforcement of effects, the nullification of effects. All the pc is trying to do when he first comes to you is to produce an effect upon you; don't forget this. He is using sickness to produce effects. Any effect is better than no effect. Anything is better than nothing. Any sensation is better than no sensation. Any circuit is better than no circuit. And as far as badness and goodness are concerned, these things are evaluations, determined by viewpoint. So anything bad is better than nothing. This should explain human behavior to you as nothing before did. What is your pc trying to do? He's trying to produce an effect. How sick is he? He's as sick as he has to be in order to produce an effect. If he's sick at all, it means that he hasn't been able to produce effects without being sick. If you try to take away from him the modus operandi of producing effects, i.e. his service facsimile or his sickness, you're in for trouble. Thus you have to rehabilitate in him the belief that he can produce effects and that he could obtain good effects from others. His goal is to produce effects upon others and obtain good effects from others; that's all his goal and that's why he's being what he is being. That is the reason behind the decision. You've many times asked what is the reason for all this? The answer is to produce an effect. What is the basic mechanical operation of producing an effect? It is reaching, pushing and pulling. Reaching is the keynote of this. What is the basic certainty? The basic certainty is dual; there is a positive and a negative certainty; there is no in-between certainty: there either is an effect or there isn't an effect, so the basic certainties are "There is an effect" "There is no effect." The next basic certainty to that is "There is no beingness" "There is beingness." I am not going to try to give you very much in this bulletin. There are other bulletins to follow. I want to know whether or not you want these bulletins. Thus I am writing down here the basic heart of SOP 8A which follows: A SUMMARY OF SOP 8A In order to be and to produce effects one must have knowledge. Knowledge is certainty. Certainty is awareness. Awareness change is the indication of effect. One must then be able to produce changes of awareness, which is merely changes in communication, in order to be certain he has produced an effect. Certainty of the production of effects and uncertainty as to the production of effects are the up and down of lifetimes. "There is something here" "There is nothing here" are the basic certainties of beingness. One runs a chronic somatic simply by picking out an area of the body which is painful or numb and having that area of the body alternately state to the pc by having him run the statements in that area or having him run feelings which approximate the statements in that area "There is nothing here" "There is something here," "There is nothing there" "There is something there." Does one for a moment ask what the something is or let the pc evaluate about the something or nothing? No, he certainly doesn't. All manner of queer sensations, covertnesses, malice and so forth turn on in the areas; we're not even vaguely interested in these reactions and these effects. The pc will try to pass them off on us as effects; we're not interested in that, we're interested in getting that area of the body alive or over its pain. Any numb area of the body run in this fashion will recover feeling; any pain in the body any place will recover a normal state if this is done. To realize the full value of SOP 8A one must know something about entities. The pc has compartmented off various parts of the body for which he takes no further responsibility. These appear to be individuals operating against him. Actually these parts of the body have individual characteristics and answer up on E-Meters. These are basically demon circuits but they are the things which produce the circuits; they are 359 the things which hold on to facsimiles, they are not themselves facsimiles. Each one of these is holding on to numerous facsimiles, and they supply these facsimiles to the pc. The pc says he's not responsible for this. We run in each area where there is any disturbance, first in the pc and then as though it's happening out in front of the pc alternately, "There is something here" "There is nothing here," "There is something there" "There is nothing there." This knocks out the entities and, therefore, automatically knocks out the mechanisms which are making the pc sick. We don't care whether there are entities or aren't entities; it's simply that he is certain that something is deviling him from a certain area. He is certain of this; we can be certain of it because he complains of it. We use this technique to knock it out. The word "entity" simply designates an area of the body which has an independent point of communication. Going back to the theory of epicenters, one then finds that there is a sub- brain in various parts of the body. When one is dealing with a Case IV or V, he is dealing with the reactive mind and he has to take apart the reactive mind to some degree in order to produce freedom for the analytical mind. The epicenters would be such parts of the body as the "funny bones" or any "judo sensitive" spots: the sides of the neck, the inside of the wrist, the places the doctors tap to find out if there is a reflex. These things are sub-brains picked up on the evolutionary line probably -- we're not even interested in where they come from, we're not even interested in the pictures they hold; we are interested in the fact that they have a monitoring effect on the body and the individual. We run these on the above techniques and we produce a considerable change in the reaction in communication of the individual. We recall at all times while running this technique that we are dealing with a positive in the vague certainty, but nevertheless certainty, of "something," and in the negative certainty of "nothing." And what do we have here? We have the theta-MEST theory. How simple is this problem? This problem is the direct application of the theta-MEST theory to auditing as directly as it can be applied. Life is essentially nothing but something which can produce an effect. There is one thing Life must not be and that is nothing. You can run on a pc as a matched or double terminal "I can be nothing" "I can be something," "I can be nothing" "I can be something" and produce a considerable release in him since he has been forcing himself all along the line to be something so that he could produce effects, and he has never been able to be anything. Of course he can't be anything, he is nothing. Fear of being nothing, then, is the driving fear. "There is no future" "There is a future." These are essentially dichotomies, but they are more precise dichotomies than we have ever run before. We handle the whole problem of pictures simply in this fashion. "There are no pictures" "There are pictures." Any occluded case vaguely remembers having recalled pictures. Pictures start to turn on when this is run or start to drop out. We can apply this to any mechanism, and we can apply it with creative processing, we can apply it with any concept running, we can apply it with brackets, we can apply it with matched terminals. A matched terminal is simply a mock-up, no matter how black, facing a mock-up. Why is the occluded case occluded? He actually isn't occluded, he's holding on to the last certainty he has anything to do with. There are several things which turn a case black. One is the defection of a friend. This is the loss of another viewpoint. Another is simply loss, and loss in any form. What happens when an individual loses something? He starts holding on to any certainty he can hold on to. The most certain certainty he can hold on to is blackness. No light or painted object is as certain as a completely black object. Blackness is an effort to disappear and hide. Blackness has many uses. When blackness shows up, one can run "can't reach" and he will have wider blacknesses there. 360 A person gets into blackness which is like glue. This can be run on the positive-negative basis of "There is something" "There isn't anything." Does one run this to agree with how long the blackness stays on and when it turns white and when it turns black again? No, one does not, because this is agreement with the MEST universe. One runs these things almost at random. Betrayal is the action of having things pounded in and held against one. Ridicule is the action of having something taken out away from one and held there where one cannot reach it. Both of these things are matters of reaching. If one wants to go on and run reaching concepts one must be prepared to run into the hottest of suppressions and the hottest compulsions he has ever been called upon to handle. It may be necessary to run some of these. However, the concepts of "There is something here" "There isn't anything here," "There are pictures here" "There are no pictures here," "Pictures can affect me" "Pictures cannot affect me" and particularly "There is change" "There is no change" produces superior results to running reaching. One must know about this button reaching because it is THE button of insanity. Compulsion to reach and the inability to reach combined produce a state of mind which one wouldn't wish on anyone. Sex plays a very heavy part in all of this because it is the symbolism of mock-ups and many other things. Thus one would do well to run "There are men" "There aren't men," "There are women" "There aren't women," "There is sensation" "There isn't sensation" in order to resolve this problem. But basically below all this there is "There is something here" "There is nothing here," "There is something there" "There is nothing there." Does one pay any particular attention to blackness? Yes, sometimes it is necessary. It will be found in an occluded case that one side of a body is blacker than the other. This comes about from an old imbalance of control centers. One control center is reaching and ignoring the other control center. The control center which is ignored and can't reach is black. Thus one finds the blackest part of the body that part of the body which is the most disabled by the other part of the body. Fears of war and of anarchy inside the body which come about in terms of control centers have nothing to do with the analytical mind. The analytical mind is very puzzled as to why this body is suddenly so disobedient. One can run the basic combination of something and nothing here, something and nothing there on the body or on an idea of the body. Is it better to run things in the body or away from the body? It is usually better to run things away from the body as this has the effect of putting out anchor points. When one runs too many things close to the body, one has the effect of concentrating the individual's attention on his own body. This actually has a tendency to collapse his space. Thus these concepts should be run at a distance from the body. One handles one of these concepts as long as the pc can hold it there as "certain there is nothing" or "certain there is something." This is very beneficial in terms of matched terminals. One runs matched terminals by having the pc put them up as though they were himself facing himself and then as though somebody else is putting them up facing somebody else on the same concept and on others putting them up for others. In this way, one runs out matched terminals and brackets simultaneously, a combination of techniques which is very effective. Does the pc have to have a mock-up in order to put up a feeling or concept in front of him? No. It must be kept in mind that the basic disability of the pc is to reach away from MEST; it is not to reach MEST and it is not not to reach MEST; it is the disability to reach away from MEST. MEST has a gravitic attraction for him and he's gotten to the point where he can't escape it and therefore all of his space is collapsing. 361 It will be discovered that running any of the techniques of SOP 8 on a positive-negative basis on a low level case is beneficial. Thus one has a V level case with his MEST eyesight compare two MEST objects which are similar and then see nothing in those two spots with his MEST eyes. This runs "there is something," "there is nothing." He can do this. You have to run these alternates on a IV and V because he's incapable of getting up to a level of disobedience of MEST laws. One wants to get him up to a disobedience of MEST laws as fast as possible because this gets him into command of energy rather than being the effect of energy. The trouble with a V is that he cannot permit himself to be reached while he himself must reach. This can be run directly or much more swiftly with the basic technique. In view of the fact that one is holding on to blackness because it is a certainty, one has to have a higher level of certainty on something else before he can let go of any of the blackness. The more MEST one loses, the more sensation one is suddenly denied, the less one feels he can create, the more one has to hold on to any certainty he can reach; and when that certainty is as low a level as blackness, an auditor really has to do some auditing in order to give the individual a high enough level of certainty so that he can let go some of the blackness. The blackness is being held in place in most instances by things which are no longer under the control of the pc. Thus it is an automatic holding-in-place. The pc is not directly doing this himself. This is a preview of the process. The only thing that one must do and be careful of in the process is to keep the preclear from figuring, thinking, guessing, wondering and so forth. One has to deal in certainties; the certainty of nothing and the certainty of something are the basic certainties of life itself. SOP 8A attacks the problem of uncertainty armed with new and important data which ranks with the discovery of the engram. The first is that certainty is knowledge and knowledge is certainty. Art itself is certainty, and where one has failed in the arts, he has failed simply because too many uncertainties have been introduced. The anatomy of maybe could be restated as the anatomy of uncertainty; and with this I have evolved the fact that uncertainty stays in suspension in time simply because one is holding on so hard to certainties. Thus by processing out the certainty on any subject, one processes out at will, paying no attention to it, the uncertainties on that subject. One does not process the uncertainties, one processes the certainties. The pc's holding on to the certainties and trying to avoid the uncertainties; thus the uncertainties are available for processing. The techniques I evolved to take care of this concern brackets, matched and double terminaling in terms of brackets; which is to say a person putting a thought out in front of him facing another thought for himself, having two thoughts out there as though placed there by somebody else, and having two others placing thoughts out there for others. This can be done by the most occluded case. It can also be done by mock-ups and one gets an automatic discharge on the double terminal system. This runs out and exhausts aberrative material. The things which are there to be exhausted are the certainties. The auditor who possesses uncertainties is playing into the hands of aberration. The next important datum is the matter of viewpoint. People have viewpoints confused. Viewpoint is only a point of awareness from which one can perceive. That is an actual viewpoint. People think of viewpoints as a method of thinking about something from a certain attitude. This is an uncertain affair and is a circuit. If one can see something completely, he certainly doesn't do a lot of supposing and predicting about it. One must get rid of the circuit compulsions in order to get perception. The greatest scarcity is the scarcity of viewpoints. This brings him out to the point where he thinks he's avoiding other people's opinions. Opinions are unimportant. The points of awareness from which things can be viewed are important; and this law comes forward with this: That a person most heavily uses the viewpoint of another when the other has evaluated for him. Any person is heavily using the viewpoints of people who have 362 evaluated for him. Thus, where he has had an ally who is dead, he has once had a viewpoint which was alive and now can no longer use that viewpoint. This is the basic loss and the basic occlusion. It is the loss of a viewpoint. If mother, father, grandmother, grandfather, etc., at all evaluated greatly for the pc, then the pc's using their viewpoints. He is as occluded as he has lost these people; hence his blackness. The viewpoint has arrested it somewhere in time and he cannot see beyond that spot; this brings him into the past. He is doing a life continuum and is in the valence of that person who has evaluated the most for him. The technique to run is being able to reach and not being able to reach other viewpoints. These life continuums show up automatically and, more importantly, they resolve. Another factor which has arisen here is the fact that one wants a viewpoint in order to create an effect and therefore will assume the viewpoints of those who create the greatest effects. Running in matched terminal brackets "I (he, she, it, they) have a viewpoint" "I (he, she, it, they) do not have a viewpoint," "I (he, she, it, they) do not want viewpoints" "I (he, she, it, they) want viewpoints," "I (he, she, it, they) cannot reach a viewpoint" "I (he, she, it, they) can reach a viewpoint" "gunshots" the reactive mind and the thetan and resolves all of his aberrations of whatever kind. One runs these only so long as the person runs them in a mood of certainty. The moment he gets uncertain (which will show up on an E-Meter) he switches over and runs the other side of the dichotomy from that which he was running. He holds each one as long as he is certain; he uses this technique simply over and over. Where one has spotted a specific life continuum, he runs "I have the viewpoint of (grandfather, grandmother, mother, rather)" "I do not have the viewpoint of (the person)" and reversely "(The person) has my viewpoint" "(The person) does not have my viewpoint." He runs this in matched terminals and brackets. Of course, the reversal of to reach is withdraw; reach away from is not quite the same as withdraw, but withdraw serves. That which is wrong with a V is that he cannot withdraw from MEST and MEST and engrams will not withdraw from him. He is in a situation where he hopes he cannot be reached and that "they" will never reach him. His conviction that he cannot withdraw is such as it would never enter his mind unless an auditor told him to run it. The idea of withdrawing or anything withdrawing from him is novel and unsupportable. Immediately below this, of course, there is a level where everything has withdrawn from the person. This is handled by "(Any dynamic) will not withdraw" "(Any dynamic) will withdraw" and is assisted by running "They will reach me" and "They will never reach me" and running with "Bodies will not withdraw" "Bodies do withdraw," and this is assisted by running "There is space" "There is no space." The glee of insanity and other manifestations show up. One must remember to run whenever he touches these reach and withdrawal techniques, the certainty that there is something there and the certainty that there is nothing there afterwards, because the phenomena which show up in running such techniques are so explosive that they leave a V considerably unsettled. He must then reach a certainty on the matter by running out the certainties of something and the certainties of nothing. This is actually all there is to the solution of a Case V. He has an uncertainty about everything. He has to figure about everything; he has to know before he goes, and he has to hide but he knows he can't hide, and he depends on logic to serve for all of his predictions because he can't look. An amazing array of complexities can arise and an amazing number of "new techniques" can be developed off these basics. However, it is well to remember that these are the basics and when one strides too far off them, examining single pictures, he should remind himself that he will do better running on the pc or himself techniques which take care of all pictures; for the number of pictures are limitless. There are thousands and thousands of variations of this and this is far from all there is to know on this subject, but it is easy auditing and it will work easily for you 363 in the resolution of cases. I will have considerably more data on this in succeeding bulletins. It got awfully simple, didn't it? I would appreciate those HDAs, HCAs and BScns who are not yet members of the HAS to apply for early membership. Founding Members who are also HDAs or HCAs are automatically professional members from here on. Professional membership brings with it a year's subscription to the Journal of Scientology, brings the Professional Auditor's Bulletin, brings direct referral service. Professional membership is $25 per annum. Only professional memberships valid are those of Founding Members, those who have graduated from associate or doctorate schools since the 1st of January, 1953, and those who have already submitted their professional membership. Anyone else has had his professional membership run out and should renew it. Fees for professional membership should be sent by personal check or cash to the HAS in London, 163, Holland Park Avenue, London W. 11, England. This does not mean that all professional memberships are in the British organization; it simply means that this is the coordination of communication headquarters at this time. Professional memberships can also be procured from Philadelphia. Those who are not professional members already amongst certified graduates are, at this time, in the minority. I am going over to France for a while to get some material assembled. These bulletins will continue. I am very glad to hear from you. What you care to write is very acceptable and will, whether positive or negative, assist other auditors. My address will continue to be 30 Marlborough Place, London N.W.8, England. L. RON HUBBARD 364  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 81 iDate=0/5/53 Volnum=0 Issue=4 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0     From: L. RON HUBBARD London Through: The Office of L. Ron Hubbard 30 Marlborough Place London N.W.8, England ASSOCIATE NEWSLETTER NO. 4 [1953, ca. end May] This newsletter concerns itself with the training and skill of auditors. I have had considerable experience in training auditors, but I only occasionally check up on auditors who have been trained in the various schools. Ordinarily the results are quite good in these schools, but now and then the results are so sour that I wonder what could have happened. Naturally, under a policy which trains anyone who comes in, one is going to get duds. But if one gets a dud he should certainly let the old man know about it, for sooner or later I get involved in some kind of scramble concerning this dud and some cases messed up. You would be surprised at the amount of traffic of this character I have had in the last three years. Generally it is based upon just one thing: the dud didn't even vaguely know what Dianetics or Scientology was. Quite commonly, he had been trained thoroughly in metaphysics, mysticism, psychology, or booja witch doctoring. When he was trained in whatever school, he received the information with no conviction whatsoever. Occasionally this lack of conviction is traced to a lot of wild rumors about my own character which then disabused him of any idea that he should accept these "opinions." Training which is done with this color is rather detrimental. happen to care very much what people think about me, but where it enters into the skill of an auditor, and where it will continue through to mess up a preclear, it becomes quite important. Germane to this I spent the other evening on the phone -- literally that, about two hours -- with an auditor who was busily processing a preclear who had suddenly gone into a large maybe about continuing processing. Mentioning no names, this preclear had previously had a mystic master of some note and renown and this mystic master had come to me and had informed me that this neophyte in his cult was being processed by one of my auditors and had informed me that this auditor was paying no attention to the fact that this girl through concussion or some such thing had only half a brain. This auditor phoned me and, frankly, I have never seen a longer communication lag in anyone. It was from ten to thirty seconds, and the answers he gave me and the data he gave me were all salted down with "maybes." This auditor, by the way, had not been granted certification but was practicing more or less professionally. His attitude toward me was extremely challenging. He referred to Dianetics and Scientology as "your stuff." A review of the student record later demonstrated that this man, during the entire training period, had been subjected to considerable marital difficulties and during the training period had missed, day after day. Further investigation revealed he had been trained in mysticism and in psychology. He had proceeded to go through an entire period of training and what had leaked into his head as Dianetics and Scientology, as disclosed in a long and arduous cross-questioning by myself with this communication lag intervening, bore little or no resemblance to anything taught in any training school. He did not know nomenclature, he did not know techniques; he knew how to run an engram, perhaps, but Matched Terminals were called Double Terminals by him; brackets were unknown to him. He claimed he had fished around in "your stuff" and, while he had found that nobody could possibly be "exteriorized" (his own case was never opened and he himself had no interest in opening it) and had evolved a "technique" in which he "fished up" the anchor points of the preclear "just like you 365 said in your stuff" and then Double Terminalled them (while he was actually only getting two of them up whereas a Double Terminal gets four of them up) and so achieved some effect upon the preclear according to him. In the first place, he had no idea of what an anchor point was -- he thought it was a person; in the second place, he had jumped Standard Operating Procedure "because it was a drill," even though he had never tested it to find out if he had gotten results by it. He had developed a "sensitive insight into preclears, and was able to evaluate for them their troubles," and yet was unable to recall ever having been told by an instructor or on a tape that evaluation for a preclear was verboten. Careful and arduous cross-questioning determined that this individual had processed this woman with Matched Terminals, yet he did not know the difference between a limited technique and an unlimited technique, which was old news in the school where he was being trained. Although it had been said to him probably no less than twenty times, he did not realize that a limited technique was one that you employed until it was proven to be very uncomfortable upon the preclear, at which time you went into an unlimited technique -- which is to say a very positive contact-with-reality technique -- and carried on with the latter until the preclear was upscale enough to carry on again with the limited technique. Expanded GITA, Matched Terminalling, Double Terminalling, running of concepts are all limited techniques, just as the running of engrams will eventually lead into the depths if continued too long. Very, very close questioning against a considerable communication lag elicited the fact that this individual of all things was not sufficiently up on his business to know that the next-to-the-last list in Self Analysis in Scientology (or Dianetics) existed. He had never heard of the technique whereby the individual was asked to remember something that was real to him. Not only that, but it had never occurred to him to apply Standard Operating Procedure to the preclear with half a brain, which would have led him directly into Step VI whereby this was indicated. If he had used Standard Operating Procedure, he would have discovered in the first 15 minutes of auditing that his preclear was a neurotic; he would have discovered also that this preclear's case would not have advanced an inch until the next-to-the-last list in Self Analysis had been run. As it was, he had used about 18 hours more or less of processing on a neurotic who had a physiological infirmity and had succeeded in hanging the person up on a maybe. In addition to this, it was somewhat amusing to note that the auditor's name, which will go unmentioned, was the kind of a name which lends itself to an engram phrase. An example of this would be (an actual case) where the individual had severe asthma and was named Sneezy and had lost his asthma simply because a professional auditor asked him one day whether or not he was trying to live up to his name. An individual (a thetan) is trying to be something rather than nothing and he will try to be the literal meaning of his own name and try to dramatize it. Well, a thetan can never be. The auditor in this case had a name which lent itself peculiarly to failure and this had never been touched in the school. Evidently what had happened in this case was that the auditor had absented himself continuously and when present had sat in the back of the room and had never obtruded into the instructor's notice. He had then failed in his examinations and, instead of continuing on at the school until he could pass the examinations, had simply drifted out into the public and had represented himself as a certified auditor more or less and so had gotten things into a beautiful snarl. Many auditors, however, who go through schools come out with something less than certainty on the subject of Dianetics and Scientology. They are pounded with whole track and other uncertainties, have no subjective or objective reality of these things and may have sat for weeks clinging hard to the fact that God was good and that all was illusion, and yet might have assembled enough glib information to pass an examination. Such people are liabilities. You can't avoid them and I can't avoid them, but we can do all we can to prevent this happening. It is essential that an auditor leaving the school leave with a certainty that the materials he has been presented with work. He should leave with the certainty that he 366 can produce an effect with the materials he has been taught, and that moreover he can produce an effect with them as they have been taught and as they are represented. It is peculiar that the only failed auditors, the only rebel auditors, we have are those who never learned the techniques with which they were presented. This poses a peculiar teaching problem. It is first a problem of getting the student into the classroom, not just as a body but as a mind; and it is dependent secondarily but very importantly, upon (and read this twice) processing out of him in terms of Matched Terminal Brackets every certainty he has had in the past that some process of the mind did or did not solve all of his problems. In processing this individual the instructor will put himself very far ahead by making sure that the student's co-auditor knows that the first duty in a school where an auditor is being trained, is to get rid of the plus certainty and the negative certainty on current lifetime subjects dealing with the human mind or the human body. This is a very simple thing to do. It is a very easy thing to understand what is wrong with somebody who cannot be trained in Dianetics or Scientology. This somebody has been trained in medicine, in psychotherapy, in psychology, in mysticism and has gone through exactly this cycle. At first, with high hope, he has assumed that the materials being taught to him in medicine or whatever, were absolutely, completely and ultimately the last word and would solve all of his problems. He finished the course or went out into practice with the realization that those things which he had been taught were so much buffoonery. Now between these two positive and negative certainties, that the thing did work and then that it did not work, lies a tremendous maybe. It is this maybe alone which produces first the uncertainty in study and second the tremendous communication lag of such people. This is the reason they cannot be trained easily in Dianetics and Scientology. They have in the past been very certain first that something worked and then have been very certain that it did not work. The resultant maybe impedes all further training. This is the student who gives the instructor a great deal of trouble, who asks non sequitur and senseless questions, who involves the class in endless arguments which are not germane to the subject, and who spoils the entire atmosphere of a school. This individual has collapsed communication lines. He collapses upon the instructor and utilizes precious minutes in utter balderdash. I repeat, it is because he has first had a certainty on some subject such as medicine or psychology and has then afterwards had another certainty; and the first certainty was that psychology would solve everything and the second certainty was that psychology would solve nothing. This is the anatomy of maybe in terms of intention and concept. When any student continues to collapse communication lines upon the instructor, which is to say, talks a great deal to him, comes up to him after class, questions and doubts, upsets other students, this is what has happened, and this is what must be processed in the student. The first moment the student shows up with this manifestation, the instructor should know instantly what is wrong with this student, and he should assign to another student the task of "certainty processing" which is nothing more nor less than matching terminals of "I am sure psychology works" "I am sure psychology doesn't work." Then somebody else as a matched terminal saying "I am sure psychology works" "I am sure psychology doesn't work"; and then others saying to others "I am sure psychology works" "I am sure psychology doesn't work." By running the certainties only and by never touching the uncertainties, this individual is at length given freedom from the circuit which is generated by these two certainties, for he is holding on to the certainties in the face of all the uncertainties which lie between. (Now read all that again.) The instructor is continually being subjected to the uncertainty of students. Thus the instructor has to enter into a convincing attitude. He has to start convincing students of the existence of engrams, of the existence of this, the existence of that, against all these doubts. He has to continue a convincing attitude. This is not good for the instructor, but it is not particularly harmful. His first step should be to get rid of via the above processing the students who require all this convincing. The next thing he should do is to run the Certainty Processing on himself to the effect of "Dianetics is 367 the solution" "Dianetics is not the solution," "Scientology is the solution,, "Scientology is not the solution." He should also run "There are engrams" "There are no engrams," "There is whole track" "There is no whole track," "Hubbard is right" "Hubbard is wrong," each in matched terminals, which is to say the idea or the person with the idea facing the same person with the same idea in brackets until he himself is free. The instructor might also do well to run "I need processing" "I don't need any processing," "There is something wrong with me" "There is nothing wrong with me," again in matched terminal brackets, and each time anything is run in Certainty Processing it is run with the feeling of certainty, and in matched terminals, that the opinion is correct. In the case of the student whose case will not move it will be found that the student is under the compulsion not to let anything happen, and this is resolved by "I must not let it happen" "I cannot prevent it from happening" and "I must maintain control" "I must lose control," for this is a compulsive case. A little lower on the tone scale the student will be found to respond to "They are preventing things from happening" "Nobody can prevent things from happening." The general subject comes under the heading of "Things happen" and "Nothing happens," which last is, of course, the gunshot on the case; the others are the compulsive and inhibitive factors. Training is essentially picking up the communication speed of the individual by utilizing techniques which break up old communications systems. If in training auditors these things are followed, we will find that we will have less trouble in the field with preclears. Further, we will find that we have less rebellion, for we have a condition in many people whereby they must produce any effect as better than no effect. The foremost reason behind life is to cause an effect. A person gets too far down the tone scale, and he becomes desperate about causing an effect. Hence you get your very rebellious auditor who is unwilling to utilize knowledge of somebody else to produce an effect, but must design something to produce any kind of an effect. The result of this' due to the lack of training of the "originator," can be very harmful to our general forward motion. In addition to all this, it is extremely important -- I repeat, extremely important -- that the auditor knows, and knows that he knows, how to do all those techniques listed as effective procedures in the Appendix of SOP-8. He should know these things backwards and forwards and in his sleep. If he gets out of a school without learning them, then you have an opponent, and I have an opponent, and that opponent is uncertainty. The public perceives this man, this woman, as having gone through a school. They do not perceive any result except rebellion, upset, a low-toned case, and we are damaged accordingly. With existing procedures, there is no real excuse to let a student go through school in a very low-toned state, and there is certainly no excuse to recommend certification for such a student. One should be pretty tough on a student concerning his knowledge of fundamentals. What we call fundamentals are those things which are listed as effective procedures in SOP-8. If an auditor can do these things, he will produce effects; if he can produce effects, the society will alert; if society alerts, our goals of sanity for man can be accomplished. Alert particularly to this manifestation of collapsed communication lines. Collapsed communication lines simply denote a complete lack of admiration in the life of the preclear. Admiration Processing will get the person who has severely collapsed lines into trouble, but nevertheless Certainty Processing on the subject "There is admiration" "There is no admiration," "There is applause" "There is no applause" can do wonders for such a case. This is the case that is giving us a bad time; an instructor should be hard-boiled enough to turn around to a student and say, "Look here, if you want to get your certification, I have a task for you, and that's to uncollapse these collapsed terminals on this student." The entire process of auditing has to do with withdrawing communications from individuals. This is based upon the idea that communications are harmful and that the body cannot handle communications. It is an excellent technique that "The body can handle communications" "The body cannot handle communications" in matched 368 terminal brackets. The frailty of the body is almost a cult in this society; if any cult exists, this is it. By communication we mean anything from talk, through letters, through sex tactile, to bullets. This process of withdrawing communication finds the auditor going downscale if the auditor has not had resolved in his case reach and withdraw: the two primary actions of putting out and bringing in anchor points. This is resolved by "I can reach (an any dynamic)" "I cannot reach (an any dynamic)" and "I can withdraw (an any dynamic)" "I cannot withdraw (an any dynamic)." By the Auditor's Code, if he follows it, he is inhibited from reaching into the preclear with a communication but must withdraw communications from the preclear. We already know how much this can do for a case. Let's consider the auditor's case and realize that students will become auditors. Thus in students the entire category of reach and withdraw, as above, including desire, enforcement and inhibition of reaching and withdrawing, should be resolved in the GE; otherwise the GE is going to grab hold of the thetan; and the auditor, one day, even if he is a theta clear, will not again be able to get out of his body. Perhaps it requires a lot of auditing to get an individual over the idea that he cannot withdraw from MEST, but this is dependent upon the fact that the preclear is dependent upon MEST. Those things upon which the individual is depending are those things which have a command value over him. This would include father and mother, and it would also include, more importantly, the MEST universe. That thing upon which the individual most depends is that thing upon which the individual has the greatest amount of aberration. That person who has most evaluated for the individual is that person whose viewpoint the individual is liable to have. We used to call this valence shifting. We can still call it that, but it's actually an enforcement of viewpoint. We have, then, as primary aberration: the curiosity about, desire for, enforcement of and inhibition of, viewpoint. And we mean by viewpoint not the opinions but the actual perceptions of the individual. In passing here now, let me mention the genus of facsimiles. Facsimiles are a compulsive duplicating of the MEST universe. The fact that one must duplicate the MEST universe is represented in facsimiles and accounts to us for the first time for why the low tone exists on the wide-open case. Eidetic memory is not desirable, for memory is not of this category. This is quite a wide departure from Book I, but these things which an individual re-perceives in his memory are not necessary to his memory, for we have gone way above anything like this at 4.0. The occluded case has eventually rebelled against the idea that he had to duplicate everything in the MEST universe. In the training of students it is desirable not that the student knows so much nomenclature, but that the techniques, if he performs them, work. He cannot know this if his ears are closed, his eyes shut, and his point in time stopped on a maybe when he was 22 and had just finished becoming a Doctor of Philosophy. GENERAL NEWS I am going over to the Continent of Europe. My purpose in going is to stir up some interest in Scientology. I will be stopping at the various spas and have an idea of entering this little hot bomb of a racing car I have in a few of the all-outs in Europe. The car has a 2 1/2 liter souped-up Jaguar engine. It is built of hollow steel tubing and aluminum and weighs nothing. Its brakes sometimes work but its throttle never fails. I have also a British motorcycle which might do well in some of these scrambles. Motion has gotten altogether too slow. I think by spreading a few miracles around the spas, I will be able to elicit considerable interest in Scientology. This should come back in terms of students to the British HAS, but more importantly it might serve to do something active in the matter of war. In Great Britain, auditors who have been trained in SOP-8 are doing excellently well and two notable cases which had hung fire have resolved on Certainty Processing. 369 In view of the fact that foreign exchange is what it is, my tour of the spas and the production of, if possible, a few miracles amongst the lame, halt and blind, falls directly upon American shoulders. The HAS in Philadelphia is breaking exactly even. The British HAS, due to the inability to export funds, cannot contribute to this activity, but has contributed markedly to research and investigation these last many months and should have a breather. Certification funds, therefore, are what are counted upon to effect whatever is effected in Europe. The new doctorate school in Germany will not be functioning actively for almost a year. I may have a few light moments which have to do with speed, but the truth of the matter is I sail pretty close to the wind on finance. The bulk of the money I receive goes out immediately upon testing techniques, the PAB newsletter and other services, and when I find myself with any excess generally finance some operation that happens to be limping. I was looking at my account books the other day and I find out that the money I have invested out of my own writing in Scientology is quite great. Very little of this has ever been realized back and, if one were dealing on a profit and loss sheet, one might wonder why I had ever indulged in such a level of research and investigation; but I am afraid that there are a lot of us who feel that, but who feel as well the game is worth more than the economic profit. I wish all of us felt like that. The point is I am going around to the various spas and in the process of this I am going to get together summaries of the various things necessary to the doctorate course and make tapes and write books to summarize this data, for as far as I am concerned, cases are cracking up far too rapidly under existing processes, which includes Certainty Processing, to cause anyone much concern. I have done what I set out to do many years ago, which is to say, develop a technique. Now it is going to take me years to get this down into workable form in terms of public interest. You see one of the examples of that in Issue 16-G, the copy for which has already been mailed to Philadelphia. 16-G is an entire book. The funds which you send away in this direction for certification and in percentage are entirely the funds on which I am operating. With these funds, I am trying to get into a highly acceptable public form the technologies which have been involved and the experience we have gained. For instance, I have to boil down and put on tape the entire subject of Freudian psychoanalysis. It doesn't exist unfortunately in a native and fundamental form. Likewise I have to get together all co-related material where Scientology applies to the society at large. It's going to take me twenty years to knock together everything that is to be known and which I have found out. These funds also serve to keep auditors happy in the field. I am making it my business to try to give them a successful business. This is a new departure in policy on my part, but only because I have found it necessary. The auditor, ordinarily, lacks imagination enough to establish himself. He's like a fellow with ten-dollar gold pieces who doesn't know what to do with them. Thus I am continuing to service the auditors and continuing to spread the word throughout America and the rest of the world, but particularly America, on the subject of what we're trying to do. Thus, keep the ink in your pen because I am depending on you to put in on checks to me so that we can get this show on the road. Germane to funds, I am recently in receipt of material from George Seidler suggesting an alternative in certifications and carrying with it the news that Sequoia University would like to authorize associates to give certain courses. With all due respect to Sequoia University and the project, I have to hand legal opinion that this protection will not stay the heavy threat when levelled. I think we have a better idea and I think Sequoia University has its role and will eventually be woven through the woof and warp of what we are doing. It happens that I have under preparation summaries of psychology, psychoanalysis and so forth which your certification fees are going to finance. Now just why a large portion of these certification fees should go to Sequoia University, I am not quite sure. I do know that if a large portion of them do go to Sequoia University, I will be strapped down financially in the preparation of this material and, believe me, material costs money. I estimate that the tapes you play cost 370 about $800 an hour. That might be a shock to you, but it is a sober fact. It isn't because I spend money like water, it's because those tapes are made only after a great deal of outlay in terms of testing and in terms of organization and material; and, even then, it is very cheap investigation. If this condensation of general semantics, psychoanalysis, psychology, electronic brains, etc. were being done by Sequoia University, I could see some point in this. Issue 16-G will very soon be in your hands. It is 50 cents per copy and I am sure that continuing copies of it will be published. It contains the second issue of The Factors, an entire breakdown of Scientology, SOP-8 and Short 8. I don't see it changing for a long time to come and in addition to existing course booklets which are still quite vital, I recommend to you that you train out of this issue as the court of appeals, for students reading it before they enroll will be disappointed if they find anything less than this level of certainty in the school. This issue has an enormous number of advance orders already. The issue was late simply because I was waiting for the test reports on the techniques and mailed the copy only when I had those. Issue 16- G is actually a complete book. It is also necessary for the student to have Scientology 8-8008, Self Analysis in Scientology (or Dianetics) and the Professional Course Booklets. Without all this material he would be lost. The first and second books of Dianetics. The Modern Science of Mental Health and, what do you know, old 8-80 has come up for a further look, for it dealt with communications within the body. The Axioms were never as valid as they are today, just as they appear in the Handbook for Preclears. Thus you can shove a lot of material at a student. Ross, by reports, is doing very well with his doctorate school. Detroit is recovering and Ann Arbor, in the same state, is dealing with an influx of activity, possibly stimulated by the adverse publicity. According to my reports here, we have quite a large enrollment throughout the various associate areas and this enrollment, with the certainty of Certainty Processing, and the materials in its hands, can make a very large dent in America. To repeat, I remind you that certification fees should be sent to 30 Marlborough Place, London N.W.8, until further notice. There will be immediately returned, first a letter stating that the student whose application has been received has been certified and next the certificate of that student. Letter and certificate will be sent to the address designated by the associate, either to himself or to the student directly. Your attention is called to the fact that man does not want to get well. He wants to produce an effect Low on the tone scale the only effect he can produce is destruction and pain. It is also called to your attention that according to Evans Farber, a disciple at one time of Howard Scott's, money is the attention unit of a social group, and that as much money comes in to any part of that social group as it attracts attention. Your success depends upon the production of an effect, your finance depends upon attracting interest. If you find finance faltering, you will discover immediately why if you realize that the financial system is a communications system and that communications systems are the background of what you are doing. A person who is trying to prevent communications from occurring will try to prevent money from being received. If a person finds himself diffident about money, he need only run "I can have money" "I cannot have money" and, in addition to that, the negative and positive on accepting and delivering communications. Money is not a sordid subject, it is the measure of the amount of attention you are attracting. If you are trying to prevent observation from viewpoints, you will not make money. Things are looking up. The fears which are being voiced have been voiced for three years without materializing. The solidarity of our team, frail as it may appear sometimes, has never been better. 371 Three associates have written me suggesting that financial arrangements between myself and associates be changed from a flat rate for every certificate, and that a percentage of training fees be forwarded to me on the entire training income of the associate. One has suggested 15%, one has suggested 10%. If you would like to shift to this ultimate plan of 15% of the training fee of everyone enrolled, I would be very happy to pay into the HAS the sum necessary for his professional membership, give each student the Journal of Scientology, whether certified or not, and supply without further charge certain training materials for each student. This would definitely be in the interests of better training. I could give each student, for instance, a complete set of Professional Course Booklets and some other materials, and they could be shipped personally to the student on evidence of his enrollment and the payment of his fee to the associate. Doctorate schools have a slightly different problem and are not included in this discussion, but the shipment of the booklets and so forth to the doctorate schools could also be instituted. Here's what we are facing. We need the Journal of Scientology being widely circulated, we need the Professional Auditor's Bulletin, we need various other promotional lines. I have changed the policy of the publications section toward the procurement of students rather than the procurement of income on books. This means, of course, more students, better promotion, and a greater amount of available material at very low price. It also means that the HAS income will drop. If you cared uniformly for this 15% arrangement, you would find materials were being paid for to a large extent and promotion was being paid for to a large extent out of an organization which was not in itself making money out of promotion. I think that the circulation of materials at very low cost would mean a very great deal in stimulating business, but it would also mean that we would all have to recognize our responsibility in keeping the HAS going in Philadelphia. Issues of the Journal, one after the other, would carry material at very low cost and books would be brought out and circulated at very little cost. I think this is what we all want. In order to accomplish this it would seem wise to shift, then, over to a 15% basis with the recognition that the 15% was paying for training materials, public promotion, as well as the development of those materials by myself. I have an enormous amount of codification to do, and the many training booklets which are still necessary and which answer the questions which are being asked about the applications of Scientology in various fields could be cared for. I would hand out certificates on the same representation. Fees would be paid to the International Office in London. Materials would be authorized to be shipped from Philadelphia to the student from London and money sent from the International Office to the Philadelphia Office to cover this. In the process of evolution, our organization is showing up what is most desirable. I wish you would give this matter some thought; because of the recentness of enrollment on the latest materials, no certification cash to amount to anything is to hand. If you approve this plan, simply change the order of things on your books and send 15% of your training fees received from, on and including, 1st April forward to the HAS, 30 Marlborough Place, London N.W.8. Your certifications will be honored as you submit them. Course Booklets will be immediately sent to your students and any student who has enrolled since April 1st. The other materials will be forwarded through. There are now four ratings: HCA, HGA, B.Scn., D.Scn. The HGA certification is intended to designate auditors who have considerable experience and whose reputation is well known, but who do not necessarily have credits and attendance at the doctorate schools. It means Graduate Auditor and is intended to compare with a Dean of Psychiatry. I am following, more or less, in certifications a time-honored pattern which was first begun in the field of medicine and was later followed through in the philosophic and healing arts. It has been customary for the founder of a subject, such as one or another branch of medicine, one or another branch of psychiatry or psychology, to act as the certifying and training agency; and, indeed, today the British Medical Association grants degrees in no other way. And the only degrees for medical doctor granted 372 in Great Britain which are accepted in the BMA are based on the very type of training which we are doing. We are in the stage of doctors training doctors. Back in Freud's day, and continuing through to the present, deans of psychiatry arrived there solely by association with those trained by Sigmund Freud. I tried two or three times to get away from this and each time got slapped around in the mails. An HGA certification is by nomination or by selection. The nominal sum of $28.00 is charged for certification in HGA to cover the cost of certificates and handling. The point of the HGA certificate is to shuffle through HCAs and HDAs and find those who are consistently producing excellent results and to form a grade by which these results can be recognized. B.Scn. is there to signify training in a doctorate school and eligibility for further training and experience to the grade of doctor. A doctor eventually will be required to have a rather wide command of psychotherapy, philosophy, psychology and other allied things, including Freudian psychoanalysis. L. Ron Hubbard [Enclosure: PAB No. 4] 373  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 101 iDate=0/6/53 Volnum=0 Issue=16 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  This is Scientology The Science of Certainty    THE JOURNAL OF SCIENTOLOGY Issue 16-G [1953, ca. mid-June] Published by The Hubbard Association of Scientologists, Inc. Philadelphia, Pennsylvania This is Scientology The Science of Certainty L. Ron Hubbard FOREWORD For nearly a quarter of a century, I have been engaged in the investigation of the fundamentals of life, the material universe and human behavior. Such an adventure leads one down many highways, through many byroads, into many back alleys of uncertainty, through many strata of life, through many personal vicissitudes, into the teeth of vested interests, across the rim of hell and into the very arms of heaven. Many before me have made their way across these tumultuous oceans of data, where every drop of water appears to be any other drop of water and yet where one must find THE drop. Almost everything I have studied and observed has been evaluated otherwise somewhere, at some time, in relation to this or that. What equipment must one have to venture upon these wastes? Where are the rules-books, the maps, the signposts? All one perceives when he peers into the darkness of the unknown are the lonely bones of those who, reaching before, have found their hands empty and their lives destroyed. Such a thing is a lonely drama; one must cheer one's own triumphs and weep to himself his despair. The cold brutality of the scientific method fails far back, almost at the starting point. The airy spirallings and dread mysteries of India, where I drank deep, lead only into traps. The euphoria of religion, the ecstasies of worship and debauchery, become as meaningless as sand when one seeks in them the answer to the riddle of all existence. Many have roved upon this unmapped track. Some have survived to say a fraction of what they knew, some have observed one thing and said quite another, some looked knowing and said naught. One engaged upon such a quest does not even know the answer to that most important question of all: Will it be good for man to loose upon him, all in a rush as an avalanche, the knowingness of eternity? There are those who would tell you that only a fiend would set you free, and that freedom leads at best into the darkest hells, and there are those to inform you that freedom is for you and not for them, but there are also men of kind heart who know how precious is the cup and drink of wide, unbounded ways. Who is to say whether man will benefit at all from this knowledge hardly won? You are the only one who can say. Observation, application, experience and test will tell you if the trek has been made and the answer found. For this is the science of knowing how to know. It is a science which does not include within it cold and musty data, data to be thrust down the throat without examination and acceptance. This is the track of knowing how to know. Travel it and see. 374 THE FACTORS (Summation of the considerations and examinations of the human spirit and the material universe completed between 1923 and 1953 A.D.J 1. Before the beginning was a Cause and the entire purpose of the Cause was the creation of effect. 2. In the beginning and forever is the decision and the decision is TO BE. 3. The first action of beingness is to assume a viewpoint. 4. The second action of beingness is to extend from the viewpoint, points to view, which are dimension points. 5. Thus there is space created, for the definition of space is: viewpoint of dimension. And the purpose of a dimension point is space and a point of view. 6. The action of a dimension point is reaching and withdrawing. 7. And from the viewpoint to the dimension points there are connection and interchange. Thus new dimension points are made. Thus there is communication. 8. And thus there is light. 9. And thus there is energy. 10. And thus there is life. 11. But there are other viewpoints and these viewpoints outthrust points to view. And there comes about an interchange amongst viewpoints; but the interchange is never otherwise than in terms of exchanging dimension points. 12. The dimension point can be moved by the viewpoint, for the viewpoint, in addition to creative ability and consideration, possesses volition and potential independence of action; and the viewpoint, viewing dimension points, can change in relation to its own or other dimension points or viewpoints. Thus comes about all the fundamentals there are to motion. 13. The dimension points are each and every one, whether large or small, solid. And they are solid solely because the viewpoints say they are solid. 14. Many dimension points combine into larger gases, fluids or solids. Thus there is matter. But the most valued point is admiration, and admiration is so strong its absence alone permits persistence. 15. The dimension point can be different from other dimension points and thus can possess an individual quality. And many dimension points can possess a similar quality, and others can possess a similar quality unto themselves. Thus comes about the quality of classes of matter. 16. The viewpoint can combine dimension points into forms and the forms can be simple or complex and can be at different distances from the viewpoints and so there can be combinations of form. And the forms are capable of motion and the viewpoints are capable of motion and so there can be motion of forms. 17. And the opinion of the viewpoint regulates the consideration of the forms, their stillness or their motion, and these considerations consist of assignment of beauty or ugliness to the forms and these considerations alone are art. 18. It is the opinions of the viewpoints that some of these forms should endure. Thus there is survival. 19. And the viewpoint can never perish; but the form can perish. 20. And the many viewpoints, interacting, become dependent upon one another's forms and do not choose to distinguish completely the ownership of dimension points and so comes about a dependency upon the dimension points and upon the other viewpoints. 21. From this comes a consistency of viewpoint of the interaction of dimension points and this, regulated, is TIME. 22. And there are universes. 23. The universes, then, are three in number: the universe created by one viewpoint, the universe created by every other viewpoint, the universe created by the mutual action of viewpoints which is agreed to be upheld -- the physical universe. 375 24. And the viewpoints are never seen. And the viewpoints consider more and more that the dimension points are valuable. And the viewpoints try to become the anchor points and forget that they can create more points and space and forms. Thus comes about scarcity. And the dimension points can perish and so the viewpoints assume that they, too, can perish. 25. Thus comes about death. 26. The manifestations of pleasure and pain, of thought, emotion and effort, of thinking, of sensation, of affinity, reality, communication, of behavior and being are thus derived and the riddles of our universe are apparently contained and answered herein. 27. There is beingness, but Man believes there is only becomingness. 28. The resolution of any problem posed hereby is the establishment of viewpoints and dimension points, the betterment of condition and concourse amongst dimension points, and, thereby, viewpoints, and the remedy of abundance or scarcity in all things, pleasant or ugly, by the rehabilitation of the ability of the viewpoint to assume points of view and create and uncreate, neglect, start, change and stop dimension points of any kind at the determinism of the viewpoint. Certainty in all three universes must be regained, for certainty, not data, is knowledge. 29. In the opinion of the viewpoint, any beingness, any thing, is better than no thing, any effect is better than no effect, any universe better than no universe, any particle better than no particle, but the particle of admiration is best of all. 30. And above these things there might be speculation only. And below these things there is the playing of the game. But these things which are written here Man can experience and know. And some may care to teach these things and some may care to use them to assist those in distress and some may desire to employ them to make individuals and organizations more able and so give to Earth a culture of which we can be proud. Humbly tendered as a gift to Man by L. Ron Hubbard, April 23, 1953 THIS IS SCIENTOLOGY Scientology is the science of knowledge. It contains many parts. Its most fundamental division is Scientology itself and Para-Scientology. Under Scientology we group those things of which we can be certain and only those things of which we can be certain. Knowledge itself is certainty; knowledge is not data. Knowingness itself is certainty. Sanity is certainty, providing only that that certainty does not fall beyond the conviction of another when he views it. To obtain a certainty one must be able to observe. But what is the level of certainty we require? And what is the level of observation we require for a certainty or a knowledge to exist? If a man can stand before a tree and by sight, touch or other perception know that he is confronting a tree and be able to perceive its form and be quite sure he is confronting a tree, we have the level of certainty we require. If the man will not look at the tree or, although it is observably a tree to others, if he discovers it to be a blade of grass or a sun, then he is below the level of certainty required and would not be able to grasp Scientology. Some other person, helpfully inclined, would have to direct his perception to the tree until the man perceived without duress that it was indeed a tree he confronted. That is the only level of certainty we require in order to qualify knowledge. For knowledge is observation and is given to those who would look. Things about which there is observational difficulty, such as mirror mazes, items hidden in smoke, objects guessed at in the dark, are outside the boundaries of Scientology. In order to obtain knowledge and certainty, it is necessary to be able to observe, in fact, three universes in which there could be trees. The first of these is one's own universe; one should be able to create for his own observation in its total form for total perception a tree. The second universe would be the material universe, which is the 376 universe of matter, energy, space and time, which is the common meeting ground of all of us. The third universe is actually a class of universes, which could be called "the other fellow's universe," for he and all the class of "other fellows" have universes of their own. A complete clarity on all three universes would be well above any goal attempted even in Scientology, and it is not necessary that one be as certain as this of three universes before one can be certain of Scientology, for certainty of Scientology requires only the same order of certainty one would have to have to know he was confronting a physical universe tree. Para-Scientology is that large bin which includes all greater or lesser uncertainties. Here are the questionable things, the things of which the common normal observer cannot be sure with a little study. Here are theories, here are groups of data, even groups commonly accepted as "known." Some of the classified bodies of data which fall in Para-Scientology are: Dianetics, incidents on the "whole track," the immortality of Man, the existence of God, engrams containing pain and unconsciousness and yet all perception, prenatals, clears, character, and many other things which, even when closely and minutely observed, still are not certain things to those who observe them. Such things have relative truth. They have to some a high degree of reality; they have to others non-existence. They require a highly specialized system in order to observe them at all. Working with such uncertainties one can produce broad and sweeping results: one can make the ill well again, one can right even the day which went most wrong; but those things which require highly specialized communication systems remain uncertain to many. Because Dianetics is placed in this category does not mean it is disowned; it means simply that it is a specialized thing based on theory which, no matter how workable, requires specialized observation. It does not mean that Dianetics will cease to work, but it means that Dianetics is not easily or quickly forwarded into a complete certainty. Yet Dianetics is more of an exact science than many which have before borne that name; and Dianetics is an intimate part of Scientology, for it is through its special communication processes that the data was won which has become Scientology. Also under the heading of Para-Scientology one would place such things as past lives, mysterious influences, astrology, mysticism, religion, psychology, psychiatry, nuclear physics and any other science based on theory. A doctor, for instance, may seem entirely certain of the cause of some disease, yet it depends upon the doctor's certainty for the layman to accept that cause of the disease. Here we have a specialized communications system. We may have an arduously trained observer, a highly mechanistic observation resting upon a theory which is not, even at this late date, entirely accepted even in the best circles. That penicillin cures certain things is a certainty to the doctor even when penicillin suddenly and inexplicably fails to cure something. Any inexplicable failure introduces an uncertainty, which thereafter removes the subject from the realm of an easily obtained certainty. Hypnotism, no matter how certain the hypnotist may be that he is effective on some people, is a wild variable and, even in expert practice, is a definite uncertainty. The use of drugs or shock produces such variable results that they class far down a gradient scale which would begin with a fair degree of certainty and which would end with almost no certainty of any kind. We have here, then, a parallel between certainty and sanity. The less certain the individual on any subject, the less sane he could be said to be upon that subject; the less certain he is of what he views in the material universe, what he views in his own or the other fellow's universe, the less sane he could be said to be. The road to sanity is demonstrably the road to increasing certainty. Starting at any level, it is only necessary to obtain a fair degree of certainty on the MEST universe to improve considerably one's beingness. Above that, one obtains some certainty of his own universe and some certainty of the other fellow's universe. Certainty, then, is clarity of observation. Of course above this, vitally so, is certainty in creation. Here is the artist, here is the master, here is the very great spirit. 377 As one advances he discovers that what he first perceived as a certainty can be considerably improved. Thus we have certainty as a gradient scale. It is not an absolute, but it is defined as the certainty that one perceives or the certainty that one creates what one perceives or the certainty that there is perception. Sanity and perception, certainty and perception, knowledge and observation, are then all of a kind, and amongst them we have sanity. What will Scientology do? It has already been observed by many who are not that doubtful thing, the "qualified observer," that people who have travelled a road toward certainty improve in the many ways people consider it desirable to improve. The road into uncertainty is the road toward psychosomatic illness, doubts, anxieties, fears, worries and vanishing awareness. As awareness is decreased, so does certainty decrease; and the end of this road is a nothingness quite opposite from the nothingness which can create. It is a nothingness which is a total effect. Simplicity, it would be suspected, would be the keynote of any process, any communications system, which would deliver into a person's hands the command of his own beingness. The simplicity consists of the observation of three universes. The first step is the observation of one's own universe and what has taken place in that universe in the past. The second step would be observation of the material universe and direct consultation with it to discover its forms, depths, emptinesses and solidities. The third step would be the observation of other people's universes or their observation of the MEST universe, for there are a multitude of viewpoints of these three universes. Where observation of one of these three is suppressed, hidden, denied, the individual is unable to mount beyond a certain point into certainty. Here we have a trianglee not unlike the affinity, reality, communication trianglee of Dianetics. These three universes are interactive to the degree that one raises all three by raising one, but one can raise two only so far before it is restrained by the uncertainty on the third. Thus, any point on this trianglee is capable of suppressing the other two points and any point of this trianglee is capable of raising the other two points. [GRAPHICS INSERTED] THE TRIANGLE OF CERTAINTY OF AWARENESS This drawing could be called the scale of awareness. It is also the scale of action and the cycle of action. The numbers represent entirely arbitrary levels which yet can be found to mean levels pf predictable attitudes. It would be found that humanity at this time hovers in terms of awareness at the level of 2.0, slightly above or slightly below; here is scarcely any awareness at all compared to the awareness which is available. It is very puzzling to people at higher levels of awareness why people behave toward them as they do; such higher level people have not realized that they are not seen, much less understood. People at low levels of awareness do not observe, but substitute for observation preconceptions, evaluation and suppositions, and even 378 physical pain by which to attain their certainties. In the field of Zen Buddhism there is a practice of administering a sudden blow by which is obtained a feeling of certainty. Here is a relatively false certainty -- the certainty of impact, although all certainty actually is derived below the level of 10.0 from prior impact for its conviction. After a brutal accident or operation under anaesthetic, it can be observed that individuals will sometimes react with an enormous conviction which yet does not seem to be based upon any fact. A certainty has been carried home to them in terms of a physical impact. This, then, is not a self-determined certainty and the self- determined certainty carries one into high echelons. The mistaken use of shock by the ancient Greek upon the insane, the use of whips in old Bedlam, all sought to deliver sufficient certainty to the insane to cause them to be less insane. Certainty delivered by blow and punishment is a non-self-determined certainty. It is productive of stimulus-response behavior. At a given stimulus a dog who has been beaten, for instance, will react invariably, providing he has been sufficiently beaten, but if he has been beaten too much, the stimulus will result only in confused bewilderment. Thus certainty delivered by blows, by applied force, eventually brings about a certainty as absolute as one could desire -- total unawareness. Unconsciousness itself is a certainty which is sought by many individuals who have failed repeatedly to reach any high level of awareness certainty. These people then desire an unawareness certainty. So it seems that the thirst for certainty can lead one into oblivion if one seeks it as an effect. An uncertainty is the product of two certainties. One of these is a conviction, whether arrived at by observation (causative) or by a blow (effected). The other is a negative certainty. One can be sure that something is and one can be sure that something is not. He can be sure that there is something, no matter what it is, present, and that there is nothing present. These two certainties commingling create a condition of uncertainty known as "maybe." A "maybe" continues to be held in suspense in an individual's mind simply because he cannot decide whether it is nothing or something. He grasps and holds the certainties each time he has been given evidence or has made the decision that it is a somethingness and each time he has come to suppose that it is a nothingness. Where these two certainties of something and nothing are concerned with and can vitally influence one's continuance in a state of beingness or where one merely supposes they can influence such a state of beingness, a condition of anxiety arises. Thus anxiety, indecision, uncertainty, a state of "maybe," can exist only in the presence of poor observation or the inability to observe. Such a state can be remedied simply by eradicating from the past of the individual, first the conviction that the matter is important, next the conviction that it is totally unimportant, next all the times when he was certain of the somethingness and then all the times he was certain of the nothingness. One merely causes the individual to observe in terms of the three universes. We face, then, two general types of mind. One is an analytical thing which depends for its conclusions upon perception or even creation of things to perceive and bases its judgment on observation in terms of three universes. This we call the "analytical mind." We could also call it the spirit. We could also call it the "awareness of awareness unit." We could call it the conscious individual himself in the best of his beingness. We could call it the mathematical term thetan. Whatever its name we could have precisely the same thing, a viewpoint capable of creation and observation of things created which concludes and directs action in terms of the existing state of three universes, as they are observed directly. The other type of mind resembles nothing if not an electronic brain. It receives its data in terms of conviction, delivered by force. It is directed by and reacts to hidden influences rather than observed influences and is, to a large extent, the reverse image and has reverse intentions to the analytical mind. This we call the reactive mind. It is an actual entity and it operates in terms of experience and theory. It sets up thinking machinery around uncertainties and the course of its thinking is downward. It seeks to direct and dictate out of pain and the effort to avoid pain. The primary difference between these two "minds" is that one, the analytical mind, is without finite duration, and the other, the reactive mind, is susceptible to death. 379 These two minds are a certainty since they can be observed by anyone, even in himself. He knows he is aware of things around him, and he knows that he has definite desires which are perfectly reasonable and he knows, if he is a homo sapiens or animal, that internal commands and compulsions, even those which tell him to eat and tell his heart to beat, are not directly within his control. All thinking can then be divided for our purposes into thinking based upon direct observation and conclusions from observation, and thinking which has to know before it can be or observe. Analytical thought can be called analytical thought because it directly observes and analyzes what it observes in terms of observations which are immediately present. The reactive mind concludes and acts entirely on experience and with only a fragmentary regard to things present which could be observed. The reactive mind begins and continues with uncertainties; and, where the course of the analytical mind is progressively upward, the course of the reactive mind is progressively downward. The reactive mind comes into being as a servant of the analytical mind, and is set up by the analytical mind to work upon and store data about the basic uncertainty that there might be something and there might be nothing. The reactive mind then continues in growth and from the servant, if the analytical mind does not observe it, tends to become the master. The goals of the two minds are not separate goals. The reactive mind is a makeshift effort on the part of the viewpoint to perceive things which it believes to be unperceivable except by comparison of uncertainties. Both minds are seeking to persist and endure through time, which is to say, survive. The analytical mind can, unless it becomes too uncertain and by that uncertainty has set up too many reactive mechanisms, persist indefinitely. The reactive mind pursues the cycle of life span. The analytical mind seeks by creation to cause an effect; the reactive mind seeks by duplication, borrowing, and experience to cause an effect. Both minds, then, are seeking to cause an effect, and this is their entire motivation for action. Each of the three universes seeks to persist indefinitely. Each is continuously caused, and each is continually receiving an effect. Each has its own adjudication of what it should receive as an effect and what it should cause. Time itself consists of a continuous interaction of the universes. Each may have its own space; each has its own particular energy. The urge of any of these three universes towards survival is subdivisible for each of the three universes into eight dynamics. There are, then, four groups of eight dynamics each: the eight dynamics of one's own universe, the eight dynamics of the physical universe, the eight dynamics of the other's universe, as well as the eight dynamics of the trianglee itself. These dynamics could be subdivided as follows: the first dynamic would be that one most intimate to the universe which could be said to be the dynamic urging the survival of self. The second dynamic would be that one of the persistence of admiration in many forms in one's own and the other's universe. This admiration could take the form of sex, eating, or purely the sensation of creation such as sex and children. In the physical universe it would be that light emanation similar to sunlight. The third dynamic could be said to be that dynamic embracing persistence of groups of objects or entities. The fourth dynamic would concern itself with an entire species. The fifth dynamic would concern itself with other living species and would embrace all other living species. The sixth dynamic would embrace, in terms of survival, the space, energy, matter and forms of the universe as themselves. The seventh dynamic would be the urge to survive of the spirits or spiritual aspects of each universe. The eighth dynamic would be the overall creativeness or destructiveness as a continuing impulse. Each impulse is concerned wholly with systems of communication. Communication requires a viewpoint and a destination in its most elementary form, and as this grows more complex and as it grows more "important," communication grows more rigid and fixed as to its codes and lines. The reason for communication is to effect effects and observe effects. 380 Each of the three universes has its own trianglee of affinity, reality and communication. These three things are interdependent one upon another and one cannot exist independent of the other two. Affinity is the characteristic of the energy as to its vibration, condensation, rarefaction, and, in the physical universe, its degree of cohesion or dispersion. Reality depends upon coincidence or non-coincidence of flow and is marked mainly by the direction of flow. It is essentially agreement. Communication is the volume of flow or lack of flow. Of these three, communication is by far the most important. Affinity and reality exist to further communication. Under affinity we have, for instance, all the varied emotions which go from apathy at 0.1 through grief, fear, anger, antagonism, boredom, enthusiasm, exhilaration and serenity in that order. It is affinity and this rising scale of the characteristics of emotion which give us the tone scale. The tone scale can be a certain has seen other beings react emotionally, who has himself felt emotion, and who has seen the varied moods of the physical universe itself. The periodic chart of chemistry is itself a sort of tone scale. There is a downward spiral on the tone scale and an upward spiral. These spirals are marked by decreasing or increasing awareness. To go up scale one must increase his power to observe with certainty; to go down scale one must decrease his power to observe. There are two certainties here. One is a complete certainty of total awareness which would be at 40.0 on the tone scale, and the other is a certainty of total unawareness which would be 0.0 on the tone scale or nearly so. Neither end, however, is itself an absolute for the analytical mind, and the analytical mind can go below 0.0 of the reactive mind. However, these two classes of certainty are very wide in their satisfaction of the qualifications of a certainty. Because the two extremes of the scale are both zeroes in terms of space, it is possible to confuse one for the other and so make it appear that total awareness would be total unawareness. Experience and observation can disabuse one of this idea. The scale is not circular. The characteristics and potentiality of the top of the scale or near the top of the scale are unbounded creation, outflow, certainty, going-awayness, explosion, holding apart, spreading apart, letting go, reaching, goals of a causative nature, widening space, freedom from time, separateness, differentiation, givingness of sensation, vaporizingness, glowingness, lightness, whiteness, desolidifyingness, total awareness, total understanding, total ARC. The bottom of the scale and the vicinity around it includes death, inflow, certainty, coming-backness, implosion, letting-come-together, pulling together, holding together, withdrawing, effect goals (ambition to be an effect rather than a cause), contracting space, no time or infinite time in a moment, connectingness, identification, identity, receivingness of sensation, condensation, blackness, solidification, no-awareness, no understanding, no ARC. These various characteristics or intentions are observable for any dynamic and any universe. Between these two extremes is the mean of action where complete freedom to do any of these things of the top or bottom of the scale is exercised. Therefore, somewhere between 3.5 on the tone scale and 36.5 there is action. The above conditions of top and bottom of the scale, of course, reach away from the extremes and toward each other. As awareness becomes more fixed, intentions become less flexible in action. Communications systems become more rigid, more complex and less susceptible of alteration. One alters these communications systems, however, by raising or lowering certainty on the three universes. The principal difference between the analytical mind in a state of awareness itself, and the reactive mind, is that the analytical mind, highly aware, knows that it is not the thing but is the viewpoint of things. Of this it can be very certain as it increases in awareness. The reactive mind conceives itself to be the thing. The analytical mind is in a state of becoming without reaching the point of being. The reactive mind conceives itself to be in a state of being and so resists becoming. 381 Perception is accomplished by the analytical mind in a high state of awareness by its own outflow and inflow or by its receipt of inflows which it can outflow. The reactive mind perceives by inflow only, and makes complete recordings of the inflow. The analytical mind is capable of developing its own energy. It is the energy of the analytical mind which empowers the reactive mind, but the reactive mind can be as well by the energy of other minds and by the life energy contained in any living thing. Thus the reactive mind can become the servant of all things, it can believe it is anything, it can believe it is owned or has the identity of anyone, regardless of whom it was created to serve. The analytical mind serves itself in a continuing knowledge of serving itself, but it serves as well and knows it serves the other two universes. The analytical mind extends from it points or observes points extended from it and thus conceives space. Space is only the viewpoint of dimension. The dimension depends upon those points which give it boundary. Within these dimensions called space, the analytical mind can create energy and form and thus, by change of form, beget time. Whether created by or within any one of the three universes, flow of energy is accomplished by setting up a terminal and flowing toward it from a viewpoint a stream of energy or by setting up two terminals and causing a flow between them. Each universe could be said to be a two-terminal universe, but flows can be set up on a basis of more than two terminals. The basic unit of any universe in terms of energy is two. This, however, does not restrict or qualify the number of viewpoints which any universe can have. A physical universe, however, is observably a two-terminal universe and a two-point universe, and it is also observable that the other two universes set up almost invariably two terminals or more and utilize two viewpoints each. Very low on the scale in terms of awareness, the analytical mind conceives itself to be the reactive mind and so does not act or perform to put out dimension points so as to get space, and does not generate for its own accountability energy. It does, however, always generate energy whether it admits it is doing so or not. The concern of two viewpoints is attention. Each viewpoint is apt to be curious about or desire the attention of another viewpoint. The most valuable part of an attention interchange is admiration. Admiration is a special particle. It is a universal solvent. It is the very substance of a communication line, and it is that thing which is considered desirable in the game of the three universes. Admiration goes into the interplay of the universes in the form of made-up objects or even in the form of bodies. These made-up objects could be called "creative pictures." These, as they become more complex in form, take on the aspect of a life of their own and become animated beings. Two viewpoints setting up terminals to be viewed by the other viewpoint demand attention one from the other and will invent all manner of "reasons" to command the continuing attention of the other viewpoint. One of the primary methods of operation is to make ones object or action of object so strange that the other viewpoint cannot look away. Another is to make the object or action of object so artistic or colorful or interesting that the other viewpoint cannot look away. Another method is the command by force for attention. Another method is to inhibit the attention so as to invite it solely to one's objects. One can plot this as a cycle of demand for attention with curiosity below 40.0, desire below that, enforcement down to as low as 1.5 on the scale, and inhibition at 1.1 on down. The lowest methods of this scale are quite observable amongst men, and the primary operation, very low on the scale, is inhibition of attention elsewhere. By cutting the communication lines of another viewpoint, an effect is created on the other viewpoint by which that viewpoint fixes with whatever emotion (since any attention is better than no attention) upon the products or objects of that one who cut the communication line. There are many methods of cutting communication lines. A common one could be summarized as "It's too horrible over that way for you to look." Viewpoints are thus given the understanding that they are surrounded by horrible things which they have never perceived and which, indeed, have never existed but which are said to be there so that they will be forced to give attention. 382 Hidden influences are the commonest methods of enforcing attention. Of course, any analytical mind is itself a hidden influence since it cannot as itself be perceived. Only its energy and objects can be perceived. Thus comes about the worship of the hidden influence, the fear of the hidden influence, the neurosis about hidden influences. The goal of seeking attention is to receive the particle admiration. One creates effects simply in order to create effects, but he is given the bonus of admiration when he creates sufficient effect or, what is most important, when he demands, commands and is able to effect admiration by duress. It might be said that there was no eating until one was so furious about not being admired that one slew as a punishment. The tiger, walking through the woods with his beautiful stripes, it could be humorously offered, would never have eaten a thing and would not be eating today if some monkey had not chattered insults at him instead of admiring him. The tiger compelled the admiration of the monkey by pinning him down and eating him up. It can be observed that the eating of living flesh or live cells delivers a kind of admiration to the taste, and it can be observed that under torture, duress of all kinds, the tortured one will suddenly, if degradedly, admire his torturer. Energy pictures which we call "mock-ups" are created things which themselves contain admiration. It could be said that these are prior to bodies. The acquisition of admiration by pain, by eating, or by devouring something that belongs to somebody else was later succeeded by a better communications system which would prevent eating on such a rigorous scale. This thing was sex, which is an interchange of condensed admiration particles which forwards new bodies into being. So far as the body of homo sapiens is concerned, its desire not to be eaten has been answered evidently by sex, and sex performs the function of continued survival of form. Thus, so long as one has the symbol of sex to offer, one feels relatively secure and when he does not have that symbol to offer, one feels insecure. But of this evolution of admiration and of evolution itself, we have no high degree of certainty as we first begin to observe, and it is offered here as an explanation of why it is a thing we do not particularly need and a thing of which we will or will not gain a future certainty as we go up the scale of awareness. Many things are non-existent low on the scale. Many things are uncertain on the scale at low levels, which become high level certainties up on the scale; but this certainty only depends on the positiveness of observation or the positiveness of observation which says the thing does not exist. It is not the purpose of Scientology to present an uncertainty and then demand that it be accepted, for here is the gradient scale of a process by which one can become more certain. If there be immortality or even the lack of necessity on the part of the analytical mind to be a specific object, then one will find it out in due course as he is processed. If they do not exist, again one will find it out. This would be a matter of progressive observation. Where a thing exists in the form of an uncertainty it has a tendency to plague the reactive mind, for the reactive mind itself deals only with uncertainties and its convictions are based entirely on blows and pain. A very basic uncertainty comes about on the subject of applause. High on the scale one performs for an effect and knows that it is an effect, whether or not there is any attention or admiration, which is to say applause. A little lower on the scale, one desires a nod or the actual substance of admiration. If it does not come, he is not concerned. But even lower on the scale the individual actively invites and requests applause. Lower than that, he becomes angry in the absence of applause. Lower than that, he exhibits fear, grief, and apathy in the lack of applause. Apathy is the realization that there will never be any applause for any effect. That which is not admired tends to persist, for the reactive mind does not destroy. One can become fixed upon producing a certain effect simply by insisting that it be admired. The longer it is not admired, the longer one is likely to persist in demanding that it be admired, which is to say exhibiting it, until at length it breaks down scale to a lower level and he realizes it will not be admired, at which time he becomes the effect of it. Here one has become the effect of one's own cause. Here is the psychosomatic illness which began as a pretended infirmity in order to create an 383 effect. Perhaps it was once applauded but not sufficiently, and after a while was not applauded at all, and one was forced to applaud it himself and believe it himself and so it came into existence and was for him a certainty. This, too, is the course of responsibility which degenerates into irresponsibility. At the top of the scale one that he is causing the effect. Lower on the scale he says he is not causing the effect (even though he is causing the effect, only he knows he causes it). Even lower on the scale he does not take the middle step; he causes an effect and instantly believes that something else caused the effect rather than himself and that he is the effect of the effect. One can see cause and effect working in terms of viewpoints. If one has not been applauded for many things, one will begin to take the position of the audience. One does the trick, creates the thing, and then goes out front, sits down over the whole theater and applauds it, for one can be a knowing viewpoint from many places. This is often the case with a writer who is seldom confronted by his readers. Indeed, most editors are so low toned that they cut off all the admiring letters of a writer and leave him to wonder. As other things influence the writer, he goes down scale to a point where he believes the things he writes are not admired, and so he has to go out and sit in the audience. This is the first step to becoming the effect of his own cause. After a while he thinks he is the audience. When he does this, he is no longer the writer. Thus with the painter, thus with anyone. The little child is quite bent on causing effects and getting things admired. He is continually being evaluated in terms of what is to be admired. Evaluation is the reactive mind's conception of viewpoint. The reactive mind does not perceive, it evaluates. To the analytical mind it may sometimes appear that the reactive mind has a viewpoint. The reactive mind does not have a viewpoint, it has an evaluation of viewpoint. Thus the viewpoint of the analytical mind is an actual point from which one perceives. Perception is done by sight, sound, smell, tactile, etc. The reactive mind's "viewpoint" is an opinion based on another opinion and upon a very small amount of observation, and that observation would be formed out of uncertainties. Thus the confusion of the word "viewpoint" itself. It can be a point from which one can be aware, which is its analytical definition, and it can be somebody's ideas on a certain subject, which is the reactive definition. Because the analytical mind and reactive mind in men can become confused one with the other, one is most prone to assume the actual perception point of that person who has most evaluated for him. Father and mother, for instance, have evaluated about art, habits, goodness, behavior, badness, how one should dress, what manners are, to such a degree that the child has no choice, it seems to him, but to assume their "points to look from," and so we will find the child observing things as his father or mother would observe them and even wearing his father's glasses or his mother's glasses as he grows older. He has confused evaluation with actual perception. Where he has been told that he is bad looking, ugly, ridiculous, unmannerly, crude and so forth by somebody else continually, his reactive mind (which, like a prostitute, cares nothing for its master and serves anyone) eventually causes him to lose his viewpoint of himself and he sees himself not by observation but by evaluation as something undesirable. Of course, he would rather be something than nothing. He has, indeed, a horror of being nothing. So it is better to be something ugly about which he is guessing than to be nothing at all, and so he persists and continues as he is. Furthermore, because he has been talked to so much about talking, about looking, about perceiving in general, he has gotten the idea that his communications system is unalterable. His whole business of living actually is a communications system with the motivation of causing effects. Thus the lower he is on the tone scale the more he persists without change except downward. The characteristic actions of the energy produced by the analytical mind are summarized above in terms of the top and bottom of the scale. However, the most important of these seem to be reaching and withdrawing. In the MEST universe, we have start, stop, and change as the characteristics of motion. The analytical mind, however, with its dimension points, is more concerned with reaching and withdrawing. This 384 is the way it perceives. It can control by creating or using energy such as that in the physical universe, and it uses this energy to start, stop, and change other energy. But in itself, its handling-of-dimension-points direction consists of reaching and withdrawing. Compulsive reaching, compulsive withdrawing, bring about many odd and interesting manifestations. The sensation of pain is actually a sensation of loss. It is a loss of beingness, a loss of position and awareness. Therefore, when one loses anything, he has a tendency to perceive less, for there is less to perceive. Something has withdrawn from him without his consent. This would be the definition of loss. This brings about eventually a condition of darkness. This could also be called an ARC break. If he has lost something, the guilty party is probably in the other two universes. It is either the physical universe or another's universe which has caused the loss. Thus he has less communication since he is unwilling to communicate, which is to say, put out things in the direction of something which is going to take them and carry them away without his further consent. This brings about a reduction of the desire to be aware which is the reduction of affinity, reduction of agreement (reality) and the reduction of communication in general. In a moment of severe disappointment in one's fellow man, the universe around him actually grows dark. Simply as an experiment, one can say to himself that he has the only viewpoint there is, that all other viewpoints are simply mocked up by him; he will get an almost immediate diminution of lightness around him. This is the same mechanism as the mechanism of loss. The result of too much loss is darkness. Another mechanism of the darkness and unawareness settling over a person is brought about by the loss of a viewpoint which has greatly evaluated for one. One has had a mother or a father who overevaluated about everything, and then this parent or guardian or ally in life, such as a teacher, died or inexplicably disappeared. One was depending for actual looking, seeing, hearing, upon the continued existence of this individual. Suddenly that individual goes and all becomes dark. After that one is not able to perceive one's own universe, for one was most of the time actually perceiving the lost person's universe, and now that universe is no longer there, which gives one the idea that he has no universe to perceive. This even dims his perception of the physical universe, of course, because of the interdependence of the trianglee of the three universes. When one has had an insufficient amount of admiration from sexual partners, the physical body, which depends mainly upon sex for its sensation and continuance to almost as great a degree as upon eating, will actually begin to change viewpoint to the other sex. Thus we find some older men becoming as women, some older women becoming as men. Thus we get the failure of the androgen and estrogen balances and the resultant decay of the body. Here in the matter of sex, one finds reaching and withdrawing rising to considerable magnitude. The reactive mind operating the body conceives itself to be withdrawing and does not know from what it is withdrawing, for it perceives itself to be under the compulsion of reaching and does not know for what it is reaching. In terms of processing, it is withdrawing from or reaching toward sexual partners. When it withdraws a great deal, or when it has been withdrawn from a great deal the reactive mind conceives the body to be covered with blackness. This resolves in terms of sex and eating. It should be fully understood, however, that this is the resolution of the problem of the body and this resolution is employed only when the analytical mind cannot be brought itself into an immediate height of awareness, using SOP 8. When one addresses the body itself, and only the body, one addresses the subject of sex and the subject of eating in terms of reaching and withdrawing. The particular processes used on this are called Matched Terminalling or Double Terminalling. This is done in the following fashion. Even when the individual cannot create forms of his own, he can at least create two ideas in front of him. He can put a form with an idea or an idea itself facing another idea out in front of him, both of them exactly alike, "withdrawing from sex" "reaching toward sex." He will very often find other terminals he did not create suddenly appearing. When he has run withdrawing, those things he puts up will be black and the object from which it is withdrawing will 385 be white. He should get the idea that the whitish object is reaching and the blackish object is withdrawing. He should then run this identical terminal as though it is being put up by somebody else not himself, again with withdrawing for blackness, reaching for greyness. And then he should run it as though somebody is putting it up for somebody else other than himself. These three causations of putting up this identical idea facing itself are himself, another for him, and others for others. This is called Matched Terminalling. Double Terminalling simply puts up two pairs of matched terminals. The pairs may each be of two different things but each pair contains one thing the same as the other pair; in other words, husband and wife is one pair and husband and wife is the other pair. These, parallel, give one the two-terminal effect necessary for a discharge. One will find that these terminals discharge one against the other. However, this is a physical body technique and it is limited in use. If one becomes very ill in doing it, he should turn to what is called later on an unlimited technique; or he should do the next to the last list in the book Self Analysis in Scientology and do it over and over, or he should simply go straight through Short Eight. It has many remedies. This Matched Terminalling for oneself, others for oneself, and others for others on the subject of reaching and withdrawing on sex, can of course be considerably expanded as a technique. It can have in it compulsion to reach, compulsion to withdraw, compulsion to reach while somebody else is withdrawing, compulsion not to reach, and it can be addressed in terms of all those complexes and things which Sigmund Freud observed empirically while investigating in his practice.* Sigmund Freud observed, even as you may have observed, that a person's concern and trouble with his body commonly began at the age of puberty, and that a curve of his ups and downs did sudden changes at those points where he was defeated sexually, where his sexual impotence ceased and where it increased. Dr. Freud unfortunately developed no fast or deeply workable techniques to resolve problems posed by these observations, mainly because the selection of sex as the prime motivator was not the selection of the basic mechanics of beingness. However, the brilliance of Freud's theories and his extrapolations from a limited amount of data, and his courage in standing before a whole world and declaring that an unpopular subject was the root of all evil, has no parallel in history. The complexes he mentioned, each and every one, are discoverable in the mind by direct observation or electropsychometry and are resolvable in the body by the technique of "Matched Terminals in Brackets" which is the proper name for the above. Where the level of the case is Step IV or Step V or below in SOP 8, it is necessary to free the analytical mind of the grip of the body. The analytical mind cannot withdraw. The body is most swiftly reduced to compliance by running the second dynamic. This is very far from the end-all of processing, but it is the fastest method I have developed for remedying occlusion or accomplishing exteriorization in low step cases. In sex and eating, the body desires to be an effect most strongly and in these things one does find the strongest desire on the part of the body in terms of immediate accessibility. The analytical mind, on the other hand, can create its own sensation, but it has become dependent upon the body. Even so, it is that part of the beingness which desires to give sensation rather than receive it. Thus one has the conflict of desire to give sensation crossed with the desire to receive sensation on the part of the reactive mind. The body's desire to receive sensation is so strong that an extremely powerful and persistent uncertainty ("maybe") develops, and the primary conflict of the analytical mind and the body's reactive mind comes about. I cannot help but give forth my own admiration to a man who, working without prior art, without electropsychometry, without nuclear physics, without any broad observation of primitive tribes or ethnology in general, separated from his conclusion by every convention of his age, yet hit upon and set forth with the weight of logic alone, the center of disturbance in the human body. He did not live to see his theory completely validated. He was deserted * L. Ron Hubbard studied Freudian psychoanalysis under the tutelage of Commander Thompson (MC) USN, who was one of Freud's star pupils. Commander Thompson studied under Freud himself in Vienna to introduce to the United States Navy the theory and practice of psychoanalysis, and was sent to Vienna for that purpose. 386 by his students, who began to write fantastic theories, completely unworkable and far from the point, which yet were better accepted. In discouragement, at the end of his career, he wrote a paper called "Psychoanalysis, Terminable and Interminable." Freud, with no method of direct observation, spoke of prenatals, birth trauma, and verbally, if not in writing, of past existences and of the continuing immortality of the individual. No praise can be great enough to give such a man, and the credit I give him for my own inspiration and work is entirely without reservation or bounds. My only regret is that I do not know where he is today to show him his 1894 libido theory completely vindicated and a Freudian psychanalysis delivered beyond his expectations in five hours of auditing. The analytical mind can be processed directly, and it improves simply by changing its mind about things. But so long as it believes itself to be closely dependent upon the reactive mind and the body, it cannot change its opinions. These opinions, however, are not simple shifts of mind. They are changes of experience. The analytical mind must discover that it can perceive, that it can perceive accurately in three universes, that it does not need to be dependent upon the body and that it can handle any reactive mind. This is done by increasing its powers of perception, increasing the number of viewpoints it can assume, and increasing its ability to locate spaces, actions and objects in time and space, and by increasing its ability above that to create space, energy and objects. This is done by drills and by procedures of the first three steps of SOP 8. It should not for one moment be thought that one is trying to perform by the gradient scale of increasing certainties in Scientology all tricks and exhibitions of which the ancients speak. We are not even vaguely interested in moving physical universe objects, throwing lightning about, or in creating solids which can be seen by others. We are only interested in the rehabilitation of the analytical mind to a point where it can handle any reactive mind, whatever its proximity to that reactive mind. We are not interested, in other words, in the objective reality from another viewpoint of the capabilities of the analytical mind in performing various types of tricks. Whether it can do these things or not do these things falls into the realm of Para-Scientology, for it is completely beyond the ability to be certain where the analytical mind is not processed well up and where the observer is very low on the tone scale. We are not trying to achieve the certainty of mysticism, necromancy, or, to be blunt, the Indian rope-trick. We are trying to make sane, well beings. The analytical mind, when it is in close proximity to the body, is unwittingly continually restimulating a reactive mind which, some say, evolved through very difficult and savage stages. Just as Freud said, the suppression in the mind is the suppression of things so bestial, so savage that the preclear undergoing professional processing is extremely shocked. Almost anything, and almost any impulse, including a thirst for pain and a desire to create any kind of effect, no matter how bad, will manifest itself while processing the reactive mind. Cannibalism, purely for sensation, so as to get the last remnants of admiration of the tortured and dying being, becomes a subjective certainty to the preclear who undergoes processing and has to have his reactive mind addressed before he can be himself, which is, of course, his analytical mind. The more suppression his reactive mind gets, the more it restimulates its beastliness. The analytical mind is basically good. It has suffered from this proximity to the reactive mind. It is no wonder that Plato wrote as he did in an essay about the conduct and behavior of man. It is no wonder that states are completely convinced that man is a beast and must be held in check at pistol point. The wonder is that, in a civilized world, so few crimes are committed. Our desire is to reach the basic goodness of the individual and bring him into a level of activity where he does not have to do terrible and gruesome things in order to produce an effect. There are various levels as one goes up scale where these manifestations seem to be the all and everything of existence. One becomes completely downhearted at the thought that one goes upscale simply to get to a point where he can kill and maim and hurt with impunity. One's feelings of honor, ethics, all his finer beingness, is revolted at the idea that this is, in actuality, life. He should say instead that this is life in a stupid conflict of uncertainties. The goal is not to get above such things and ignore them. The goal is to achieve the basic decency which is inherent in all of us. Although I have given you here "Matched Terminal Brackets" on the subject of reach and withdraw, with particular attention to sex, you must understand that this is a professional auditor's technique. The first three steps of SOP 8, when they can be done, can be done by alert, interested people. From Step IV down, a professional auditor is not simply desirable, he is completely necessary. This technique which I have given you here turns on, when one runs its compulsive aspects, particularly when one runs must reach and can't reach, the emotion which we see in sanitariums which is called insanity. And although the turn-on is brief and temporary and would wear away in about three days, an inexperienced auditor could become quite frightened. Simply by carrying on with the technique or by getting back to unlimited techniques or by taking Self Analysis with its next to last list, these things could be remedied; but these techniques walk on the rim of hell where they are addressed to cases below the level of IV. If the test subject or the preclear cannot make space, which is to say Step III of SOP 8, let a professional auditor have him. The professional auditor, by using "Matched Terminal Brackets" of reach and withdraw with attention to sex, will be able to exteriorize this analytical mind and turn on its perceptions. This is skilled work, however, and is a little too shockingly intimate to the seamier side of life for tender hands and tender minds. Even the operation of wasting which is contained in expanded GITA is capable of turning on a vast amount of illness and somatic on the part of the preclear. Expanded GITA is a limited technique, which is to say it can be audited perhaps only for ten minutes and at the most for 50 or 60 hours, without finding the preclear on the downgrade. One has to turn to an unlimited technique such as contained in Short Eight if the preclear becomes too ill trying to waste things. Just because an unlimited technique is labelled unlimited, is no reason why it is a faint technique. These unlimited techniques are extremely powerful. They're very simple, but again, when one of them becomes too strong for the preclear, it is necessary to turn to something simpler and easier. Simply getting the idea in two places, the idea, so to speak, facing the idea "There is nothing," will turn on a sick sensation in many preclears. This fear of being nothing is very great. He will be anything rather than nothing. A safe technique is that technique which always -- I repeat, always -- deals in things of which the preclear is certain. When one deals with uncertainties, one is dealing with circuits. One can use double terminalling, which is to say, two pairs of matched terminals, of the preclear being certain of things. One never runs things or puts the preclear up against things of which one is uncertain or of which the preclear is uncertain, if one wishes the preclear to come on up the tone scale. As an example of this, on any object, thing or idea, on any psychosomatic ill or any numb portion of the body, one has only to run "There is something there, there is nothing there." Have it saying, "There is something here, there is nothing here." One can do a complete bracket on this, having the numb or painful or injured area saying, "There is something here, there is nothing here," having it then say, "There is something there, there is nothing there," having the preclear say about the area, "There is something there, there is nothing there," and then the preclear about himself, "There is something here, there is nothing here." This makes a complete bracket. This turns on and off interesting somatics. A professional auditor could get the somatic or numb area to get the feeling it is reaching while the preclear is withdrawing, the preclear reaching while it is withdrawing, and bring about a change in any somatic. As one is dealing with communications systems, one must realize that communication depends upon certainty of despatch and receipt, and certainty of what it is that is being despatched and received. Thus one does not deal in uncertainties. There is something, there is nothing, are, of course, observable certainties because one is top-scale, the other is bottom-scale. One does not say what the something is and, of course, nothingness needs no qualifications. In the case of the person who has been and is trying to become again, one should run out by concepts the former successes, the triumphs of that person and the times 388 when he was absolutely certain he had failed. One does this with double terminals or "Matched Terminal Brackets." This is a professional technique. It was mentioned to me by Meredith Starr, one of the great mystics from Cyprus, that Jung had once had a great experience and had sought ever since to recover it. He gave this as another man's opinion of Jung. This gives you some clue as to what happens to someone who has a great triumph. He ever afterwards is not seeking to duplicate the triumph, he is seeking the triumph itself. This puts him back on the time track. This is particularly applicable to old people. One hangs, then, on to certainties. The certainties are important. The uncertainties are important only in their production of psychosis. It is possible to take a sick animal and rehabilitate his idea that he is dangerous by dodging every time he strikes out, no matter how faintly, at one. It is possible to rehabilitate an individual who is very low on the tone scale merely by coaxing him to reach out and touch the material universe and, touching it, to be certain that it is there, and having touched it, to withdraw the touch and to be certain that he could withdraw. Certainty is a wonderful thing. The road toward realizing what certainty is has led these investigations through many uncertainties. One had to find out what was, before one could find out what could be. That work is done. It is possible to take large groups and, using Short Eight, to bring them, each and every one, into higher levels of certainty. And bringing them into higher levels of certainty brings them into higher levels of communication, communication not only with their own bodies but with others and with the material universe. And as one raises that level of awareness, one raises also the ability to be, to do, to live. Today this world suffers from an increasing incidence of neurosis brought about by a dependency upon mechanical things which do not think, which do not feel, but which can give pain to those that live. It suffers with an overdose of agreement that there is only one universe. So long as it believes that there is only one universe, that there is only one universe to study, to be studied, only one universe to agree with, it will continue to seek the lowest end of the scale, which is to say, that point where all universes become one universe. Where the trianglee vanishes to a single point it vanishes completely, and where one studies but one corner of the trianglee and ignores the other two corners of the triangle e, and agrees only with one corner of the trianglee such as the physical universe, one will tend toward that point where that corner of the trianglee is coincident with the other two corners, and this is death. The curse of this world is not actually its atom bomb, though that is bad enough. The curse of this world is the irresponsibility of those who, seeking to study but one universe, the physical universe, try to depress all beings down to the low order of mechanically motivated, undreaming, unaesthetic things. Science as a word has been disgraced, for the word science means truth and truth means light. A continual fixation and dependence upon only one universe while ignoring the other two universes leads to darkness, to despair, to nothingness. There is nothing wrong with the physical universe; one should not cease to observe the physical universe, but one certainly should not concentrate upon it so that he can agree with it and its laws only. He has laws of his own. It is better, far better, for the individual to concentrate upon his own universe than to concentrate upon the MEST universe, but this in itself is not the final answer. A balance is achieved in the three universes and certainty upon those universes. All control is effected by introducing uncertainties and hidden influences. "Look how bad it is over there, so you'll have to look back at me." Thus slavery is effected solely by getting people to fix on one thing. That one thing in this case is the physical universe. Science, so called, today produces machines to blow your nose, produces machines to think for you, produces every possible argument as to why you should consider your body frail and unexpendable. Science, under the domination of capital, creates scarcity. It creates a scarcity of universes in fixing one upon one universe only. Those things which are scarce are those things which the individual has lost his faith in creating, in having. An individual who cannot create has to hold on to what he has. This leads him into holding on to what he has had. Where he has had a certainty in the past that something existed, he begins to grip it closer and closer to him; his space 389 lessens, his beingness lessens, he becomes less active. The reactive mind that cannot create children, has lost its hope of creation. It then can influence the analytical mind into believing that it can no longer create. The analytical mind creating artistically in the MEST universe and not in its own universe at all, and not in other people's universes that it can recognize, goes down scale until it meets on its own level the reactive mind. And here at this level we find the enslaver, the person who makes things scarce, the fellow who uses his ethics, so called, to enforce his crude judgments and to make things out of beings that could be men. Here, where the reactive mind and the analytical mind have come into a parity, we have the only effect that can be produced -- the effect of pain. Where we have an active desire for pain masking in a thousand guises, where every good impulse high on the scale is turned into a mockery, here we have crime, here we have war. These things are not awareness. These things merely act on a stimulus-response mechanism. Up scale is the high, bright breadth of being, breadth of understanding, breadth of awareness. To get there all one must do is to become aware of the existence of the three universes by direct observation. STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE 8 STEP I -- Ask preclear to be three feet behind his head. If stable there, have him be in various pleasant places until any feeling of scarcity of viewpoints is resolved. Then have him be in several undesirable places, then several pleasant places; then have him be in a slightly dangerous place, then in more and more dangerous places until he can sit in the center of the Sun. Be sure to observe a gradient scale of ugliness and dangerousness of places. Do not let the preclear fail. Then do remaining steps with preclear exteriorized. STEP II -- Have preclear mock up own body. If he does this easily and clearly, have him mock up own body until he slips out of it. When he is exteriorized and knows it thoroughly (the condition of all exteriorization) do STEP I. If his mock-up was not clear, go to STEP III immediately. STEP III -- SPACATION. Have preclear close his eyes and find upper corners of the room. Have him sit there, not thinking, refusing to think of anything, interested only in the corners until he is completely exteriorized without strain. Then do a spacation (constructing own space with eight anchor points and holding it stable without effort) and go to STEP I. If preclear was unable to locate corners of the room easily with his eyes closed, go to STEP IV. STEP IV -- EXPANDED GITA. (This is an extension of Give and Take processing.) Test preclear to see if he can get a mock-up he can see, no matter how vague. Then have him WASTE, ACCEPT UNDER DURESS, DESIRE and finally Be Able to TAKE or LEAVE ALONE each of the items listed below. He does this with mock-ups or ideas. He must do the sequence of WASTE -- etc. in the order given here for each item. He wastes it by having it at remote distances in places where it will do no good, being used or done or observed by something which cannot appreciate it. When he is able to waste it in vast quantities the auditor then has him accept it in mock-up form until he no longer is antagonistic to having to accept it even when it is unpleasant and great force is applied to make him take it. Again, with mock-ups, he must be able to bring himself to desire it even in its worst form; then, by mock-ups of it in its most desirable form he must come to be able to leave it entirely alone or take it in its worst form without caring. EXPANDED GITA remedies contra-survival abundance and scarcity. It will be found that before one can accept a very scarce (to him) thing, he has to give it away. A person with a milk allergy must be able to give away, in mock-up, enormous quantities of milk, wasting it, before he can accept any himself. The items in this list are compounded of several years of isolating what factors were more important to 390 minds than others. The list lacks very few of the very important items, if any. Additions to or subtractions from this list should not be attempted. Viewpoint, Work and Pain should be heavily and often stressed and given priority. Waste, Have Forced Upon, Desire, Be Able to Give or Take, in that order, each of the following: (Order of items here is random.) Viewpoint, Work, Pain, Beauty, Motion, Engrams, Ugliness, Logic, Pictures, Confinement, Money, Parents, Blackness, Police, Light, Explosions, Bodies, Degradation, Male Bodies, Female Bodies, Babies, Children Male, Children Female, Strange and Peculiar Bodies, Dead Bodies, Affinity (Love), Agreement, Beautiful Bodies, People, Attention, Admiration, Force, Energy, Lightning, Unconsciousness, Problems, Antagonism, Reverence, Fear, Objects, Time, Eating Human Bodies, Sound, Grief, Beautiful Sadness, Hidden Influences, Hidden Communications, Doubts, Faces, Dimension Points, Anger, Apathy, Ideas, Enthusiasm, Disagreement, Hate, Sex, Reward, Eating Parents, Eaten by Mother, Eaten by Father, Eating Men, Eaten by Men, Eating Women, Eaten by Women, Start, Broken Communications, Written Communications, Stillness, Exhaustion, Women Stopping Motion, Men Stopping Motion, Changing Motion Women, Changing Motion Men, Changing Motion Babies, Changing Motion Children, Starting Motion Men, Starting Motion Women, Starting Motion Children, Starting Motion Objects, Starting Motion Self, Omens, Wickedness, Forgiveness, Play, Games, Sound, Machinery, Touch, Traffic, Stolen Goods, Stolen Pictures, Homes, Blasphemy, Caves, Medicine, Glass, Mirrors, Pride, Musical Instruments, Dirty Words, Space, Wild Animals, Pets, Birds, Air, Water, Food, Milk, Garbage, Gases, Excreta, Rooms, Beds, Punishment, Boredom, Confusion, Soldiers, Executioners, Doctors, Judges, Psychiatrists, Alcoholic Liquor, Drugs, Masturbation, Rewards, Heat, Cold, Forbidden Things, God, The Devil, Spirits, Bacteria, Glory, Dependence, Responsibility, Wrongness, Rightness, Insanity, Sanity, Faith, Christ, Death, Rank, Poverty, Maps, Irresponsibility, Greetings, Fare wells, Credit, Loneliness, Jewels, Teeth, Genitalia, Complications, Help, Pretense, Truth, Lies, Assurance, Contempt, Predictability, Unpredictability, Vacuums, White Clouds, Black Clouds, Unattainables, Hidden Things, Worry, Revenge, Textbooks, Kisses, The Past, The Future, The Present, Arms, Stomachs, Bowels, Mouths, Cigarettes, Smoke, Urine, Vomit, Convulsions, Saliva, Towers, Semen, Blackboards, Fireworks, Toys, Vehicles, Dolls, Audiences, Doors, Walls, Weapons, Blood, Ambitions, Illusions, Betrayal, Ridicule, Hope, Happiness, Mothers, Fathers, Grandparents, Suns, Planets, Moons, Sensation, Looking, Incidents, Waiting, Silence, Talking, Knowing, Not Knowing, Doubts, Fac One, Remembering, Forgetting, Auditing, Minds, Fame, Power, Accidents, Illnesses, Approval, Tiredness, Faces, Acting, Drama, Costumes, Sleep, Holding Things Apart, Holding Things Together, Destroying Things, Sending Things Away, Making Things Go Fast, Making Things Appear, Making Things Vanish, Convictions, Stability, Changing People, Silent Men, Silent Women, Silent Children, Symbols of Weakness, Symbols of Force, Disabilities, Education, Languages, Bestiality, Homosexuality, Invisible Bodies, Invisible Acts, Invisible Scenes, Accepting Things Back, Games, Rules, Players, Restimulation, Sexual Restimulation, Space Reduction, Size Reduction, Entertainment, Cheerfulness, Freedom for Others to Talk, Act, Feel Pain, Be Sad, Thetans, Personalities, Cruelty, Organizations. TRY FIRST: Healing Bodies, Strong Bodies, Good Perception, Good Recall. WARNING: Should your preclear become unstable or upset doing this process take him to STEP VI. Then return to this list. COMMENT: The mind is sufficiently complicated that it can be expected to have computations on almost all the above. Thus there is no single clearing button and search for it is at the dictate of a circuit, the mechanism of circuits being to search for something hidden. Thus, your preclear may begin to compute and philosophize and seek to find the "button" that will release all this. All this releases all the buttons so tell him to relax and go on with the process every time he starts to compute. NOTE: Running the above will bring to the surface without further attention the "computation on the case" and the service facsimile. Do not audit these. Run EXPANDED GITA. 391 STEP V -- PRESENT TIME DIFFERENTIATION. EXTERIORIZATION BY SCENERY. Have preclear, with his body's eyes, study and see the difference between similar real objects such as the two legs of a chair, the spaces between the back, two cigarettes, two trees, two girls. He must see and study the objects. It is not enough to remember the objects. The definition of a CASE V is "no mock-ups, only blackness." Have him continue this process until he is alert. Use liberally and often. Then exteriorize by having the preclear close his eyes and move actual places on Earth under him, preferably places he has not been. Have him bring these up to him. Find two similar things in the scene and observe the difference between them. Move him over oceans and cities until he is certain that he is exteriorized. Then, preferably while exteriorized, have him do STEP I. This case has to know before he can be. His viewpoint is in the past. Give him present time viewpoints until he is a STEP I by the methods given for STEP V. (COMMENT: PRESENT TIME DIFFERENTIATION is a very good general technique and resolves chronic somatics and improves tone.) Assume other people's viewpoints as a drill -- not what they think about things, but as they look at things in the material universe. Attempt to be in the location of a leaf, blade of grass, car headlamp, etc., and view the universe. STEP VI -- ARC STRAIGHT WIRE using next-to-last list of Self Analysis in Scientology which asks preclear to recall something really real to him, etc. Then use the lists in Self Analysis. This level is the neurotic. It is identified by the preclear having mockups which will not persist or which won't go away. Use also PRESENT TIME DIFFERENTIATION. Then go to STEP IV. At any drop in tone, return case to STEP VI. STEP VII -- PSYCHOTIC CASES. (Whether in or out of body.) The psychotic appears to be in such desperate straits that the auditor often errs in thinking desperate measures are necessary. Use the lightest possible methods. Give case space and freedom where possible. Have psychotic imitate (not mock up) various things. Have him do PRESENT TIME DIFFERENTIATION. Get him to tell the difference between things by actual touch. Have him locate, differentiate and touch things that are really real to him (real objects or items). If inaccessible, mimic him with own body, whatever he does, until he comes into communication. Have him locate corners of the room and hold them without thinking. As soon as his communication is up go to STEP VI, but be very sure he changes any mock-up around until he knows it is a mock-up, that it exists, and that he himself made it. Do not run engrams. He is psychotic because viewpoints in present time are so scarce that he has gone into the past for viewpoints which at least he knew existed. By PRESENT TIME DIFFERENTIATION, by tactile on objects, restore his idea of an abundance of viewpoint in present time. If he has been given electric shock, do not process it or any other brutality. Work him for very brief periods, for his attention span is short. Always work psychotics with another auditor or a companion present. NOTE: All steps for all cases. If in doubt as to condition of case, test with STEP VI. NOTE: An operating thetan must also be able to manufacture particles of admiration and force in abundance. APPENDIX NO. I TO SOP 8 (Any alterations in SOP 8 will appear in appendices, as they are expected to be minor and to make no radical change in the design of the steps in general.) STEP I -- The Operating Thetan must be able to manufacture and experience to his complete satisfaction all sensations including pain in mock-up form, and all energies such as admiration and force. It will be found that some STEP I cases will not be able to manufacture admiration particles. 392 STEP II -- Be very careful not to make a lower step preclear, while still in a body, mock up his own body too long. Any mock-up will appear if it is simply put there often enough and long enough -- providing the preclear doesn't spin in the process. The long-term manufacture of mock-ups of one's own body and of admiration may not produce quite the results expected -- communication lines which should remain shut may open with bad results. These lines that are shut appear like hard, black cords to the preclear. There are two types of techniques in general, POSITIVE GAIN and NEGATIVE GAIN, as defined in the above text. POSITIVE GAIN Can Be Administered in Unlimited Amounts Without Harm. NEGATIVE GAIN techniques such as the reduction of engrams and locks, double-terminalling, black and white, are often limited in the length of time they can be given. After a few hundred hours of early type auditing the case could be found to slump. Thus we have in POSITIVE GAIN the unlimited technique which improves the analytical mind. In NEGATIVE GAIN we have a limited (in terms of the time it can be audited) technique. In SOP 8 the following steps and processes may be audited without limit: STEP I, STEP III, STEP V, STEP VI, STEP VII. The following steps are limited and should not be audited many hours without changing to another type (unlimited) for a while, after which the following steps could be resumed: STEP II, STEP IV. The following steps can be used on groups. STEP III, STEP V part 1 and part 2, STEP VI, STEP VII. APPENDIX NO. 2 OF SOP 8 CERTAINTY PROCESSING The anatomy of maybe consists of uncertainties and is resolved by the processing of certainties. It is not resolved by the processing of uncertainties. An uncertainty is held in suspense solely because the preclear is holding on so hard to certainties. The basic thing he is holding on to is "I have a solution" "I have no solution." One of these is positive, the other is negative. A complete positive and a complete negative are alike a certainty. The basic certainty is "There is something" "There is nothing." A person can be certain there is something; he can be certain there is nothing. "There is something" "There is nothing" resolves chronic somatics in this order. One gets the preclear to have the center of the somatics say "There is something here" "There is nothing here." Then he gets the center of the somatic to say "There is nothing there" "There is something there." Then the auditor has the preclear say toward the somatic "There is something there" "There is nothing there." And then he gets the preclear to say about himself "There is something here" "There is nothing here." This is a very fast resolution of chronic somatics. Quite ordinarily three or four minutes of this will resolve an acute state and fifteen or twenty minutes of it will resolve a chronic state. This matter of certainties goes further. It has been determined by my recent investigations that the reason behind what is happening is the desire of a cause to bring about an effect. Something is better than nothing, anything is better than nothing. If you will match terminals in brackets "There is nothing" you will find that a lot of your preclears become very ill. This should be turned around into "There is something." The way one does Matched Terminals is to have the preclear facing the preclear or his father facing his father. In other words, two of each of anything, one facing the other. These two things will discharge one into the other, thus running off the difficulty. By bracket we mean, of course, running this with the preclear putting them up as himself to himself; as though they were put up by somebody else, the somebody else facing the somebody else; and the matched terminal again put up by others facing others. 393 The clue to all this is positive and negative in terms of certainties. The positive plus the negative in conflict make an uncertainty. A great number of combinations of things can be run. Here's a list of the combinations: The button behind sex is "I can begin life anew" "I cannot begin life anew," "I can make life persist" "I cannot make life persist," "I can stop life" "I cannot stop life," "I can change life" "I cannot change life," "I can start life" "I cannot start life." A very effective process: "something wrong -- " "Nothing wrong -- " "with you, me, they, my mind, communication, various allies." A very basic resolution of the lack of space of an individual is to locate these people and these objects which you've been using as anchor points, such as father, mother and so forth, and put them into matched terminal brackets with this: "There is father" "There is no father," "There is grandfather" "There is no grandfather." In the compulsive line this can be changed to "There must be no father" "There must be a father." One takes all the allies of an individual and runs them in this fashion. The basic law underneath this is that a person becomes the effect of anything upon which he has had to depend. This would tell you immediately that the sixth dynamic, the MEST universe, is the largest dependency of the individual. This can be run out, but then any dynamic can be run out in this fashion. "There is myself' "There is no self' and so on up the dynamics. "(Any dynamic) is preventing me from communicating" "(Any dynamic) is not preventing me from communicating" is intensely effective. Any such technique can be varied by applying the sub-zero scale as found in Scientology 8-8008 which is also to be found in an earlier issue of the Journal of Scientology. One runs any certainty out because he knows that for this certainty there is an opposite negative certainty and that between these lies a maybe, and that the maybe stays in suspense in time. The basic operation of the reactive mind is to solve problems. It is based on uncertainties about observation. Thus one runs out certainties of observation. The most general shotgun technique would have to do with "There is sex" "There is no sex," "There is force" "There is no force." This could be run, of course, in terms of matched terminal brackets or even as concepts, but one must not neglect to run the overt act phenomenon, which is to say getting somebody else getting the concept. The processing out of certainties would then embrace "I have a solution,, "There is no solution." These two opposite ends would take care of any individual who was hung on the track with some solution, for that solution had its opposite. People who have studied medicine begin by being certain that medicine works and end by being certain that medicine doesn't work. They begin by studying psychology on a supposition that it is the solution, and finish up believing that it is not the solution. This also happens to superficial students of Dianetics and Scientology; thus one should also run "Dianetics is a solution" "Dianetics is not the solution." This would get one off the maybe on the subject. We are essentially processing communications systems. The entire process of auditing is concentrated upon withdrawing communications from the preclear as predicated on the basis of the body and that the preclear cannot handle communications. Thus "The preclear can handle communications" "The preclear cannot handle communications" is a shotgun technique which resolves maybes about his communications. An intensely interesting aspect of Certainty Processing is that it shows up intimately where the preclear is aberrated. Here is the overall basic technique. One runs "There is -- " "There is not -- " the following: Communications, Talk, Letters, Love, Agreement, Sex, Pain, Work, Bodies, Minds, Curiosity, Control, Enforcement, Compulsion, Inhibition, Food, Money, People, Ability, Beauty, Ugliness, Presents, and both the top and bottom of the Chart of Attitudes, positive and negative in each one. Basic in all this is the urge of the preclear to produce an effect, so one can run "I can produce an effect upon mama" "I cannot produce an effect upon mama," and so forth for all allies, and one will resolve the fixations of attention on the part of the preclear. Thus fixations of attention are resolved by Certainty Processing, processing out the production of effect. 394 One can occasionally, if he so desires, process the direct center of the maybe, which is to say doubt itself, in terms of Matched Terminals. This, however, is risky for it throws the preclear into a general state of doubt. The key to any such processing is the recovery of viewpoints. "I can have grandfather's viewpoint" "I cannot have grandfather's viewpoint" and so on, particularly with sexual partners, will prove intensely interesting on a case. "There are viewpoints" "There are no viewpoints," "I have a viewpoint" "I don't have a viewpoint," "Blank has a viewpoint" "Blank has no viewpoint" resolves problems. One should also realize that when one is processing facsimiles, he is processing at one time energy, sensation and aesthetics. The facsimile is a picture. The preclear is being affected by pictures mainly, and so "There are no pictures" "There are pictures" forwards the case toward handling pictures, which is to say facsimiles. A person tends to ally himself with somebody whom he considers capable of producing greater effects than himself, so "I, she, he, it can create greater effects" "I, she, he, it can create no effect" should be run. When one is processing, he is trying to withdraw communications. Reach and Withdraw are the two fundamentals in the action of theta. Must Reach and Can't Reach, Must Withdraw and Can't Withdraw are compulsions which, when run in combination, produce the manifestation of insanity in a preclear. "I can Reach" "I can't Reach," "I can Withdraw" "I can't Withdraw" open up into the fact that remembering and forgetting are dependent upon the ability to reach and withdraw. You will find that a preclear will respond to "You must" or "You can,', "You must not" "You cannot," "There is" "There is not" forgetting and remembering. The only reason a person is hanging on to a body or facsimile is that he has lost his belief in his ability to create. The rehabilitation of this ability to create is resolved, for instance, in a person who has had an ambition to write, with "I can write" "I cannot write" -- and so forth. The loss of this creative ability made the person hang on to what he had. The fact that a preclear has forgotten how to or no longer can himself generate force makes him hold on to stores of force. These are very often mistaken by the auditor for facsimiles. The preclear doesn't care for the facsimile, he simply cares for the force contained in the facsimile because he knows he doesn't have any force any more. It should be kept in mind that reaching and withdrawing are intensely productive of reaction in a preclear. But that preclear who does not respond to Reaching and Withdrawing and Certainty thereon, is hung up in a very special condition: he is trying to prevent something from happening. He also prevents auditing from happening. He has lost allies, he has had accidents, and he's hung up at all those points on the track where he feels he should have prevented something from happening. This is resolved by running "I must prevent it from happening" "I cannot prevent it from happening," "I must regain control" "I must lose all control." Blackness is the desire to be an effect and the inability to be cause. "I can create grandfather (or ally)" "I cannot create grandfather (or ally)" solves scarcity of allies. "I want to be aware" "I want no awareness" is a technique which is basic in attitudes. Run this as others, in Matched Terminal Brackets or in EXPANDED GITA. Certainty there is a past, Certainty there is no past; Certainty there is a future, Certainty there is no future; Certainty it means something else, Certainty it does not mean anything else; Certainty there is space, Certainty there is no space; Certainty there is energy, Certainty there is no energy; Certainty there are objects, Certainty there are no objects. SHORT 8 This is a short form of STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURE 8 of Scientology 8-8008. It can be used on any preclear without any survey of the case and 395 will not get him into any difficulties and should resolve his various computations. This can also be used on groups. Just do the lettered steps in order. (A) Next-to-last list in Self Analysis, Remembering Something Real etc., until auditor is certain preclear has and can do so easily. In a group ask for a show of hands the moment something real is recalled. Take those hands that went up in a couple of seconds and use them for the rest of this. Take the no- hands or slow hands as a special group under somebody else and simply drill them on this step until their speed is well up. Then put them back into the main group, or keep all in one group and so on. (B) Examine and compare two similar MEST objects or spaces and tell the difference. Keep this up for at least 20 minutes. It can be kept up for hours with astonishing case improvement. (C) Run Wasting Healing Bodies; then Accepting Them Under Duress, then Wasting Them, then Accepting Them Under Duress. Do this for 20 minutes or an hour until preclear or group shows signs of relief or amusement. (D) Run next-to-the-last list of Self Analysis for five minutes. (E) Run DUPLICATION. This process is the basis of making facsimiles. Have preclear or group look at a MEST object, then have him or them mock up a mock- up similar to it but beside it. Have the MEST object and the mock-up compared to tell the difference. Some people get none of the duplicates for quite a while but will eventually. Some start making much fancier objects of the same sort. In any result, keep this up for 20 minutes. (F) Have preclear or group close eyes and locate the corners of the room behind them and keep interested in those corners and not thinking for several minutes. (G) Have preclear or group move MEST scenery under them individually but at the command of the auditor. The scenery is, preferably, that not before viewed by the preclear or preclears. Don't let them invalidate what they see. This is Exteriorization by Scenery. Keep up for 20 minutes. (H) Do next-to-last list of Self Analysis. Five minutes. (I) Examine and compare two present time objects. (J) Have one of the members go to the window and look out of the window. Have the remainder of the group assuming his viewpoint to see what he sees out of the window. Do this for ten minutes. (K) Start at beginning again and use list over and over. What they waste each time through can be changed to work and anchor points. Avoid pain with this Short 8. Run "healthy bodies" for it instead. SOP 8 is a professional auditor technique which deals with the problems of the reactive mind. SOP 8 from Step IV down and including Step IV is a professional auditor technique. Short Eight is done by someone who has been trained, preferably by a professional auditor. It can be done on a group no matter how large. Self Analysis in Scientology is a group technique aimed at the rehabilitation of one's own universe so as to bring it up to a level of comparability with one's observations of the MEST universe, and can be delivered to groups of children or adults by a person trained only through the text of Self Analysis in Scientology. Associates have courses in group auditing which are given free of charge and which consist of six hours of tape lectures by L. Ron Hubbard on the administration of Self Analysis in Scientology and the general techniques of group auditing. THIS IS SCIENTOLOGY, SCIENCE OF CERTAINTY, was written especially for the Journal of Scientology by L. RON HUBBARD and contains a summary of his work for the use and interest of the general public. [The above text starting from "STEP IV-EXPANDED GITA", page 390, up to "APPENDIX NO. 1 TO SOP 8", page 392, was reissued as HCO B 7 May 1972, Expanded Gita.] 396  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 31 iDate=0/6/53 Volnum=0 Issue=3 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  CERTAINTY PROCESSING    P.A.B. No. 3 PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN From L. RON HUBBARD Via The Office of L. Ron Hubbard 30 Marlborough Place, London N.W.8 [1953, ca. mid-June] CERTAINTY PROCESSING The anatomy of maybe consists of uncertainties and is resolved by the processing of certainties. It is not resolved by the processing of uncertainties. Issue 16-G is recommended to you for your processing and your public representation. It contains the anatomy of certainty. An uncertainty is held in suspense solely because the preclear is holding on so hard to certainties. The basic thing he is holding on to is "I have a solution" "I have no solution." One of these is positive, the other is negative. A complete positive and a complete negative are alike a certainty. The basic certainty is "There is something" "There is nothing." A person can be certain there is something; he can be certain there is nothing. "There is something" "There is nothing" resolves chronic somatics in this order. One gets the preclear to have the center of the somatics say, "There is something here" "There is nothing here." Then he gets the center of the somatic to say, "There is nothing there" "There is something there." Then the auditor has the preclear say toward the somatic, "There is something there" "There is nothing there." And then he gets the preclear to say about himself, "There is something here" "There is nothing here." This is a very fast resolution of chronic somatics. Quite ordinarily three or four minutes of this will resolve an acute state, and fifteen or twenty minutes of it will resolve a chronic state. This matter of certainties goes further. It has been determined by my recent investigations that the reason behind what is happening is the desire of a cause to bring about an effect. Something is better than nothing, anything is better than nothing. Any circuit, any effect, any anything, is better than nothing. If you will match terminals in brackets "There is nothing" you will find that a lot of your preclears become very ill. This should be turned around into "There is something." The way one does Matched Terminals is to have the preclear facing the preclear or his father facing his father; in other words, two of each of anything, one facing the other. These two things will discharge one into the other, thus running off the difficulty. By bracket we mean, of course, running this with the preclear putting them up as himself to himself; as though they were put up by somebody else, the somebody else facing the somebody else; and the matched terminal again put up by others facing others. The clue to all this is positive and negative in terms of certainties. The positive plus the negative in conflict make an uncertainty. A great number of combinations of things can be run. Here's a list of the combinations: 397 The button behind sex is "I can begin life anew" "I cannot begin life anew", "I can make life persist" "I cannot make life persist," "I can stop life" "I cannot stop life," "I can change life" "I cannot change life," "I can start life" "I cannot start life." A very effective process: "something wrong with (you, me, they, my mind, communications, various allies)" "Nothing wrong with (you, me, they, my mind, communications, various allies)." A very basic resolution of the lack of space of an individual is to locate those people and those objects which you've been using as anchor points, such as father, mother and so forth, and putting them into matched terminal brackets with this: "There is father" "There is no father" "There is grandfather" "There is no grandfather." In the compulsive line this can be changed to "There must be no father" "There must be a father." One takes all the allies of an individual and runs them in this fashion. The basic law underneath this is that a person becomes the effect of anything upon which he has had to depend. This would tell you immediately that the sixth dynamic, the MEST universe, is the largest dependency of the individual. This can be run out, but then any dynamic can be run out in this fashion. "There is myself' "There is no self" and so on up the dynamics. "(Any dynamic) is preventing me from communicating" "(Any dynamic) is not preventing me from communicating" is intensely effective. Any such technique can be varied by applying the sub-zero scale as found in Scientology 8-8008 which is also to be found in an earlier issue of the Journal of Scientology. One runs any certainty out because he knows that for this certainty there is an opposite negative certainty and that between these lies a maybe, and that the maybe stays in suspense in time. The basic operation of the reactive mind is to solve problems. It is based on uncertainties about observation. Thus one runs out certainties of observation. The most general shotgun technique would have to do with "There is sex" "There is no sex," "There is force" "There is no force." This could be run, of course, in terms of matched terminal brackets or even as concepts, but one must not neglect to run the overt act phenomenon, which is to say getting somebody else getting the concept. The processing out of certainties would then embrace "I have a solution" "There no solution." These two opposite ends would take care of any individual who was hung on the track with some solution, for that solution had its opposite. People who have studied medicine begin by being certain that medicine works and end by being certain that medicine doesn't work. They begin by studying psychology on a supposition that it is the solution, and finish up believing that it is not the solution. This also happens to superficial students of Dianetics and Scientology; thus one should also run "Dianetics is a solution" "Dianetics is not the solution." This would get one off the maybe on the subject. We are essentially processing communications systems. The entire process of auditing is concentrated upon withdrawing communications from the preclear as predicated on the basis of the body and that the preclear cannot handle communications. Thus "The preclear can handle communications" "The preclear cannot handle communications" is a shotgun technique which resolves maybes about his communications. An intensely interesting aspect of Certainty Processing is that it shows up intimately where the preclear is aberrated. Here is the overall basic technique. One runs "There is -- " "There is not -- " the following: communication, talk, letters, love, agreement, sex, pain, work, bodies, minds, curiosity, control, enforcement, compulsion, inhibition, food, money, people, ability, beauty, ugliness, presents, and both the top and bottom of the Chart of Attitudes, positive and negative in each one. 398 Basic in all this is the urge of the preclear to produce an effect, so one can run "I can produce an effect upon mama" "I cannot produce an effect upon mama,,, and so forth for all allies, and one will resolve the fixations of attention on the part of the preclear. Thus fixations of attention are resolved by Certainty Processing, processing out the production of effect. One can occasionally, if he so desires, process the direct center of the maybe, which is to say doubt itself, in terms of Matched Terminals. This, however, is risky for it throws the preclear into a general state of doubt. The key to any such processing is the recovery of viewpoints. "I can have grandfather's viewpoint" "I cannot have grandfather's viewpoint" and so on, particularly with sexual partners, will prove intensely interesting on a case. "There are viewpoints" "There are no viewpoints," "I have a viewpoint" "I don't have a viewpoint," "Blank has a viewpoint" "Blank has no viewpoint" resolves problems. One should also realize that when one is processing facsimiles, he is processing at one time energy, sensation and aesthetics. The facsimile is a picture. The preclear is being affected by pictures mainly, and so "There are no pictures" "There are pictures" forwards the case toward handling pictures, which is to say facsimiles. A person tends to ally himself with somebody whom he considers capable of producing greater effects than himself, so "(I, she, he, it) can create greater effects" "(I, she, he, it) can create no effect" is quite effective. When one is processing, he is trying to withdraw communications. Reach and Withdraw are the two fundamentals in the action of theta. Must Reach and Can't Reach, Must Withdraw and Can't Withdraw are compulsions which, when run in combination, produce the manifestation of insanity in a preclear. "I can reach" "I can't reach," "I can withdraw" "I can't withdraw" open up into the fact that remembering and forgetting are dependent upon the ability to reach and withdraw. You will find that a preclear will respond to "You must" or "You can," "You must not" "You cannot," "There is" "There is not" forgetting and remembering. The only reason a person is hanging on to a body or facsimile is that he has lost his belief in his ability to create. The rehabilitation of this ability to create is resolved, for instance, in a person who has had an ambition to write, with "I can write" "I cannot write" -- and so forth. The loss of this creative ability made the person hang on to what he had. The fact that a preclear has forgotten how to or no longer can himself generate force makes him hold on to stores of force. These are very often mistaken by the auditor for facsimiles. The preclear doesn't care for the facsimile, he simply cares for the force contained in the facsimile because he knows he doesn't have any force any more. It should be kept in mind that Reaching and Withdrawing are intensely productive of reaction in a preclear. But that preclear who does not respond to Reaching and Withdrawing and Certainty thereon, is hung up in a very special condition: he is trying to prevent something from happening, he is trying to maintain control. If he prevents something from happening, he also prevents auditing from happening. He has lost allies, he has had accidents, and he's hung up at all those points on the track where he feels he should have prevented something from happening. This is resolved by running "I must prevent it from happening" "I cannot prevent it from happening," "I must retain control" "I must lose all control." Blackness is the desire to be an effect and the inability to be cause. 399 "I can create grandfather (or ally)" "I cannot create grandfather (or ally)" solves scarcity of allies. "I want to be aware" "I want no awareness" is a technique which is basic in attitudes. Run this as others, in matched terminal brackets or in Expanded GITA. Certainty there is a past, certainty there is no past; certainty there is a future, certainty there is no future; certainty it means something else, certainty it does not mean anything else; certainty there is space, certainty there is no space; certainty there is energy, certainty there is no energy; certainty there are objects, certainty there are no objects. Professional membership in the HAS gives you the Journal of Scientology, Professional Auditor's Bulletin and other services as they are developed. It gives you as well professional standing. A certificate of membership for framing is sent to all the professional members. All the latest materials are sent to professional members and the fee assists in the general public interest in Dianetics and Scientology. We have here now Scientology, the Science of Certainty. We have side-stepped all the questionable material and have techniques which are built on things of which people are very certain. This is the beginning of a big push. Your membership fee is necessary to make it possible. Founding Members and Fellows of Scientology are professional members, where they are HDAs, in perpetuity without further payment. Send your $25.00 membership fee by check, U.S. money order or U.S. cash to the International Office of the HAS located at 30 Marlborough Place, London N.W.8. Your card and certificate of membership will be forwarded to you. Give the number of your certificate and the school that issued it. There are a few auditors in the field whose experience is such as to command considerable respect from other auditors. The grade of Hubbard Graduate Auditor has been instituted and is awarded by nomination from other auditors or by selection from the HAS to designate those auditors whose experience and results have brought them into prominence. The doctorate schools award BScn and HGA, but only HGA by nomination. This is more or less an honor award. Please send your nominations for such auditors through to the International Office. A small fee is charged to cover the cost of handling and certifying and the certificate itself. The fee is $25.00. When HGAs are awarded the Journal carries notice of the fact. Be very certain in your own minds that this is not an effort to get another $25.00; it is an effort to winnow out the very good auditors and give them a public recognition which their work actually elicits. While it does not in any way reflect upon the students who attended, the main reason for severance with the last Foundation was its diploma mill attitude about certificate awards, and it gave certificates to all comers. This has since, as it did then, posed many problems. The HGA certificate is an effort to recognize the merit of the really good auditors and to remove from their minds any feeling that their skill has not been recognized and to give the public certain auditors of whom they can be very confident. END  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 81 iDate=18/6/53 Volnum=0 Issue=5 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0     From: L. RON HUBBARD Sitges, Spain Through: The Office of L. Ron Hubbard 30 Marlborough Place London N.W.8, England ASSOCIATE NEWSLETTER NO. 5 18 June 1953 After a fast and violent passage across most of the countries of Europe, we are catching our breath in Spain. We will be here for quite a while. We went to take a look at what all the fighting has been about, the invasion routes as they appear in peacetime, the nations experiencing recovery. With Susie in a racing car and myself on a motorcycle we crossed Belgium, Germany, Luxembourg, Austria, France and part of Spain. We covered the primary invasion routes of two wars and looked over the probable fighting terrain of the third. Diana remained in England with her nurse, to be flown here in a few days. I came down to Spain for a rest and to organize the material for the doctorate degrees. Living is better here than in many other places and it is certainly beautiful enough to encourage anybody. We are at the Hotel Miramar in Sitges, Spain. This is Old Catalonia and although Spanish is the general language, Catalonian, the native tongue, predominates and slurs the imported Spanish. Exchange in Europe is so outrageously bad for American and British money that none could afford touring Europe as such. A loaf of bread, a gallon of gas and bills of large denomination in U.S. and U.K. currency vanish. It is an incredible fact, useful only to those who wish to export products to Europe. And this export is being done on a large scale. Belgium is full of American cars, large new ones, and other equipment is in evidence elsewhere. Germany, speaking of materiel, is almost crushed flat. France is used to war, builds of stone so that the materials will not get scattered about, rebuilds when the shooting is done -- I suppose France has been doing this for thousands of years. I had two important things to do in Europe. One of them concerns doctorate degrees. You may have heard of Milan degrees. These are acceptable in universities throughout the world. I am making similar arrangements for doctorate degrees in Scientology, a fact which is at this writing confidential, for it will be a very large shock, when accomplished, to state legislatures and others that Scientologists have better degrees than psychiatrists and psychoanalysts. Of course we will have to have curriculum and study to support that fact in fact. And the most important part of any training we do will be HCA and HPA level training. We must not overlook the fact that to be well respected we must be well represented. Good representation, first and last, is the auditor getting good results with exactly what we teach. I must prepare the complete curriculum for the doctorate degree before it can be authorized and in our schools, and by correspondence this curriculum must be put into action. I have already made the proper contacts in Austria and am making them in Spain. It needs about two thousand dollars which I am now collecting in order to bring about the highest possible level in doctorate diploma. Amazingly enough, I find myself very well accepted in European professional circles and much amusement in these at the American news stories about my work. Their knowledge of Dianetics, slight as it is, has brought them far toward thinking of American doctors necessarily as a lot of quacks. The axioms are what did it, for these created the first wide organization and codification of the field of the human mind according to these people. Of course, this doesn't displease me. 401 The people you are training this very moment, as well as those you have trained, are going to benefit intensely from this doctorate arrangement upon which I am now working and you yourselves will benefit from it to the extent of dominating the field of the mind with it. I am trying very hard to do all that I can to assist you in several vital ways. I have every confidence that you will not let me down. With Issue 16-G you see a new simplicity. As always people will mistake a change in form for a change in substance. Changes in form have been necessary in order to establish communication on material which has never been communicated until the last three years. Gradually you find me stripping the vocabulary of our science of coined words and putting in their places common words which mean exactly what they say. As the material is better communicated it works better. As several old-time auditors have already said, it all works. But it doesn't work for that one who has not been communicated with about it. Hence a wide variation in communication forms and the appearance of continual simplification of what we know and what we can do. My communication channel is from you to 30 Marlborough Place, London N.W.8, and from there to me. From me to London and to you. I will have some news for you in a very few weeks on the subject of doctorates which will astonish you even though I have given it a preview here. And now I must get to work. Ron 402  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 101 iDate=0/6/53 Volnum=0 Issue=17 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  The Limitations of Homo Novis    THE JOURNAL OF SCIENTOLOGY Issue 17-G ( 1953, ca. end June) Published by The Hubbard Association of Scientologists, Inc. Philadelphia, Pennsylvania The Limitations of Homo Novis L. Ron Hubbard (J of S Editor's foreword: L. Ron Hubbard pulled no punches when he wrote these words, first published early in 1952. The importance of theta clearing could not be more clearly or vigorously described.) The theta being is the principal target of the auditor. The preclear is the theta being. A homo novis is limited in his self-determinism by all the economic and social restrictions of an aberrated society. He is not free of the need for food, clothing or shelter. He dies when you get him too cold, he perishes when the oxygen content drops too low. He is living in a tolerance band which keeps him cramped to the face of one second-rate planet in a tenth-rate system, prey to all the ill will that blows. Is this being free or self-determined? Maybe he is good enough to overlord his fellows into a security for himself never before possible. But that is his only real route toward security. He must fight and command for his three squares, he must use police protection in order to keep himself free of bullet holes and bumper marks. Compared to a homo sapiens, homo novis is very high and god-like. Compared to a truly self- determined being, homo novis is an ant ready to die under anybody's misstep. This universe is a rough universe. It is a terrible and deadly universe. Only the strong survive it, only the ruthless can own it. Given one weak spot a being cannot long endure, for this universe will search it out and enlarge it and probe it until that weak spot is a festering wound so large that the being is engulfed by his own sores. Fighting this battle for survival, and fight it he must, a being in the MEST universe cannot seem to afford decency or charity or ethics; he cannot afford any weakness, any mercy. The moment he does he is lost -- for he is surrounded by chilled, coarse rock and molten energy which, no matter the state of aberration of his social surroundings, will engulf him the instant that he ceases to obey the very laws of MEST. This is a universe of force. It is not a universe of reason. Brutal, unthinking, without decency or mercy, MEST force awaits with punishment any being with any weakness. The possession of a MEST body is a liability, for through that body the being can be given pain, can be regimented by the routine demands of eating and care from harm until at the very, very highest he can be but a puppet dancing to the spin of some unthinking planet under the strong glare of a remote and careless sun. Under these conditions a being, burdened with the care and liability of a body, made uncertain by an unknowingness, bows to strange and nonexistent gods, resorts to terrible makeshifts in lieu of justice, cringes before the mightier bomb, the sharper blade. You have examined an engram. A standard engram is simply the collision of the body with the MEST universe with sufficient impact to produce the confusion of attention known as "unconsciousness.,, 403 Should you care to make a test, just run "care of the body" as a total therapy. You will discover that by running out the postulates of a pc about his body and its care and his injunctions and insistences to others that they care for their bodies you can produce soaring changes in tone. An entire book can be written concerning this therapy. An entire book has been written about it -- the first book in Dianetics. This therapy could be styled, "The efforts of a theta being to reconcile the frailty of a MEST body with the ethics of a theta being." They do not reconcile, these two. Schopenhauer, Zeno and names without number in philosophy have been trying to make this reconciliation for eons. One says, "Defeat it all and die, for only by dying can you defeat it." Another says, "You can't win, therefore the only victory is in refusing to try to win." Christianity and a million other -anities have struggled with this problem, and the result is a pot-pourri of answers, none of which can reconcile the problem. You have a soul -- it goes off somewhere, you don't know about it. You are a soul, you don't know about it. Today we live in a vast cult called "Worship the body." Medical doctors, school teachers, parents, traffic officers, the whole society unites into this war-cry, "Care for the body." This stems from the concept that the body is all that one has, that he will have just one body, that his total devotion is the care of that body. A body is a vegetable. It is not even a sentient vegetable, for it lacks perception in the whole theta range. Like any vegetable it grows from seed and has habit patterns which help it survive. And, like any vegetable, one way or another, it gets used by others. Early theta beings saw MEST bodies acting and being as though they were self-motivated. This was a curiosity. The early theta being did not know that these MEST bodies depended wholly for their wits upon the guidance of a decayed theta being. The bodies looked like entities of considerable force and skill. The theta beingness of them was hidden and unapparent. Thus, even theta beings have been fooled by MEST bodies. A MEST body, whether it belongs to the race of Man or the race of ants is only an animated vegetable. Given a theta being to guide it, it becomes part of a composite such as homo sapiens. Here we have a theta being, decayed into unknowingness, devoted to the care of a MEST body. The "I" of this body, the actual volition of it, all its wits and skills are theta things derived from the guidance of a theta being. By itself the body would live, walk around, react, sleep, kill, and direct an existence no better than that of a field mouse or a zombie. Put a theta being over it and it becomes possessed of ethics and morals and direction and goals and the ability to reason; it becomes this strange thing called homo sapiens, a being above animals and yet an animal. Give this MEST body a psychotic theta being and you get a sort of Frankenstein's monster. Give this MEST body a nearly unconscious theta being and you get a zombie. The body is a carbon-oxygen engine which runs at 98.6 Deg F. The theta being is the engineer running this engine in a homo sapiens. There is already an entity running this engine, the genetic entity, but there is here only a total devotion to avoiding pain, seeking survival factors of the meanest sort, begetting new MEST bodies. Every cell in that body has its own theta -- the genetic entity is theta. A theta being is something else entirely. In the first place, the theta being came into being without the need of a MEST body, without the need of motors. It is close to a perpetual motion machine in that it can create energy and impulses. It thinks without facsimiles, it can act without experience, it can know simply by being. When we have talked of optimum performance in Dianetics or Scientology, we have talked about the actual top level capabilities of the theta being, not the capabilities of the MEST being. Early work in Dianetics treats of the composite called homo sapiens and treats that composite for what it is, an identity of several parts which act in greater or lesser coordination. You can go right on treating this composite being as a unit, you can go right on treating him and getting results for which you will be praised. But you must know that you are not treating the actual identity when you treat the MEST body. You are furthering a composite, and actually you are subscribing to the International Cult called "Care of the body." 404 You can, at your own choice, go on living with and processing this composite known as homo sapiens and create homo novis. You can use Dianetics to make hitherto impossible strides. But be advised that in this choice you are living with paradoxes which no philosopher in all the ages ever reconciled -- the injustice of death, the depravity of human beings as in Plato, the penalty of assisting another, the impossibility of having good ARC and survival too, the liability of being kind and merciful and every "unanswerable" religious paradox known. You, by persisting in yesterday's reality are persisting then in problems which have never been resolved with the factors accepted. You are demanding of a MEST-theta composite that he be self-determined when every zephyr from a hard universe contains death for him and can turn him like a top; you are demanding that he be "careful" when his only salvation is to be carefree; you are saddling him with all the unanswered riddles of an aberrated life in an aberrated world. And you are condemning a preclear to the dwindling spiral -- for the theta being as part of the composite decays fast and soon dies forever in the rigid apathy of MEST. Thus Scientology is given you. In lieu of this data the only thing which could be given Man is the answering salute to the gladiators -- they who are about to die. As an auditor, the choice is yours to make -- the paradoxes or the answer. 405  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 31 iDate=0/6/53 Volnum=0 Issue=4 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  BEINGNESS and CERTAINTY PROCESSING    P.A.B. No. 4 PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN From L. RON HUBBARD Via The Office of L. Ron Hubbard 30 Marlborough Place, London N.W.8 ( 1953, ca. end June) BEINGNESS and CERTAINTY PROCESSING The reason behind beingness is the drama of cause and effect. It has been isolated that the total reason for activity which explains all other activities is "to produce an effect." In this we have a dimensionless CAUSE ambitious only to produce an EFFECT and to handle effects which are produced on it. BEINGNESS is the modus operandi of effects. The thetan would rather have less than more identity and becomes only when he cannot otherwise produce an effect. The one thing a thetan is afraid of being is what he is in terms of this universe: nothing. Thus it is better to be anything than nothing. So it is better to handle, produce or have any effect than to handle, produce and have no effect. Thus the service facsimile, thus the conduct of the preclear. Awareness on high scale is aware of producing effects and of effects without proof via energy. Awareness lower on the scale requires the proof of perception and thus energy and force. As one moves from pure CAUSE into beingness one becomes involved with his own developed energy and the energy of others. Living is the battle of effects. Dying is the final dramatic effect one who has a body can always produce. The thetan is never otherwise concerned than with effects. The problem of awareness and of effects in general is communication. Communication, not affinity or reality, is the monitor of any processing. The phenomenon of facsimiles is produced by the thetan to prove to himself what he has done. He knows without facsimiles. He is already low in tone when he starts dealing with them. Energy, force, responsibility and perception are the same order of problem and thing. Occlusion is the loss of viewpoint of effects. When one has lost a viewpoint with which to perceive effects and upon which he depended for all perception of effect he is very occluded. Viewpoint and evaluation are, aberratedly, synonyms. Thus a law: a person takes the viewpoint of that person who has most evaluated for him. If that person then dies, the result is the apparent loss of that other's viewpoint which brings about loss in general. This is solved by remedying the need of the now dead viewpoint. Communication is defined as any RITUAL by which effects can be produced and perceived. Thus a letter, a bullet, the output of theta "flitter" are all, to us, communication. Men communicate with women with difficulty mainly because they have found that women cannot handle their communications: force and sexual particles. But men 406 communicate even more poorly with men for there is no particle adequate. Women communicate poorly with men because they have found danger in the receipt of any male communication. Hence the breakdown of interpersonal relations. Women find it all but impossible, for instance, to communicate with women; there is no particle. Awareness is the first requisite of a communication system. If one is TOO aware, he is hurt. If one is not aware enough, he is hurt. A bad communication is a sudden impact. Gentle communications are seldom remembered. Any certainty can be classified as knowledge. Certainties exist in three universes from many viewpoints. Awareness of a heavy flood of energy becomes a certainty. Any certainty, just as any effect, is better than no certainty. Thus we find the preclear suspended on the track anywhere he has had a high certainty. Thus his suspension in electronics and such. A certainty is positive or negative -- that something exists, that something does not exist. Run, as though it speaks, "There is something here" and "There is nothing here" in any numb or painful body area, and then the pc the same as though he speaks to it, and the somatic will abate or the numbness vanish. This can be applied to the outer areas around the preclear as well. Matched or Double Terminals in brackets is a fast and effective technique. It is run on certainties. One runs only those things of which the pc is certain. They alone create a "maybe" and a "maybe" alone aberrates. A high level process is Matched or Double Terminals in brackets: "I want more awareness" with the emotion of certainty; "I want less awareness" with an emotion of certainty. "I want no awareness" "I want some awareness." This pin knocks a case that is hanging fire into a willingness to perceive and, hence, communicate better. One resolves also the problem of lost viewpoints with brackets on "I have my (mother's) viewpoint" and "I do not have my (mother's) viewpoint" and on all persons who saw or evaluated for the preclear. Also in brackets "(Any dynamic) can handle communications" "(Any dynamic) cannot handle communications. The key theta actions are "REACH" and "WITHDRAW." The auditor is trying to withdraw communications from the preclear. This restimulates in the auditor trying to withdraw or wait for communications in his own past. An auditor must match-terminal "I must (must not) withdraw the communication" on himself to get into good shape to audit. My best to you. RON 407  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 81 iDate=0/7/53 Volnum=0 Issue=6 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0     From: L. RON HUBBARD Seville, Spain Through: The Office of L. Ron Hubbard 30 Marlborough Place London N.W.8, England ASSOCIATE NEWSLETTER NO. 6 (1953, ca. early July) This is a brief one about organization. It has taken me three years to try to fit some kind of organization and some kind of processing to our present society. You may think that founding a science was tough -- tougher has been organization. You've no idea of the state of managers in the United States today and you've no idea of the incredible occurrences in the early foundations. Well, just as we are beginning to get national polite recognition (Time June 8, Medicine and other publications) we have, I do believe, an organization which (1) can't be swept away by carelessness or organized attack, which (2) gives us the benefit of versatility on the part of many managements, (3) permits me to investigate, write and publish without terrific economic duress (for it would stun you to know that NO earlier organizations spent a thin dime on this one), (4) which permits a service organization, the HAS, to provide publications and national service, and (5) -- most important -- which gets the job done. I have been some time trying to evolve what we are doing. It's quite one thing to plan a thing, quite another to see it go into action in MEST. I've made a lot of fits and starts trying to straighten things out with everybody's agreement and liking and I think, from what I hear from you, that we've just about got it in the following form: The associate schools train to an HCA level, giving whatever courses below that rating they desire, such as basic and group courses. A unit, more or less the HAS, gives a correspondence-associate assist course in the history of psychotherapy, psychology, general semantics, electronic brains and Freudian psychotherapy; this comes before, during or after HCA training and is not required for an HCA. With field practice and this correspondence course, the HCA qualifies toward a doctorate. The doctorate course is a very high level course and leads to a very superior degree ranking with or above psychiatric degrees. What we call doctorate schools teach lower level courses and the doctorate course (otherwise they wouldn't be able to survive until we had the demand for the upper-upper level course) but someday become a sort of university finishing school. An HCA who finishes his general correspondence course and does a lot of field work can qualify for an HGA as a designation to denote experience and senior standing. Thus we have the ratings of Group Auditor (GA), HCA, HGA, B.Scn. (pending doctorate) and D.Scn. (awarded from a very high source abroad). There would be an additional course but it wouldn't, at least at this time, be a course leading to anything but better auditing; I get occasional requests to be studied with and someday I'll have to run a clinic to make this possible, but this matter is no great concern to an associate for the only people who are demanding it are real old-time HDAs and HCAs. Associates also run clinics if they choose and clinics exist without schools. This is pretty clear cut and agreed upon amongst you, from what comment I have had, and follows a general trend. The HAS on its part issues to every student the moment he is enrolled and paid up in the associate school and has his name passed into the Philly HAS, a set of 50 course books, a Self Analysis, a Handbook for Preclears (so he'll have the Axioms) and a copy of "This Is Scientology." He is put on the PAB list as a conditional professional member and is made a conditional professional member of the HAS. He is also sent, thereafter for a year, the Journal of Scientology. On graduating the associate airmails his name to the London HAS and a letter of award of HCA is immediately sent to the student direct or via the associate as indicated and is followed by the regular certificate (since the latter takes a little time to prepare and sign). When the letter of award is issued, a card as professional member of the HAS is also issued. 408 The associate sends 15% of the enrollment fee of the student to the HAS in London and remits on the first of each month. This fee is divided between the HAS for books and materials and membership and myself for the purpose of PABs and maintenance. The 15% fee includes all books and materials as above, professional membership for the student, the Journal et al and should, by reason of materiel, make the course more saleable by the associate. The associate could have on hand a few sets in a neat package for his prospective students and could order replacement sets rather than direct sets for the student in the interest of cutting down the time it would take for the student to receive the course booklets which, presumably, would be immediately necessary for the student's training. The HAS would, in view of this support, cease to try to make money or exploit Scientology for its own maintenance and would exist as a general promotional organization for the various associates, publishing the Journal and books in order to net a wide interest level from which the associate could profit. The Journal would carry associate ads without charge, would keep auditors interested via the PAB, would place book and subject ads in various national publications on a very professionally high level and would, in short, keep its nose clean. The mailing lists of the HAS would be available to associates by area or in general, at postage and handling costs. The London HAS has automatic addressing and addresses on tapes. The HAS would then be a mail address center. Aside from general book circulars and special issues (for promotion) of the Journal, nothing else would go out to the HAS mailing list. The member and subscription lists would, of course, get their publications. Now it happens I know this will work because it is more or less working right now. All the pieces are in place on the board for things to go this way and nothing new is needed to make this work, for it is already working without much confusion. Things sort of drifted in this direction. You have now in existence three possible methods of handling associate fees. The first is ten percent straight on all fees; the second is $55 per certification; the third is 15% of training gross and all books furnished the student. These systems have been worked out from various suggestions by associates. I advocate the 15% of gross for all associates and doctorate schools because it means a large saving to the associate in terms of books and means more books in student hands, for I don't say there that the associate cannot charge a little more for including the books. You can choose any one of the three but it is my hope that we can standardize on the 15% and stop changing it around to agree with this associate or that one and so that my office can get back its sanity in bookkeeping. The associate, by this system, obtains a much more saleable course and takes out of existence HAS competition which comes about when the HAS exchequer drifts too dangerously low. The HAS can exist then to interest the public for the associate and to keep the HCA happy, for an unhappy HCA can really hurt one's activities. This would permit us to continue calmly on without much mad scramble to a point where we are the training and guiding units of psychotherapy in general for the U.S. We are trending that way with no strain. All we've got to do now is keep turning out good auditors and getting results and in two to five years, we'll be the say-so, each in his own area, of who mans the sanitariums and who runs child guidance in the schools. Medicine and psychiatry started much too late to do something about it. Now here and there you see Mongrelology, an original duplicate of what we're doing, start up and attract a lot of people. One, Conceptology in San Antonio, is the latest flash in the pan. Don't worry about these. They help us real fine. The people they attract get educated enough, eventually, to wonder what the basic science is and because, whatever you may think, I get lots of real good notices and publicity, they'll come right over to get the whole story from us for, believe me, we've got a three-year lead on any upstart and we're publicly miles above any hangdog "Dianetics is all right but Hubbard is no good" outfit. The latter attitude almost always brings me an eventual letter which says, "They kept telling me you had something awful wrong with you and they kept saying it so hard I finally decided you must be okay..." etc. etc. etc. 409 These beavers all chew and chew and chew and when they drop the tree, there it is in our pond. Been doing that now for three years. The bad press I've had is getting older and older. It takes two to three years for a repute to alter or blow over and our various opponents shot their bolt. They shot it so hard that now very few believe them about anything. It's like the kid that cried wolf. Well, however fatuous this may sound to you, however impatient you may be about a lot of things, how do we really profit by our past? We simply saw wood. Now is the time to get calm and conservative, to be vested interest. We aren't the wild-eyed revolutionary any more because we've been around too long. We're on the verge of being the marble-fronted, soft-spoken voice of calm authority on the subject of psychotherapy. We better be what we are. All we've got to do is be what we are -- an organization which has really taken a beating but which learned how in the meanwhile. And we'd better realize that our strength lies in a good friendship one for another, unit to unit, and a realization that while we'll never have the glory of hanging desperately for our Cause, we'll have the satisfaction of occupying the fort for an awful long time to come. Do you know that your total enrollment as of now is almost five times the student enrollment at the peak of the "boom"? As an organization we have three times the membership of the foundations at their height? Do you know you are partners with schools in every quarter of the globe? That the course you are teaching is also being started so close to the Russian border that the Russ guards are visible from the window? That the pcs we used to sweat hard over are easy today? That the most ancient things we know are becoming big news to the professional world? You might be a little stuck on the time track and if so, think about these things for a minute. And think about this: they've been howling about my "repute" for three years and for three years I've kept on working and producing toward the same goal, and year by year, in terms of processing, your reality has come closer to my cursed optimism. Well, I ought to be optimistic. I've never known otherwise than (1) that this was a tough fight and (2) that it was going to be won. The biggest part of the winning of this fight has to do with you. The continuous support and loyalty and hard work of most of you has more than offset the attacks upon. You've been mauled around and doubted and you've stuck your necks out and you've stayed in there with preclears and fought the same economic fight I have. I don't forget things like that and I appreciate them. On the matter of techniques, SHORT 8A has been breaking up occluded cases rather easily even if the auditing is not very brief. I know actually and truthfully of only two processes now which break up easily the second type of occluded case. Occluded cases can be broken into two types -- one type which is black and on almost any process well applied comes out of it, the incident being simply an incident in which the pc is stuck. The other type of occluded case is that one which is not only occluded, it will not let anything happen; the first method of solution I used was a sort of auditor personality approach in which I gently led the attention of the pc into a security and confidence of being able to see his facsimiles by coaxing him patiently through light locks. The other technique is recent. Results with all our techniques have been, in the hands of auditors, very spotty on the second type of occluded case. Call this second type not just a V; call it a RESISTIVE V. This case, as I knew when I released SOP-8, is not solved by SOP-8 unless one puts in many- many-many hours on alternating V and VI. That is a very tough sled to pull. Hence there is SHORT 8A, and SHORT 8A is a rote process for the resolution of the RESISTIVE V. Thus if you have a few RESISTIVE Vs around, wait until I get SHORT 8A into your hands rather than waste much time with them, for they break an auditor's heart with their "Nothing Must Happen Or Change." This is a mechanical condition and doesn't yield to pulling postulates. The pc can't help it. I am writing up the notes on SHORT 8A for there's a lot of technology behind it even if it could be done without much training. So it will be with you soon. Ron 410  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 31 iDate=0/7/53 Volnum=0 Issue=5 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  ABOUT PABs    P.A.B. No. 5 PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN From L. RON HUBBARD Via The Office of L. Ron Hubbard 30 Marlborough Place, London N.W.8 ( 1953, ca. mid-July) ABOUT PABs The response in terms of letters to the Professional Auditor's Bulletin is very heartening. Some have called it "the first auditor's newscast since Book I." Reports of cases which had long "hung fire" breaking under the onslaught of the data in the PABs puts a "long continuation" on the service. The Professional Auditor's Bulletin was inaugurated to be timed with the simplicity of data as contained in the Journal of Scientology Issue "THIS IS SCIENTOLOGY, Science of Certainty." Here begins an era lacking in doubt and complexities for we gaze now at a solved problem, the human mind and human behavior. Many other problems may be solved as well but we KNOW and we are CERTAIN that change can be effected in any preclear in a reasonable length of time. And we have as well, various group techniques which are many times as effective as the individual techniques of '50-'52. It was entirely necessary to pass through and to release data about many things which can be found in people and we are fortunate in having this data. But it is no longer necessary to answer challenges about the "authenticity" of things which have been mysterious these thousands of years. Like recent medical society releases (Time Magazine, June 8, 1953) demonstrate a growing alertness as to the actuality of "birth" and "prenatals" as described in Book One, someday perhaps all these other matters such as "whole track" will likewise receive widespread agreement. This is beside the point. The point is that the engram can be solved in quantity lots irrespective of content and a man can be made free to his desired limits of freedom. This is all we have tried to do, make Man happier and better in a sometimes unkind universe. Perhaps the basic difference between "investigation" and "research" is that the investigator should seek truth, and "research" all too often seeks only agreement from the crowd. I find what I do and do what I do either because it is, to my way of thinking, the best thing to do or is the only thing I can do at the moment when confronted by many difficult obstacles; I have been too long in the "professions of applause" to care much for applause; my goal is the simplicity of getting a job done. And the job of making Man well is the job I have had the temerity to assume, not because I thought it would enrich anyone and certainly not for that odious thing called fame -- for it is rather amusing that my name is not Hubbard and the fame, if it ever came, would go only to a legal trademark, a thing without body or spirit. Little men with great fears have often made the task hard; but it is being done and its results are being reported in the Professional Auditor's Bulletin. L. RON HUBBARD Copyright $c 1953 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved. 411  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 81 iDate=0/7/53 Volnum=0 Issue=7 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Strategy and Tactics    From: L. RON HUBBARD Spain Through: The Office of L. Ron Hubbard 30 Marlborough Place London N.W.8, England ASSOCIATE NEWSLETTER NO. 7 ( 1953, ca. late July) Strategy and Tactics: Just as a preclear sometimes must be approached with a very quietly deft campaign, so the U.S. has had to be approached organizationally with Scientology. It may seem to you sometimes that there is confoundedly little reason behind all this organizational set-up but the truth of the matter is, organizational patterns for what we are doing did not exist in 1950. The campaign had to be cut from whole cloth. The original planning was completely overridden by one fact -- an instant popularity; the staggering effect of this upon the first Foundation was enough to wreck it and wreck as well, in the reaction, the second Foundation. There was a very basic flaw in the entire Foundation type operation: It did not permit individuals to act on their own initiative and it robbed the science of that skill which should evolve in the field of management and it hung the science with poor managers selected politically, one might say; these managers uniformly had the drawback of knowing business but not Scientology; the two don't mix well. By the way, I got to a point finally where I would almost scream when somebody suggested that what we needed was a "good business man": these were death and ruin to us primarily because what we do requires a good heart and a desire to help, things remarkably absent in the buffoonery of modern business. There was another flaw in Foundations: they set up a single target of attack. Any time one sets up a single target for the enemy to fire at, trouble will happen and it did happen. The shafts and arrows that come my way are an almost inevitable result of being a single target: Chaucer's "Ballade of Ye Goode Counsel" was never so true, never so true. Well, what do we have today and why? We have an organization of sufficient plasticity that it does not require extraordinary methods of financing and which is sufficiently dispersed to immunize it against attacks; its lack of need for finance before it can function makes a future "angel,, unnecessary; its lack of corporate interconnection makes a would-be attacker such as the AMA stay its hand in the face of an impossible task, for in order to "stop" Scientology such an attacker would have to sue at least twenty different places and companies in that many different locations and that would cost in legal fees alone a fortune. So the attack never develops and if it starts it vanishes before anything very wide happens, as in Detroit where all is getting quieter and quieter and the interest in Scientology higher and higher. By remaining interconnected in name and purpose and style of training and level of result, our many-faced organization yet presents to some upstart a vested interest of considerable power and our vested interest grows and grows strongly for a change. It is difficult to educate an entire public, for it is actually pretty crazy but, by keeping our general name and style and by staying connected under a goal as well agreed upon as ours, we can and only then can educate the public. We have the benefit now of many skilled managers whose skill would have been and indeed was lost under the Foundation system. We have defense in depth, a broad reach and a future which, by these things, grows stronger and stronger. We are, in truth, as individuals, getting on our feet, as individual companies and clinics and schools just now getting into the swing of things. Mail by mail one, then another, shows more strongly across the world. Here a new building has just been bought, there an instructor has just decided to retrain a whole class as "unfit by 412 current standards", another is well advanced into a campaign to reach industries, and so it goes. I would that you could see yourselves as an entire picture as I see it through these many communication lines. It is getting to be a very, very good view indeed. Some day those amongst us who worry will see in a very successful fellow associate a distinct asset, not a rival. A good show in Phoenix is worth much to San Francisco. A good clinic in the Middle East will help bring prosperity to one in New Zealand. We have the cream amongst us of all the auditors trained to date. Those who aren't "with us" were never with their preclears or their own cases either, so no loss. The best have survived what has been in truth a very bad battle and the best are numbered, every one, amongst our associates and loyal supporters. They are not the best because they are with us, they are the best because they know their Dianetics and Scientology and can solve cases. Bluntly, the "auditors" who aren't with us can't solve cases and they can't because they don't know their business -- I know because I get the kicks from the preclears processed by auditors who also are intensely critical of us and of me. We have several very strong organizations and they daily grow stronger. Amongst these are the Hubbard Foundation in Camden, Lamoreaux's in Phoenix, and London and Los Angeles. Any one of these is strong enough in itself to carry the whole burden but, in the absence of help, would be enturbulated on the single-target basis. And naming just these does not mean that there are no others as strong. Organizationally speaking we have first the HAS itself. What is it actually? It is several companies in different places, each one autonomous. It would be almost impossible legally to penetrate these concerns by suing one to obtain the rights of others. Each one of these companies has in itself certain rights and copyrights. One and another have different membership responsibilities. The function of the HAS is very simple: it is -- they are -- publishing and dissemination firms for data for one thing. The Pennsylvania HAS is solely a publishing company. It publishes the Journal of Scientology and several other books. The Arizona HAS has certain rights. It has as well in itself the founding members. The British HAS has its own charter, professional and founding members and again, does publishing on its own. Each associate has a contract with me personally which calls for a percentage of the gross training income of that associate in return for service, good will, support and advertising. These contracts are assigned to one or another of the various HAS companies. They are, however, not cancelable by anyone but myself for I have contracts with the HAS to that effect. The income sent to me is devoted to the various functions in Scientology. The associate sees that income again in terms of books in people's hands, disseminates material and solved cases. Each and every part of each HAS company is solvent and, in view of the small overheads and apportionment of work, is not likely to be otherwise from here on out. They have small staffs, small overheads and a good financial history. Every HAS company pays its bills. Amongst the various operations the one I have just been in most continuous contact with, London, is one of the finest we have. It is managed by Reg Gould. Its chief instructor is one of the best in Scientology -- Denis O'Connell. This organization has increased its number of groups from seven to forty-two in about three months. George Wichelow, an outstanding auditor and public performer, is now going about the country pulling in people by their ears with extremely well-organized enterprise. Another major operation is the HUBBARD FOUNDATION in Camden where Helen O'Brien keeps the lions very precisely lined up, if sometimes snarling, and where Dr. John Noyga, with a deftly convincing but offhand way is getting upper level Scientology across. Helen is also the "big wheel" in the Philadelphia HAS, although the Hubbard Foundation and the Philly HAS are not in any way connected. Probably the most succumb-proof personality we have, Dr. Ross Lamoreaux, who is also one of Scientology's most skilled auditors and instructors is bringing the Phoenix Scientology Institute into higher and higher levels of beingness. This organization, under Ross, has the skill of making itself heard in very far places and, lately in 413 particular, has been taking scalps from the HAS-nots, as one might call those who oppose the HAS. In Los Angeles Hardin and Joanna Walsh do a very excellent job of matching the area with the argument. You might not suspect it, but it takes REAL genius to do anything at all in Los Angeles -- imagine every student you get being an ex-authority on Slinkism, imagine every technique of Scientology you release tonight turning up tomorrow in the hands of some crackpot as Scoism. To have a good operation in Los Angeles is incredible and yet the Walshes have achieved it. They have with them my good friend Richard de Mille, the world's greatest 1.5 in addition to his abilities in Scientology. As Los Angeles has always more or less handled groups since Remi Stone's time, Joanna of course handles groups for the U.S. They also dabble a bit into Latin America. In Detroit the Catastrophe is getting to be history as I suspected it would when the cops got next to what they really had by the tail. The cops got bit in the form of an increased interest in Michigan like you never saw before. So Refa Postel and Earl Cunard are surviving and doing well again and will soon do better. It ought to be a moral to us all that all a court can do is wave sheets of paper around and deprive a body of locomotion for a while. In San Francisco, George Seidler, assisted by my friend John Farrell, has been running a very good organization. It's getting sounder and sounder. George got a note the other day "cancelling his associateship" which gave him a bad shock as it should have since he's doing fine. I don't know who sent it to him but I didn't. I haven't cancelled any associateships and don't intend to. If you want to know how well George is doing you need only know how bad that area was before he put his lariat on it: it even had a company in it called, I think, Sickness and Sadness and the streets were thick all over with stuff from Cherry Papdelaine. A sad bunch of auditors, trained (God help them) in the first days of L.A., were trying to act in some direction or other. So George has done quite a job. Doris Colbury Graffam in Houston, Texas, is doing a good job on Texas. She keeps right on coming along and I'm real proud of her. Chicago is held down by the Mazureks and I hear quite a bit from their clientele. Spokane and a lot of country around there is in the hands of Walter Hanan. Ray van Wyck up across the border has just completed an entire year of training on one group of students and infers that their quality is pretty high above the standard trainee as of course it should be -- if these people know they know. Hubbard Associates of Puget Sound are settling down after the usual shifts and tumults. Ernest (Jester) Kish has just taken on, for a fight to the finish, the State of Ohio. I am expecting Washington, D.C., to be taken over one of these days -- it's always been a rough spot. And all the others are doing well. There is some interesting data about the above organizations which I give you on a sort of I-told-you-so basis. The most stable and prosperous of them haven't deviated from techniques as handed out one milli-inch. The least stable get snarled up on technique maybes and perhaps this has something to do with their financial upsets. The public is buying increasingly and ever increasingly exactly what the HAS is selling and isn't buying dilutions. I have some almost frantic appeals for help here from nonauthorized "foundations" who started for glory on "converted procedure" and wound up in the strange state of mind that I should now bail them out. As for publications, the fifty Course Books remain standard. The axioms haven't changed and won't -- but will be added to with several pre-logics and axioms which simplify the rest but don't change them. And with "THIS IS SCIENTOLOGY" you are into a stretch of simplicity we can all use. What a heck of a time we had with data -- but how much richer we are that that data isn't a Big Mystery when we encounter it now. The Journal is getting an increasing number of subscribers every week, is getting out wider and wider. 414 And what of the "opposition"? I guess under that heading you could group the whole of prior vested interest in keeping things scarce. But there is no real opposition. It's dwindled down to a pathetic campaign over "communication networks." I,ve tapped several and honest, they must make friends for us like mad. "They" have gone down so low now that they condemn us for being "only data sources." That's like saying the sun's no good because it gives light. A fellow from Los Angeles wrote the other day that what I take to mean the usual source of entheta was about to invest "over a quarter of a million dollars in litigation in the next few years" and that I ought to make some kind of offer. He doesn't know that I have made, to date, about a dozen offers, all very reasonable and that every one has been turned down without an invitation to any discussion; a few people still think that certain people really want to get Dianetics going even though those same people have yet to do anything, so far as I can see, but harm it and make things tough for me. The fact that a suit was served on me EVERY time I gave a lecture series finally convinced a lot of people that the entire effort there was to stop me from teaching people Dianetics. For the suits came to nothing and coincided every time with a lecture series and so did not seem very coincidental. So by August first, so far as I can predict, there won't be any real opposition within the science that I can place. And what of techniques? Well, I up and solved it as I told you a little while back. I've been rationing it now against digestion. Don't want to shock people too hard. You see, what I solved was exactly how pictures are made, by what and why. So the rest was simplicity itself. A person starts resisting the MEST Universe with "flitter" and, of course, starts taking pictures by sheer mechanical fact of wave vs. wave. His resistance-distance is the distance away from him that he is taking the picture. When that is close, you get the "wide- open" case. When he won't take pictures, you get the occluded case. It's totally a problem in flitter (that gold stuff the thetan puts out) and a conflict between the body taking pictures and the thetan taking pictures and the amount of MEST Universe action present which causes one to resist (and so take pictures). The basic circuit for the GE is "There is (is not) something behind it, under the surface, below it, above it" for the picture is of the surface only but gravity demonstrates an unseen but felt greater mass. For the thetan the basic circuit is "There must be something to start it" when, of course, there is NOTHING at the start, the start being boundaries for nothingness. So circuits, so pictures. Old Survive comes in strong again with "Life cannot (can) persist," "Life is important (not important)," "Life is scarce (abundant)," "Life is worth (not worth) living," etc. etc. This is run very workably with an incredibly summated summarized process: White terminals of people, matched, in brackets, with the effort to reach, not reach, withdraw, not withdraw, with hordes of people below admiring all this. In other words, if you can do it, you can shoot the works with everything from effort processing forwarded all in one chunk. This is done on MEST objects, not people. When one fails, he gets the ambition to be the valence that won, whether it is a tooth, a fist, a piece of paper. Ambition is trying to become what has whipped one. And that's evolution. One runs a process like this on the lines of Short 8 and we get Short 8A wherein we use the above and steps like it in between each of the unlimited steps of Short 8. I'm just giving you advance notice of this. You can play the organ with all the stops open if you want. Effort to reach, not reach, withdraw, not withdraw, in matched terminals, in brackets, admired by mobs from below. Wow! It isn't the easiest technique to work. Another technique is "transferring." One swaps matched terminaled people into himself, himself into them, back and forth, back and forth, and then a matched terminaled self (in brackets) into objects and objects into self (particularly working tools). And we get the mechanisms of sympathy. Giving sympathy is turning one's self into others (letting them eat one) and obtaining sympathy is turning others into self (eating them). This runs out the mechanism of the winning valence. And then we change matched nothingness into matched somethingness and vice versa. 415 Beingness processing is a process, like the last paragraph, but done straight wire. One discovers what the pc is trying to be in terms of names, MEST objects. The goal of the pc will be to become a person or a MEST object. As the thetan can only approximate conditions of beingness and cannot himself be, the pc is, of course, pretty well shifted out of himself. Find the first time he failed in this life and "transfer" him into what made him fail and back again if you like. Or by straight wire. And there you have it. Of course, by the brackets you get as well all the overt acts. If you don't catch all the above rapidly, it's because so much of it is old stuff packaged up to work like fury. Wasting things, by the way, is a very superior technique but on a lot of cases you have to run admiration or they just don't move. The whole cycle of wasting is as follows: Get the pc to waste, get him to get others to waste, get him to keep others from having the item, get him to get others to keep him from having the item, get him enforcing the item on others, others enforcing the item on him, get him desiring, others desiring, being curious about, others being curious about the item, get it in GITA in abundance and it is really RUN. BUT it is not necessary to do all this or work any one item long. I give it about ten minutes or less per item and simply get the pc to skim along, thus getting him to some hot buttons faster and not getting him bogged. Run expanded GITA like a swallow flies and you've got it. Labor it too hard and it tends to get the pc. The button "You are self-determined" "not self-determined" is fascinating when run in matched terminaled brackets. You see, all this sort of thing boils down to MECHANICAL interchange between "flitter" and the actions of the MEST Universe which include gravity, vacuums, and various kinds of energy. Theta "flitter" can react against MEST. The first fatal step of the thetan is to RESIST. The moment he uses "flitter" to resist incoming MEST waves, he first gets pictures of the SURFACE of the MEST, then (because these pictures contain all aspects of MEST) all the energy actions of MEST such as gravity. He is led down" and "condensed" by MEST. Gravity will not let him withdraw. And so he is in a terrible state at last. The contest is between FORCE and ADMIRATION (sensation). Admiration dissolves force, force cancels admiration. Forbid the use of force, restrict the use of admiration and a thetan becomes powerless. A collapsed track is gravity working on masses of theta energy which has actual mass. The remedy is either breaking the mass up with admiration (a long but effective process) or restraining the thetan to use his force not to resist MEST waves but to make new objects of his own design (STEP VI, SOP-8). Agreeing with MEST, using flows, lots of other things simply pin him deeper into this problem. Automaticity is this fact of taking pictures automatically simply by putting out "flitter." A confusion about time is this condensation of old energy by gravity. Time is also the basic on LOSS. Every moment is LOST. A major loss then keys in this continuous loss, energy condenses, gravity acts on the thetan's facsimiles and the thetan refuses to take any more pictures (mechanically, he can't) and so finds himself in the "past" and entirely lost. The above with rapidity, but there so you won't be caught off guard when it appears much later in PABs. It actually needs a lot of explanation. THE FACSIMILE, ITS ORIGIN, BEHAVIOR AND SOLUTION will be the next big Journal Book Issue. THE LOGS AND AXIOMS will be the next big issue after that. In between there will be a lot of filler issues, good dope, comments, etc. SOP-8A I am going to release slightly differently than forecast, as already mentioned above. It uses every trick I know about to get a low-step case and includes much of the above, interlarding the process with material which rebalances the case. I am also writing up a book on the subject of Freudian Self-analysis. It will be published in the Journal. The reason for this is very plain. The Freudians and psychoanalysts all agree more or less on a lot of hogwash about the second dynamic (utterly missing the brutal sixth). Sure enough, solving the second dynamic is fairly important in a case. This lean towards Freud is to show that those things on which people in 416 psychiatry etc. have agreed are solved with sudden finality by Scientology. That makes up the agreement continuation of all psychotherapy and gives us legal standing. It also gives us the impact of all Freudian lay following which isn't slight. So bear with me on this Freud excursion. We're not okaying Freud and saying Sex is all. We simply say we solve Freud too. ITEM: At the Hubbard Foundation we are issuing a small gold key to the ace graduates with the word "SCIO" on it. BECAUSE IT IS GOING TO TAKE TWO YEARS AND MORE to make competent doctors under the present planning, we are bridging the gap as we can in order to designate our very best auditors. At the doctorate schools a very few of these gold keys will suffice. In the field in general we are going to issue, on recommendation, the certificate of H.G.A. which says, "HUBBARD GRADUATE AUDITOR -- we know this auditor is honest and trustworthy and can solve your case." Only a few will be issued. WOULD YOU PLEASE SEND ME THE NAMES AND ADDRESSES OF AUDITORS YOU FEEL REALLY DESERVE THIS. We are not now going to charge for it (changing the last bulletin) in any way except, of course, if the auditor doesn't happen to be a member of the HAS and decides to become one, a thing which is incidental. Some auditors are astonishingly better than others and we ought to recognize the fact. My wider reaction to the 15% is very good. I think it is a good idea as it gives the associate all the books for the student, gets material around better and makes bookkeeping much simpler in my office. It does not change any contract I have with you. It simply permits, by the payment of an extra 5% when the 10% is paid to secure the books the student should have. I hope all associates decide to standardize on this at this time. It is 15% of all training fees, the HAS then providing the associate with a prepackaged set of books for each student enrolled in an HCA Course. Went to a bullfight yesterday. It's all stacked against the poor bull. He comes snorting and pawing into the arena, looks around for something to take revenge upon for all his indignity. He never gets a chance to see the fences. People start waving capes and off goes this mountain of strength to get his man. But he doesn't see the man, he is distracted by the cape and charges it. Of course, there's nothing behind the cape so he keeps charging into nothingness. Every time he gets himself all set to ruin a toreador, the cape is there to distract. After running himself weary after capes, he is suddenly encouraged to find a picador confronting him. The picador is mounted on a horse and the bull for once can get his strength and horns into this horse and he proceeds to do so, BUT, the picador leans in with a long pike and every time the bull gets a good thrust at the horse, spikes go into his back inches deep with plenty of force behind them. This cures the bull of butting very hard -- a nice, big engram. Then men start sailing at him at fast speed on foot to plant bandilleros (spiked sticks!) in his back. He's got the engram now so he doesn't try hard to get them even though they are right in front of him. The bull now knows. He knows he is going to die. That is the first time this has occurred to him and the shock is severe. He stands there sick at his stomach, guts heaving, covered with his own blood, getting weaker and weaker. And then comes the matador and makes him dip and lunge a few more times at a red cape. It's all over. The bull knows it. But he still reacts enough to make his lunges. And the matador, with a pretty dance, slides a long rapier from in front and into the hump and down into the heart. The bull still tries to make it but there are the capes again to make him turn around and around and so make him pump enough blood to kill himself. And down he goes and they sink an axe in his skull and he's dead. And the pretty little horses come out and hook to his horns and sail away dragging him to the tune of jingling bells. And they sweep it all up and sprinkle new sand and let in another bull. MEST Universe, what would happen if the bull ever charged the fence? Best regards, Ron 417  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 101 iDate=0/7/53 Volnum=0 Issue=18 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Off the Time Track    THE JOURNAL OF SCIENTOLOGY Issue 18-G ( 1953, ca. late July) Published by The Hubbard Association of Scientologists, Inc. Philadelphia, Pennsylvania Off the Time Track: L. RON HUBBARD lecturing, June 1952 "Free theta is attention units free enough to be directed of your own volition.... An unreduced facsimile is one that still has the capability of absorbing your attention unit output.... At 1.8 you will find real pain.... A human being behaves like an attention unit. This is factual.... The concept of aloneness was installed as a control mechanism.... The aesthetic band is practically a disintegrating band. For instance, you can generate music and practically own people.... You become to some extent that with which you agree.... Somebody thought this universe up -- literally -- that's why you can disintegrate engrams.... You can place on your future track facsimiles of future high level beingness.... Unawareness of your present time body is good health.... The more heavy facsimiles you pick up, the less active you are -- for example, an athlete.... Bring two free energies together and you get matter.... Invalidation occurs at cancellation of any thought, emotion or effort by any thought, emotion or effort.... Regret is trying to make time run backwards.... The only way you can control people is to lie to them.... Decision is sanity. The degree he's capable of decision determines his sanity.... Sex is a harmonic of aesthetics and pain.... Theoretically, if you were high enough on the tone scale, you could run matter as an engram and disintegrate it.... MEST is motion in super apathy.... Give a psychotic time and space.... Care of the body is the worst obsession we have. It's like taking care of a baby by painting his toys.... Only the very aberrated love their eccentricities.... The preclear will tell you everything wrong with his case in the first session, but he'll usually give you the wrong side of it.... Moses was so good he could probably enter into a cave and cause it to bite people.... The degradation of Man is primarily on the fourth dynamic. Every time a man does something dishonorable or unethical he has the feeling that the whole race is degraded.... On the seventh dynamic, look for overt acts against aesthetics.... If you could look at a man's facsimiles, it would look like an alarm clock some kid had taken apart.... This business of requiring photons for sight is a major aberration.... Run all the times a preclear tried to keep someone from knowing.... The mind is very good at approximating, at setting up symbols.... Data which is socially unacceptable is almost always aberrative.... You can probably process the main body of theta with technique 80.... You don't need a MEST body to run engrams.... You identify people as their MEST body and they identify you as your MEST body. Straight wire back to the first time you identified somebody by their MEST body.... As you go up tone scale, you reach new levels of ARC with your own kind.... At the level where you don't feel the need to arm-yourself-against, where you trust, that is the level of true brotherhood...." Copyright $c 1952 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved. 418  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 31 iDate=0/7/53 Volnum=0 Issue=6 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  CASE OPENING    P.A.B. No. 6 PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN The Only Unbiased and Accurate Professional Publication in Dianetics and Scientology From L. RON HUBBARD Via Hubbard Communications Office 4 Marylebone High Street, London W.1 (1953, ca. end July) CASE OPENING Here begins the first of the series of Professional Auditor's Bulletins which deal with the auditor's own case and which can be "self-audited." Later the auditor may care to use the steps of this series on difficult preclears. I am assuming throughout this series that the auditor is a difficult case but to get to the top and stay at the top the auditor, whatever he believes his case to be, should follow through on these steps. We are going to pursue the following course here: the body, the analytical mind, the reactive mind, the rehabilitation of force and perception. We are going to take, at one session every two weeks, quite a little time at this. You've been ruining yourself for a score or two of years so you can expect a score or two of weeks to get unruined. Now, to begin, I have often offered a point to you which is nearly always missed -- the mind and the body are part of a gradient scale of creation. The mind is at a high point on this scale, the body at a low point. The mind has all the capabilities of the body, but the body has lost many of the capabilities of the mind. Thus the mind can function independently of the body so long as it does not have its attention continually on the body. When the mind fixates wholly upon the body we have that extreme degree of introversion visible in psychotics or neurotics. No exterior world remains -- there is only the body. The dwindling spiral toward oblivion is this road of greater and greater fixation upon the body. You can observe that the child is very exteriorized in interest, sympathy, projects and you can trace the curve of his growing unhappiness through a life which at last is most concerned with eating or the inability to eat. The downward curve of any case is this curve. How does the mind become fixated upon the body? If you know your engrams you can see the sudden introversion caused by a blow. Kick somebody and observe his attention turn to the point of contact and only then turn out again to resent the kick. If you keep on kicking him and if he cannot use the motion to kick you he will turn all the way inwards about kicks and be in apathy. He is now a body willing to accept the exterior directions of your mind. The compounded poundings of a lifetime bring about, in the natural course of events, this fixation upon the body. To get well, you must reverse this course, not by 419 going into the past where there were no kicks (the effort of the neurotic) but by reducing or erasing the impacts (as per Dianetics) or by extroverting the attention (as in Scientology). These two methodologies have been developed by myself in order to make people well. There are many ways in Dianetics and Scientology to achieve this. None of these ways include shocks and impacts upon the body, as these, of course, reverse the process and parallel the dwindling spiral of the MEST Universe. If you have studied Issue 16-G of the Journal of Scientology, you will understand the simplicities with which we are dealing. While there is much more to Scientology than will be found in 16-G, none of it exceeds these basics. Some are so extremely dense or go spun in that such simplicity of background is subject to grave suspicion and some are so far gone on voodoo that this separation of high level mental awareness (the analytical mind) and low level awareness (the reactive mind) must, of course, be witchcraft or charlatanism. When we separate the analytical mind from the body we discover most often that it very unclearly perceives this universe. It knows it is not in the body but it can't see walls. It can't even move mountains. The body is convinced about walls; the analytical mind, more highly aware, isn't convinced about walls for it hasn't been hit by that many walls. Very much more aware of truth, the analytical mind, wonderfully serene, sees or doesn't see walls at choice. The point is, the conviction of the existence of a universe depends upon the chronic restimulation of impacts. A fabulously interesting, utterly unbelievable communication system, complete with its own time, comes about through these impacts. The reactive mind (the body) believes it utterly. It isn't sane to be MEST or to be a body. Watch the skidding psychotic and observe his greater and greater conviction that thought is MEST, that words are objects, and watch first his growing anxiety about the body and then his frantic efforts to retain sensation and then his loss of all. This curve is worth studying, for it is the curve of illness, aberration and difficulty on any dynamic. The primary difference between the analytical mind and the body is the ability of the analytical mind to have nothing and the inability of the reactive mind, the body, to have nothing. The body knows things exist and knows there are things it must have and things it must not have. By things we mean things with molecules in them. Thus in this first session, we are going to ask the preclear, namely you, to put some attention on your body -- medically and dietetically. You won't find in any of my lectures or writings any discounting of the physical ills of the body. They comprise 30% of the 100% of Man's ills. On the contrary, you will find me asking time after time to be aware of, to observe, that your preclear may be physically sick. Physical illness is predisposed by, precipitated by and prolonged by mental aspects and difficulties. But you don't run engrams on a preclear with a curable physical ailment. Cure the ailment or alleviate it and then run engrams. All right. Now observe the mental curve of a physically ill person. It approximates, in the various stages of the sickness, the various depths of the tone scale. A physically ill person is a mentally ill person. In the sanitariums if they had anybody there to observe it, some percentage of their "insane" are only ill physically, but this chronic physical illness is bad enough to make them act insane. One notable case comes to mind of a psychiatrist electrically shocking an inmate many times to discover finally (without any embarrassment, being professionally beyond shame) that the patient was in continual agony from cancer. An operation arrested the cancer. The electric shock was not so easily repaired. Very well, not to infer anybody is insane, be aware that a chronic low tone, anxiety and insecurity can stem from a prolonged but not entirely suspected physical illness which in this day of Aureomycin may be cured. 420 Being particular about my practice, unlike some people I won't name, I always send a preclear to a medico before I audit whenever I suspect some chronic illness for maybe the medico can cure it quickly. If he can, then I can audit with speed. Auditing a physically sick preclear is slow work. In many instances where Dianetics failed in auditors' hands, the auditor didn't look at his preclear. He audited a preclear who secretly took drugs, who was ridden by some disease, who didn't eat properly -- in other words the failure was a failure to observe the simple rule that when a man is thirsty, while auditing might help a bit, it's easier to give him a drink of water. All right. In this session, I am going to ask you to see if you aren't thirsty or hungry or sick before we go into your engrams. How about dropping in on the local insurance examiner for a fast three- dollar checkover, asking him in particular to look for any possible chronic illness. Now, it is 70% possible that whatever worries you or (if it is) makes your case hard to run, is psychosomatic. Let's wipe out the 30% chance that any trouble you're having is a physical stick on the tone scale, not a mental one. Of course, you may be having no trouble with your own case. Fine. But if you are holding on to your bank and your body like mad, remember that it may be because your body is holding on to you. In those around you and in preclears, you will find it very sound advice to observe for physical ills as well as mental. It may be true that all ills are mental BUT it may be possible to cure something fast with a simple diet change. As for food -- I can tell you at once, without even looking you over that you are deficient across the boards. I'm no food faddist and I would use Gaylord Hauser for you know what, but I've fed men on three expeditions and during an entire war and modern rations are so deficient in vitamins and minerals that it's a wonder you stagger around at all. Get this -- the B1 normal of the average being comes about only through administering in tablet form about 250 mg. per day. By knocking B1 out of the body I can reproduce any and every kind of restimulation. It is a bumper between the restimulable engram and the preclear. As for the body itself, it was made to be used -- worked. Not used, it goes to the devil quickly. The favorite whine of America is "I don't want to work." You might as well say "I want to be sick." The American Banker has sold America and a lot of Great Britain on the glories of getting enough saved so one can retire. Death and retirement, if you care to look at the statistics, are damned close together. Retiring or "going away for a rest" are usually followed by illness. The only ambition of a sane body is to be permitted to work in harness until it drops dead in harness. Now you happen to be using a body. Before we worry about your mind let's clean up the primary communication relay point, the body. And for two weeks, let's do these things: 1. Clean up your MEST, get done the various odd jobs you've "been meaning to do." 2. Bring yourself up to date socially and give a letter or a ring or a personal call on people you've neglected. 3. Take a one-hour walk every day, simply starting away from home very early (dawn is best) for half an hour and then walk back, a different direction every day. (If you can't walk, get out in the yard and throw things for half an hour. If you can't throw, spit at something for half an hour -- and I mean throw and spit literally.) 421 4. Get a physical examination and if anything is chronic get it cured. 5. Take twice a day 100 mg. of B1 (200 mg. total) and supplement it with 250 mg. of vitamin C. If you will do these things, you will be ready in a couple of weeks for some auditing. And if you feel you're in such top condition you need no auditing, I dare you to do the above and feel the change. This is good advice. But it is better than advice. It's an invitation to start living. If you won't take it, then you want auditing to supplant living and you think processing will furnish you with an easy regimen or a painless suicide. How about it? L. RON HUBBARD 422  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 31 iDate=0/8/53 Volnum=0 Issue=7 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0     P.A.B. No. 7 PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN From L. RON HUBBARD Via Hubbard Communications Office 4 Marylebone High Street, London W.1 (1953, ca. mid-August) Come on and bear a hand with your professional or special membership. Send your $28 or $110, if you haven't already sent it, to London -- 4 Marylebone High Street, London W.1, or to the HAS in Philadelphia -- 237 North 16th Street. I need your fee to help bear the freight on investigation, PABs and the Journal. You need this data, this service. Occasionally you may not like what I say but remember that small fault can be found with silence. You may not like what people say I do -- remember that all you know for sure about what I do is that I do my job -- it being my simple-minded belief that that is the only way for anybody to get anywhere. I want you as a member. There are darned few of us to get this show on the road as it is. So send in your membership fee if you haven't already. I need it. If you have a better "reason," charge it up to $28 worth of auditing from Hubbard. The International Congress of Dianeticists and Scientologists is scheduled September 30, 1953 (Tuesday to Saturday inclusive) in Philadelphia, Pennsylvania. Write to HAS, 237 N. 16th Street, Philadelphia for more data -- or just be there if it is in easy reach. The entrance fee will be minor. I'm going to give ten hours of rundown on SOP 8L and auditing and demonstrations. And there will be lots of case reporting. Professional organizations will get under way in earnest for the first time. You may not be aware of it but with 16-G and other material, we are toeing the mark to take over psychotherapy in the U.S. That's not ambitious, there not being any besides ours. Hope you can make it. If you can't, a few months later there will be a Western conference in Phoenix. Somebody may be interested in a personal project of clinical and research training. We have too few top-notch boys and girls in auditing and almost none in investigation. For the six weeks following the Congress I am going to groom a handful personally, picking out the most promising I can. There will be an $800 fee, a guaranteed clearing, and an award of HGA to the successful ones. Needless to say, I only want experienced auditors for material. Also, I will listen if somebody is impatient to have his case cracked by me. I'm cracking occluded ones, even in Spanish and French these days -- and I speak damned little of that! As a personal note, I'm homeward bound by freighter, being shepherd to a couple of racing vehicles. Susie, who knew no Spanish at all but pronto (and all Texans know that), now holds long and involved conversations with the baby's Spanish nurse, shopkeepers, professors and officials. Confidentially, her accent is very Texan-Spanish with a southern drawl. The baby, of course, isn't speaking anything even though she understands what I tell or ask her. She's a real cute kid. All grin and giggle. 423 About Scientology, the universities in America would be ashamed of themselves if they could see and hear the high repute in which the work is held in Europe. Over here they know something happened in 1950. Well -- to business. SIX STEPS TO BETTER BEINGNESS Easy to Learn, Quick to Act With regard to your own case or any case, be advised that as of this writing of August, 1953, six short easily learned processes exist which, separately or in combination, markedly and simply alter and improve a case. They solve those problems encountered in Dianetics as well as in Scientology. These processes are unlimited. They are not difficult to do. They work fast and they require no more time to learn than it would take to instruct a preclear. When I step back and look at them I am a little shocked at myself for not developing them 25 years ago instead of this year, and I am more than a little shocked that Man, in 3,500 or 4,500 years of written history, could have remained ignorant of them. Of course Man, in many cults and systems, borders on these. But make no mistake -- if you think you know one of these because you saw it in Mysticism or Capitalism or some other cult, read it again here, for you have missed it. "Taking nothing" is not denial, for denial implies a shunning of something, and "taking nothing" doesn't even imply a something exists. This, for example, is an all technique. It is a certainty of nothing-in-existence. Hard to do at first, perhaps, but productive. And so it is with other processes. Read well, for the thing may be so simple you will miss it. Now what are these six wonder-workers? SOP 8? No, but they appear there. Formula H? Takes skill to use that. SOP 8L? No, we aren't even covering these here. Our six processes have been around for a while and they are given to you as tested, for many auditors have worked with them. And they are given to you as self-processing techniques, for a trained auditor can use them on himself. Any one of these, used alone, would probably effect a theta clear. But that isn't our goal just now. Many of you have no reality in that. Instead, let us use, one after the other, these six just to become better beings. In subsequent PABs we will do processes which bring you to know about Life through your own certainty. In this one we will aim toward the goal of getting you to know that you are alive. Oh, you do already? Not, I am afraid, to as great a degree as you could. In this PAB we are going to cover the certainty that something can happen. Now those of you who exteriorize easily need alter these processes here only to the extent of doing them while exteriorized. These apply to any case, mock-ups, black or what-room. The processes are, by proper name: (1) Ten Minutes of Nothing. (2) Duplication (Step E, Short 8). (3) Spacation (Step III, SOP 8). (4) Contact (Step VII, SOP 8). (5) Self Analysis (Step VI, SOP 8). (6) The Opposite Pole. 424 They rank approximately in the above importance and they can be run in the above order. Certainty Processing, Formula H, and SOP 8L are to be the subjects of later PABs. The above six serve our purpose here. They serve our purpose so well, these six -- that an auditor cannot use them on a preclear without changing markedly the state of the case. In fact, it is my belief that an auditor, after testing these on himself and a preclear, could not honestly go back to using off-brand psychotherapy unless he had something else besides psychotherapy in mind, such as, shall we say, sadism or coercion. For these six by themselves or with Certainty, SOP 8, Short 8, SOP 8L and Formula H, produce any beneficial mental result possible according to my experiments, data and reports. Remember, all these are Scientology, they are not Dianetics. They go on a 180 Deg vector to Dianetics. I developed these in 1953. I carefully point this out in order to unslick a few people on the time track. The phenomena in Dianetics are still there but Dianetics requires too much skill and leaves too wide a margin for unscrupulous auditing. Dianetics isn't better -- it's just too difficult, and takes too long. These six are a backbone of Scientology, Science of Certainty. And they give you and your preclears all the certainty of recovery you could desire. They undo travail. They do their job easily without auditor restimulation. And you can self-audit them. (Read ALL the PAB before Self-Processing.) To begin the session, if you were here in person I would ask you to double-terminal with certainty "I can't make people well" "I can make people well" in brackets, for it might be standing in your road. You can try it if you like but need to. We'll pick up all that when we learn about LIFE in SOP 8L. Or I might have you run "Must reach" "Can't reach," "Must withdraw" "Can't withdraw" on your favorite somatic first. But again, that isn't necessary. Let's go straight to ( 1) of these processes: (1) Take Ten Minutes of Nothing. This technique means Oh so literally what it says. It isn't ten minutes of "relaxation" or "relief' or "rest." It isn't ten minutes of you, a body. It isn't ten minutes of somatics. It means ten minutes of no body, no engrams, no walls, no MEST Universe, no sound, no thought, really nothing. All one's life he is trying to get, to work, to be, to perceive SOMETHING. Now for Ten Minutes let us have utterly NOTHING. The gettingness of something makes a one-way flow. Also the dwindling spiral. Also, the one thing the analytical mind cannot be, it thinks, yet all it is is nothing, is in MEST terms: Nothing. Mind you, fear of NOTHING is enough to make one's stomach curl for Nothing is death itself. This is unlimited in running time. It always improves a case in the long run if not instantly, as it often does. The preclear discovers sooner or later he CAN be nothing, that he doesn't have to strive to be. What a relief! Lao-tse was so right about striving. The MEST Universe itself is mainly nothing even in the science of physics. In sound, concentrate on the silences between the beats, not the beats, for instance. You can use NOTHING in Matched Terminals Brackets, you can have Nothing of particular somethings such as dead kinfolk. But the basic technique and the one used here is simply "Ten Minutes of Nothing." If you or the preclear get too ill the first time (the illness would abate if the process were kept up and always abates in subsequent periods) use the next-to-the-last list of Self Analysis (something real, etc.). Now to (2). This is Duplication. This process appears in Short 8 as Step E. But it appears so briefly that its use and variation has not been understood. 425 The analytical mind has come to depend entirely for perception upon the body while, it can be demonstrated easily, it is itself capable of vision. Further, the body has a nasty and uncontrollable trick of duplicating everything it sees. This makes engrams. The body perceives continuously as we learned in Dianetics. Duplication is the action of making mental pictures. Duplication processing brings the mechanism of taking pictures under the aware control of the analytical mind. The body "makes pictures" of everything. It is certain of MEST because it has apparently been punished into agreeing with the solidity of MEST. The analytical mind is not so "sold" on MEST. Thus, remember this, it doesn't make clear pictures or "see" well at first. It dubs in a thing of no consequence in theta clearing. The process begins by having the preclear (or yourself) look with the body's eyes at MEST objects and, one by one, put beside each object selected a mock-up or duplicate of it. This is done rapidly with far more attention to quantity than quality. This is done for a couple of minutes. The second, longer step consists of advising the preclear or yourself to "look" with eyes shut at MEST objects and, eyes still shut, put a duplicate or mock-up beside each object selected, and perceived. One does not at first select the preclear's body. One selects objects in the room, then outside the house. The last necessitates "seeing through walls." At no time lead the preclear, if doubtful, to do more than "pretend to see." But don't tell him he must only pretend either, for this is invalidation. The certainty comes in on the duplicate. The preclear knows he is duplicating even if he is only pretending to see the actual object. Tell him to see the house next door and duplicate it with a mock-up beside it. Tell him to see a bush and duplicate that. Keep this up for many many objects. The preclear may or may not tell you he feels he is away from his body. If he is, good. Don't tell him to get back in. Just keep up the process regardless. You are not interested at this stage or with these processes in theta clearing, but it happens anyway. Finally have the preclear view and mock up beside it his own body and parts of his body from various angles. This process resolves scarcity of engrams and viewpoints and is intensely useful and valuable. (3) Spacation is Step III of SOP 8. This is a specialized version of nothingness. It is very murderous to aberration. Its first phase is to have the preclear, with his eyes closed, "reach" up and find the two corners of the room behind him and get interested in them and NOT THINK. You can do this for hours. No matter how bad you feel or from what, you can always improve with this one. This puts the preclear in present time. And as circuits are never in present time, they key out. This process resolves all your out-of-present-time Dianetic problems. The preclear is holding on to both sides of the engram bank, taking responsibility for one side only -- thus he is an effect. This is "Spacation with MEST." Your preclear, I am sorry to say, will eventually exteriorize whether he knows about it or not. A total spacation is completed by having the preclear put eight anchor points of his own out, ignoring MEST, to make and use his own space. There are many uses for this process. All ills are basically lack of one's own space. This Step III is basically a nothingness process. People who are afraid of nothingness can't make space. (4) Contact is Step VII of SOP 8. More data is needed here. Auditors have been writing me frantically telling me that their "sane" preclears get big tone rises on this and that this is not limited to psychotics. The process consists of having the preclear see, feel or otherwise sense objects in the room, reach for them with hands and then withdraw from them. It can be repeated theta-wise. (5) Self Analysis (Step VI of SOP 8) is, of course, the total of Self Analysis in Scientology, published by the HAS in Philadelphia. It is mock-up processing. 426 It (a) creates space, (b) takes attention off engrams, (c) recovers the use of energy, (d) improves aesthetics, and several other things. The next-to-the- last list in the book is still excellent -- Recall a time when something was real to you, when you were in good communication, when you knew some affinity was present. This can be supplemented by having the preclear mock up an entirely fictitious series of past and future incidents -- for TRUTH when it means MEST Universe is Total Agreement with the past; and that is death, that is MEST. (6) opposite Pole processing is new to you but it is a logical follow- through on three universes. We have here more than adequate to make one sure of his own universe, enough to make one sure of the MEST Universe, but not enough to make the preclear certain of the "other fellow's universe." (See Issue 16-G of the Journal of Scientology, "This is Scientology," ( page 378 ).) Certainty on three universes is necessary. The Opposite Pole is, as I will cover in later PABs, quite important. Here I will give the rudimentary process: There are two phases: The first is allied to certainty Processing. The second is a resolution of valences. Its name is "Wearing Heads." In the first, one puts an imaginary point before, behind, above, below, to each side of him, one place at a time, and has this point think "I am going to destroy you"; also have the points saying "I will betray you" and "I won't reply" and then the preclear thinks at the point "Nothing there." This is a simple form. The point can think all sorts of threatening or cowardly things, and also "Nothing there" meaning all manner of things at the point. But the primary phase of having the point think "I am going to destroy you," "I will betray you" and "I won't reply" and having the preclear think "Nothing there" and varying the position of the point will suffice when Opposite Pole is used with the remaining five processes. "Wearing Heads" is the second phase of Opposite Pole. One has the preclear, or himself, make a list of early allies, pets, enemies, current associates, the wife or husband and objects and then, one after another, put on the head (mocked up over his own head or around him if exteriorized) of the other person or thing. One does this rapidly. The preclear gets some insight into the 3rd Universe. "Wearing Heads" is quite effective. If there are some heads he won't wear or if he gets one "stuck on" and "can't get it off," recall that this process is the last on the list and one goes from it to "Take Ten Minutes of Nothing" and around we go again. Now if you really are serious about your own case or about getting results on your preclear, you will sit down or lie down for half an hour or an hour or so a day for the next two weeks and go through each one of these six, giving each a few minutes and then going on to the next. I won't tell you you'll be a clear in two weeks. You will have to have an insight of some depth into life to be a stable clear and you get that by getting audited on or auditing yourself on Certainty, Formula H and SOP 8L on the routine to be given in future PABs. But if you use these six steps as given here and don't wander and don't let your circuits get you into "mazes of philosophy" and don't get fascinated by engrams, you'll be a passable release after a while. You may even find out you're alive! Breathing and everything! Here's the routine: SIX STEPS FOR SELF-AUDITING (SSSA): (1) Ten Minutes of Nothing. (2) Duplication. (3) Spacation. 427 (4) Contact. (5) Self Analysis. (6) Opposite Pole. Do each not longer than ten minutes at a time. Do all in one session. Use for any case, for auditing or self-auditing. Send in for your membership so I can see you next fortnight. L. RON HUBBARD 428  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 81 iDate=0/8/53 Volnum=0 Issue=8 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0     From: L. RON HUBBARD Seville, Spain Through: Hubbard Communications Office 4 Marylebone High Street London W.I, England ASSOCIATE NEWSLETTER NO. 8 ( 1953, ca. late August) The big news is the International Congress of Dianeticists and Scientologists scheduled for October 1, 1953 by the HAS, 237 North 16th Street in Philadelphia, Pennsylvania. The Congress will last five days, beginning Wednesday and closing Sunday night. The new material will be given and demonstrated by myself. Professional organization will be stressed business- wise. Case reports on current data will be given. Group Processing will be undertaken and demonstrated by myself and others. I am, by present plan, homeward bound in September after an absence from the U.S. of one year. During that year I believe I have achieved a great deal -- a strong and successful operation in England and internationally. And I have brought the science to a point of simplicity which works excellently even in poorly taught hands and upon groups. I have one more process which I am saving for the Congress, a process which makes the preclear, no matter how unhappy, quickly satisfied that something is happening for the better and which strikes down even the extreme cases of "I don't want to get well." This is 8L and is a final answer to engrams and what life is about. It has not been detailed in any paper. It is pro-auditor and self-processing. We have now university backing of magnitude in Europe and also university arrangements in the U.S. And I think the amount of trouble I can expect is slight, although I am informed that some fellow in the Middle West urged in Denver a "police force to keep auditors from using Hubbard's techniques." I have booby-trapped the line on this guy. He will, of course, as he has in any series of lectures I have given, launch some petty suit at me to annoy me. This lets me sue back in the East. I think he will be very unhappy, I hope. I'm not looking for trouble but today I have the funds, the science and the time to get real nasty on these squirrels. Always before I had first to think of investigation, second to think of business. The boys took ample advantage of my preoccupation with trying to get to where we could really help people easily. I am ashamed for them but that won't stay action from me. Now following the Congress in Philly, I am going to take on personally for training some few top crust HDAs or HCAs. This is the start of the doctorate routine. It looks like the pattern will go this way: The Road to Doctorate: 1. HCA from an associate or doctorate school. 2. B.Scn. from a doctorate school. 3. Correspondence Courses on various subjects such as philosophy, psychology. 4. Special training by myself. Three and four above may be changed at times so that they finish with my prepping before they finish their correspondence courses. The people I will undertake to train immediately after October 5 will be advanced people. The course will be clinical in nature and will last six weeks. Its fee is $500. If you can see your way clear, send me somebody real good so we can have some carefully coached auditors around. 429 According to plans we will have, I believe (but not for certain), a Western Congress in late December at Phoenix. In Philly I hope to get the HAS a bit more active and solvent, a thing I always work on anyway, so don't be concerned for the moment on the non-receipt of books. There will be conference tapes, about 10 hours at $10 per hour. Order through HAS, Philly. The Journal will now be catching up on its issues. The big drawback here has been its lack of copy from me. I have been pretty busy and for some time without a dictaphone. Its earlier punctuality was due in some part to my having good facilities and getting the copy there on time. Also to Hart's heavy newspaper indoctrination. Poor ole Green Eyeshade will have to get unoccluded now on 8L. Hardin and Sequoia have received a go-ahead on a four-year training program which includes some "residence training." We are now seeking to work out a schedule whereby he can use the Sequoia Correspondence Courses in various subjects to supplement associate training through the associate. These are apparently good courses Sequoia has. I have asked Ross to look into using the purely correspondence material on philosophy, etc. in a general program for associates. This doesn't, by the way, put anybody under Sequoia. The reason for this study in old subjects lies in my observation that most auditors lack knowledge of Man's struggle with knowledge. They cannot, with this lack, recognize first the value of their own work, second, cope with cultured if incompetent academic psychologists, and third, they appear ignorant to preclears who, if their trouble is severe, are quite often extreme experts on psychology and philosophy. This is part of raising the cultural level of auditors as a whole. As a side comment, isn't that Ghost of Scientology raising hell with people! Delightful. As another comment, people process and act in Spanish according to the rules and tone scale. Still another, my God is it hot in Seville! NOTE: Run Certainty on "Can (Cannot) make people (self) well." Be surprised how this changes an auditor. Best, Ron  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 31 iDate=0/8/53 Volnum=0 Issue=8 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  VIEWPOINT PROCESSING    P.A.B. No. 8 PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN From L. RON HUBBARD Via Hubbard Communications Office 4 Marylebone High Street, London W.1 ( 1953, ca. late August) VIEWPOINT PROCESSING A few weeks ago I was able to tell the various schools of the HAS in an Associate Newsletter not to bother with or work with their extremely tough cases for a little while since I had to hand a process which easily remedied their difficulties. I discovered Viewpoint Processing about the same time as The Factors, but wished to make completely certain of the results to be obtained by Viewpoint Processing and to go on for a few months investigating the possibilities that there might be another even more easily workable process by which the difficult case or any case could be resolved. To give you an entire list of the processes developed and examined and applied for the purposes of test would be a lengthy and at this time unprofitable task. I should, however, for the use of future investigators, give you some outline of the processes developed and investigated. In addition to the developments which you see in the various books and articles I have written on the subjects of Dianetics and Scientology, and which delineate many processes, and in addition to lectures I have made on my investigations and applications in the field of the human mind, I have tested in excess at this date of ten thousand mental combinations of computations, various types of nothingness, facsimiles, postulates, force, perception and other factors designed to alter, enhance or nullify mental conditions. In addition to this purely thought investigation a great many mechanical aids, biochemical combinations of substances, various diets and regimens have either been tested or developed and tested in an effort to resolve endocrine and purely structural problems attendant upon mental and physical deficiencies in an effort to locate in structure a sweepingly simple answer. All of these efforts pointed toward and assisted in the development of the technology and methodology of SOP 8, Short 8, Six Steps for Self-Auditing (SSSA) and techniques evolved directly from the data given as The Factors, the five Pre- Logics and the Axioms and Logics as given in the Handbook for Preclears. Investigation forced one toward the conclusions which follow: The problems of structure and bacteria are best resolved first by a direct address to the mind; second (but first in the case of emergency surgery) mechanical rearrangement of structure; and third, diet and regimen within the tolerances of the body; fourth, the administration of biochemical substances of a preventive, supplementary or curative nature, but only in the presence of obvious and well established acute or chronic illnesses or deficiencies. From the standpoint of technique, it could be said that those techniques which most apply creation and observation produce the best and most rapid effects. Those techniques which employ nullification or eradication are substantially less effective, and those techniques which employ evaluation for the patient or which cause him to combat or shun one phenomenon or another are directly harmful. Techniques which stress viewpoint creativeness, space and action are far superior to techniques which stress ideas or objects. Techniques which bring about anaten in any form or which stress somatics are not in the long run workable above a very low level. Any 431 technique which introverts is inferior to a technique which extroverts the attention. The goal of processing could be said to be the restoration of the highest possible level of freedom of attention for the purposes of creation and observation. Emergency mental conditions alone excuse the running of engrams, the use of concepts, matched double terminals; but such a practice should be altered to unlimited techniques after no more than half an hour. Certainty Processing is apparently the only exception to this rule, but here the ingredient of certainty alone on past, present and future excuses the use of nullification. Some hundreds of tests applying viewpoint attention and other matters to Certainty Processing demonstrate it to be an emergency technique to be employed only to that level where observational creative techniques can be used. The remedying of scarcity and abundance in terms of Creative Processing as represented by SOP 8 (Step IV) is senior to, by far, Double Terminaling, Matched Terminaling and running concepts or Postulate Processing in any form. Restoration of the patient's ability to evaluate and an eradication of invalidation by restoring his confidence through direct observation are excellent techniques. Auditing failure evidently comes about by the unwillingness on the part of the auditor to have other people "look." Auditing difficulties are found to lie more generally with the auditor than with the preclear. It could be said generally that an auditor is not in a position to audit unless he can comfortably out of a clear conscience permit other people to observe. The auditor's own fear of discovery of data in his own life is found to impede the progress of preclears markedly and is the basic reason for auditor fixation upon nullification techniques rather than observational techniques. There are in the process of test four mechanical aids for the treatment of the psychotic which may or may not obviate auditing. Nevertheless such mechanical aids would have to be applied by an auditor. Pending the final testing of these mechanical aids, the auditor is invited to let alone for the time the problem of the psychotic and psychotic patients. But if he does feel called upon to treat the psychotic, his attention is invited to Step VII of SOP 8. It is highly probable that this step, succeeded by as much of the remainder of SOP 8 as can be assimilated, is the only mental treatment in existence for the remedy of psychosis or severe neurosis which will deliver good results without danger of worsening the psychosis. A long investigation of shock treatment by an unbiased investigator financed by myself has resulted in the incontrovertible conclusion that shock treatment of any kind, whether by use of noise, gas, electricity or physical blows, not only worsens but confirms mental derangement and is used in this civilization at this time solely because the level of acceptance of the psychiatrist is a psychotic person, which level of acceptance will not permit a raising of that person into the level of sanity. The use of surgery and shock upon the mentally deranged is bluntly criminal. The recommended battery of techniques for the betterment of the preclear as of this date is as follows: Viewpoint Processing SSSA Certainty Processing SOP 8 Short 8 Formula H SOP 8L Viewpoint Processing is contained in this issue of the PAB. SSSA has been covered in PAB No. 7. Certainty Processing is contained in Appendix 2 for SOP 8 (PAB No. 3). SOP 8 and Short 8 are contained in Issue 16-G of the Journal of Scientology. Formula H [PAB No. 9] and SOP 8L will be covered in later PABs. 432 Although viewpoints may be handled in many ways and are best handled purely from observation, there is that case which is intensely occluded which cannot at the beginning of auditing observe well as a body if at all as a thetan. This is either the occluded or the delusory case. If the case is delusive, its entrance is via Step VII of SOP 8. If the case is merely occluded the obvious and immediate entrance to the case is Viewpoint Processing. The blackness on the case is indicative of a scarcity of viewpoints, a necessity for safeguarding and protective "screens," a defensive and propitiative attitude towards existence, too much loss of allies and goods, too much loss of space, and finally and most importantly, loss of those who have evaluated for the preclear. The sudden departure of the person who has evaluated for the preclear results in loss of that viewpoint which the preclear unwittingly had assumed. That one person evaluates for another solely in the most common concourse of communication is not aberrative, but where evaluation has taken on an extreme aspect as in the case of a mother, father, husband or wife, then the preclear has come to assume that if the person evaluates for him, the person is looking and listening and feeling for him as well. The loss, by any cause, of the evaluating Personality causes the preclear to believe that he has lost his source of perception. There is no radical difference, and only a gradient scale, between "observing for" and "thinking for." "Thinking for" is much lower than "looking for" the preclear. Direct observation is infinitely superior to thought which seeks to know before looking. Thought could be said to be the manifestation of evolving a low-level certainty of observation from a number of past observations. The combination of past observations to derive a future observation could be said to be the process of thinking itself. Thus we find the occluded case very often very brilliant, very sane and very reasonable but inhibited in observation. The brilliant occluded case has achieved the almost impossible level of being able to know through past experience without looking at all. This could be said to be the generation of a theory: the combining of past experience to predict future experience, the role and function of a theory. Where the ability to think is combined with the ability to observe directly, one has a genius. The case which can observe but thinks poorly or shallowly is known to us as the wide-open case. The case which cannot observe but thinks obsessively is known to us as the psychotic. This does not mean that there are not combinations of wide-open and occluded cases, and it does not mean that all wide-open cases cannot think, nor does it mean that all occluded cases cannot observe. I have here presented only the two extreme aspects of "all observation without thinking" and "all thinking without observation." All manifestations of thought break down into relative positions in space. A person is happy when contra-survival things are far from him and pro- survival things are near to him and unhappy when contra-survival things are close to him and pro-survival things are far from him. In other words, all manifestations of thought and all difficulties of thought find as their basic the five Pre-Logics, the substance of which is that theta locates things in time and space and creates time and space in which to locate things and creates things to be located in time and space. It will be found that the spatial concepts and observations of the difficult occluded case are at fault: things are too near to him or too far from him; things are in improper relation one to another. The use of Step VII of SOP 8 upon an occluded case, even where the case is not even vaguely "insane," all can produce this startling result, for this step remedies relative position in space of various objects. This is mentioned in passing because the occluded case who comes to the auditor is usually merely worried or wants to be better and the auditor overlooks the fact that here is a very powerful mind holding well in check and compensating for lack of reality on spatial position. It 433 will be found immediately that this case has been from early childhood extremely concerned one way or another by spatial position. This denotes a former dependency upon one person or another for the MEST universe itself to keep objects located relative to one another in space, and dependence upon the judgment of another as to whether things are near or far. It will be found immediately that somewhere in the current lifetime background of this preclear there was a person who was extremely concerned about the nearness or farness of things and who was obsessed on the subject of distances. A quick relief of this condition is the discovery with an E-Meter of the identity of this person and then the application of Viewpoint Processing, using that person as the one who has most evaluated for the preclear. The E-Meter, not the preclear, will be able to locate this person. Although the occluded case will always inform one with great rapidity that he cannot get mock-ups, his statement is quite relative and is based upon his desire to defeat the auditor. It will be found that the case can get some vague impression in one fashion or another sufficient to work the case. The occluded case is afraid of sight. He will be found to recoil from a momentary bright mock-up or a facsimile. These frighten him. In Para- Scientology it has been discovered that a cycle of Can't-See, Can-See, has taken place somewhere in this occluded case's past. It has been offered that a person was blind in a lifetime and on death, of course, recovered suddenly his state of vision. So long as he was blind he was alive, the moment he could see he was also dead, so to see means to die. This has solved some of the blindness cases in Scientology. It will also be noted that the occluded case, when asked to exteriorize or when he exteriorizes for the first time, will feel a considerable amount of grief. In Para-Scientology this has been traced to past lives and the death (for exteriorization is an approximation of death). It does not particularly matter whether the sadness of the occluded case, on the thought of exteriorizing, is occasioned by "past deaths" or whether his fear of perceiving is traceable to sudden visions of a body, now dead, to the end of believing that seeing makes him dead. These are matters for Para- Scientology and they only feed the occluded case's circuit which compels him to look always for a prior cause, a reason. Indeed, his search for a reason is what marries him so thoroughly to a body, for a body always has reasons, reasons for everything. How far can you get from observations? A reason. The occluded case has to know before he can go, has to compute what he will see before he looks. He is the best customer for the map-maker. The dear old Royal Auto Club with its wonderful fund of knowledge about touring, its beautiful travel directions, yet is an example of having to know before we can go. The RAC can tell you the number of pebbles on any road in Tibet, much less France. It is the best and most efficient club of its kind in the world. Just so, we do not object to this trait of the occluded case -- to have to study books and maps before he can move -- but the occluded case himself at length concludes that he isn't too happy even when he gets there. His longing for adventure is thwarted by his thirst for knowing before he is. He has to know, for example, all about the conditions of being a clear before he is audited. Then he approximates in auditing what he has now computed a clear should do. And his case stands still. Why? Because it isn't being audited -- his circuits (calculators) are. On concepts and nullification techniques in general his improvement is very, very slow, for he is processing something while the auditor is processing him -- and the auditor is not processing the preclear, but, via the preclear, a circuit. The answer to this is blunt: "Look! Don't think! Look!" It will be found that the occluded case never looks at a thing. He looks at something besides a thing. He is "steered off' that which he would observe by charge. Ask 434 him for an observation -- you will get an indirect reply, a reason, an explanation, a description -- and if he is in "bad shape" you will get an answer, not to your question, but to something else. By this alone you can tell an occluded case. A case pretending to be wide-open is actually occluded if it behaves thus. Many a "wide-open" case with "clear recalls" actually can't see anything or is seeing nothing but delusion. The positive key is, how direct is the communication with this person? Another characteristic of the occluded case is that he "has been betrayed." Any case that talks much about betrayal is an occluded case, even if he represents himself otherwise. The occluded case is sometimes a criminal, sometimes intensely honest. In a search for truth, he has interpreted truth as "agreement exactly with the past." This is honesty. It is also being MEST itself. So if you cannot get a case to lie to you, know that it is occluded. If you cannot get a case to act without a reason, it is occluded. If a case claims to be doing one thing and is actually doing another, if its actions are hidden behind a mask of TRUTH (if it is really a liar) you have a spun occluded case that has entered delusion. This person is crazy. And dangerous to the auditor and his reputation. The only safe way to audit is with an E-Meter. Only then can an auditor know the preclear is doing what the auditor says. Spend twenty hours of auditing an occluded case if you will, without an E-Meter, come to the end of the period, as you will, without any marked benefit to the case, assume then that the technique didn't work (and you will), but don't expect any sympathy from me if you don't always use an E-Meter. If the preclear is running as you direct there is always a needle response, particularly on the new Mathison 54 -- no occluded case can get by one -- but they can get by an auditor for the whole being if the occluded case is geared to defend and defeat other motion while yet emanating motion. There is a type of occluded case, very low in reasoning ability, which may have given rise to the "vampire" idea -- the personality which absorbs the life and lives on the life of others. This case, of course, is near-psychotic (you must understand that occlusion and psychosis are not synonymous). It has a peculiar trick which identifies it -- it ignites and extinguishes matches. I remark on this type because it typifies in a peculiar way what the occluded case is doing: THE OCCLUDED CASE IS DOING ALL POSSIBLE TO STOP OR ABSORB MOTION. Here we have the gradient scale of cases: Clear viewpoint (Cleared On) Viewpoint of facsimiles Viewpoint partially occluded (the average case) Viewpoint entirely occluded Viewpoint partially occluded, partially delusive Viewpoint of delusive facsimiles (the dub-in case) It is a shock to the occluded preclear to find out what he is doing -- for he is using every facsimile or ridge he can muster to absorb around him light, sound, feeling, motion, distance, and viewpoints. He is rigging himself up as a sponge for all motion that is forbidden or destructive. When you start to process this man, you will be astonished to find he is holding to him (with no responsibility) waterfalls to deaden sound, stove lids to stop fire, mats to deaden impacts. He is a walking soft-armor tank. In a light stage he is heavily built. When he is thin, he has begun to retreat from his armor plate. 435 He has followed this scale downward: 40.0 Cause (Emanating) 30.0 Mainly Cause, sometimes Effect 20.0 Half Cause, half Effect 4.0 More Effect than Cause (High Toned Man) 2.0 Mainly Effect, destructive Cause down 0.0 All Effect Note: 4.0 was and is the goal of Dianetics. 30.0 to 40.0 is the goal of Scientology. This goal of Dianetics was so difficult or impossible to attain by my early auditors that I returned entirely to investigation in October of 1950. I had considerably overestimated the capabilities of auditors and seriously underestimated the difficulty of some cases. Whatever process you use on an occluded case, you will find the above holds true. And of course it continues to hold true down into delusion. To make this case recover by wiping out engrams or postulates is bluntly impossible, for the case has mimicry of gravity and is grasping to it every incoming impact. It is remarkable that the delusive or dub-in case is best told by its pretending to have facsimiles (a complete corruption of an intolerable past) and yet manifesting the other manifestations of a completely occluded case. There aren't many of these delusive cases around; auditors in the old days commonly mistook these cases for near-clears, and thought to bring them up to a state of clear by auditing out engrams. Of course, the preclear could manufacture and believe (automaticity of engram manufacture) more engrams than could ever be eradicated by auditing and the case would simply stay on the same level or would even get worse. The auditor had failed to apply the small tests offered in Book One to distinguish a dub-in case. The wide-open case (delusive but clear recalls of non-factual material) is distinguished, then, by having the same manifestations in life as the occluded case, which is to say, a fear of and protest against sound, a general protest against life, a defensive and defeating attitude. But this case is in far worse condition than the occluded case and this condition is most easily noticed by endocrine disorders. This is denoted by sterility, untimely fat on the back of the ankles (startlingly common in the current civilization) and perceptic difficulties. In auditing this delusive case, it will be found that sonic and visio go off and the case becomes an occluded case before it rises far enough up the tone scale to have (and not need) proper facsimiles, or a good memory of past events. If the auditor thinks the occluded case is difficult, he should realize that this wide-open case is death and destruction to all around it, for the case is capable actually of nothing but destructive action and desires no other mental state in those around it than a complete apathy. The occluded case quite commonly supposes himself to be badly off; the delusive case rarely, if ever, believes there is anything wrong with him or her. The occluded case is high toned for homo sapiens and is therefore far more common amongst the leaders of society than even auditors suppose. In Viewpoint Processing we are looking for the person in the preclear's past who did not enjoy certain positions on the tone scale. You must know that love, hate, enjoyment and admiration are not positions on the tone scale. You will not find them on any tone scale that has been released by me for they are attitudes toward emotion or characteristics of energy rather than emotion. Emotions are a set band of reactions. Any person who can be freely emotional and enjoy a "good cry," or even enjoy being apathetic, also can hate "having a good cry," and so it is as well with love and admiration. In what the Russians laughingly call a civilization (and you would be shocked at how far that is from anything Europe or America thinks is civilized) practically the only enjoyed emotions are apathy, grief and fear. The remaining emotions in that culture are all but unknown. This holds true on the tone scale, in spite of the fact that these emotions are actually enjoyed. 436 In the old days the Russians thought nothing was more fun than for everybody to go into the barn and burn it down. They have not much changed. In Germany the most enjoyed emotion is hate amongst the Junkers class. They hate up and down the entire emotional band with an abandon which brings out the sporadic excursions they take down into France. Love, if you have ever noticed, does not much care where it sits on the tone scale, as we find a young man deeply in love starving himself to death (a characteristic of apathy) and a young girl in love in a dreamy enthusiasm which makes her bloom. We find love used in Christianity about twelve feet below 0.0 and in New York precisely at 2.5 on the tone scale. Admiration is a particle which unites and resolves like the universal solvent all types of energy, particularly force. Hate coheses and hardens energy. Love is the human manifestation of admiration. All this so you will know why it is that an occluded case sticks at being an occluded case while another case does not. The reason is in the people who have evaluated for the preclear. One of these has taught the preclear arduously to dislike (hate) all manner of things, has taught the preclear that many things are bad (it's so bad over there you'll have to look back at me). Another has taught the preclear that he must love everything. The predominant teaching is "Do not enjoy," "Do not be happy" (happiness being a state of admiration of things). The cycle, then, of the preclear who has been taught to hate things is that he begins to resist them and eventually piles up energy against them to such a degree that he makes an actual deposit, which is an occlusion and which has on his side of it complete blackness and on the reverse side of it the piled-up facsimiles of that thing which he is resisting. This screen, then, has a hunger for the thing which it was resisting, and if this screen is fed whatever it was set up to resist, it will dissolve. This accounts, in part, for the step of Expanded Gita. As a test, I fed the screen of one preclear the loathsome item which it had been set up to resist for thirteen hours before the screen resolved. In processing it is far better to pick up the evaluation which began the screens than it is to set out on the adventure of trying to dissolve the screens. However, if you want to see a cleared MEST body it is probable that you will have to feed these screens on Expanded Gita, wasting and accepting in brackets for, perhaps, a hundred hours. This solves the actual hunger which depresses the acceptance level of the preclear down to the things which he is resisting. The best trick the MEST universe has is to teach somebody he must not enjoy something, that that thing is bad and therefore he must resist it. Once this cycle of resistance is started, the preclear edges down toward the bottom. In auditing Viewpoint Processing, then, with the preclear on the E-Meter, one should take an assessment of all the people with whom he has been surrounded to discover which one of those people enjoyed things the least and hated things the most, and which one of those people insisted that the preclear love everything. It will be found that both of these will probably wind up with a stuck needle when discovered, for the preclear winds up hating the individual who insisted upon love for everything. The sudden loss of a sexual partner runs the cycle from love to hate with rapidity and leaves the preclear hung at that portion of the track where he lost the person. By resisting the loss he resists the person, and if the person has done anything to engender hate, we will find the preclear in a strange state of hating love. If he has to resist all love and affection, then, the chances of his getting enough particles of admiration to make life enjoyable to him are nil. This person is probably earlier in the preclear's life than marriage. What we are trying to do here, then, is not to run out all the engrams in the bank, but to release and free the viewpoints which are being resisted. This is somewhat like opening a safe. It was difficult to learn the proper combination; the proper combination 437 consists of breaking down the resistance of the preclear to that viewpoint which loved everything and which evaluated for the preclear and tried to get him to love everything. It will be found that this person has departed from the life of the preclear and the preclear will probably tell you with a sudden realization, yes, his emotions shut off just about that time. The screen which has been set up to resist this person may be based on an earlier screen, so one should take a second look and find out if there was somebody else who loved everything who is resisted by the preclear. It will generally be found that there are one or more earlier screens than the first one the auditor will discover. Having found this screen, it is necessary then to have the preclear, whether he can see his mock-ups clearly or not, mock up in abundance the person being resisted in the attitudes of "looking for the preclear" and of "pointing things out to the preclear to be loved."* Another variation of this process employs a principle which is very old to us -- Cause and Effect. The actual computational difficulty with this case is that the case is seeking to be an Effect rather than to be a Cause. The case will tell you that it has been betrayed. This is, in essence, saying "I have been the effect of a bad action"; it is an apology for failure. It will tell you during one session that such-and-such was cause, during the next session that so-and-so was cause, during the session following that that somebody else was cause, during the session following that the engrams so-and- so were the cause, and will actually, when it is very badly off, write you very long notes concerning computations as to what was cause. All of these computations break down into the category of "Something else is cause other than myself." This is what the auditor is trying to remedy, for unless this cause can assume the role of causation, the case cannot emanate energy sufficient to remove the bank or to move around the spaces in which his engrams are contained -- for his problem in being unable to move his engrams around is the problem of being unable to handle space. If he could handle engrams and could handle space, it would be a very simple matter for him to pick up all these black screens and hang them on some building and forget about them. But so long as he is saying that something else is cause other than himself, he will not handle space, he will not handle energy and, truth told, he backs away from objects. And this level of case tends to accept very poor and out-of-repair objects, energies and spaces. This case and cases below this level will dramatize the poor man's outlook and will accept enMEST rather than MEST. Thus it is very simple to get this case to run anything which will place the cause somewhere in his environment rather than in himself. The case actually wants to be an effect so as to receive sensation. This accounts in part for the absorption screens which are found in its vicinity. The desire- enforcement-inhibition curve runs down from wanting to be an effect through having to be an effect to trying to inhibit being an effect. When it gets down to inhibiting being an effect, it begins to fight the entire environment. *This preclear can give the auditor a rough "go," for the auditor is trying, by the evaluation of the preclear, to point out the fact that the preclear should be in contact with other human beings, should get better, should like the world and should enjoy life. The auditor, in other words, whether he says so or not, represents to the preclear the road toward love and happiness. Thus the preclear puts up his first and most immediate screen straight at the auditor. This makes it very difficult for the auditor to audit, but it makes it very easy to discover the person involved on the E-Meter when the engram is immediately presented to hand to be run. On a much broader scale, amusingly, the state of my own reputation at the hands of some people suffers from the same cycle. I am pointing out that life can be better. The full flood of unreasoning hate, then, can be and is poured out by many persons in my direction. It would be upsetting to me if I had not been experiencing savageness from neurotics for many, many years, and if I did not understand the principles on which this was operating. When I did not understand the principles on which it was operating and had not seen it in basic operation and had not resolved cases by it, it was very upsetting to me to have my reputation so kicked around. LRH 438 In more than one occluded case I have found the assumption to be the basic cause. Although this is part of Para-Scientology it is interesting that the auditor encounters it so often. The occluded case has stolen the baby. Papa, mama, no one else, must realize this. And at length the case itself will not realize it. The occluded case quite often is found stuck in birth. But it is stuck at the assumption point, where the thetan has taken over the baby, rather than the obstetrical end. Now and then some auditor starts to run a birth and finds a black hand reaching in for the baby. This is not the doctor's hand: the doctors do not reach in very often: this is the assumption. It will be found that the preclear will immediately steer away from this and, indeed, some preclears will fight it so hard that it cannot be run. Those preclears who fight this very hard are those preclears who have had families who did not appreciate them. The family was thought by the preclear to be saying continually, "see what you have done; we do not want you," and so on. This makes the preclear try to disavow his responsibility in having taken over the child. Wasting babies has a marked effect upon such a case. Using the motive of cause and effect in Viewpoint Processing, one runs the preclear in vast quantities saying to the environment "You are cause," saying to people "You are cause," saying to his engram bank "You are cause," and runs vast quantities of people saying to the preclear "You are cause" and people saying to other people "You are cause"; then large numbers of the preclear saying "I am an effect," large numbers of people saying to the preclear "I am an effect" and large numbers of people saying to large numbers of people "I am an effect." The wording of the thought can be varied in the last: "You have betrayed me -- an informer -- it is your fault" or "You are to blame." One preclear on whom this was run after a couple of minutes sat up on the couch with a startled look on his face and said, "You know, it isn't saying that to me." When I asked him what he meant he informed me that although he had not before realized it, he considered that every wall and every tree was saying to him, "You blame for this." His case took an immediate upsurge. Assigning cause and declaring effect is very high echelon processing and is a primary variation of Viewpoint Processing. It should be realized that all the foregoing material consists of variations of Viewpoint Processing which is in itself susceptible to many combinations and uses. VIEWPOINT PROCESSING This process seeks to resolve the problems set up by the evaluation of one being for another. It resolves in particular dependence upon people, objects, bodies and special systems of communication. Expanded Gita resolves scarcities. Viewpoint Processing resolves dependencies. A being tends to close terminals with anything on which he depends, and attempts to widen terminals on things on which he dare not depend. Upset and disillusionment about life becomes an obsessive desire for independence which in a body is, of course, impossible. The concept "I must be the only one" demonstrates the terrible urge not to be dependent upon anything. However, life works in two directions. A person who is trying to be "the only one" at the same time will be trying to make other beings dependent upon him. Thus the dependency of other beings upon him will eventually bring him downscale no matter how hard he tries to be the only one. "The only one" is a resistive computation and in a body is impossible to carry out and so results in a dwindling spiral. To be "the only one," in other words to be entirely independent, in the lower tones the individual resists all evaluation for himself and evaluates for others. This in 439 the higher tones is a native characteristic of life, but, just as any other characteristic of life can be debased and exaggerated, so it is in the lower tones. All life seeks to be independent; it is only when it becomes obsessively independent that difficulty results. In a democracy, for instance, the general feeling that all must be equal is fought against so that one finds in a democracy an excessively large number of people maintaining "computational" independence. A body is grossly dependent upon other life forms and other MEST combinations for its existence. It is quite impossible for a body eating every day to be independent. The analytical mind in close position to this body and believing itself dependent upon the body eventually, of course, begins to believe that it itself is the body and thus we get the buried and mysterious loss of identity on the part of the thetan, who is, in essence, the analytical mind to the body. One runs Viewpoint Processing on all dynamics. In particular the 5th, 6th, 7th and 8th dynamics must not be neglected. In sanitariums the briefest observation demonstrates that the 8th dynamic is most prominently the aberrative dynamic, for here we have the idea that God inhabits all space, thus making it impossible for the preclear to have any space of his own. The preclear must either have no space or must be himself God. To solve the God problem, one simply rigs up large spaces in abundance "full of God" and more large spaces "full of preclear" until the preclear can have large spaces of both. It is interesting that in preclears whose families were connected with the Church, the problem of space is most acute. This process is done by mock-ups of a very large order and of no particular distinctness. Although any computation can be run, the following computations will prove effective: Cause, Effect, enjoy things, hate things, look, don't look, motion, no-motion, sound, sight, feeling, work, pain, no-sound, no-sight, no-feeling, no-work, no-pain, babies, no-babies, spirits, no-spirits, Christ, no-Christ, God, no-God. The technique is run in this fashion: Brackets are used. One has the preclear put up a number of people or objects as himself putting them up, then has him put up people or objects as though somebody else were putting them up; then has others putting them up for others, all in quantity. One should use those things of which the preclear is certain. In other words, where you have a case which has a great deal of black silence on it and constricted space, you should run cubes of blackness which is silent, the preclear putting them up for others, another putting them up for the preclear, and others putting them up for others. The object here is a great many items put up rather than one set put up and held. One should put up many sets and should not hold them. If all he can put up are black cubes or patches of blackness, then he should put these up with the thought in each one such as "Cause.,, It must be kept in mind that what one is doing with this process is resolving some of the evaluations which have been done for the preclear to the end of resolving a scarcity of viewpoints. The reason one keeps putting up very large numbers of points which are evidently thinking toward a direction is, in essence, the remedying of a scarcity of viewpoints. One takes it at the level of accepting less desirable viewpoints, and it will be found that more desirable viewpoints are much more easily wasted by the preclear, so that the process can be varied by having these viewpoints, as mocked up, 440 waste large amounts of desirable things, such as babies. These viewpoints as mocked up will waste things that are desirable in torrents. We at once remedy the scarcity of viewpoints and the evaluation which those viewpoints have done. Thus one mocks up hundreds of thousands of grandfathers, pointing this way or that, or saying things are too distant, or saying simply,"You are the cause"; and one mocks up thousands of the preclear having him evaluating for others. Don't-depend-on-me and depend-on-me is a key button, but all the buttons included in Step IV of SOP 8 can be used in this process. The primary requisite of the viewpoint is that it has position relative to points. A change of viewpoint necessitates on the actual level a change of positions rather than a change of idea. The change of position is primary; the change of idea is secondary. Evaluation is the shifting of viewpoints or the effort to do so. On an actual rather than a thought level, this would necessitate transplantation from one spatial position to another spatial position. Shifting a baby from one side of the room to another side of the room is, in essence, evaluating for him, for it demonstrates to him a new point of view and new points to view. Dropping a curtain before one would be, in essence, evaluating for him. Locking a person in a closet or forcing a child to stay or sleep in a dark room would be forcefully evaluating for him. A child best accepts his mother's viewpoint if his mother has been that person who most changed his position in space and who furnished for him locomotion. Not in quite the same order, an automobile or an airplane evaluates for one by shifting his spatial position from one point to another. Fixation upon vehicles of transportation is very noticeable in people and the loss of a vehicle is bound to be damaging to perception, for the vehicle furnished not only a point from which to view but changed that point. Thus distance is definitely involved, both in viewpoints and in evaluation. You will find preclears "stuck on the track" in places where their position in space was forcefully changed or interrupted. This could be said to be a forceful evaluation. All problems of thought reduce to spatial relationships, quantity, velocity or characteristics of energy, and these interacting bring about time. Gaps in time such as in unconsciousness are a loss of viewpoint and are dependent upon others to view during the period, thus all evaluation for an individual brings about a restimulation of unconsciousness -- those periods when a person lay unconscious, not knowing where he was, completely dependent for the safeguarding of his possessions upon others about him or completely at the mercy of those others. The first being safeguarded is restimulated by protective evaluation such as "If you do so-and-so you will get hurt," and the latter is restimulated by betrayal; because periods of unconsciousness contain within them pain and discomfort, protective evaluation and betray restimulate alike somatics, and could be said to bring about psychosomatic illness. Where the preclear has had about him someone who told him what he did while he was asleep, he is likely to get that person confused with a doctor or nurse according to sex, in some operation, thus bringing the operation into constant restimulation. This is resolved simply by mocking up in brackets this evaluating person evaluating to the preclear and being evaluated to by the preclear. Mocking up hordes of doctors and nurses will restimulate the somatics of operations. This is best resolved, if it becomes very acute, by simply feeding the preclear a great many operations much worse than the one he has and placing these in future; for he is running in the case of any operation which restimulates "It must not happen again." The entire sub-zero tone scale is of great use in Viewpoint Processing. Ownership could be said to be that area being covered and protected by the preclear. As he goes 441 on in life, this area will narrow down to just his own body and then to just a portion of his own body. This is because he has been driven back, step by step, conviction by conviction, to the point where he does not believe he can protect anything. He gets to the point where he apparently does not want a viewpoint but wants instead battlements, ramparts, caves, and any other place in which he might be able to hide. He tries to make his engram bank into such a fortress. In this case it is very good to give him tremendous numbers of protective viewpoints; stone walls, doors, caves, and thus satisfy his "hunger" for a place in which he himself cannot be viewed. He will gradually come up on this to a point where he is cautiously willing to view something. I have had a preclear give tremendous sigh of relief at being permitted for an hour to insert in the darkness about him barricades of various sorts. A preclear who is very occluded does not think himself strong enough or does not sufficiently trust himself to offer very much protection to anything. Thus he cannot take responsibility for items around him and will be found not to be taking responsibility for several areas of the body. The preclear will be found to have, if occluded, an enormous desire to view the future and will be found to have had in his past association which pretended to evaluate the future for him. Spirits are the commonest; thus one must not neglect the 7th and 8th dynamics. The time factor of the viewpoint is tremendously interesting. The occluded preclear does not view the present. From the present he started viewing the future, and from the future started viewing the past. What he calls knowledge is the certainty of impact which has happened to him in the past and which he is certain is going to happen to him in the future. He knows that this is going to happen again. He knows in ratio to the violence of the impact. Thus seeking knowledge, he finds impact. If you ask him to run simply "It is in the present" he will rapidly discover that much of the blackness he is looking at is believed by himself to be in the future. In this case a special point of Viewpoint Processing is used wherein quantities of horrible and terrible events are placed in the future. As this is done, it will be found quite ordinarily that he begins to move on the time track and may quite suddenly get with these future mock-ups brilliantly clear forms and adequate space. In other words, we give him a viewpoint of the future in its most terrible and drastic form (he is, remember, not actually interested in the past: he is interested in the future and knows that such horrible things have happened and will happen again that he cannot adventure further in time). It will be found additionally that he is expecting a great many people to appear in the future. The preclear is quite startled when Certainty Processing is used to find out that he actually believes certain people are present. This knowledge is suppressed, and Certainty Processing brings it to light. In Viewpoint Processing one gives numbers of people to the preclear coming to him from the future, particularly enemies he has known in the past. It is peculiar to the occluded case that he believes himself, quite often, under arrest; therefore one should give him a great many police and uniformed people calling him here and taking him there; and one should also give him large quantities of schoolrooms and jails -- there being very little difference between them in the preclear's mind. He will become quite upset in this process unless he is also permitted to waste motion in wide spaces. The school and the courtroom have much in common in that they dispose of spatial positions with no recourse on the part of the preclear, and evaluate for him also on a thought level. Books can, say, "do the looking" for one. This is one of the best reasons why science stagnated and why science becomes increasingly complex instead of increasingly 442 simple. All the scientists are very busy looking in the books of other scientists instead of at the material universe and their own universes. To remedy this one can have the preclear get enormous stacks of books with the idea that they are looking for him. In the case of fiction, the books also feel and hear for the preclear; and more than one preclear's sonic is lost in the silence of the written word. In that a viewpoint does not only look but also perceives along other channels, it will be found that the preclear who has very little perception is actually expecting a totality of non-perception in the future. He believes that death is such a totality. He is holding on to incidents in the past which tell him that he will lose all perception in the future and this, in itself, shuts off his own perception. To remedy this, one should get in the future being deaf, being blind, being solidly stuck in coffins, and in general, having no viewpoint. Invalidation is basically non-attention. Attention itself is quite important, for attention is necessary before an effect can be created. Thus the attention of the preclear will be found to be fixed or dispersed and not entirely under his control, which would account for the phenomenon of occlusion. The preclear cannot unfix his attention from things which he expects to happen. The auditor actually shifts his attention by having these things happen in the future in mock-up form and in tremendous quantities. One need not be too particular to discover what the preclear is afraid will happen; one only need take various possible disasters, all of them summing to a loss of viewpoint. That thing which is most feared is that thing with which the preclear will close terminals. He actually creates those things which he fears. Viewpoint Processing can be combined, of course, with Certainty Processing. It will be found that Viewpoint Processing is very effective but that it does not even vaguely supplant observation. Certainty Processing and Viewpoint Processing should be used in conjunction with such a process as SSSA, using it between the six steps. It is, like all concept, postulate, matched or double terminal processing, a propitiation of the circuits. Now I have given you this rather expansive look at Viewpoint Processing so that you would understand what we are trying to do to run the computation amongst all computations, the center central of all thinking, which can be run on an occluded case. It is one thing to have, you must realize, the center of all thinkingness and quite another thing to have it in a form which can be run. I am giving you here following the form in which it can be run. The technique with which it is run is Viewpoint Processing. In other words, we have here three things in conjunction. We have the center centerness of all thinking; we have the form in which it can be run, which is to say, the words which express the thought which will run on the case, no matter how occluded that case is; and we have the technique with which it is run. These are three separate items. The center centralness of all thinking is, of course, change of position in space. If you recall your Axioms you will understand that this is known to us as time, it is also known to us as motion. A particle moves from one position to another position and this change requires a certain amount of what we arbitrarily call time. The change cannot take place instantaneously, otherwise the particle would be in both positions at the same time. 443 At the International Congress of Dianeticists and Scientologists ( September 30 -- October 4, 1953, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania), this matter of spatial position will be given at length and probably as you receive this will already have been given, in which event the tapes most likely will be in the possession of your nearest Associate. The change of position of spaces is an operation in which the preclear must be able; if he is not able to change the position of his own spaces, then he cannot change the position of his facsimiles. The inability to change these spaces means an inability to "keep up with time" and sticks the individual in the engram. The two most prevalent viewpoints to impress one with how bad something is are that one must change his position in space and that one must not change his position in space. Indeed, a communications system is dependent upon not changing one's position in space. Thus attention tends to fix one in space. The dwindling spiral of the MEST universe is the desire to remain fixed in space. This eventually immobilizes a person. Perception, action, doingness, sensation, sonic, hearing and even happiness depend upon an ability to change in space. Money, security and communications systems themselves tend tp fix a person in space. All this twist to thinkingness comes about from motion itself. An explosion is not enjoyable to the person in the center of it. Thus one attempts not to disperse, which is to say, change position all over space. An impact seeks to fix a person in space. People dramatize the dispersal by insisting that everyone move around in space, as in the case of an enthusiasm dramatization (which, by the way, most people bent on security do not like) or that, in the case of the impact, people stay where they are and not move. Because impacts are more common than explosions it could be said that the engrams dictate a dwindling spiral with greater and greater fixation upon being "well fixed," to use the colloquial term which best fits the master engram of them all. In the Axioms you saw where thought is preceded by motion. This is quite true. Obsessive thoughts are preceded by too much motion in too little time. This, indeed, produces the sensation of pain. Along with this we have, of course, the insistence that one must not change spaces. Here in the MEST universe we have only one space actually, but to have a time track one must continually make space. One confuses MEST universe space with his own ability to make and put space into the past and so becomes extremely tangled the moment he decides not to have a great deal of mobility. This is seen in the young man who gets married and has to "settle down." The 1.5 is obsessed with the idea of people staying in one place, remaining fixed, not moving. This, of course, is death. You have also noted the franticness which comes over some people when they have lost some material object. It has disappeared into space, which is to say, it cannot be located or it cannot be fixed in space, much less changed in its spatial position. It is then, without observation, evidently changing its spatial position. This is the action of a hidden influence and is quite frightening to the individual. All religion uses this fear in order to evaluate for people. With Viewpoint Processing, one mocks up hordes of spirits, gods, people declaring first that everything is lost in space, then that everything must be fixed in space, then that everything must be changed in space, then that the spaces must be changed and then that spaces must be fixed. One does this and intersperses it with minutes of nothingness; the last is necessary to run out the suppression the preclear has put on these viewpoints. One runs it as well in brackets. One has hordes of the preclear in various forms and aspects declaring that nothing can be found in space, that everything must be fixed in space, that everything must be changed in space, that spaces must be changed, that spaces must be fixed. 444 One does not bother with the reasons why the spaces must be changed; the body has lots of reasons for everything. They are entirely unimportant. The biggest bugaboo your preclear has is that he has to have a reason to do something. If he has enough reasons, he'll be good and dead. One does not, when he is running this process, permit the preclear to go wandering off and running people with other ideas than this simple one, change in space. Once in a while he will want to re-phrase the same idea and that is, of course, quite permissible. Getting two spots out in front of the occluded case which are saying, "Do not change in space" is quite effective and will quite likely produce considerable somatics of tiredness, for that is the main excuse for not changing in space: one is too tired to go. Your occluded case, then, breaks down to one of two kinds: one will get mockups which will persist and not go away, the other will get mock-ups which vanish instantly. The former is stuck in an impact engram, the latter is stuck in an explosion engram. The phenomenon of seeking to know is actually a search for a certainty. The greatest certainty is the certainty of impact. Thus, when one goes toward a great certainty without this knowledge and these techniques one tends to go downhill toward engrams which contain an impact and which, of course, remain more and more fixed in space. Thus you have the scholar who becomes more and more immobile and, indeed, you have that operation of the State known as "education" wherein the State delivers into the mind of the child in sixteen years of sitting still in classrooms knowledge which could be delivered in a compact form in two or three years at the most. It is, in short, a control operation. In running this, one will find the phenomenon of black and white turning up. If he is running lots of people with "must not change in space" and the field of vision remains black, then he should be running "must change in space," at which moment it will be seen that the field lights up. Sometimes "must change in space" and "must not change in space" alike do not light up the dark field; at this, one should run "lost in space" or "lost in the darkness," at which time the field will probably light up. This can be watched on the E-Meter. Whenever the field goes entirely dark the E-Meter sticks; in addition, the energy involved in the material is not running out when the needle is stuck. So long as the needle is gradually rising, the auditor can be sure that the field is fairly white before the preclear. When somatics flick on the needle, when it gives small jumps or sticks, it is time to reverse the concept When all concepts tend to make the needle stick, simply give the preclear in brackets a moment or nothingness until the needle is again free. We will call this Triple Process of the right button with the right phrasing with the right mechanical process "Change Processing" for further reference. If you cannot now finish off your occluded cases with a few hours of auditing, I disown all of you. This is the third of the series of the Professional Auditor's Bulletins which delineate techniques to assist the auditor's own case and to give him data he may use upon his preclears. Viewpoint Processing may be self-audited within reason if the individual thoroughly makes up his mind to use it as an intermediate step between the steps of 445 Process SSSA as delineated in PAB No. 7. Otherwise it will leave him wallowing in his circuits, not that this, for many an occluded auditor, would be anything new. Author's Note: This paper was written in Seville, Spain, in what the Spaniards laughingly call a civilization. They have electricity of varying voltages which is off for many hours of the day, water which only comes out of the faucets between eleven and one, a mailman who, surprisingly enough, delivers packets. Of course the castanets and beautiful nights make up for all this and nobody worries about anything and it all somehow gets done manana, but it doesn't particularly add to the quality of technical papers which get dictated, when there happens to be electricity, from notes which the maid overlooked destroying in her clean-up. Understand, then, that this paper is very informal. It is sent through to you now as it is because the information is three years overdue already. LRH 446  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 31 iDate=0/9/53 Volnum=0 Issue=9 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  FORMULA H    P.A.B. No. 9 PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN The Only Unbiased and Accurate Professional Publication in Dianetics and Scientology From L. RON HUBBARD Via Hubbard Communications Office 4 Marylebone High Street, London W.1 (1953, ca. early September) FORMULA H In early 1953 I developed Formula H as a basic resolution in terms of emotion and effort of insane impulses, neuroses, obsessions and compulsions. It is a limited technique. Formula H is the end development of Effort Processing, and is run with all the technology learned in Effort Processing itself. FORMULA H: THE EFFORT TO REACH AND WITHDRAW, TO GRASP AND LET GO OF ONESELF, OF OTHERS FOR THEMSELVES, OF ONESELF FOR OTHERS AND OTHERS FOR ONESELF AND OTHERS FOR OTHERS: FOR FORCE PERCEPTION AND ADMIRATION WHEN RUN RESOLVE THE TENACITY OF ENGRAMS. The first example of the use of Formula H would be applied to present time. One would ask the preclear to run the effort to reach and to withdraw into and from present time in terms of force, in terms of admiration and in terms of perception. He would run as well for force, admiration and perception the effort to grasp and the effort to let go. He would then run present time as an entity, reaching and withdrawing, grasping and letting go the preclear. He would find that there is a duplicity of effort wherein the preclear can run withdrawing while something else withdraws, reaching while something else withdraws, withdrawing while something else reaches, and reaching while something else reaches, grasping while something else grasps, grasping while something else lets go, letting go while something else grasps, letting go while something else lets go. This can be run in brackets, which is to say with the preclear doing it as though others were doing it and the preclear doing it for others doing it in regard to others. One could run this generally, which is to say without any specific object in contest with the preclear, and one could run it on pictures alone or on engrams alone if the preclear knows what an engram is. Of course, this is a limited technique. It can be run only until such time as the preclear's case is moving more easily. The technique can be run slowly or rapidly, which is to say, one can run the cycle and withdraw as fast as the preclear can think it or slowly. This would depend in large measure on the use of an E-Meter. The needle should keep rising while the preclear is reaching and withdrawing, but when it reaches a stop then the effort should be changed or reversed. 447 The use of Formula H is entirely an emergency measure. Formula H is not intended to clear anyone. It is intended to put a case in shape to run more easily. Immediately after Formula H is applied, Acceptance Level and SOP 8 can be applied. In other words, Formula H should not be continued indefinitely. The reason this technique should not be used indefinitely lies in the fact that after it has shaken the case loose, its continued use will bog the preclear down in some other part of the time track, for the use of the technique primarily is to shake the preclear loose from the time track. The emotion of insanity -- and indeed, there is an emotion of insanity -- is discovered in the preclear by having him run something withdrawing while he is reaching or something reaching while he is withdrawing. This is an actual emotion; such a case has insane impulses. This technique should find, bring to view and run out these impulses, for it is an intensely uncomfortable emotion. Reaching and withdrawing, grasping and letting go are the actions of theta itself. It does this with beams, particles and forms. Thus the formula exactly parallels theta operation, thus its effectiveness. But its continued use on the individual, the analytical mind or the thetan, the production energy unit, or whatever else you want to call it, in the body produces sufficient energy to shake loose engrams which might be better left untouched. Thus the limitation of its use. It will be found while using it that the emotion of insanity can be turned on or a manic state can be turned on in a case. These emotions will run out simply if the auditing session is continued a little longer. If these become very acute, however, turn to Step III of SOP 8 and have the preclear hold the two upper corners of the room. This will clear away these impulses. Commonly a preclear runs with this formula into a situation where, if he is a man, the sensation of a woman trying to eat him and a woman being white and himself black, in reversing the reaching and withdrawing, he finds himself trying to eat a woman, himself white and the woman black. This situation, when encountered, can simply be run one way and then the other way until all these impulses cease. Considerable sexual sensation will turn on during the running of this and they should not be left in restimulation. Formula H is called Formula H because the "H" stands for Hope. It can be used on a very difficult case if it does not immediately respond to auditing. Something can happen with sufficient drama and he can know he can get better. This gives to the auditor a tool which will produce relatively fast effects. It also gives the reassurance that the auditor can do something with this person which has not been done to this person before. Formula H can be self-audited because, of course, Formula H applies mostly to the body. But if so used, it should not be used very long and it should be used with Six Steps to Better Beingness (SSSA). RESOLUTION OF GEOGRAPHICAL AREAS It is quite important for the auditor to understand the nature of geographical areas in their role in aberration. As an example of this, let me tell you a story about a little dog on a ranch I once had which, indeed, is responsible for calling my attention to the fact that it is the location not the personnel that is at fault. This little dog was running down a quarter-of-a-mile-long road when a careless driver hit him with a front bumper. At the moment of impact the driver reacted with sufficient speed to keep the wheel from going over the dog. The driver did not see the dog had not gone under the car, and when he got out the dog was gone. Evidently it had run immediately after being struck into the brush beside the road. He was gone for three days and could not be found in the entire area although looked for. At the end of the three days he came back, running up the same road. When he came within 30 feet 448 of the spot where he had been hit, although no car was now standing there, he lit out into the brush and scouted the area, coming back on the road again well beyond the spot, thus avoiding the place in the road. On subsequent days the little dog, coming down this road came closer and closer to the area where he had been struck, each time noted it and avoided it. He had at the same time no fear of the car which had struck him and no fear of the motor of the car and no fear of the people who had been in the car. After about two weeks, he would walk all the way down the road without going into the brush. Each time he passed the geographical spot where he had been hit he lowered his head and looked frightened when he passed. There is no difference between this dog's reaction and the reaction of a man. In Book One you will find the mechanism of avoiding a restimulator. The person will not look at (as discovered in a hypnotic test) the thing which is motivating his action. If the signal he is being given in a post-hypnotic command is the hypnotist touching his tie, he will find fault with the room, with the hypnotist, with the hypnotist's clothes, but very rarely with the hypnotist's tie, the actual signal. This tells you, then, that man avoids geographical areas and will not look at them, and at the same time will say that he is not in that area because of people, because of incidents, because of many things. He has been injured in some geographical area. Pain and unconsciousness have taken place at some point on the globe, some city, some ocean, some altitude, some depth. Afterwards, he avoids such a point. In Para-Scientology, it has been established without any great certainty that man has been here in this universe for some time and that men have a great many recorded experiences much earlier in existence. It does not matter whether this is true or not; it does matter that men have geographical antipathies. They are avoiding many spots in their own home, around their own towns, around their own state, their own country, their own continent -- all over the world. This comes to a pass, finally, where a person is avoiding the entire world. Also in Para-Scientology we have turned up in many cases what the preclear claims is "space opera." The only thing that is very certain in each one of these cases is that the preclear so claiming actually avoids space. He avoids space just as the little dog avoided the point on the road. In other words, this person has been injured in space and because space is so difficult to locate and points in space are so difficult to establish, he begins to avoid all space and so we get the case which is hard packed all around with engrams. He is trying to be solid so as not to have any space. If we work this case on the Formula H given above as we discuss in a moment, we will discover that there are many points specific and exact in space in the vicinity of the solar system which the person is particularly antipathetic towards. He may or may not have an explanation for this but the point is he does avoid space and points in space. In view of the fact that the person who wants no space is avoiding the entire MEST universe and because any point in or the entire MEST universe can be a geographical area, we get what is this tremendous antipathy for the MEST universe on the part of preclears. This resolves by processing geographically all of the areas of which the auditor can think or read about from an atlas. Geographical processing is quite surprising in its results. It is done with Formula H. One gets the preclear's efforts to reach and withdraw from, to grasp and let go, various geographical areas; and gets the preclear getting others trying to reach and withdraw from, grasp and let go, the same geographical areas; and gets the geographical areas trying to withdraw from and reach, grasp and let go, the preclear; and gets the areas reaching and withdrawing from, grasping and letting go, others. The peculiar nostalgia generated by reason of a person's being raised in a certain area (which in its acute state is homesickness) is resolved by the use of Formula H on 449 the area of the childhood home. If one were to be processing children in a summer camp, he would find that many of these were suffering acutely from homesickness and could not enjoy themselves. If he would simply take a group of them and get them to reach and withdraw from home, he would possibly, through a bath of tears, restore the vitality of many who were ailing. Particularly for the case who is having difficulty with space, this is a recommended process. An example of its running follows:. Auditor: Get the effort to reach the place you lived when you were five. Preclear: Tries to recall place and cannot. Auditor: What part of the United States was it in? Preclear: Somewhere in the Midwest. Auditor: Try to reach the Midwest. Preclear: Does so. Auditor: Get trying to withdraw from some place in the Midwest. Preclear: Does so. Auditor: Now try to see (reach) some place in the Midwest. Preclear: Does so. Auditor: Now try not to see some place in the Midwest. Preclear: Does so. Auditor: Now try not to admire (withdraw from) a place in the Midwest. Preclear: Does so. Auditor: Now try getting to admire a place in the Midwest. Preclear: Does, remembers that it is Sioux Falls and achieves a visio on the area and develops at the same time a considerable body warmth which is uncomfortable. Auditor: Now gives the preclear the same as above, as though Sioux Falls were trying to reach and withdraw from the preclear. Then the auditor runs: Auditor: Get the effort to let go of Sioux Falls. Preclear: Does so. Auditor: Get the effort of Sioux Falls to let go of you. Preclear: Does so. Auditor: Get the effort of Sioux Falls not to look at you. Preclear: Does so. 450 Auditor: Get the effort of Sioux Falls to grasp you. Preclear: Does so, and suddenly finds himself engram-wise in a room having the measles. This is the hold on the track about Sioux Falls. Somatics become acute, warmth excessive. The preclear keeps saying that the sickroom alternates with the county jail. It suddenly develops that he was in quarantine during his illness and felt like a prisoner and has felt degraded ever since. The auditor now uses Acceptance Level Processing or Expanded Gita. As the former has not been covered, the latter will be illustrated. Auditor: Start mocking up lots of rooms full of measles. Preclear: Does so, and is astonished that they keep falling in on him. He does this and suddenly remembers how nice his mother was to him during the measles. Auditor: Gets the preclear to throw away rooms full of measles until the preclear can do so easily. Preclear: Fever has abated, engram has been run out. Auditor: Gives the preclear the effort to reach and withdraw from present time, and the effort of present time to reach and withdraw from the preclear until the preclear is very alert. End of Session. You will find that Formula H used in any combination is productive. If used in conjunction with geographical areas, it is extremely productive. It is recommended for all cases early in processing; it is not recommended for cases late in processing which are progressing satisfactorily. It is not recommended that Formula H be run longer than for two or three hours on a case except where the auditor has set out to process geographically the entire MEST universe. Processing the entire MEST universe and points in its space would be identical with the above illustration except that points in the MEST universe would be substituted for first the Midwest and then Sioux Falls as the "Sioux Falls" particular points showed up with the preclear. It cannot be too forcefully stated that the emotion called insanity is an actual emotion and is turned on and is run out by Formula H. It may or may not be good processing for an auditor to attempt to discover and locate this emotion of insanity on preclears who aren't neurotic or insane and so discharge it. This would depend entirely on the skill of the auditor. When the emotion of insanity is turned on in a preclear who is otherwise sane, it should simply be run out by Formula H. L. RON HUBBARD 451  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 81 iDate=4/9/53 Volnum=0 Issue=9 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Requested Report    From: L. RON HUBBARD Through: Hubbard Communications Office 4 Marylebone High St. London W.1, England ASSOCIATE NEWSLETTER NO. 9 4 September 1953 Requested Report All Associates of the Hubbard Association of Scientologists are requested to submit the following data to the HAS. The period covered for this data is from the time of beginning operation or from January 1, 1953, whichever is the earlier, to September 1, 1953. All data should be inclusive of January 1, 1953 and September 1, 1953 for all business. Those Associates who began business later than January 1, 1953 should report on their actual beginning of operations to September 1, 1953. NAME OF ASSOCIATE: CORRECT OPERATING ADDRESS: TOTAL NUMBER OF STUDENTS ENROLLED FOR ANY COURSE OF ANY KIND: TOTAL NUMBER OF STUDENTS GRADUATED TO HCA OR B.SCN: GROSS INCOME FROM TRAINING: TOTAL SUM (CALCULATED ON BASIC CONTRACT PERCENTAGE IN FORCE) OWING TO HAS:. WHAT PART OF SUM ALREADY PAID (LIST ALL PAYMENTS AND AGENCIES TO WHICH PAID): SUM NOW DUE AND OWING TO HAS AND ENCLOSED HEREWITH. ATTACH A COMPLETE LIST OF ALL STUDENTS ENROLLED WITH THEIR HOME ADDRESSES SO THAT THEY CAN BE PUT ON PAB AND JOURNAL LIST. Signature: ____________________________ (Director) RETURN THIS REPORT AND SUM OWING TO DATE IF ANY TO THE HUBBARD ASSOCIATION OF SCIENTOLOGISTS, 4 MARYLEBONE HIGH STREET, LONDON W. 1, ENGLAND. DO NOT PAY TO ANY OTHER ADDRESS OR AGENCY. As of this date, Associate Schools of the Hubbard Association of Scientologists will cease to receive gratis the Professional Auditor's Bulletin; Associate Schools and members of the staff of Associate Schools are requested to submit with a payment of $28 -- and $10 extra if airmail delivery is desired -- their application for professional membership as an organization or as individuals. Business done by some Associates is too slight to warrant further expense from this office, and free PAB service cannot be continued to such agencies. L. Ron Hubbard Copyright $c 1953 by L. Ron Hubbard. All Rights Reserved. 452  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 31 iDate=0/9/53 Volnum=0 Issue=10 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  CHANGE PROCESSING    P.A.B. No. 10 PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN From L. RON HUBBARD Via Hubbard Communications Office 163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11 (1953, ca. late September) CHANGE PROCESSING In Professional Auditor's Bulletin No. 8 we have a variation of Change Processing which utilizes the factors given in that PAB to excellent advantage. We find as a law that a person takes the opinion viewpoint of that person or thing which has most changed him in space. It will become apparent immediately that the reason soldiers will obey a sergeant's command to go forward into battle lies in their training in close order drill. This sergeant has placed them here and there on the drill field, has posted them on sentry duty -- in other words, fixed them in space -- and in general has altered their positions in space to such a degree that now the opinion of the sergeant that they should go forward even to certain death has much higher validity than the soldier's own opinion. We see as well that the mother, having carried the child in the womb, having carried the infant here and there, and the father, having carried the infant about and having changed the mother in space during gestation, both, then, have enormous opinion value for the individual. This is basic on the reason why the preclear is so anxious about his personal relations with his parents. This is also why he has obeyed his parents so implicitly or has had to fight so hard not to obey them. Because his parents have changed him in space, his parents evaluate for him. It will also be seen in a motor-happy society that machinery very soon begins to evaluate for the individual, for a car changes the person in space. Machine tools and large stationary engines fix a person in place. It is as much evaluation to fix a person in space as to change him in space, for, indeed, fixing a person is actually to make him do otherwise than he himself would do, so is, in effect, a change in space against the person's own self- determinism. As soon as we examine fixation in space, we are examining fixations on subjects. We have here, in a breath (but with a rather dirty trick beneath it which will be covered in a later PAB), the entire secret of education. They fix the student in space and thus can evaluate for him. This is doubly vicious as it also reduces the space of the individual. If you wish to see your preclear upset and dumbfounded, simply have him fit the corners of his kindergarten and early grade to the corners of the room in which he is being processed and keep duplicating these rooms, which is to say, fixing the old space in this new space, until he gets a good facsimile of his early school. Incidents where he was punished or degraded will immediately turn up. This is an investigatory rather than a therapeutic process, for it takes much too long. Of course there are two sides to moving things in space. It is a question whether the child moves the mother in space more than the mother moves the child in space. Of course, the child, being smaller, is apt to take the view that the mother is moving him 453 in space; yet the mother's actions are being monitored continually by the necessities of the child. In such a way there are two evaluations of an automobile. One is that an automobile is moving the person in space and the other is that the person is moving the automobile in space. The difference between these two viewpoints is self-competence. We are looking here at above 2.0 on the tone scale and below 2.0 on the tone scale. Above 2.0 the individual feels that he is moving the automobile in space; below 2.0 the individual is certain that the automobile is moving him in space. This is also the difference between happiness and unhappiness. A person is happy as long as he feels that he is the causative mover and is unhappy to the degree that he feels that he is the effect of something which moves him. Illustrative of this point is an airline pilot, one of the best on the Company payroll who, as long as he flew the airplane, was an excellent pilot. This individual at the end of his run would quite often "deadhead" to the city where he had his home. He would ride as a passenger, and it was a source of amusement over the entire airline that this crack pilot in the smoothest air would be airsick every time he was a passenger. In the first case, he was moving the airplane in space; in the second case, as a passenger, the airplane was moving him in space. Being moved in space by an airplane occasioned terror; moving the airplane in space occasioned happiness. During the constructive or active moments, the thetan is moving the body, but there are times when the body's necessities -- as in the case of urination and bowel movements -- move the thetan. Thus we find that the latter are quite aberrative in the individual. In the Pre-Logics we found that the prime function of theta was to locate or alter objects in space and time, and also to create space and time and objects to locate in them. So here we have viewpoints and the prime purpose of theta interlocking -- and discover that we have come on two roads to the same point. A method of running evaluation, particularly aberrative evaluation where the preclear has been surrounded by somewhat neurotic parents or marital partners, is a very simple one consisting of mocking up the parent and then, in mock-up, having the parent shift a mock-up of the preclear up in the air, down low, to the right, to the left, before and behind. One then repeats the process of having the mock-up of the preclear move the mock-up of the parent before and behind, to the right, to the left, above and below. One can even have the preclear simply mock up the parent and start moving the parent until he is certain that the parent can be moved. One has the preclear move the mock- up of the parent from before him to behind him, to his right, to his left, above him and below him. One does this with the parents, marital partners and working machinery, and also with vehicles. As soon as one starts Creative Processing to the end of convincing the preclear that he can change things in space, he begins to find quite ordinarily that the preclear will get visios of roads. The road, of course, is the one thing which constructively changes the preclear in space. There is, of course, a scarcity of roads, and one remedies this with Viewpoint Processing by having the preclear mock up a great many roads for himself, somebody else with roads for themselves, and others mocking up roads for others, until the scarcity of roads is remedied. The road is also aberrative because it threatens momentary impacts to those persons who have been in accidents. Automobile accidents are, then, excessively aberrative since they are a hold- motion and a fixation on something which is intended as a continuance of motion. One of the simplest ways to handle this latter situation is simply to run the engram of the accident or to mock up accidents until the preclear is surfeited with them (by this last, of course, I mean that one has the preclear mock up the accidents). One can also repeat this by having the preclear mock up the thetan moving the body as above and having the body moving the thetan. This last process is very 454 productive. One does it in brackets. One has the preclear mock up something which he calls the thetan and then has this move the body as in the case of the parents above. Then he has others being moved around by their thetans and thetans moving others around, and then others doing this for others. L. RON HUBBARD 455  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 81 iDate=0/9/53 Volnum=0 Issue=10 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  TECHNIQUE BULLETIN    From: L. RON HUBBARD Through: Hubbard Communications Office 4 Marylebone High St. London W. 1, England ASSOCIATE NEWSLETTER NO. 10 (1953, ca. late September) TECHNIQUE BULLETIN Cases which bog down in the process of auditing normally come up against the computation of the workability of techniques. People have consistently believed and disbelieved in a cycle that something would solve everything and, regardless of the workability of a technique, people continue to follow this cycle. The interruption of this cycle in any case -- and, I repeat, any case -- is extremely desirable. The cycle is interrupted by running on the preclear in brackets "The remedy is unworkable," "The technique is ineffective," "The solution will not apply," and so on, so as to cover techniques, cures, medicines, computations and systems of communication. The workability of any of these is under question, for the preclear has been often disappointed and betrayed. Thus, his case has a tendency to hang up. It will be discovered that the belief that something is workable is the beginning of the cycle with considerable space, and the belief that something is unworkable is the end of the cycle and is the equivalent of death. Death itself is a solution of sorts, but it is an unworkable solution and the preclear recognizes its unworkability. When unworkability is run in terms of brackets, as in Viewpoint Processing, it will be found that the space of the preclear narrows down to nothing. Running this in brackets is done by mocking up the people with the concept -- as many people as possible, each one with the same thought. The preclear mocks them up for himself, has another mock them up in thousands for himself, and has others mock them up in thousands; each one with the idea that the remedy is workable, and again with the idea that the remedy is unworkable. This can be specifically applied to Dianetics but is effective only when the person has long been in contact with Dianetics. We have, in Dianetics, a consistent change of technique, not because each one has proved unworkable, but because new techniques have shown up which were faster. However, to many dull people, this has given the appearance of change of technique because the last technique which was once considered so workable, is now considered unworkable. Thus we have consistently and continually run the cycle on these people and worn them out. If these people are to be renovated, running the change of technique as workable and unworkable on them in brackets as above, will remedy the condition. This is the center of the whole idea of hope, dreams, illusions and plans. What one is trying to do and what one is trying to solve is to get through time; in other words, to survive as long as possible. Modern medicine has begun to run this cycle with greater and greater rapidity. In Dianetics and Scientology, the continuing field of discovery has a different pattern. Techniques have gone through from entirely introspective techniques to conceptual techniques through direct energy handling techniques up to purely observational techniques. This is because Man does not want to look at something. Man always looks beside something. I refer your attention to Book I and the dissertation on the subject of the restimulator in the environment: people will not look at the restimulator but look, instead, at associative restimulators. We are actually finding how we can bring people up to a point where they will look at things. It is discovered that if they will 456 look at things directly, the threat of those things disappears. Actually, energy, directly observed, will dissolve. The only way the universe keeps going, really, is because nobody theta-wise looks directly at it. Thus we have gone from looking at the thing furthest from actuality that was still real -- the engram containing pain and unconsciousness -- up to staring straight in the teeth of the actual thing. Methods have been discovered by which this can be done, as you found in Six Steps of Self-Auditing. The concept in large masses "There must be no other cause" falls into the general category of the above and resolves as well the "I must be the only one" computation which inhibits so many people. The idea that there must be no other cause but himself comes about because any person can trace immediately back to the fact that his own decision started the concatenation of events which led to disaster. Going out for an automobile ride which concludes with an accident was done on the free decision of the individual; thus he traces his own decision to go for a ride as the prior cause which led to the accident. Thus he begins to conceive that only those things which he himself has desired or caused can at length affect him. He believes he can only be attacked by those monsters which he himself has created. He gets this idea from his early work in his own universe. This does not apply ih the MEST universe. The accident has, if the preclear desires to trace it, thousands of other causes. His fixation on being the only one is, of course, a self-protective measure, and is a defensive measure in the extreme. People who have the idea that they are the only ones who can be cause have actually been punished so hard and so much that they are extremely defensive. Their assumption of cause is assumption of self- responsibility for many things for which they have no reason whatsoever to assume responsibility. This is remedied by clarifying the scarcity of causes. The invention of God as represented for the MEST universe is an effort to fill all space with cause so that one will not then become the only one, for becoming the only one is an extremely fatal operation which goes down a fast dwindling spiral. One has to recognize that there are three universes. Thus, all things, including wasting, Acceptance Level processing and concepts, have to be run in brackets. Otherwise, one leaves out the idea of other causes. If one omits this from the processing of a preclear, he drives the preclear further and further and further into being the only one. Thus Dianetics, after 500 or 600 hours of auditing, reversed itself and began to do harm. For one reason, it had driven people into being the only one, and for the other reason, it had made engrams scarce by erasing them. 457  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 31 iDate=0/10/53 Volnum=0 Issue=11 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  WHAT THE THETAN IS TRYING TO DO    P.A.B. No. 11 PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN From L. RON HUBBARD Via Hubbard Communications Office 4 Marylebone High Street, London W.1 [1953, ca. early October] During these last many PABs, I trust that something has been happening to your own case. I am trying to bring it along on a self-auditing basis. All techniques I have been giving you since we started in these sessions can be self-audited. You will find, however, as you self-audit things, that a very basic law is at work. This law consists of THE ENTIRE PROCESS OF THOUGHT IS AN EFFORT TO OBSERVE SOMETHING WITHOUT LOOKING AT IT. You will find yourself, if you self- audit, dramatizing this by preferring those techniques which deal with thoughts and concepts rather than those techniques which specialize in looking. Thus, I dare say, you will have avoided doing the Six Steps to Better Beingness and will probably have done Viewpoint Processing in preference. Let me assure you, however, that the Six Steps to Better Beingness are on a higher level than any process which merely processes thoughts. There is another law involved which explains this matter of not wanting to look which we will take up in PAB No. 12. In this present PAB we will set forth what the thetan is trying to do. WHAT THE THETAN IS TRYING TO DO With all the books of philosophers before you, with all the religions of the world to consult, with all the closest scrutiny of Man and his involved behavior, it would still be difficult to guess what the thetan is actually trying to do. Indeed, one would be more prone to believe that the thetan is entirely idle and is not trying to do anything; for, such is the complexity of behavior resulting from the extreme simplicity of the original effort that the entire activity is lost in a maze of complexity. The thetan is trying to do something very simple: he is trying to put up mock-ups of his own; that is really all he is trying to do. But in order to do this, he comes in conflict with other thetans and he finds that his effort is complicated to the degree that these thetans, putting mock-ups in front of him, seek to obstruct him, even when they only want these mock-ups admired. Thus the thetan's activity enters its second step, which is to nullify or divert mock-ups placed before him, which is to say his viewpoint, by other thetans. As soon as he enters this activity of trying to destroy or divert mock- ups placed before him, he runs into the first levels of subterfuge. These consist of the various emotions by which people seek to convince him that his activities in shunting their mock-ups aside are very bad. Of course he himself has begun this subterfuge in trying to put up mock-ups of his own. He is trying to convince others that when they destroy his mock-ups, they are doing something very vicious and wicked to him. After a few failures in getting mock-ups of his own which persist and failures in destroying or diverting mock-ups which are thrust in front of his face, he conceives the idea of being multiple. He becomes more than one viewpoint or he teams up with other 461 thetans and these, together then, seek to put up mock-ups which persist. These are fought back against by other groups of thetans and so on up the dynamics. This, in effect, is the basic game all of us are playing. This is adequately proven out by processing. The field of least certainty is the observation of what others are trying to do to others. This, then, becomes aberrative. One doesn't quite know what the rest of the world is doing or thinking. And this becomes complicated because others pretend to be the friend of the thetan, only to betray him. As soon as this occurs he begins to watch very closely the behavior of other thetans' mock-ups in order to gauge what is happening to them so as to prevent things from happening to himself. With these three things -- the thetan trying to put up mock-ups of his own which persist, trying to divert the mock-ups of others, and trying to observe what others are doing to others -- we have what we call a "bracket" in Scientology. The processing of this activity is of the simplest kind. You will find, even on an occluded case, that there is a zone beyond the occlusion where the preclear can put up a mock-up. The worst cases will not be able to see it, but they will know that they have put a mock-up out there. In view of the fact that the basic impulse of the thetan is simply to put a mock-up out there which will move and which will persist, we have as our most certain -- if by far not our shortest process -- that one given in Self Analysis in Scientology. One simply has the preclear go on putting mock-ups out there until the preclear at length can put them up in excellent order and condition. One can enter this in a little more complex vein and have the preclear receiving before him mock-ups which "others" have put up and destroying these mock-ups. It will be found at first that the preclear has a very hard time destroying mock-ups which so appear before him, even though he himself is putting them there for others. After a while he will be able to divert and destroy these mock-ups at will and his tone will improve as a result. No matter how much complexity may enter into this, no matter how many lines of thought, how many values of knowledge or evaluations occur, at any given instant the basic impulse of the individual is to create something and maintain it while preventing the mock-ups or creations of others from interfering with his activity. The best test of this process is its workability and it is found that the process is extremely workable. Very few auditors have the patience to sit through a couple of hundred hours of Self Analysis in Scientology. They are prone to assign it as homework or to avoid it. However, remember it is the very best process which we have, for it exactly parallels what the thetan is trying to do. As the auditor processes this on the preclear, the preclear will begin to notice various things, which is to say he will put up three mock-ups, one after the other, and will find that the third mock-up is much weaker than the first one he put up. This is because he believes that the first two have been destroyed and thus his impulse to put up a mock-up is lessening. One alters this simply by having him put up more mock-ups. Additionally, this process feeds energy into an energy-starved bank. By using this process in company with the other five steps of Six Steps to Better Beingness and with SOP 8, results are enormously speeded. But remember, whatever else you know, you would be able to make clears simply if you persisted with the process given herein and which is detailed at some length in Self Analysis in Scientology. Perhaps with this understanding and evaluation of what the thetan is trying to do, you may care to go more deeply into this, even on your own case, to using Self Analysis half an hour a day. 462 IMPORTANT ADVANCE Change Step 6 (Opposite Poles) of SSSA to be done as follows: Get a point before, above, etc. the preclear to say "You will be ridiculed" and have the preclear say "Nothing there." Then have the preclear say to a point as before "You will be ridiculed" and have the point say "Nothing there." In "Wearing Heads" have the preclear put on various heads and have others take them off and hold them away. Then have the preclear take various heads off (mock-up) people and have him hold them away. The reason for this change is my observation that everyone suffers from contracted space. This inferred that they were most afraid of expanded space. Expanded space (held out anchor points by others) gives the emotion of ridicule and this change when I tested it on preclears brought the highest tone rise observed for a single quick process. People are afraid of ridicule -- they prefer the serious attitude of betrayal. Ridicule includes scorn. This technique can be employed using brackets and all pronouns. L. RON HUBBARD 463  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 101 iDate=0/10/53 Volnum=0 Issue=21 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  The Theory of Communication    THE JOURNAL OF SCIENTOLOGY Issue 21-G [1953, ca. late October] Published by The Hubbard Association of Scientologists, Inc. Philadelphia, Pennsylvania The Theory of Communication L. Ron Hubbard As we have gone forward in Dianetics and Scientology, we have come into possession of more and more significant evaluations of the interrelated factors of life. One of the simplest and yet one of the most significant emergences has been the factor of communications as the most important single factor in the trianglee of Affinity-Reality-Communication. This ARC trianglee, when I formulated it in Elizabeth in the early summer of 1950, resolved a great many things for auditors, but for the following three years much discussion ensued on the nature of the trianglee itself. Generally, though, acceptance of it was swift and glad, for with its use came an understanding of human behavior, and with that trianglee the tone scale itself, as it appeared in Science of Survival, was born. The earliest tone scale is in Book One, and is the first chart in that book. Communication did not certainly emerge as a more important factor than either Affinity or Reality until the inclusion in the science of new data concerning the physical universe. It then became apparent that communication was, in essence, the shift of a particle from one part of space to another part of space. In its crudest definition, this is communication. It does not matter whether the communication particle is a bullet, a word, a thought or a light particle. It is still communication if it travels from one part of space to another. Not even terminals are necessary in order to establish the existence of a communication, but in the accepted sense of the word, communication is something which emanates from one terminal and travels through space to arrive at another terminal. To achieve a full understanding of how communication is important, one need only do a very simple exercise to discover that almost any process involving itself with communication is powerfully effective on the mind. If one seats himself in one of two chairs which are set facing each other, and looks at the other empty chair, and then gets up and sits down in the other empty chair, then rises and sits in the first empty chair, then goes and sits in the second empty chair, he will realize that something can happen with this technique, even though no words are spoken and no thoughts thought. In the most accepted sense of the word, communication expects a return. In other words, a particle going from Point A in space to Point B in space is expected, if Life has anything to do with it, to then of itself, or with an approximation of it, go from Point B back to A again. A complete communication cycle is from Point A in space to Point B, and Point B back to Point A. In order to demonstrate the degree to which this affects human behavior, one need only perform another simple technique. One takes two chairs, sitting some few feet apart, facing each other. He sits down in one of the chairs and looks at the empty chair and says, "Why don't you answer?" He says this aloud to the empty chair. He then gets up and sits down in the empty chair and faces the chair he just vacated and refuses to answer. He gets up again and returns to the first chair, sits down, and says, "You must answer me." He then removes 464 himself to the second chair, then actually looks at the first chair, then says, "All right. What do you want to know?" He then gets up out of the second chair and goes to the first chair and says, "Are you all right?" He then removes himself to the second chair and says, "Yes, I am all right." He will experience full relief if he does this. Almost any computation of this chair act can be worked out, but the one having to do with answering is the most effective. This explains to you why a communication lag on the part of another person can be transferred as an aberration. We discover, then, that the most basic communication is one which does not have any reason connected with it. It is simply the interchange of a particle from one space to another space, and, preferably, the return of that particle, or a particle like it, to the first position in space. Any communication is an anchor point. In order to understand the significance of an anchor point, one only has to realize the actual definition of space. For many centuries, in fact, during all of written history, man has not had an accurate, workable, definition of space. This omission is extremely peculiar, because he lives and exists continually in space. Of course, he really avoids space. He would much rather look at a person who is occupying a space, than the space surrounding the person. He is avoiding space to such a degree that he is always trying to work toward something, and is never trying to work toward the gain of nothing, except during some low-toned activity like war. You can readily establish for yourself the correctness of this definition of space. Space is the viewpoint of dimension. In the earlier editions of the Encyclopedia Britannica, one discovers under the heading of "Time and Space" a long article which says bluntly that time and space are matters of psychology, not matters of physics. They must be resolved in the field of the human mind before they can be resolved by the physicists. This proves to be true, for with the introduction of space as a viewpoint of dimension, not only human behavior, but many intricate and complex problems in physics fall apart. Like all things worth knowing, this definition is idiotically simple, but tremendously workable. It is workable to the degree that its direct application in processing can produce, with no other aid, a clear. The first application of this definition in the theory of processing is to have the preclear sit in a chair and from "inside himself' reach out to the two upper corners of the room behind him and simply hold on to those corners, without thinking. If he does this for a long period of time, he will simply become better and better. He may have some bad periods while he does this, but nevertheless the technique inevitably results in a better condition. If just this technique and no other technique were used this person, at the end of perhaps fifty or eighty hours, would be in good physical and mental condition, if not a Theta clear. In this technique we are putting theory directly into practice. More and more, we are beginning to use these two things as identities. Theory is practice, and that auditor or that instructor who is trying to separate theory from practice is missing a great deal in the science, and is not getting too good results in his practicing. In essence, holding on to two corners of the room is making space, but again, this is maintaining a condition of communication. One has an anchor point of his own up in each of the two back corners of the room. One can just as well hold all eight corners of the room with an anchor point of his own and his eyes closed. However, this technique is often too vigorous for a preclear. He can also do a total spacation, which is to say, perform Step III of SOP-8. When we understand that communication is a fundamental, and is a first action of space, as well as the first action which takes place in space, we can advance our processing markedly. In the first place, we have an immediate index as to how aberrated our preclear may be. Preclears are aberrated if they have a communication lag. They have a communication lag as long as they have no space. In other words, communication lag is inverse to the amount of space a person has. This may sound very technical, but it is only as technical as you care to make it. There is nothing simpler than sitting down and making with eight points a cube of space, and then moving a 465 particle, which you have created, from one point to another point inside the space you have created. In this way, it is possible to understand both space and communication. Affinity and Reality have taken secondary roles because they are dealing with nothing more than the particle pattern or the number of viewpoints which agree upon the particle pattern. The pattern or velocity of the particle creates the degree of affinity, whether emotion or effort, and the reality depends upon the number of viewpoints which are in agreement upon the pattern of the particle. In both affinity and reality it can be traced that these are secondary to the condition of the existence of a particle and its change in space. In working Standard Operating Procedure 8 (as given in Issue 16-G of the Journal) one does not have in the seven steps an immediate index of the sanity of the individual. These are steps relating to techniques used at various levels of difficulty with techniques. These are not necessarily an indication of the sanity of a person, even though Number VII is marked "Psychotic" and Number VI "Neurotic." VII and VI are so marked only to direct -the auditor's attention to the fact that these two techniques are so good that they can be used on any level of case and that he should not use other techniques on psychotic or neurotic people. These definitions of the steps are not to be construed by a preclear, if they are used upon him, to mean that he is psychotic. In order to have a theory of evaluation of cases which matches with the seven steps of SOP-8, it is necessary to move the preclear out of the seven steps and into a step gradient we could call A, B, C, D, E, F, G. This step gradient would be the gradient scale of the communication lag of the preclear. This is a direct index of sanity. A, which compares to Step I, would be an almost instantaneous response, and G, at the other end of the gradient scale, would be a lag so long that it did not return. In other words, this is a communication-return index. In using SOP-8, if one exteriorizes an individual by using Step III, he often finds that the individual's communication speeds up markedly or slows down. If he is to continue the practice on the preclear while the preclear is exteriorized, then it is necessary for him to re-evaluate the preclear. If the preclear remains at the same communication speed as before being exteriorized, the auditor simply goes on using the same step level which exteriorized the preclear. However, if the communication level of the preclear speeded up markedly, then the auditor shifts from the step which he used to exteriorize the preclear to a higher, faster motion step. If the preclear's communication lag became greater when exteriorized, then the auditor moves over into the ABCDEFG scale, locates his communication lag, and moves back into SOP-8, using a lower level step such as VI or VII on the preclear, after the preclear has been exteriorized. As communication is the single most important factor today in processing itself, the auditor will do well to regard it as such. 466  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 31 iDate=0/10/53 Volnum=0 Issue=12 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  THE CYCLE OF ACTION OF AN EXPLOSION    P.A.B. No. 12 PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN From L. RON HUBBARD Via Hubbard Communications Office 163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11 [1953, ca. late October] THE CYCLE OF ACTION OF AN EXPLOSION The role which an explosion plays in Scientology processing is as spectacular as the explosion itself. To experience the impact of an atomic bomb, it is not necessary to know the mechanics of nuclear fission. Just so, a preclear need not know the Scientology mechanics of the explosion and its role in experience to benefit from the process. An auditor, however, should understand the mechanics underlying explosions in order to use the process to its fullest extent. That thing which most closely approximates life itself in the material universe is the explosion. It changes things in space; it disorganizes MEST; it puts out particles from an apparent viewpoint; it alters compounds; and it has closely following its beginning a mirror effect, which is to say, that if one could stop an explosion in its flight, he would find that its center was sufficiently smooth to act as a mirror. It is, then, extremely simple for theta to identify itself with an explosion; and theta has done this to such an extent that science itself, at least at this writing, subscribes widely to the theory that life originates solely from the interactivity of chemical compounds. It could be said that the explosion itself is the basis for this mis-identification. The cycle of action of life in the MEST universe is the cycle of action of an explosion. In the first book on Dianetics you will find repeated the ancient Vedic formula that things are born, grow, decay and die. I have expanded this to include the end action. First there is nothing; then there is a something; the something increases, then decreases; and again there is nothing. Thus you have a complete basic cycle of action. There is a process known as Cycle of Action Processing wherein the preclear with creative mock-ups completes the cycles which he has begun and which he has not ended. It will be found that the preclear is trying to complete cycles of action begun often at some long forgotten time, and this accounts for some of the goals which he is rationally or irrationally attempting. The basic cycle of action of life itself in this universe is the cycle of action of an explosion. While this is not true of all universes, it applies very firmly to the MEST universe. Life has attempted since its inception to approximate things in this universe so as to effect a conquest of the MEST universe. That thing in the universe most like life is the explosion, and life, therefore, in this universe follows the cycle of the explosion. This will become adequately apparent in processing and upon further examination. An explosion begins with nothing, grows, recedes and at its end there is again nothing. Here we have the desire-enforcement-inhibition cycle and here, indeed, we 467 have the pattern of all the cycles mentioned in the doctorate lectures and the book Scientology 8-8008. It should be remarked that an explosion here is meant to include all varieties of impact including implosions and impacts themselves. Cellular life runs on a motor basis and very tiny explosions provide the heat necessary to run the cellular motors. In other words, life has used the explosion as the pattern of the motors which it builds both in the body and in engines such as those used in vehicles. Thus we have the interesting fact that an inability on the part of the individual to tolerate explosions or their symbols, such as noise, is reflected in a repression of the actual operation of the carbon-oxygen low-heat engine which the human body is. The overall life cycle of an individual in one lifetime approximates the explosion very closely. There is an apparent nothing; then there is something, and the something brightly expands up to its limit of expansion; then darkens, recedes and vanishes. Here we have pre-conception, birth, youth and, at the end of youth, the darkening period which continues on until death, at which time nothing is again present. It should be closely noted that an explosion follows this cycle. There is nothing; then there is a point of intense light which, expanding, becomes larger but less brilliant; and at the limit of expansion, ceases to be bright, turns dark and dwindles. The particles which make up the explosion, even in its moments of intense brightness, turn black after the recession point is entered. You as an auditor should be intensely interested in this, for this is occlusion. The preclear is fixed in an engram -- of what age we care not -- where he is confronting the dark particles which have been formerly bright. Just as one is not hurt ordinarily by the immediate glare and blast of an explosion so one is not hurt by the energy of youth. But this receding, as in the case of an explosion, seems to leave one in the midst of the particles which have been crushed against him by the blast and which particles are painful. In any effort to run the blackness which surrounds a thoroughly occluded preclear, both the E-Meter and the preclear remark the pain which attends any shifting of that blackness. Similarly an individual who had been caught in an explosive blast would be caked with dark particles which, when disturbed, would give him intense pain. The explosion is apparently a very definite basis in all engrams and, for our purposes here, can be considered to be basic-basic. And it could be remarked with this PAB that basic-basic for all cases has been discovered and is being delivered into your hands to be run. How does one run basic-basic? The process is intensely effective but is extremely simple and is even apt to be slightly monotonous. Thus the running of basic-basic is accompanied by inserting this process as a between-step in each of the Six Steps to Self-Auditing. One would run Step I of SSSA; would then run the cycle of the explosion as given here; would then run Step II of SSSA; would then run the cycle of explosion as given here; would then run Step III of SSSA; and so on. At each address to the problem of running the explosion, about five minutes would be devoted to auditing it, before one went on to the next step of SSSA. He would do that step of SSSA and would then devote another five minutes to the running of the cycle of the explosion. By doing this he would maintain the interest of the preclear and would markedly advance the case. There is no reason why the cycle of the explosion cannot be self-audited by one trained in Scientology. The cycle of the explosion is audited in brackets. This is to say that one has the preclear run the cycle as happening to himself several times, then run it as though someone else were running it and run the cycle that way several times, and then run 468 the cycle for others confronting others. There is a mirror effect running the cycle of the explosion which gives some therapeutic value to having the bracket repeated as though the preclear were sitting about twenty yards in front of himself and doing it there, which is to say the preclear would be far in front of himself, putting it up for himself, having others put it up for others, and then others putting it up for himself; and then the preclear, where he is, would put it up for himself, would have another put it up for himself, and have others put the cycle up for themselves. What exactly is the cycle of the explosion? One gets the preclear to get nothingness, then a growing expansive whiteness, then turn the whiteness black, have the black dwindle and get nothingness again. You will readily see the similarity of this to Black-and-White Processing and, indeed, this is the furthest extension of Black-and-White Processing, but is many times more effective and useful. In a case which has a direction reversal (confuses left and right) one should run the cycle backwards, having the preclear get first nothingness then blackness, then whiteness, then nothingness. This runs out regret. When a case has a weak heart or is chronically ill, one should be careful to run this cycle lightly and on such things as the chronic somatic only, or on words coming from the preclear's mouth (in brackets), getting the words absent, then black, then white, then absent. At any event, be careful of a case that is very ill. On such a case perhaps SSSA or SOP 8 (omitting Step IV) would be best. This cycle, forward or backwards, used in brackets, betters chronic somatics well enough to prevent their return -- an important gain, for chronic somatics sometimes return when audited with older techniques. In PAB No. 8 you saw that masses of mock-ups could be run in brackets, and that the most important of these were changes in space. The explosion is the most forceful change in space. Thus from the high echelon mechanic of theta's purpose in changing things in space, one can go immediately into the first pattern theta uses in the MEST universe, which is the explosion, and he can run this in brackets. Remember to do the cycle of the explosion exactly as given. Nothingness, then growing whiteness, then the whiteness turning black, the black receding and nothingness again. It does not matter how poorly the preclear runs this. It does not matter if his nearest approach to whiteness is simply the idea that something might be white if he could see it. The cycle is run without effort, which is to say one does not permit the preclear to strain and use effort while running the cycle of the explosion. One can expect an occasional electrical discharge, but if the cycle of the explosion is run in brackets and in masses, this discharge will be minimal. It should be remembered that you are not trying to run out basic- basic, you are trying to feed an enormous hunger. In other words, you are trying to feed enough explosions into the bank to satiate the scarcity of explosions. Any and all thinkingness, reasoningness, moralness and ethicalness is derived from the cycle of the explosion. This becomes immediately apparent for, while running the cycle of the explosion on circuit cases, it will be found that they tend to philosophize considerably. This should be ignored. But, for the interest of the auditor, it should be noted that all moralness and ethicalness are directed towards minimization of the wild uses of explosions. Things are right or wrong connected with explosions depending upon whether or not the explosion favors or disfavors oneself or one's group. 469 Certainty is knowledge. Knowledge is basically an impact. After a sharp impact, it will be found that a person believes himself to be possessed of knowledge. When this is coupled with anaesthesia -- which is to say, when a patient is anaesthetized and given a sharp and terrible explosion such as that occasioned by the stab of a surgical knife or the yank at a tooth -- he will awake from the operation in the confusion of something-nothingness and be certain that there is knowledge for him to discover. After the brightness of an explosive blast, people wonder about the significance of the blast. The most uninformative thing there is is darkness. Darkness is greatly intensified in its blackness after a bright explosion has appeared. Thus, all the times one has looked into darkness and wondered whether or not something was there are, so to speak, collected together into this great wonder about the significance. The blackness is a concern about "What is the significance of it?" As an investigatory process but not for the purposes of therapeutic processing, one can have an occluded preclear simply run in brackets "What is the significance of it?" and he will find the preclear quite taken with the process, for the preclear is trying to do just this: he is trying to discover the significance of the blackness. This simplicity brings upon us a very grim jest. Soldiers, after an explosive war, are deeply concerned with the significance of it all. Men, after operations or bad accidents, are quite often concerned with the significance of things. But, much more important than this, the entire field of learning is today dramatizing the significance of blackness. The jest is terrible, when one realizes how he has been betrayed by education. Print is in black, the page is white. In order to read, one has to put forth an effort to suppress the whiteness of the page. This keys in gradually the suppression of the brightness of an explosion, a thing which is automatic, and which is succeeded by darkness. The black letters apparently contain knowledge -- and actually often do -- but they lead the poor student deeper and deeper into "What is the significance?" And the more he studies, the less he knows, until he is left at length in a complete mystery of darkness. You can run this just to see how it is, not for therapeutic value, and find that Effort Processing on reading will bring out letters on pages. One lets the blackness come through, one suppresses the whiteness of the page. Further, in that the scholar is seeking more knowledge, and in that the knowledge is written in blackness, the scholar is led to suppress the whiteness of the page consistently until he is suppressing all whitenesses. This makes him suppress the whiteness on the cycle of an explosion and thus moves him on the time track past the peak of youth long before his time. The continuous suppression of whiteness retards the metabolism of the body and reduces energy. Educators uniformly dramatize the cycle of the explosion, of course, for their field is thought, and the first thought consists of energy particles not of concepts. Thus the processing of concepts on an occluded case does not resolve occlusion. Processes which utilize and multiply energy are far superior to and infinitely more effective than processes which look for postulates or concepts. And, mentioning education brings one to the most terrible thing which can happen to the thetan. This is to have a guarantee of no explosions. Once the thetan cannot have, either by manufacture or acquirement, explosions or facsimiles of explosions, he is finished. Prison is so terrible merely because it denies the thetan explosions. The interim after death is terrible to the thetan because it is without explosions. Education as done on the public school system guarantees long periods in cubicles which contain no explosions; and education free from the printed page for long years in cube space is easily the most destructive and effective method of destroying the vitality of a race and the initiative and energy of those who should be its leaders and is, to say the least, rather typical of the MEST universe. This is the seventh of the series on self-auditing the auditor's own case. These steps, of course, apply equally to the auditing of preclears. Our task at the moment, 470 however, is to bring about as high a state of case as we can in all of our auditors. Not long ago an auditor in an area where many early auditors had practiced told me that the certificate was degraded in that area. This is not surprising if these auditors have not followed through with processes and have not given their own cases attention; but it is surprising that the auditor who wrote me has not taken over the responsibility of remedying this situation, for this auditor is quite well trained in Scientology. It would be extremely simple to discover the HDAs and HCAs in one's own area and bring them together for the purposes of mutual betterment and use on them Short 8, Six Steps to Self-Auditing on a group level and, on those cases which are particularly occluded, cycles of explosions with SSSA. This would at once establish a better reality on the part of any auditor who has slipped away and would give him some of the benefit for which he hoped when he studied Dianetics. In fact, I cannot conceive a man being interested in Dianetics and Scientology and knowing these techniques and knowing as well that in his area there are people who have not utilized their training and yet who would not gather these people together -- with a blackjack if necessary -- and see that they receive group auditing. If one does not like to have himself compared unfavorably with an inexpert auditor who is yet practicing, then the thing to do is to bring up the case level of the inexpert auditor and to give him at least the rote procedure to use on preclears of SSSA. Auditors have been quite confused here and there in the past because they got their techniques and news of new techniques by rumor and because they did not possess the insight to see that all of this work is of a piece and that the goals we are now attempting are simply higher goals than those we first attempted and yet, though higher, more easily attained. But it would be very difficult for an auditor to fail to understand all the uses involved in Six Steps to Better Beingness (PAB No. 7) and to use these steps with success. He would only have to know this much and he would have well cases. There is no slightest excuse today for an auditor not to get rapid results with Scientology. Because I continue to put out techniques is no reason that old techniques do not work. These new techniques are developed and codified out of experience in auditing by myself. They do the work faster. I am even getting complaints from auditors that some of these processes work so rapidly that after a one- or two-hour session the preclears are so well they never come back for a second session. I cannot see how this would be hard on an auditor's pocketbook unless the auditor had not applied the techniques to himself and was unable to go out and dig up preclears. There are today on earth in excess of two billion human beings. In that active auditors number about a thousand, this would seem to give one auditor a fairly good-sized practice. I myself doubt that I could audit more than two or three million people a year and still keep up with my hobbies. So I feel very sorry about these techniques working so fast and ruining people's practices. (The auditor who wrote me the above should receive all this as humor, not criticism.) L. RON HUBBARD 471  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 0 iDate=28/10/53 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  STEP III AUDITING COMMANDS    HUBBARD ASSOCIATION 726 Cooper Street Camden 2, New Jersey October 28, 1953 STEP III AUDITING COMMANDS The preclear is not supposed to think of anything while he is doing this process. If he thinks of something do not stop him from thinking of it in such a way as to cut communications with him as a preclear, but let him know that this is part of the process. 1. Put eight anchor points around yourself, for yourself (if case is occluded have him put eight black anchor points around himself). 2. Have somebody else put eight anchor points around himself. 3. Have other people put up eight anchor points for other people, with you in the space. 4. Have other people put up eight anchor points for other people, with somebody else in the space. 5. Have somebody else put up eight anchor points for you. 6. You put up eight anchor points for somebody else. 7. From where you are hold on to the eight corners of the room. 8. Have somebody else hold on to the eight corners of the room. 9. Have other people hold on to the eight corners of the room for other people. 10. Have somebody hold on to the eight corners of the room fur you. 11. You hold on to the eight corners of the room for somebody else. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:-rd Copyright $c 1953 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 472  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 31 iDate=0/11/53 Volnum=0 Issue=13 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  ON HUMAN BEHAVIOR    P.A.B. No. 13 PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN From L. RON HUBBARD Via Hubbard Communications Office 163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11 [1953, ca. mid-November] ON HUMAN BEHAVIOR It greatly facilitates the work of the auditor to know the most aberrated and most aberrative types of personality. Kraepelin in Germany a long time ago made a long and varied psychotic classification. This has been refined and made, if anything, even more unwieldy in modern times. It is valueless since it does not lead to the immediate remedy of the situation. Further, we are not very interested in types. There is really no such thing as a special type of psychosis or neurosis, beyond those types which are quite aberrative around the preclear. If we could isolate a particular set of traits as being the most aberrative traits, we could more quickly process the preclear by using Acceptance Level Processing or Viewpoint Processing on such people. Probably the truly aberrative personalities in our society do not number more than five or ten percent. They have very special traits. Where you find in the preclear's bank a person with one or more of these characteristics, you will have the person who most thoroughly tried the preclear's sanity. What we will call the aberrative personality does the following things: 1. Everything bad that happened to the preclear was (a) ridiculous, (b) unimportant, (c) deserved. 2. Everything the preclear and others did to the aberrative person was (a) very important, (b) very bad, (c) irremediable. 3. Those things which the preclear could do (a) were without real value, (b) were done better by the aberrative personality or by others. 4. Sexual restraint or perversion. 5. Inhibition of eating. Such people would be better understood if I called them the "merchants of fear." The most degraded control operation of which the GE is capable is utilized by these people for their sole method of getting on in the world. They have lost all ability themselves to create, they cannot work themselves, they must either amass money which is never to be spent or must prevent others from amassing money. They produce nothing, they must steal one way or another, and then devaluate whatever they obtain. They speak very sternly of honesty or ethics and put on a formidable front of complete 473 legality. They are impartial, which is to say they are incapable of decision but ride continually a maybe. They close terminals easily with courts, for courts are, sad to say, more or less of this disposition themselves. They feel called upon at no pretext to become adjudicative on subjects where their opinion has not been invited. Probably a society could be cleared and allowed to bloom if these people were simply rounded up and removed from contagion with the remaining populace, for they are not numerous. Yet they are in sufficient number that it is doubtful if your preclears who are more seriously badly off have not had at least one in their past. It is particularly true of the occluded case that he has been victimized by one of these "merchants of fear." Although there are many characteristics which are undesirable in such aberrative people, it is remarkable that only those listed above are aberrative. These wind sinuously as a threatening thread through all of their conversations. Such people are a mixture of paradoxes to the observer who does not understand the basic ingredients of human character. Such people are themselves a continuous maybe and therefore will be found very easily in the bank, for they appear most often. Where you find one, two or three people appearing almost continuously in the preclear's bank, or his lamenting conversation, you will find that these people answer the above- numbered characteristics. The method of processing these people is to have the preclear mock them up in large masses with the certainty that they are there, and then, with them unmocked, with the certainty they are not there. Then, mocked up again, with the certainty that they will be in the future, and, unmocked, with the certainty they will not be in the future. One also runs the above concepts in masses and in brackets. A case cannot be said to be well so long as these aberrative personalities continue to reappear in his thoughts and processing. Therefore the auditor will find it extremely profitable to use all available means to process these people out of the preclear's bank. When the auditor has succeeded in doing this, he will find that the preclear now believes himself to be very much better than before and, indeed, he will be. It should be remembered that such people have invited many overt acts. The "merchants of fear" specialize in being offended themselves and, even though the overt acts against them are slight, these have become magnified in the preclear's bank until such people, on the overt act phenomenon alone, occupy a major role in the preclear's thinking. It will often be discovered by the auditor that the preclear has "swapped terminals" with these aberrative persons. The weight of aberration is such that the preclear has been swung into the valence of such people, for they have obviously won. The truth of the matter is: such people never win. If one traces out these people, as I have done occasionally after processing a preclear, he will discover that the aberrative personality is very close to the brink of a crack- up, has a very low survival level, and quite commonly goes insane. It should be understood that anyone going down tone scale in moments of anger is apt to use the above-numbered steps one way or another. But this is a momentary thing; the above steps belong, of course, on the tone scale and are significant of a level on the tone scale. Thus, one going down tone scale into anger or into apathy, is inclined to use these operations momentarily. This is quite different from the aberrative personality. The aberrative personality is at work with this operation 24 hours a day. Ceaselessly, relentlessly, calculatingly, with full knowingness, the aberrative personality continues this onslaught against those around him. 474 The entire computation of this aberrative personality is that he is worthless, he himself knows himself to be completely worthless. One might feel a little pity if the harm were not so great, for there is nothing more terrible than this knowledge. The aberrative personality feels he cannot succeed unless he drives others away from him with fear, preferably with terror. He assumes aspects of ugliness in matters of clothing; he is quite prone to ugliness. Very often this personality does not bathe, his breath is very often foul, his feet become odorous, the endocrine system has failed one way or another, the person has considerable bowel trouble. Other people than the aberrative personality occasionally manifest these difficulties; unfortunately, it all stems from the same idea -- to drive other people away. The communication lag of the aberrative personality is his easiest clue. These people are slow to respond, they are very thoughtful about what they say. They "think twice before speaking once," if they speak at all. When they do speak it is very often not on the subject. Their favorite phrase is "You do not understand." They preface their statements with, "well, I don't know but...." There is no decision in such people; they do not know whether to go up the street or down the street. Put into a certain routine and forced into that routine they will carry on, but they do not themselves produce anything, they are entirely parasitic. This parasiticism is gained either by the inheritance or other accumulation of money or by a direct and forthright nullification of those around them into the status of slaves. For this person knows above all other things that he cannot produce an honest day's work. Now in case you err and try to apply this classification too widely, there is one definite characteristic you must not overlook. This characteristic makes the difference between the aberrative personality and run- of-the-mill human beings. The secrecy computation is the clue. The best index to a secrecy computation is a refusal to be audited. Because of this factor of the secrecy computation, and for no other factor, it chances to follow that the aberrative personality can be known by his refusal to have any auditing of any kind, or, if he has any auditing, accepts it very covertly and will not permit it to have any effect upon him. He will not have a second session. He has all manner of excuses for this such as "altitude," but in any way, shape or form he escapes auditing. If your preclear's unwilling to be audited, he himself may fall into this classification. Because justice in this society prides itself upon impartiality, these impartial people -- the aberrative personalities -- are quite often listened to by those around them. The pose of being impartial is an effort to escape decision. People who get things done or who are worth anything to the society make decisions. The impartial people make no decisions if they can possibly avoid them, and at the very best put off decisions as long as possible, as in the case of a court of law. These people, being well downscale, are very close to MEST and have a very solid agreement with MEST. Very often you will find aberrative personalities addicted to religion, but the addiction will not be accompanied by any belief in the human spirit. Just how this paradox is accomplished -- a professed avowal of Christianity and a complete unwillingness to accept any effort to heal or help the human spirit as opposed to the body -- is just another one of this bundle of paradoxes which mark the aberrative personality. For, you see, the person is such a complete maybe that anything about him is indecisive, and people trying to make up their minds about this person, of course, fall into the state of maybe, because that is the clue to the personality. Impartial personality -- the maybe personality -- and the "merchant of fear" are more or less of the same order and are alike aberrative. Men in the field of the arts are very often victimized by these aberrative personalities. The "merchant of fear" closes terminals rapidly with any area which contains a great deal of admiration. Since the person is actually incapable of decision, this is a mechanical closure. The presence of admiration around anyone else begins to dissolve 475 some of the completely stultified bank of the "merchant of fear" and this finds him very close to the source. Orchestra leaders, painters, writers are always having the terrible misfortune of closing terminals with such personalities. There is hardly a man of art or letters who does not bear on him the scar of having associated with a "merchant of fear," for these are vampire personalities. They are themselves so starved of admiration and of sensation that they drink out of others around them any possible drop of admiration in any form. Where a woman becomes a "merchant of fear," sexual starvation is continually attempting satiation and all the while the "merchant of fear" will protest and, to all visible signs, follow a life of complete celibacy. While it is not my purpose here to revile, I wish to impress upon the auditor that the "merchant of fear" is extremely dangerous, both to creative impulses and to sanity. One could say airily, "Why don't we just audit these people upscale, since they are so few," but these people will never present themselves for auditing and will discourage anyone else from having any auditing. A solution to the "merchant of fear" probably does not lie in the field of auditing. The society at large is so accustomed to association with MEST and the "merchant of fear" so closely approximates some of the characteristics of MEST -- the maybe, for instance -- that the public quite commonly misassigns strength to such aberrative personalities and thinks of them as strong people or as wise people. They are neither strong nor wise, and before an even indifferently forceful attack quickly capitulate. They live their whole lives in terror of attack. One often finds these characteristics in company with paresis or hears the aberrative personality has actually contracted a dreadful disease to add to his repulsiveness. The auditor should not err in thinking that these people always present a repulsive appearance; repulsive conduct precedes a repulsive appearance. At first they operate only mentally in trying to make everyone afraid. Then this begins to show up more and more in their own MEST and finally will demonstrate itself in their personal appearance. Thus one can mark the state of decay of these aberrative personalities. Now and then some violent man in one country or another has undertaken programs to rid a society of these points of contagion. Kings in olden times handled the problem by decapitating people who continually brought them bad news -- this was a very wise measure. In more recent times it has been said that Gomez, late dictator of Venezuela, discovered that the contagion point of leprosy in the country was the beggar. He found that the beggars of Venezuela were using leprosy in order to beg. People would pay in order to have the ugly thing taken away from them (the basic philosophy of the beggar is to be paid to go away). Gomez had the beggars told that they were going to be taken to a very fruitful part of Venezuela and given a colony of their own; he had them collected on a river bank and loaded aboard two large river boats. The river boats proceeded into midstream, their crews left them in skiffs and the boats blew up with a resounding explosion. This was the end of leprosy in Venezuela. I am not telling you this to advocate the immediate slaughter of the "merchants of fear"; I am merely giving you an historical note. The extreme impatience of people trying to get something done in a society will eventually center upon those who will not work and, in the case of kings or tyrants, such people have very often been done away with. Thus the precedent is very old of a society cleansing itself by removing from its ranks the non-workers. Revolutions very often have this as an objective. The French Revolution recognized in the existing aristocracy a state of will-not-work, and saw in these people the character of the "merchant of fear," and for several years there in France, shortly after America became free, the tumbrils formed an assembly line to the guillotine. People in societies are extremely punitive about those who will not work and about those who 476 depend on fear for their sustenance. But society going downscale can become more and more apathetic toward the "merchant of fear" until the "merchant of fear" predominates as a class. Just as the king or the society revolted against the "merchant of fear," so has your preclear tried to get the "merchant of fear" to work and to contribute something besides bad news. This effort, of course, was bent toward an organism which was already rotten at the core. Whether the "merchant of fear" used money or beauty to excuse his own lack of labor, only added to the maybe. The law forbade the preclear to use the measure of the tyrant or the Gomez, for the law is utterly infatuated with such people and defends them at every turn just as such people use almost exclusively the law. As your preclear was balked in his natural impulse to clear the way he was brought into staring recognition of the fact that the necessary act -- murder -- was halted by the existence of police and courts. This brought the preclear to the point where he conceived himself to be put upon by the society and the law. Many of your preclears, as a result of this, are startled to find, when it is run on them, that they believe themselves under arrest, even though any arrest they have been subjected to was as minor as a traffic pick-up. I am not advocating, again, violence; I am merely trying to explain to you the state of mind of the preclear and the most aberrative person he has confronted. He wanted to, and didn't, kill these people. If your preclear is of the kind who produces or creates or who works and makes his way in the world in general, you can find the aberrative personality in his bank immediately by asking him -- with an E-Meter, of course, because he probably won't tell you direct -- if he wanted to kill anyone. The E-Meter will say that he did, and on discovery of this identity the auditor will find the aberrative personality. This even follows through with women, although women go more quickly into apathy when confronted with an aberrative personality than do men. You should understand that the aberrative personality has not become an aberrative personality by being confronted by another aberrative personality. You are not getting here the pattern of stimulus-response, you are getting the decay of a human spirit to complete inactivity so that the entire modus operandi becomes that of the body itself, and a body, in the case of the aberrative personality, which itself is too deteriorated or exhausted to work. Not all bodies becoming so exhausted and unable to work turn into aberrative personalities, but the aberrative personality is born entirely out of the decline of the ability of the individual to produce. When the individual really recognizes his utter worthlessness to the society, he becomes an aberrative personality. Many people who cannot work physically turn to other lines of progress. They are getting on one way or another. The aberrative personality is so badly off that he can lead only a parasitic existence. You will understand, then, that people going down tone scale do not immediately and automatically become aberrative personalities, in our definition as here used. People become aberrative personalities out of a malevolence which insists on a high level of survival without the production of anything. 477  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 81 iDate=19/11/53 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0     From: L. RON HUBBARD Through: Hubbard Association Camden, New Jersey 726 Cooper Street Camden 2, N.J. ASSOCIATE NEWSLETTER 19 November 1953 Dear Associates: Since coming back, I have gotten a conference through, and have trained the first group of auditors in the processes we now have. This has been a very busy time and I have not had sufficient opportunity to communicate with you and give you some kind of idea of what is taking place and what I think should be on the time track in the near future. The first class here served as a good sounding board for training these techniques. The cases of all present have changed remarkably, and are continuing to change for the better, as most of these people are near enough so as to be here weekends where they meet as a club. The best news in all this is that we are now handling the processing of occlusion or blackness or inability to see while being exteriorized with such ease that it is being done to the second group on a group basis. Of course, the second group inherits all of the "know-how" which was established about training while the first group was here. The second group is therefore slightly larger than the first group. But in spite of this, and in spite of the fact that this is only their second day here, their cases have done almost as much shift upwards as the first group did in their first two weeks. This is all very good news for all of us. I have found that we should have had one called "American procedure" all this time. America runs to some degree the "only one" computation, and is afraid of an effect. This fear of being an effect is so marked that any process which is found to work on the individual is immediately braced against by the individual. This is almost a national phobia. Thus, the processes which were actually the cause and reason for such things as occlusion and no mock- ups had to, of themselves, be exposed and techniques perfected to remedy them before much effect could be achieved upon the more difficult American cases. Although these techniques have been in existence for over eight months, the combination of them now being used is new; and the methods being used to communicate them are equally original, and responsible for the results which are being obtained. I am going on training groups for the excellent reason that we have all too few top-notch auditors. It would make me very happy if, like the Washington, D.C. associate, other associates were able to go through this six- week course, see the material at work first hand, and become cleared. This is not a recruiting gesture for this unit. It is the best solution, if not the most easily obtainable solution. Group by group these processes refine; but the day is here when I can break an occluded case which has resisted all previous auditing in one hour's auditing of a scattered step-level group of which that occluded case is a member. This has happened to two such cases in the past two days. Three cases, of which I am sure you know as being famous resistive cases, have been smoothly brought to full perception in the past two weeks. A case of muscular dystrophy in a child, where the mother had had twenty-four electric shocks and where the father was deaf, and the child beyond all medical help and in constant agony, has not only been resolved itself, but the auditor, working for short periods for about five days, has resolved the deafness of the father, the sanity of the mother as well. As though this was not enough in the way of miracles, we are hitting levels of theta clearing which we dared not think about in the past. 480 All this is good news; but it means very specifically that we must work fast and thoroughly to achieve the best possible organization we can for the dissemination of this information and its utilization in the resolution of individual and social problems in America. We will simply have to get out of the narrow confine of trying to keep something vaguely moving along, trying to fight back those amongst us who have tried to hold us up, and will have to go out on the level where we belong. Our organization gestures of the past have been aimed toward keeping an organization going while a science was being developed. A science has been developed. It is time it got the organization going. I hope to see many of you at Phoenix between the twenty-eighth and thirty- first of December of this year, where I will give clinical procedure as the subject of a twelve-lecture series -- the first lecture being in the afternoon of the twenty-eighth -- and where I will do group processing on those present, and where there will be seminars. The fee for the Congress is $50.00 per person, without rebate or discounts, except in the case of a husband and wife where the couple will be admitted for $75.00. Burke Belknap will be in Phoenix sometime before, and is in charge of the Congress as it will be held there. His address will be c/o Phoenix Scientology Institute, 4248 North 32nd Street, Phoenix, Arizona. Reservations should be placed with him at that address. Everything possible is being done to minimize the cost of housing and to solve the problem of temporary housing in Phoenix during that period. The reason the Congress is not being given at Los Angeles is my conviction that that city is the most aberrated city in America -- without any real doubt the most aberrated city in the world. Further, we are planning a broad clinical establishment in Arizona -- and Arizona, after all, is our home ground, and is the home state of the HAS. All books and orders of whatever kind should be sent here to 726 Cooper Street, Camden 2, New Jersey. SPECIAL ANNOUNCEMENT! We are preparing a special series of tapes, professionally recorded, on clinical processing (SOP-8-C), which tapes are the result of the present training program here in Camden using and developing clinical procedure. There will be about twelve hours of lectures available only to our associates. Write or wire for quotation on the price. The Hubbard Foundation, and what the Hubbard Foundation was trying to call the HASP, are no longer in existence, and the personnel of those organizations are no longer connected with Scientology in any way. The reason for this is their failure to provide Journals, book orders and adequate responsibility for what they were supposed to do. I will be writing you later concerning material which is specifically available, discounts, new course materials, and certification arrangements. In the meanwhile, let me hear from you. Best regards, L. Ron Hubbard 481  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 31 iDate=0/11/53 Volnum=0 Issue=14 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  ON HUMAN CHARACTER    P.A.B. No. 14 PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN From L. RON HUBBARD Via Hubbard Communications Office 163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11 [1953, ca. late November] Why has Man chosen to degrade himself below the level of the beasts which serve him? In the past a knowledge of his own character was an unpalatable fact to Man since people sought to force him to achieve that knowledge solely through condemnation. He resisted what he was and he became what he resisted and ever with a dwindling spiral he reached lower dregs. If ever once a man were to realize with accuracy what he was, if he were to realize what other people sought to make him, if he could attain this knowledge with great certainty, there are no chains strong enough to prevent his escaping, for such would be his astonishment that he would brave beasts, gods and Lucifer himself, even governments and churches, to become something better than what he had beheld in his own heart. The only tragedy of all this is that Man has lacked any method of estimating himself with certainty so as to know what it was he was trying to improve. In this PAB you will find such a method and, in applying it, you will also find improvement; if you also find vileness and rottenness beyond the most base ravings of Dostoevsky or Sigmund Freud, you have the comfort of knowing that you already possess in 16-G and in these PABS the means of bettering that condition and of rising once more toward the sun rather than sinking further into the sewer. ON HUMAN CHARACTER As you will find in The Factors, and as the actual application of processing will rapidly prove, the basic impulse is to produce an effect. In relatively high-toned beings, the very upper range of Man and above, the impulse is to produce something out of nothing: one can only cause a creative effect by causing nothingnesses to become something. Lower on the tone scale, the effect most desired is to make nothing out of something. The general range of Man occupies this area of the scale. Man on the lower ranges is entirely dedicated to the goals of the body itself. The body, to exist, must make nothing out of something. This, as the simplest illustration, is the goal of eating. It may or may not be necessary to life to eat; it may not even be necessary for the body to eat. In Para- Scientology there is some evidence that the stomach once produced sufficient life energy to motivate the body without any further "food," but the body of man and beasts in general is not equipped so today, and of that we are very certain. The body's single effort to make something out of nothing is resident in sex, and in this culture at our time sex is a degraded and nasty thing which must be hidden at best, and babies are something not to have but to be prevented. Thus even sex has been made to parallel the something-into-nothing impulse. 482 Exactly as the body by eating seeks to make nothing out of something, so does the general run of Man in his conversation and interpersonal relationship seek to make a nothingness out of friendship, acquaintances, himself, art and all other things. He much more readily accepts a statement or a news story which reduces something further toward nothing than he accepts a story which raises from a relative nothing to a higher something. Thus we find out that scientific achievements for the good of Man occupy a very late place in the newspapers and stories of murders and love nests, wars and plagues gain first place. Man in his present debased form is held on the road to survival by his culture alone. This culture has been policed into action by brute force. The bulk of men are surviving against their own will. They are working against their own desires, and they seek wherever possible and ever so covertly to succumb. This could be called, this MEST universe, a Love-Hate universe, for these two are the most prominently displayed features, and neither one has any great altitude, although many claim that love is all and that love is high on the tone scale, which it is not. To live, Man must eat. Every time a Man eats, no matter the kindness of his heart or disposition, something must have died or must die, even though it is only cells. To eat, then, in this MEST body culture, one must be able to bring about death. If eating is motivated by death, then digestion would be as good as one is permitted to kill. Digestions are bad in this society. Killing is shunned in a degraded and covert fashion, and man eats only those things which not only have been killed elsewhere and out of his sight, but have as well been certified as dead through scalding cookery. Killing even food is today far above the ability of the majority of our culture. The characteristics of love could be said to be No-Kill, stomach trouble, hunger but can't eat, work, flows, heavy emphasis on ARC, inhibited sex. Hate as a personality could be said to characterize, at least on a thought level, kill, bowel trouble, hungry but eats covertly, no work, hold, pretended ARC, enforced sex. These are two personality classes. Many people are compounded of both. There is another scale which one should have if he is to understand human character. Thought as Man thinks it, is not the highest level of the scale but the lowest level. High on the scale above 20.0 we have fully creative thought -- by which is meant the ability to create actual energy -- free emotion and a wide knowingness as opposed to understanding, which is low on the scale. At 20.0 we have force; below that as we go down we find force restrained, then overt gesture, overt gesture restrained, overt emotion, overt emotion restrained, and overt thought and overt thought restrained. The last few are ranging down to and around 0.0. The scale is constructed in the given order. Thought in Man is largely born out of impact and is not free. It is an effort to know before he knows, which is to say, to prevent a future. The phenomenon of going into the past is simply the phenomenon of trying to take the knowledge which one acquired through force and impact and held after the event, and place it before the event so as to prevent that thing which has already happened. "If I had only known," is a common phrase. This gets bad enough to cause Man to want to know before he looks at anything, for in his debased state it is dangerous not only to use force, not only to use emotion, not only to think, but also to perceive things which do. Thus the prevalence of glasses in this society. The body -- and that means, of course, Man in this culture -- must have a reason for everything. That which has the most reason is the body. A reason is an explanation, the 483 way Man interprets it, and he feels he has to explain himself away and to explain every action which he makes. Man believes he must have force but receives force, that he must not perceive or be perceived, that he must kill but must not be killed, that he must not have emotion, that he must be able to wreak destruction without receiving it. He can have no pain, he must shun work and pretend that all work he does has a definite goal. Everything he sees he feels must have been created by something else and that he himself must not create. Everything has a prior creation to his own. All things must be based on earlier things. Thus he shuns responsibility for whatever he makes and whatever destruction he may create. This animal has equipped himself with weapons of destruction far superior to his weapons for healing and in this low-toned mockery whines and pleads that he is duplicating saintliness and godliness; yet he knows no meaning of ethics and can follow only morals. He is a meat animal, a thing in the strait jacket of a police force, made to survive, made to stay in check, made to do his duty and performing most of it without joy and without, poor thing, even actual suffering. He is a meat animal, he is something to be eaten. If he is to be helped, he must either learn where he is and find better, or be duped or forced into helping himself. In our current age, cowardice is an accepted social pose, self-abnegation a proper mode of address, hidden indecency a proper method of survival. It may be that my statement of this does not carry through with an entire conviction. Fortunately, although these data are based on a wide experience with Man, particularly in the last few years as well as during a terrible and cataclysmic war, my statement of the case does not have to stand, for there exists a process which, by its astonishing workability, signifies the accuracy of this observation on human character. This process will be given in the next PAB. L. RON HUBBARD 484  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 31 iDate=0/12/53 Volnum=0 Issue=15 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  ACCEPTANCE LEVEL PROCESSING    P.A.B. No. 15 PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN From L. RON HUBBARD Via Hubbard Communications Office 163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11 [1953, ca. mid-December] ACCEPTANCE LEVEL PROCESSING Man is a duplicity. He is at once a body and a spirit. The personality which we know as the individual is a spirit by its contagion with the body. The body, as a very small amount of processing will demonstrate, is not the personality or the being, but a used thing. The body is a very craven and degraded thing in an unprocessed state and rather rapidly debases its spirit, so that when one first begins this process of Acceptance Level, it would seem to him that he, as the spirit, is actually at the level where he finds himself. True enough, he conducts his affairs at the level of the body, not at the level of the spirit. But the spirit can be freed, decontaminated, and the body itself, by this process, can be healed of its depraved thirsts and hungers so that it becomes almost fit company for a spirit. Acceptance Level Processing is that process which discovers the lowest level of acceptance of the individual and discovers there the prevailing hunger and feeds that hunger by means of mock-ups until it is satiated. The process is not a separate process itself, but is actually a version of Expanded Gita. It is, however, Expanded Gita used in a very particular way, and because one has successfully applied Expanded Gita, he should not think as well that he has a command of Acceptance Level Processing. The process is done in brackets. A bracket is very simply done. The pattern of the bracket is for the preclear, via the preclear for others, and via the preclear others for others. One has the preclear mock up, no matter how blackly or how crudely, items for himself to accept, then have others in his mock-ups mock up things for them to accept, and others to mock up things for others to accept. In Acceptance Level Processing this bracket, which is the technical name of this pattern, extends to having the preclear also mock up things for others to accept and others to mock up things for him to accept. Thus there are five stages in the bracket. Acceptance Level is what the preclear himself accepts, what the people around him in mock-up form accept, and what others will accept from others, and included as well what others have wanted him to accept and what he has wanted others to accept. Be very alert to this difference and to this particular phase of Acceptance Level: that people have wanted him to accept something does not mean that he accepted it, but it does mean that he will gain an insight into their motives. Acceptance Level is a voyage of discovery. It is the method of making a MEST clear. It is the method of clearing the genetic entity. There is no other method of which I know which will accomplish this. The running of concepts, the running of engrams, straight Creative Processing, will not any of them accomplish this clearing of a thoroughly degraded MEST body; and, so long as the body remains 485 thoroughly degraded, the task of rehabilitating the spirit connected with it is difficult at best. The process of Acceptance Level can be combined with Expanded Gita, in which case wasting good things in brackets in the five steps (which is: what did people waste, what do people waste, what did the preclear want others to waste and what did others want him to waste) resolves the occasional stalls which occur; for it often happens that the preclear must waste something good for a short time to discharge an accumulated charge in the bank brought about by a continuance of "feeding by mock-ups." Nowhere in Acceptance Level Processing, except in the form of wasting, does one seek to eradicate an engram, a thought, an emotion or a circuit. The entire process is built upon feeding the apparent cravings of the body. These have come about because of the mechanism of resistance. The MEST universe is built upon the theory that one must resist. When one starts resisting something, he engages upon it until it finally breaks down his resistance and he then goes into the cycle of actually craving it. A hunger is therefore created for various things which would not be suspected in the absence of this process. It is the object of this process to feed these hungers until they are satiated and until they depart. A very thorough and strong warning must be injected here by calling your attention to this apparent law. ACTION IN THE MEST UNIVERSE DOES NOT RUN OUT ACTIONS WHICH HAVE OCCURRED IN THE MEST UNIVERSE. THE ONLY THERAPEUTIC FACTOR POSSESSED BY MAN IS HIS OWN SPIRIT. ACTIONS WHICH HAVE OCCURRED IN THE MEST UNIVERSE ARE ALTERED OR ERADICATED ONLY BY ADDRESSING THE MATTER IN ONE'S OWN UNIVERSE IN THE FORM OF MOCK-UPS DONE BY THE PRECLEAR. By living a life of debauchery, in other words, one does not heal the debaucheries he has committed. By feeding his hungers in terms of the MEST universe, whether these be liquor or much baser things, one accomplishes only a further degradation and a further thirst. Such things are healed by the only process of healing which we have, which is the spirit itself. The spirit accomplishes this by direct address of energy as in the case of a Step I reaching in and patching up parts of the body or by mock-ups which themselves alter the condition of the body. More whiskey can only make a worse drunkard out of a drunkard. A constant and continuous stream of mock-ups of bad whiskey can satiate the craving and restore to him his ability to drink when he wants to drink or not at all. Basically this process is a learning process. It brings to the individual an understanding of the motives of himself and others who have been around him. These enter as sudden flashes of insight as the process is continued. They are not given to the preclear as evaluation. This matter of Acceptance Level is of far more use in understanding one's past than one would immediately suspect, for one sees immediately that if something is being healed by the process, the hunger must have existed. Acceptance Level is also extremely useful in the MEST universe in evaluating and understanding the why of the actions of those around him. One can understand at last why cheap and dirty hotels are patronized, why in some cities garbage is not collected, why a person dresses as he does and acts as he does; and, indeed, an understanding of Acceptance Level gives one an enormous command of his fellow beings. There is one thing you should know about ARC. The most ARC there can be is a complete identification: the person is the person with whom he has the ARC. One sees this in valence shifting. This goes down a dwindling spiral until the most complete ARC there is exists in the form of eight anchor points enclosing no space: in other words, a 486 particle. Thus, trying to understand, purely as such, from data offered is in itself a perilous undertaking, for the end of the road is zero space, and that in itself is the opposite end of the tone scale. That is the end where MEST is. "Trying to understand" run as a concept -- even that is quite startling. Knowingness has to do with certainty, and understanding which advances along the lines of certainty creates more space, not less space. Thus there is the low funnel end of ARC as well as an upper end of ARC. Trying to understand by reason of data before one looks brings about the vanishing point of existence. The psychotic often confuses his terrific stress on circuit-prompted thought as telepathy and thinking itself. Thus in running this process we are not trying to understand anything, but simply going through with the process to satiate hungers. One can very easily go off and plot the entire evolution of everything by running this process, but one should move along rapidly, gaining only his insights as they seem to apply to him. Only the preclear knows when these insights have taken place. The process is best run on an E-Meter, for as long as the E-Meter rises slowly and gradually, further mock-ups are necessary; when the E-Meter sticks or stutters, a change in bracket is necessary or, in some cases, something good on the same subject has to be wasted before the process can continue. The process works best on severely occluded cases -- the case we have called a Resistive V. It works least on a Step I, and is, indeed, not needed in the running of a Step I save only to clear up his MEST body, in which case it is run while he is exteriorized. One can take the list in Issue 16-G of the Journal of Scientology of Step IV, Expanded Gita -- that being the most complete list published -- and pick out the most revolting items as they occur or the most dangerous items as they occur and have the preclear accept them, have him have others accept them, and others have others accept them until the subject does not have charge. One can take any of the good items of this list and, by prefacing them with no, attain an additional source of acceptable objects. As soon as one starts to run this process (and it can be self-audited) he will wonder at first when he starts to mock the thing up for others what other person than himself could possibly have had such a hunger for the thing. After it has been fed into the space before him as destined for others, the personnel will come to view who had the acceptance level of the object; and when others run for others these mockups (via the preclear, of course), various groups and ideas will display themselves. In various instances, as in the matter of running blame, the process may stop moving, at which moment it is up to the auditor, or, if the process is being self-audited, to oneself, to begin to waste praise. One will occasionally be astonished when praise is wasted in the form of brackets how violent the wasting can be. In Expanded Gita, by the way, all the wasting and forcing upon and desiring, giving and taking, is done in brackets. The reason you had Viewpoint Processing in an earlier PAB was so that you could understand the source of evaluation and why evaluation was important and so that, even more, you would get the idea of mocking things up in masses. Just, then, as in the practice you got in Viewpoint Processing, you mock up in Acceptance Level vast hordes of things: for oneself, for others, and others for others. Large masses of others for large masses of others mocking up large masses of the desired thing is very good processing. L. RON HUBBARD 487  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 101 iDate=0/12/53 Volnum=0 Issue=22 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  What an Auditor Should Know    THE JOURNAL OF SCIENTOLOGY Issue 22-G [1953, ca. mid-December] Published by The Hubbard Association of Scientologists, Inc. Camden, New Jersey What an Auditor Should Know L. Ron Hubbard In the hectic days while research and investigation were in full swing, it would not have been possible for me to have stated with accuracy what an auditor should know to be a good auditor with any expectancy of the answer remaining valid for more than a few months. Running Engrams, Black and White processing, Beauty and Ugliness, technique followed technique, each one more workable than the last, each one issued solely on the valid excuse that it was better than anything we had before it. I can greatly sympathize with anyone attempting to follow what must have appeared to some, scraps of knowledge and disrelated material, and who yet expected to know a whole subject. After this year's work in Europe and some six months after the current techniques were last polished, it can at last be stated with security what an auditor is expected to know of Dianetics and Scientology to consider himself adequate to his task, and in order to assure himself of excellent results upon his preclears. Probably even more important organizationally, certification boards of experienced auditors can be set up who can have before them unchanging standards of examination, to the end that when auditors are at last certified the organization can feel secure that they have "the latest information" securely at work in their hands. It is highly possible that America, with its craving for change, may not find this very acceptable, but it is certain that auditors putting out hard money for training and preclears putting out their dollars for processing will be assured of knowledge and results which are standard and predictable. Many things have changed, but many things remain the same. To those who stayed with me for three years -- and these number the majority -- the shifting panorama and emphasis have at last begun to make sense. These people, in effect, have been studying a gradient scale of technology. They have been studying life, human behavior, and psychotherapy. It is astonishing to many of them now on reviewing Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health, to find most of what they know stated in the first place in the first book. This graduated scale enters with the most basic knowledge man has, as represented by the Asclepian Priests of Greece, continues through the work of Freud and is continually back-shadowed by the knowledge of the wise men of the East. It goes then into what we now call facsimiles (which is to say mental pictures) and all techniques which address the past, and into processes which directly adjust the future. The marriage of the deepest knowledge of India with the latest technologies of nuclear physics could not help but result in a swift climb upwards into the understanding of the behavior of life in the physical universe, and could not help but deliver into our hands technologies with which to resolve the immediate problems of Mankind. In a recent book On Auditing by Martha Courtis, the gradient scale of Dianetics and Scientology is made extremely apparent, and it is shown there quite expertly how 488 each advance only extended knowledge already held, and the inevitable consequence of Standard Operating Procedure in Scientology. It could be said that those auditors who entered early have spent those three years studying the same thing, and they now can look back upon an integrated picture. Indeed, it is a necessity for auditors contacting Scientology now for the first time, without any background knowledge of Dianetics, to review the entire process of the evolution of the science. Just as an auditor would be foolish indeed to know nothing more than the running of engrams now that far faster techniques such as those contained in SOP exist, so would it be foolish for an auditor to study SOP only, and with no knowledge of earlier processes find himself adrift, alone and incapable some dark night with a preclear who is stuck in and is looking straight at an engram. Just because phenomena have been more adequately handled in these later months is no reason why phenomena discovered earlier have ceased to exist, and auditors in training are confronted by each and every phenomenon observed in the last three years. While this makes, apparently, a complex picture, the simplicity lies in knowing the entire story of the preclear, and then in applying techniques so simple that they could be used by a child upon children, and indeed often are. What should an auditor know? He should know how to run engrams and secondaries, he should know effort processing, he should know how to apply, in its entirety, Advanced Procedure and Axioms, Handbook for Preclears, and Self Analysis, old and revised editions. He should know the 50 Course Books. He should have a good understanding of the axioms as they appear in the Handbook for Preclears. He should know Scientology 8-8008, and he should have a command of all the SOP's from 1 to 8L. He should know Formula H, Acceptance Level Processing, Change of Space Processing, he should know the theories of randomity, and automaticity and the processes by which these are remedied. If that is an appalling lot of knowledge, be assured that the auditor who knows it -- knows it well -- and who is himself cleared will have excellent results, and that an auditor who knows only fragments of it will continue to run into cases which he cannot solve, even though he may solve by rote procedures over 50% of the cases he addresses. The question of training is the question of how many cases is the auditor going to resolve out of the hundred cases presented, and the length of time the preclear must spend in processing. What the auditor should know is answered by what the auditor wants to expect in terms of results on himself and preclears. An auditor who knows and knows well SOP-8, Short 8, and Six Steps to Better Beingness, and yet does not know other Phenomena as it may appear in a case, may find some 30% of his cases unsolvable. What might happen to render a case unsolvable? A preclear in 1953 can be expected to be stuck in at least one place on a time track just as in 1950. The preclears haven't changed, the techniques have. Generally, the preclear is in a "secondary engram." While there exist techniques in advance of SOP-8 which run secondaries rapidly, the auditor is poorly equipped if he cannot discharge a "grief charge" which is lying there waiting for him, the discharge of which will in itself entirely alter the attitude of the preclear toward the world. The auditor may have before him someone who actually does not have sufficient randomity to interest himself in further living, and who is yet incapable of creating more, the auditor may come up against in this what is termed "the speed factor" a subject discussed and covered in late 1951. Only by "increasing the speed potential" of the preclear can the auditor place the preclear in a situation to engage in sufficient action to discard his boredom. There are fifty reasons why a case can hang fire. The auditor who doesn't know at least ten of them will often find himself staring into an enigma past his understanding. Further, he may be astonished by the material if he does not know the strange adventures of preclears as they rise on the tone scale. All too often an auditor is so set on enforcing his own concept of existence upon the world at large that he insists that a science agree with him, and lays down the boundaries that the science must not exceed what he himself, before he studied the science, believed to be true. The auditor who is not trained through all the data is 489 prone to make errors which will cost him the resolution, not only of his own case, but case after case if, in ignorance of earlier data, he is seeking to warp theta clearing into some tract of mysticism where it does not and cannot belong. I recently resolved the case of an old man whose trouble was that he desired no more of life. Observedly, his body could no longer serve him, and his hope in being audited was that he would die. I have recently seen several such cases. The auditor who is not sufficiently wise to establish the actual goal of his preclear will continue to try to make this person physically well, while the entire attention of this preclear is absorbed in using auditing to assist his dying. The only thing one can do for such a person is to bring him into a situation where he is no longer entirely dependent upon his body, but does not need to destroy it in order to be interested in life. What does an auditor need to know? What he could know is formidable. What he must know is easier to face. Abstracts of all past data have been prepared at this time, and the courses available from the HAS are now highlighted by the necessary knowledge. The difference amongst auditors is the difference of what percentage of cases is the auditor capable of solving. It can be observed that any psychotherapy in the past could have reached, and did reach and remedy a certain level of case (Step 1). This case continues to be resolved with great ease and in a few minutes with Scientology today, no matter what is wrong with it. The same case was resolved, within two years, by psychoanalysis. Earlier the same level of case was solved with great ease by Asclepian Priests. Analytical Procedure will solve such a case. Lock scanning will solve such a case, as can any elementary and shallow process, including a changed environment which promises a good present time. And so an auditor who has little command of the subject, obeying most of the rules of the Auditor's Code, can solve it. But immediately adjacent to that is the one which doesn't quite solve, which improves a little, but not a lot. This one (a Step 2) also improved after many years of psychoanalysis. This one was solved also by the first techniques of Dianetics, even when they were crudely used. The third level of case (a Step 3) was the one which psychoanalysis hoped about, but never improved, which Dianetics kept from deteriorating, but seldom (in the hands of average auditors) stabilized, and with this level of case we have departed completely from the past abilities of man, and the abilities of Dianetics as used in the field. We have reached at this point some 50% of the populace. We have 50% remaining. The intriguing thing about this is that these first three grades (or 50%) number amongst them sane, insane and neurotic alike, for these step levels are not established by sanity, but by the ease with which they recovered. The remaining 50% were never touched by the Asclepians, the psychoanalysts or auditors using Dianetics in the field. These 50% numbered amongst them some of the most able people, but not necessarily all the able people in the society. They were sane, neurotic and psychotic, just as the first three types of cases I have mentioned, but the workability of the case exceeded the ability of all. The three cases mentioned above are referred to in Scientology as Step 1, Step 2 and Step 3. The remaining four steps, as represented in Standard Operating Procedure 8, are resistive to any betterment regardless of the sanity or ability of the case. What we are gazing upon here is, distasteful as it may seem, the ratio of the potential of the individual being met by the environment. The last four cases are not necessarily more able, but they have met more resistance than their reality potential could accommodate, and although they continue to function, their certainty is insufficient to their environment. Their native ability permits them to continue their performance, to exceed former skills. We are now handling these cases in Scientology. All but a few of them, in the hands of an able auditor, resolve with the use of SOP-8. The few require even more advanced techniques, such as those being given to the Clinical students in the East. What should an auditor know? He should know enough to resolve those cases which come to him and to retain and increase his own stability. Now at last we can write down in specific detail the exact data which he must command in order to do his job well. 490  L. RON HUBBARD   Type = 31 iDate=0/12/53 Volnum=0 Issue=16 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  ACCEPTANCE LEVEL PROCESSING    P.A.B. No. 16 PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR'S BULLETIN From L. RON HUBBARD Via Hubbard Communications Office 163 Holland Park Avenue, London W.11 [1953, ca. late December] ACCEPTANCE LEVEL PROCESSING Some people who have exteriorized and have not gone any higher in processing are held down because the genetic entity -- in other words, the body itself -- must be processed. A good process for the body itself is this process of Acceptance Level. The motto of the body is that it has to be acceptable, that other bodies have to be acceptable to other bodies, that other bodies have to be acceptable to it and that it must stay in a general state of agreement with the MEST universe. This tells you, by the way, that a country where equality was stressed would start out the bottom all in a mass and in a hurry once it began to go, for everyone being equal to everything and everybody obsessed with the idea of equality, as soon as the society discovered the existence of one psychotic, it would have to moderate itself to that degree in order to remain equal. This is a very hideous sort of an outlook, but is the end product of equality. There is a political creed known as Equalitarianism; a society adopting it would find itself caving in rapidly and all at once. Equality is a characteristic of cells, not of free beings. But you will see all this as you use Acceptance Level Processing. Quite aside from the list of Expanded Gita, which is actually a list of buttons rather than a list of things, there is a list of the Acceptance Level run on a Resistive V by myself some time ago. I have kept this list against the time when I would release this technique, and I give it here. These items were run in this order on this case. The data was arrived at through E-Meter testing. I have no reason to believe that this Resistive V was really any worse than many who pass for higher on the tone scale. I have tested the list twice since without adding anything, although in the following two cases after the origin of the list, I had to put some of the things in worse form and had to change the order slightly. In the remaining cases where I have used Acceptance Level, I have worked straight from the Expanded Gita list as contained in 16-G. All the preclears on whom I have used this have been fascinated with the process and their interest in the world it opened to them has, so far as I know, not declined. Instead of Acceptance Level Processing, I might as well have labeled this short essay for the PAB "How to Make a MEST Clear." This is the best method I know of to make a MEST Clear, and people who have an antipathy to discovering they are a spirit and people who are hanging grimly to earlier work or to P-therapy will not, I can guarantee, accept any faster route than Acceptance Level Processing in order to achieve the state of clear. Self-audited -- and I give you this purely as a guess -- a very rough case would probably need a couple of hundred hours of this, but after only an hour or two of it, the case would have advanced remarkably, and it would be a continuing surprise from there on how high one can go, for there are very few people who have any concept at all of the higher range of sanity than those they have seen around them, and those they have seen around them during their lifetime have been, at best, meat animals, meat 491 animals who wore clothes and who pretended they were not trying to make nothing out of every human contact and person. When using Acceptance Level Processing, please realize that it is a technique which cannot be audited indefinitely without interspersing it with direct perception technique such as the first five of the Six Steps of Beingness as given in an earlier PAB [No. 7], or at least Spacation as contained in SOP 8 as Step III. Any time the going gets too rough, if one is self-auditing this, or too rough for the preclear if one is auditing one, a shift into holding the two upper corners of the room behind the preclear for a little while will nullify the effect. Formula H applied to present time will also nullify the effect, but not as well as holding the two upper corners of the room with the eyes closed. You understand that the preclear closes his eyes and "finds" the two upper corners of the room behind him and holds these without thinking. There is no more to that process than just that. It will re- stabilize a case which has been thrown out of stability by this process. You must realize that this process is strong meat and the things which are fed to the preclear to mock up and accept in vast multitudes must be stronger meat than you would occasionally encounter in polite social conversation. One of my associates -- and I will not mention any names -- published the Expanded Gita list from an early issue of SOP 8 and carefully omitted from it the most vital factors in it, because, I suppose, he considered these too strong for the American stomach. From what I know now in processing, I would consider them, if anything, too weak, for they are not in a depraved form as bad as they are themselves. One need not expect that the preclear will immediately rush off and engage in strange liaisons because of this process. His morality level will come up to a point where he can be moral. Most of these people who worry about morality, particularly in others, are themselves so low morally that they could not find satisfaction in a society of cannibals. Here is the specialized list that was first evolved for Acceptance Level Processing. These items were fed in brackets. Large numbers of them were mocked up to the best ability of the preclear, even though he could not see his mock-ups for some time. They were mocked up for himself, others mocking them up for themselves, and others mocking them up for others, and others trying to get him to accept them, himself trying to get others to accept them, and, a few times, others trying to get others to accept them, and, occasionally, good items similar to these being wasted in the same bracket. Because this list worked uniformly on this Resistive V, it would be said immediately that the Acceptance Level of his body was this list. Running this list resolved hungers and cravings, blackness and somatics which he had long combated. Most of these items had to be put into a depraved, diseased or decayed form in order to run them at all. Now we have the list: A TERRIBLE PAST, A DANGEROUS ENVIRONMENT, A TERRIBLE FUTURE, A MISSING PRESENT, NO HELP, INDEPENDENCE, INABILITY TO ACCEPT PRESENTS, DEATH, KILLING, EATING, SLEEPING, ANAESTHETICS, AGREEMENT, DISAGREEMENT, LOW REALITY, LOW AFFINITY, LOW UNDERSTANDING, NO COMMUNICATION, CAUTION, LOW SPEED, SUPPORT, NO FALLING, NO LOOKING, REASONS, EXPLANATIONS, THINKING, NOT THINKING, TALKING, NOT LISTENING, SERVICE, CONVICTION, KNOWING, PRECISE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM, DESIRE FOR EXPLANATIONS, ANSWERS, REPLIES, TRUTH, NO LIES, SOLID MEST, NO SPACE, NO GEOGRAPHY, CRITICISM, NO CRITICISM, ABERRATIONS, SANITY, PERFECTION, HIDDEN ENGRAMS, 492 HIDDEN BETRAYALS HIDDEN RIDICULE, DEFAMATIONS, THINGS BEING STOPPED, CHANGE, HELP, CONSEQUENCES, FEAR OF CONDITIONS, AN ACCEPTABLE LEVEL OF BEING ILL, AN ACCEPTABLE LEVEL OF BEING CRAZY, THREATS, ARRESTS, COURTS, HONORS, MEDALS, IDENTITIES, FACES, POLICE, TORTURE, BACTERIA, SYPHILIS, GONORRHEA, BLACK PEOPLE, THINGS TOO HORRIBLE TO PERCEIVE, EFFORTS TO GET COMMUNICATIONS OUT, EFFORTS TO GET COMMUNICATIONS IN, FORGETFULNESS OF MEN, FORGETFULNESS OF WOMEN, FORGETFULNESS OF PAST, ACCEPTANCE OF WRONGNESS, THE GOAL TO GET BIG, THE NECESSITY TO UNDERSTAND, FATHERS (IN THE WORST FORM), MOTHERS (IN THE WORST FORM), ALLIES (IN THE WORST FORM), GRANDPARENTS (IN THE WORST FORM),FRIENDS (IN THE ACT OF BETRAYAL), BUSINESS ASSOCIATES (IN THEIR WORST FORM), BEING BABIES, BEING BODIES, TEACHERS IN FRONT OF ONE, LEARNED BOOKS, ACCEPTANCE OF AN IN-BETWEEN LIVES AREA, DEATH, FAILURE, BEING VARIOUS PROFESSIONS, BEING VARIOUS PARTS OF THE BODY, NERVOUSNESS, SERIOUSNESS, A GOOD JOB, WANTING THINGS GONE, HAS-TO-BE-TOLDNESS, TIREDNESS, ANXIETY, WANTING PEOPLE TO WORRY, LONG DAYS, FAST TIME PASSES, SLOW TIME PASSES, CLOCKS, SCHOOLS, FACES, LEARNING, MINDS, POOR MORNINGS, BAD NIGHTS, NO-TIME, ARRIVALS, COMPLETIONS, NO AFFECTION, LOVE, NO KILL, STOMACH TROUBLE, HUNGER, INABILITY TO EAT, WORK, FLOWS, INHIBITED SEX, CLOSED COMMUNICATION LINES, HATE, KILL, BOWEL TROUBLE, COVERT EATING, NO WORK, HOLDS, PRETENSE, ENFORCED SEX, LONELINESS, WOMBS, HOT WOMBS, BIRTH, KIDNAPPING OF BABIES, STERILITY, EMPTY WOMBS, BLACK WOMBS, ABSENT GENITALIA, FIGHTING SOMETHING, NEVER FIGHTING NOTHING, FIGHTING WORDS, FIGHTING DIRECTION, ACCEPTING DIRECTION, HATRED OF MUSIC, HATRED OF SIGHT, HATRED OF SOUND, ACCEPTABLE LEVEL OF PAIN, NO PETS, BEING GOD, ASSOCIATING EVERYTHING WITH EVERYTHING, HATING TO BE REMINDED, SEMEN, EXCRETA, NOTHINGNESS, POVERTY, NO MONEY, NO FOOD, NO HOME, EXPECTING SOMETHING BAD TO HAPPEN, KNOWING IT IS WRONG, BEGRUDGED FOOD, THE WEIGHT OF OBLIGATION, NO RESPONSIBILITY, REFUSAL TO BE CAUSE, DESIRE TO BE AN EFFECT, GUIDING SPIRITS, STRANGE SCIENCES, FORTUNE-TELLING, CRYSTAL BALLS, DEMONS, STRANGE SEXUAL PRACTICES, SELF-DENIAL, WRONGNESS, LOSING, ACCIDENTS, AND BEING A HUMAN BEING. The case was then run on the Expanded Gita list in addition to the above. Much of the auditing done on Acceptance Level Processing is done by the preclear following the procedure by himself in a room near the auditor, or simply by self-auditing. However, a very low-toned preclear is incapable of the persistence necessary to follow through the process and needs auditor supervision. The ingenuity of the auditor lies in discovering just what the acceptance level of his preclear is. Persistence of the auditor and the preclear is vital to carry through the process item by item until each and every item is itself entirely surfeited. It will be found that some preclears will rise so rapidly in tone at the lower levels offered, that they do not find any area to "feed." In this case, higher-toned objects must be fed to the preclear just as these low-toned objects are fed. What we are doing here is "remedying the scarcity in all things." The main thing the preclear will discover is that he has been carefully taught that certain things are bad and therefore not enjoyable and that he has set up resistances to these things and that they at length -- these resistances -- have become a sponge for the 493 things they were set up to counteract and the resistance caving in has created a hunger for the object which was at first resisted. This is the MEST universe at work in its very best operation: make one fight something, then so arrange it that one winds up craving for what one was fighting. You can use this formula in general on any aberration which the preclear has. If he is fighting something, feed it to him in mock-up form, done, of course, by the preclear. And then finish off the bracket by feeding it through the preclear to others, and others to others, and then going on getting the preclear to get others to accept this thing to fight, and then others getting the preclear to accept this thing to fight, and thus the item is discharged. This is Acceptance Level Processing. You can, if you look about you, see acceptance level dramatized in every activity of life. You can understand now why so-and-so will not clean up a living room: a living room is not acceptable except in a cluttered fashion to this person. You can understand also why this fellow leaves a beautiful and helpful girl and runs off with a maid or a prostitute: his acceptance level was too far below the beautiful girl. You can understand, too, some of you, why you were not acceptable in your own homes when you were young: you were too bright and too cheerful and this was too high above those around you. You can understand, as well, why the newspapers print the stories they do, and most and foremost you can understand that everybody in a body is being subjected to the body's craving to be acceptable, a thing which in itself will end one up at the bottom of the tone scale. You might think that running Matched Terminals or Matched Terminal Brackets on being acceptable will remedy this; unfortunately, this is above the body's level of acceptance. It is raw meat; it wants raw meat. Trying to run something out of the body which it craves is a difficult thing indeed. On lower-toned cases the reason Dianetics often worked was because instead of running through the engram, the case was permitted to go over and over some unsavory incident which it actually considered extremely savory, and so was able, by these repeated "returns" to this muck, to feed the bank to some degree and adjust and surfeit its craving for such incidents even when they had not occurred. Thus one was actually feeding the body numbers of mock- ups rather than running out engrams, even though at that time it was supposed that an engram was being run out. Where engrams were exhausted from the body with a betterment of the case, it was because the body did not have an extensive hunger. Where running an engram out did not remedy the condition it was because a hunger existed for that engram and it was being offered. Thus we have the case which insatiably ran engrams but which would not get well. That case had a level of acceptance of not-too-sick and not-too-well, the level of acceptance of the general society today. Remember that evaluation depends upon the preclear having been actually moved or directed from one space to another by something. Change in space is the basic on all evaluation and thinking as it is known to Man. Remember that change in space in geographical area is like an evaluation of those areas. Thus you will find the most aberrative people in the bank, those people who have most changed the preclear in space. In running Acceptance Level Processing, be sure to stress accepting exterior direction, and be sure to stress acceptance in various forms of those people who have greatly directed the preclear and who then created a scarcity of direction either by not being there or by stopping direction. You must also be aware of the fact that this technique, this process, is to a large degree an informative process and is addressed to the MEST body; it does not dispense with or displace other processes we now have. 494 The bracket method of accepting is also the method of wasting which could be run in Expanded Gita. In other words, in running wasting in Expanded Gita one should waste in brackets and have material forced upon in brackets. Acceptance Level Processing is a variation of Expanded Gita. As a note which may be of interest: Expanded Gita was developed from phenomena discovered after I developed Creative Processing. It was originally plain Give-and-Take Processing, hence the Gita. Acceptance Level was developed by observing Expanded Gita in action. Expanded Gita and Acceptance Level are in effect the same process and so we are not dealing here with anything new. There are a great many of these levels and one could easily compose a chart -- and, indeed, I have composed a chart -- called Character Processing -- which is as yet of no enormous value, which lists the following levels: Acceptance (Grasp), Determent (Withdraw), Deprivement (Let Go), Interest (Reach), Intention, Enthusiasm, Spiritual, Applause, Death, Sonic, Visio, Tactile, Friendship, Enmity, Physical Strength, Emotional Strength, MEST Aid, Obedience, No Sympathy Fear, Propitiation, Grief, Apathy, Agreement, Communication, Affinity, and Responsibility levels, by which a character could easily be read. An auditor who knows his Scientology could without much trouble draw up this chart using as a guide the chart in Science of Survival or Self Analysis. As the use of these things comes to view or takes on sudden value, they may be included in later PABs. For instance, only somebody interested in control would be interested in specified levels; in processing we are only trying to raise the Acceptance Level of the individual high enough so that he can finally accept himself on all eight dynamics. The apathy case resolves with this Acceptance Level, and much to many a preclear's surprise he finds apathy on the road up rather than below his operating level. L. RON HUBBARD 495  L. RON HUBBARD